Secure Mobile Access 11.2 Administration Guide

Dell™ Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
©
2016 Dell Inc.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright. The software described in this guide is furnished under a
software license or nondisclosure agreement. This software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the
applicable agreement. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use without the written
permission of Dell Inc.
The information in this document is provided in connection with Dell products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or
otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Dell products. EXCEPT
AS SET FORTH IN THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AS SPECIFIED IN THE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THIS PRODUCT, DELL ASSUMES NO
LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL DELL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS
OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF DELL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Dell makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of
the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time
without notice. Dell does not make any commitment to update the information contained in this document.
If you have any questions regarding your potential use of this material, contact:
Dell Inc.
Attn: LEGAL Dept
5 Polaris Way
Aliso Viejo, CA 92656
Refer to our website (software.dell.com) for regional and international office information.
Trademarks
Dell, the Dell logo, and Dell Secure Mobile Access are trademarks of Dell Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used
in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell disclaims any proprietary
interest in the marks and names of others.
Legend
CAUTION: A CAUTION icon indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING icon indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
IMPORTANT NOTE, NOTE, TIP, MOBILE, or VIDEO: An information icon indicates supporting information.
Secure Mobile Access Administration Guide
Updated - September 2016
Version - 11.4
232-003219-00 Rev E
Contents
Part 1. Introduction
Secure Mobile Access Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
About the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Features of Your Dell SMA Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Dell SMA Appliance Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Administrator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
User Access Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
ADA 508 Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
What’s New in This Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Client Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Server Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Part 2. Installation
Installation and Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Network Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Dual-homed configuration (internal and external interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Single-homed interface configuration (internal interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Preparing for the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Gathering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Verifying Your Firewall Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Helpful Management Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Installation and Deployment Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Specifications and Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Front Panel Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Connecting the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Powering Up and Configuring Basic Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Web-Based Configuration Using Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Configuring the Appliance Using the Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Moving the Appliance into Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Powering Down and Restarting the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Hyper-V for the SMA 8200v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Next Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Part 3. Management
User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Overview: Users, Groups, Communities, and Realms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Using Realms and Communities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Viewing Realms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
3
Default, Visible, and Hidden Realms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Specifying the Default Realm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Enabling and Disabling Realms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Best Practices for Defining Realms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Configuring Realms and Communities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Creating Realms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Adding Communities to a Realm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Creating and Configuring Communities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Network Tunnel Client Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Using the Default Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Changing the Order of Communities Listed in a Realm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Configuring RADIUS Accounting in a Realm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Editing, Copying and Deleting Communities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Managing Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Viewing Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Managing Users and Groups Mapped to External Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Managing Local User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Importing and Exporting Local Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Integrating an SMA appliance with a Dell SonicWALL firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Configuring a firewall to receive RADIUS accounting records from an SMA Appliance 104
Configuring a Dell SMA Appliance to send RADIUS accounting records to a firewall . . 107
Viewing Dell SMA users on the firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Working with Appliance Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Logging In to AMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
AMC Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
A Quick Tour of the AMC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting Objects in AMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Administrator Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Managing Administrator Accounts and Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Avoiding Configuration File Conflicts with Multiple Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Managing Multiple Dell Secure Mobile Access Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
The Central Management Server (CMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Configuring an Appliance for GMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Working with Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Saving Configuration Changes to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Applying Configuration Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Discarding Pending Configuration Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Scheduling Pending Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Deleting Referenced Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Part 4. Authentication
Network and Authentication Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Configuring Basic Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Specifying System Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
4
Configuring Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Configuring ICMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Viewing Fully Qualified Domain Names and Custom Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configuring Fallback Servers for Connect Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configuring Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Configuring Network Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Choosing a Network Gateway Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Configuring Network Gateways in a Dual-Homed Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configuring Network Gateways in a Single-Homed Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Enabling a Route to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Configuring Static Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Configuring Name Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Configuring Domain Name Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Configuring Windows Network Name Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Certificates . . . . . . . . . . .
CA Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certificate FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . .
....
....
....
....
...
...
...
...
....
....
....
....
...
...
...
...
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
...
...
...
...
....
....
....
....
...
...
...
...
. 152
. 153
. 162
. 168
Managing User Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
About Intermediate Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuring Authentication Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuring Microsoft Active Directory Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Configuring LDAP and LDAPS Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Configuring RADIUS Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
User-Mapped Tunnel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Configuring RSA Server Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Configuring a PKI Authentication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Configuring a SAML Based Authentication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Configuring a Single Sign-On Authentication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Using RSA ClearTrust Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Dell Defender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Configuring Local User Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Testing LDAP and AD Authentication Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Configuring Chained Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Enabling Group Affinity Checking in a Realm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Using One-Time Passwords for Added Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring Personal Device Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Next Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Part 5. Administration
Security Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Creating and Managing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Resource Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Resources and Resource Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Using Variables in Resource and WorkPlace Shortcut Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Creating and Managing Resource Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Web Application Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
5
Creating Forms-Based Single Sign-On Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Kerberos Constrained Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Configuring SMA Support for Microsoft Outlook Anywhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Viewing User Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Access Control Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Configuring Access Control Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Resolving Deny Rule Incompatibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Resolving Invalid Destination Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Optional Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Enabling SSH Access from Remote Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Enabling ICMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Configuring Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
System Logging and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Overview: System Logging and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Monitoring the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Managing Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Exporting the Current Configuration to a Local Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Saving the Current Configuration on the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Importing Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Restoring or Exporting Configuration Data Stored on the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Replicating Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Requirements for Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Defining a Collection of Appliances to Receive Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Beginning Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Viewing Configuration Data Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Upgrading, Rolling Back, or Resetting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Updating the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Rolling Back to a Previous Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Resetting the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Managing Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
SSL Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Configuring SSL Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
FIPS Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Requirements for FIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Managing FIPS-Compliant Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
FIPS Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Enabling FIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Exporting and Importing FIPS-Compliant Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Disabling FIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Zeroization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Software Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
How Licenses Are Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Viewing License Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
6
Managing Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Part 6. Access Control
End Point Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Overview: End Point Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
How the Appliance Uses Zones and Device Profiles for End Point Control . . . . . . . . 350
End Point Control Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Managing EPC with Zones and Device Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Enabling and Disabling End Point Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Zones and Device Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Creating Zones for Special Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Using End Point Control Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Application Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
How Application Access Control Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Configuring Application Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Creating a Client Application List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Learning an App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Approving a Learned App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Viewing User Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Part 7. Components
The WorkPlace Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
A Quick Tour of WorkPlace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Intranet Address Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Custom RDP Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Network Explorer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Web Shortcut Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Configuring WorkPlace General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Working with WorkPlace Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Viewing Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Adding Web Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Creating a Group of Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Adding Network Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Web Only Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Citrix Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Adding a Virtual Desktop Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Adding a Text Terminal Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Editing Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
WorkPlace Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding WorkPlace Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Appearance of WorkPlace . . . .
WorkPlace and Small Form Factor Devices . .
....
....
....
....
...
...
...
...
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
...
...
...
...
....
....
....
....
...
...
...
...
. 439
. 440
. 442
. 443
Fully Customizing WorkPlace Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
WorkPlace Style Customization: Manual Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
7
Overview: Custom WorkPlace Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
How Template Files are Matched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Customizing WorkPlace Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Giving Users Access to WorkPlace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
End Point Control and the User Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
How Cache Cleaner Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
User Access Components and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
User Access Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Client and Agent Provisioning (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
WorkPlace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
The Tunnel Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Client Installation Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Downloading the Secure Mobile Access Client Installation Packages . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Customizing the Configuration for the Connect Tunnel Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Command Line Access to Connect Tunnel with NGDIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Running Connect as a Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Network Tunnel Client Branding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
The OnDemand Proxy Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Overview: OnDemand Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
How OnDemand Redirects Network Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Configuring OnDemand to Access Specific Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Configuring Advanced OnDemand Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Client Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Managing Access Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Overview: Access Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Stopping and Starting the Secure Mobile Access Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Configuring the Network Tunnel Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Configuring IP Address Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Configuring Web Resource Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Configuring Custom Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Configuring Fallback Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Configuring the Web Proxy Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Android Application Access Control - Allow Any Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Terminal Server Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Providing Access to Terminal Server Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Server Farm Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Browser Only Mode for Citrix Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Defining an Access Control Rule and Resource for Terminal Server Access . . . . . . . 522
Managing Graphical Terminal Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Graphical Terminal Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Virtual Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
What is Virtual Assist? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
How Does Virtual Assist Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Technician Initiates a Virtual Assist Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
8
Customer Initiates a Virtual Assist Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Configuring Virtual Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Enabling Virtual Assist Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Configuring the Virtual Assist Ticket Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Configuring Virtual Assist Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Configuring Virtual Assist Invitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Enabling Virtual Assist on the WorkPlace Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Configuring a Help Desk Technician AMC Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Using Virtual Assist in Technician Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Installing the Virtual Assist Technician Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Accessing the Technician Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Configuring Virtual Assist Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Using Virtual Assist Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Emailing an Invitation to a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Assisting a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Using Technician Console Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Chatting in Virtual Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Using Virtual Assist in Customer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Using Virtual Assist for a Windows Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Initiating Virtual Assist on a MacOS Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Initiating Virtual Assist on a Linux Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Part 8. High Availability
Administering a High-Availability Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Overview: High-Availability Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Cluster Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Stateful Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Synchronized Cluster Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Installing and Configuring a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Step 1: Connect the Cluster Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Step 2: Run Setup Tool on All Nodes of the Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Step 3: Configure the Cluster’s External Virtual IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Final Steps: Network Configuration and Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Managing the Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Viewing and Configuring Network Information for Each Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Powering up a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Starting and Stopping Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Monitoring a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Backing up a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Performing Maintenance on a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Upgrading a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Troubleshooting a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Cluster Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Normal Flow of Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
HA Active Node Fails or Goes Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Node Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
9
Part 9. Mobile Connect
Using SMA with Mobile Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
General Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Hostname Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
DNS Routing with Split Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
DNS Routing with Redirect-All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
DNS Routing with Application Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Mobile Connect General Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Application Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
VPN-controlled Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
iOS/Mac OS X Specific Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Android Specific Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Windows RT MC limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Supported EPC Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
IPV6 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
URL Control Caveats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Configuring Trusted Network Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Part 10. Appendix
Appliance Command-Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Configuring a New Appliance Using Setup Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Tips for Working with Setup Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Using Setup Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Saving and Restoring Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Saving Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Validating Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
General Networking Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Verify a Downloaded Upgrade File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Troubleshooting Agent Provisioning (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
AMC Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Authentication Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Using Personal Firewalls with Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Secure Mobile Access Services Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Tunnel Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
OnDemand Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
General OnDemand Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Specific OnDemand Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Client Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Windows Client Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Macintosh and Linux Tunnel Client Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Troubleshooting Tools in AMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
10
Using DNS Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Viewing the Current Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Capturing Network Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Logging Tools for Network Tunnel Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Using CEM Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Ping Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Traceroute Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Snapshot Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Best Practices for Securing the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Appliance Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Appliance Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Administrator Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Access Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Set Up Zones of Trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Enabling SSL Ciphers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Suite B Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Configuring the Suite B ciphers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Client Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Log File Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
System Message Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Auditing Access Policy Decisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Viewing Client Certificate Errors in the Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
End Point Control Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Unregistered Device Log Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Network Tunnel Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
\Auditing Connection Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Web Proxy Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Management Console Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
WorkPlace Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
WorkPlace Shortcut Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Internationalization Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Support for Native Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
RADIUS Policy Server Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Selected RADIUS Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Other Supported RADIUS Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Configuring a High-Capacity Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Overview of Clustering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Cluster Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Performing Initial Appliance Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Configuring the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Attaching the Appliance to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
11
Configuring the Load Balancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Warranty and Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
GNU General Public License (GPL) Source Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Limited Hardware Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
End User License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Open Source Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
About Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Technical support resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Third-party components and licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .810
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
12
Part 1
Introduction
•
Secure Mobile Access Overview
•
Features of Your Dell SMA Appliance
•
What’s New in This Release
•
System Requirements
•
Server Components
•
About the Documentation
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
13
1
Secure Mobile Access Overview
Welcome to the Secure Mobile Access 11.4 Administration Guide. This manual provides the information you
need to successfully activate, configure, and administer Secure Mobile Access on Dell SMA appliances.
Dell SMA appliances provide secure access—including clientless access to Web applications, access to
client/server applications, and file sharing—to employees, business partners, and customers. All traffic is
encrypted using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to protect it from unauthorized users.
The appliance makes applications available from a range of access methods—including a standard Web browser,
a Windows client, or a mobile device—on a wide range of platforms including Windows, Macintosh, and Linux.
Figure 1. Secure Mobile Access in your network
You might use the appliance to:
•
Create a remote access VPN that enables remote employees to securely access private company
applications such as email over the Internet.
•
Create a business partner VPN that provides designated suppliers with access to an internal supply chain
application over the Internet.
The appliance’s granular access control lets you define policy and control access down to the user and resource
level. Managing policy and configuring the appliance is quick and easy with the Web-based management
console.
For an overview of planning your Dell Secure Mobile Access appliance configuration and deployment, see the
Dell SMA Deployment Planning Guide.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
14
This Introduction provides the following major sections:
•
About the Documentation
•
Features of Your Dell SMA Appliance
•
What’s New in This Release
•
System Requirements
•
Server Components
About the Documentation
This document contains detailed information about installing, configuring, and maintaining the appliance. Its
contents are also available as context-sensitive Help from AMC; see Getting Help on page 118 for more
information.
Your Dell SMA appliance also comes with a printed Getting Started Guide, and there is a webposted Dell Secure
Mobile Access Deployment Planning Guide that explains important VPN concepts and components and will aid in
deploying your VPN. For access to electronic copies of all product documentation, visit the Support portal at
https://support.software.dell.com/, or log in to your MySonicwall.com account and register your appliance.
See Registering Your Dell SMA Appliance on page 346 for more information.
Document Conventions
Throughout this document, “External” refers to the network interface connected to the Internet. “Internal”
refers to the network interface connected to your internal corporate network. This document uses the following
typographical conventions:
Table 1. Document conventions
Typographical convention
Usage
Bold
User interface components (such as text boxes or buttons on a Web page).
Monospace font
Information you are supposed to type.
Italic
File names and directories, examples, and titles of documents.
commandname -x [-y]
In command-line syntax, square brackets indicate optional parameters.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
15
Features of Your Dell SMA Appliance
This section highlights the key components provided with your appliance.
•
Dell SMA Appliance Models
•
Administrator Components
•
User Access Components
Dell SMA Appliance Models
Dell offers the following Dell SMA and EX Series appliance models, all of which are documented in this manual.
Most of them can be clustered: a cluster of two appliances is intended for high availability (it provides system
redundancy in case one of the nodes fails), and clusters of up to eight can be used to increase capacity.
In this document, the term SMA 1000 series appliance refers to the following Dell appliances.
•
Dell SonicWALL E-Class SMA EX9000: Supports up to 20,000 concurrent users and provides for
clustering two identical appliances behind one virtual IP address, or up to eight appliances using an
external load balancer.
•
Dell SonicWALL E-Class SMA EX7000: Supports up to 5,000 concurrent users and provides for clustering
two identical appliances behind one virtual IP address, or up to eight appliances using an external load
balancer.
•
Dell SonicWALL E-Class SMA EX6000: Supports up to 250 concurrent users and provides for clustering
two identical appliances behind one virtual IP address, or up to eight appliances using an external load
balancer.
•
Dell SMA 7200: Supports up to 10,000 concurrent users and provides for clustering two identical
appliances behind one virtual IP address, or up to eight appliances using an external load balancer.
•
Dell SMA 6200: Supports up to 2,000 concurrent users and provides for clustering two identical
appliances behind one virtual IP address, or up to eight appliances using an external load balancer.
•
Dell SMA 8200v Virtual Appliance: Supports up to 250 users for Hyper-V and 5000 users for ESX.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
16
Administrator Components
These are the key components for managing the Dell SMA appliance and services:
•
Appliance Management Console (AMC) is a Web-based administrative tool used to manage the
appliance. It provides centralized access for managing security policies, configuring the system
(including networking and certificate configuration), and monitoring. AMC is accessible from a Web
browser.
•
The Web proxy service provides users with secure access to Web-based applications, Web servers, and
network file servers from a Web browser. The Web proxy service is a secure HTTP reverse proxy that
brokers and encrypts access to Web-based resources.
•
The network tunnel service is a network routing technology that provides secure network tunnel
access to a wide range of applications, including those that use non-TCP protocols such as Voice Over IP
(VoIP) and ICMP, reverse-connection protocols, and bi-directional protocols such as FTP. It works in
conjunction with the Connect Tunnel client and the OnDemand Tunnel agent to provide authenticated
and encrypted access. The network tunnel service can traverse firewalls, NAT devices, and other proxy
servers that can interfere with traditional VPN devices.
•
The Management API Library provides URLs to view and modify appliance data in JSON format. The API
is divided into two primary URLs that handle HTTP requests before and after the appliance has
completed initial configuration:
During initial configuration: https://<AMC IP address:8443>/Setup
On configured appliance: https://<AMC IP address:8443>/Console
Browser-based documentation is available at:
https://<AMC IP address:8443>/Setup/UserGuide
https://<AMC IP address:8443>/Console/UserGuide
NOTE: When using a virtual machine, use the virtual machine port number instead of port 8443.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
17
User Access Components
The Dell SMA appliance includes several components that provide users with access to resources on your
network.
WorkPlace
The WorkPlace portal provides users with quick access to resources on your network. It is accessible from any
Web browser that supports SSL and has JavaScript enabled. WorkPlace provides a range of access methods for
you to choose from:
•
Basic Web (HTTP) resources are accessible using the Web translation engine, a reverse proxy that
provides single sign-on and fine-grained access control. The web translation engine has 3 modes of
operation:
Alias based translation appends a custom alias to the end of the URL that users access (also called URL
re-writing). For example, if you specify http://hr.mycompany.com/ as a URL resource with an alias of
'hr', users would access it by clicking on a link in Workplace that looked like this:
https://vpn.mycompany.com/hr/ This type of configuration is recommended for simple web
applications that do not require advanced functionality like Java applets, JavaScript (AJAX), etc. Dell
supports a limited number of applications in the alias based translated web access method (see page 18
for more information).
•
Host mapped URL access changes the hostname that the resource is accessed on. For example,
if http://hr.mycompany.com/ URL resource is configured with a custom hostname of
hr.vpn.mycompany.com, users access the resource by clicking on a link that looks like this in
Workplace: https://hr.vpn.mycompany.com/. Host mapped URL access is recommended for
complex web applications that may use Java applets, advanced AJAX (and other advanced web
technologies). It is highly recommended to purchase either a wildcard SSL certificate, or a SAN
certificate with wildcards in it to make expansion of host-mapped URL resources easier.
•
Port mapped URL access changes the port number that the resource is accessed on. For
example, if http://hr.mycompany.com/ URL resource is configured with a custom port (8888) for
access, users access the resource by clicking on a link that looks like this in Workplace:
https://vpn.mycompany.com:8888/ One of the downsides of custom port URL access is that it
does require you to open up a port for each web application that you want to configure to use the
port mapped URL access. Port mapped URL resources is recommended for complex web
applications that may use Java applets, advanced AJAX, and other advanced web technologies.
•
File system resources are accessible from the Web-based Network Explorer that is integrated in
WorkPlace.
•
Client/server traffic (TCP/IP) is accessible using one of the network redirection clients, OnDemand
Tunnel. The client is automatically provisioned or activated when the user logs in to WorkPlace.
The access method you choose will be based on several factors, including the network protocols used by your
applications, your security requirements, end-user convenience, and the target platforms.
Connect and OnDemand Tunnel clients
Tunnel clients provide network-level access to all resources, effectively making each user device a virtual node
on your network.
•
The Connect Tunnel client provides full network and application access from a Web-deployed Windows
client for computers running a Windows 7 SP1, 8.1, 10, Mac OS, or Linux operating system. The client can
be provisioned either transparently using a link from the WorkPlace portal or through an executable
installation package. The Connect Tunnel client provides split-tunneling control, granular access
controls, and automatic proxy detection and authentication.
•
The OnDemand Tunnel agent provides the same features as the Connect Tunnel, except that it can’t be
used as a dial-up adapter for domain logins, and is integrated into WorkPlace. OnDemand can operate in
either split-tunnel mode or redirect all traffic mode.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
18
End Point Control (EPC)
EPC components ensure that your network is not compromised when accessed from PCs in untrusted
environments by enabling you to “interrogate” devices and determine whether they are running the programs
that you require. Advanced EPC simplifies granular end point protection by allowing you to set up device
profiles (for clients running on Microsoft Windows) using a comprehensive predefined checklist that includes
security solutions from leading vendors like OPSWAT, McAfee, Computer Associates, Sophos, and Kaspersky.
Advanced EPC is included with the SMA 6200, SMA 7200, EX9000, and EX7000 appliances and licensed separately
for the other appliances in the EX Series.
ADA 508 Improvements
The Administrator (AMC) and User Access (WorkPlace and Connect Tunnel) components provided with your
appliance have ADA 508 improvements for the following operating systems:
Table 2. ADA 508 Improvements
Windows
Mac OS X
Linux
AMC
WorkPlace
Connect Tunnel
ADA 508 improvements include the following features to improve keyboard usability and compatibility with
assistive technologies:
•
Keyboard shortcuts and proper keyboard tab order.
•
Visual focus that identifies the user’s location on a page and allow them to use the Tab key to move
between elements on a page. This is especially helpful for tabbed pages, radio buttons, checkboxes,
push buttons, and other types of selection methods.
•
Meaningful popup captions on property windows, dialog boxes, and non-text elements.
•
Completion message when Connect Tunnel successfully completes installation.
•
User actions in the Configuration Wizard more accessible.
•
Browser-based High Contrast theme, which makes text on the computer screen easier to see. This
feature is available on Internet Explorer, Chrome, and Firefox browsers, but results vary based on the
operating system and browser combination.
Login and runtime dialog boxes, session statistics, and status are rearranged to make them more accessible.
Dell recommends using NonVisual Desktop Access (NVDA) or JAWS screen reading software.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
19
What’s New in This Release
Version 11.4 of the Dell Secure Mobile Access software includes the following new features:
•
Integrating an SMA appliance with a Dell SonicWALL firewall — Dell Secure Mobile Access (SMA) 1000
series appliances running firmware version 11.4.0 and higher can be integrated to work with Dell
SonicWALL TZ, NSA, and SuperMassive series firewalls running firmware version SonicOS 5.9.X and higher.
•
Outlook Anywhere support — an Outlook client that connects to the Microsoft Exchange server using
RPC over HTTP or MAPI over HTTP.
•
TLS and NLA support for HTML5 RDP — Secure Mobile Access (SMA) 11.4 provides Transport Layer
Security (TLS) and Network Level Authentication (NLA) for HTML5 browser clients that want to connect
to remote hosts via the Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP).
•
SAML 2.0 Identity Provider — CA SiteMinder has been replaced with SAML 2.0 Identity Provider, which
supports CA SiteMinder as well as other IDPs.
•
Suite B Ciphers — a set of security algorithms or ciphers approved by the National Security Agency (NSA)
for assuring the security and integrity of information passed over public networks.
Related Documentation
Refer to the following Dell SMA 11.4 documents for specific details about the various features and products of
SMA 11.4:
•
SMA 11.4 CMS Administration Guide
•
SMA 11.4 WorkPlace User Guide
•
SMA 11.4.0 Upgrade Guide
•
SMA 11.4 Connect Tunnel Windows User Guide
•
SMA 11.4 Connect Tunnel Mac Linux User Guide
•
SMA 11.4 Connect Tunnel Service User Guide
•
SMA 11 8200v Getting Started Guide
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
20
System Requirements
Topics
•
Client Components
•
Server Components
This section describes the system requirements for the client and administrator (server) components for Secure
Mobile Access.
Support status is indicated by the font type for items listed in the tables:
•
Fully supported (normal font)
•
Compatible with, moving into support, issues addressed as needed (bold italics)
•
Compatible with, moving out of support (italics)
There are no known issues with “compatible with” configurations, but they have not been specifically tested in
the current release. Therefore, Dell does not guarantee that significant issues will not occur and there is no
guarantee of support for such issues.
NOTE: Metro View is not supported in Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) v10.
Client Components
The system requirements for client components are listed in the following tables:
•
WorkPlace Lite
•
Web-Based Clients
•
Tunnel Clients
•
Proxy Clients
•
Virtual Assist Clients
•
End Point Control
NOTE: The tables that follow show the latest released versions of software that are available at the time
of the corresponding Dell Secure Mobile Access (SMA) release.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
21
WorkPlace Lite
The following table shows system requirements for WorkPlace Lite.
WorkPlace Lite access
Table 3. WorkPlace Lite requirements
Operating system
•
•
•
Windows 10
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
Windows 7 x86/x64 SP1
Browser
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Firefox 44
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
Edge
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Firefox 44
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
IIE11(32 bit only)
•
IE10 (32 bit only)
•
Firefox 44
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
iPhone/iPad OS v9.0
•
Safari 9
•
iPhone/iPad OS v8.0
•
Safari 8
•
iPhone/iPad OS v7.0
•
Android 6.x
•
Firefox 44
•
Android 5.x
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
Android 4.x
•
ChromeOS
•
Version 48+
•
Windows Phone 10
•
Edge
•
Mac OSX 10.11.X
•
Safari v9.x
•
Mac OSX 10.10.X
•
Safari v8.x
•
Linux x86/x64 Kernel 3.X or
later
•
Firefox 44
Notes
•
No access agent or EPC is
required. The browser
must support HTML5.
Supported HTML5 bookmarks:
•
RDP
•
Telnet
•
SSH
•
VNC
•
Citrix (thru Storefront)
•
Network Explorer
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
22
Web-Based Clients
The following tables show system requirements for Web-based clients.
WorkPlace Portal, Translated Web, Network Explorer, Host/Port Mapping URL access
Table 4. Web-based client requirements
Operating system
•
•
•
Browser
Windows 10
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
Windows 7 x86/x64 SP1
Notes
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
IE11(32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
IE10 (32 bit only)
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
Mac OSX 10.11.X
•
Safari v9.x
•
Mac OSX 10.10.X
•
Safari v8.x
•
Linux x86/x64 Kernel 3.X or
later
•
Firefox 44
Web Application Services
Table 5. Translated/Custom Port Mapped/Custom FQDN Mapped Web application service requirements
Operating system
Browser
•
Outlook Web Exchange 2016
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Outlook Web Access 2013
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Firefox 44
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Outlook Web Access 2010
•
Firefox 44
•
SharePoint 2013
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
SharePoint 2010
•
For Windows 8.1 use IE11
Notes
Web Application: Generic (Simple)
Browser: Internet Explorer, Firefox, and Chrome
NOTE: Support of a given web application using alias based Translation is based on the compatibility and
complexity of these underlying web application. Some web applications will not work with alias based
Translation, in which case custom host or port mapping URL access should be used. SonicWALL only supports
and tests the specifically listed applications in this section for alias based translation access. Supports NTLM,
BASIC, and forms-based Single Sign-On(SSO).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
23
Table 6. Custom Port Mapped/Custom FQDN Mapped Web application service requirements
Operating system
•
Browser
Domino Web Access 9.0.1
•
IE11 (9.0.1 only)
•
Firefox 44
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
Notes
Web Application: Generic (Advanced)
Browser: Internet Explorer, Firefox, and Chrome
NOTE: Notes: Recommended for advanced web applications that may use Java Applets, AJAX, or other
advanced web technologies. Supports NTLM, BASIC, and forms-based Single Sign-On (SSO).
Tunnel Clients
The following table shows system requirements for the Tunnel clients.
Connect Tunnel Client
Table 7. Connect Tunnel client requirements
Operating system
Browser
Notes
•
Windows 10
•
N/A
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
•
N/A
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Windows 7 x86 SP1/x64
•
N/A
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Mac OSX 10.11.X
•
Safari v9.x
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Mac OSX 10.10.X
•
Safari v8.x
•
Linux x86/x64 Kernel 3.X or
later
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
Connect Tunnel Service
Table 8. Connect Tunnel Service requirements
Operating system
Browser
•
Windows 2012 Server R2
•
N/A
•
Windows 2008 Server R2 x64
•
N/A
Notes
OnDemand Tunnel Agent
Table 9. OnDemand Tunnel agent requirements
Operating system
•
•
•
Browser
Notes
Windows 10 Threshold 2
(build 10586) x86/x64
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
IE11(32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
IE10 (32 bit only)
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
Windows 7 x86 SP1/x64
•
Mac OSX 10.11.X
•
Safari v9.x
•
Mac OSX 10.10.X
•
Safari v8.x
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
24
Table 9. OnDemand Tunnel agent requirements
Operating system
Browser
Notes
•
Linux x86/x64 Kernel 3.X or
later
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
TurboLinux v7
•
Mozilla 0.94
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Mozilla 1.7
Proxy Clients
The following table shows system requirements for the Proxy clients.
Web Proxy Agent
Table 10. Web Proxy client requirements
Operating system
•
•
•
Windows 10
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
Windows 7 x86 SP1/x64
Browser
•
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
IE11 (32 bit only)
Notes
•
Active X
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Active X
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
IE11(32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
IE10 (32 bit only)
•
Java 1.8 update 71
OnDemand Proxy Agent (Mapped Mode)
Table 11. OnDemand Proxy agent requirements (mapped mode)
Operating system
•
•
•
Windows 10
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
Windows 7 x86/x64SP1
Browser
Notes
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
IE11(32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
IE10 (32 bit only)
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Mac OSX 10.11.X
•
Safari v9.x
•
Mac OSX 10.10.X
•
Safari v8.x
•
Linux x86/x64 Kernel 3.X or
later
•
Firefox 44
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
25
Virtual Assist Clients
The following tables show system requirements for the Virtual Assist client application and technician
application.
Client Application
Table 12. Virtual Assist client requirements
Operating system
•
•
Browser
Windows 10
Windows 7 x86 SP1/x64
•
E11 (32 bit only)
•
Firefox 44
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
IE11(32 bit only)
•
IE10 (32 bit only)
•
Firefox 44
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
Mac OSX 10.11.X
•
Safari v9.x
•
Mac OSX 10.10.X
•
Safari v8.x
•
Linux x86/x64 Kernel 3.X or
later
•
Firefox 44
Notes
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Java 1.8 update 71
Technician Application
Table 13. Technician system requirements
Operating system
Browser
•
Windows 10
•
Windows 7 x86 SP1/x64
•
Mac OSX 10.11.X
•
Safari v9.x
•
Mac OSX 10.10.X
•
Safari v8.x
Notes
•
Java 1.8. update 71
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
26
End Point Control
The following tables show system requirements for the End Point Control clients.
Interrogator and Installer
Table 14. End Point Control client system requirements
Operating system
•
•
•
Windows 10
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
Windows 7 x86 SP1/x64
Browser
Notes
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
IE11(32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
IE10 (32 bit only)
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Chrome 48.0.2564.103 m
•
Mac OSX 10.11.X
•
Safari v9.x
•
Mac OSX 10.10.X
•
Safari v8.x
•
Linux x86
•
Firefox 44
•
Linux x64
Third Party Components (OESIS, Cache Cleaner)
Table 15. Third Party Component requirements
Operating system
•
Windows 10
•
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
•
Windows 7 x86 SP1/x64
Browser
Notes
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Active X
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Mac OSX 10.11.X
•
Safari v9.x
•
Mac OSX 10.10.X
•
Safari v8.x
•
Linux x86
•
Firefox 44
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Linux x64
•
Cache Cleaner 3.6
•
Windows
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Mac
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
27
Server Components
The system requirements for the administrator components and authentication servers are listed in the
following tables.
Support status is indicated by the font type for items listed in the tables:
•
Fully supported (normal font)
•
Compatible with, moving into support, issues addressed as needed (bold italics)
•
Compatible with, moving out of support (italics)
There are no known issues with “compatible with” configurations, but they have not been specifically tested in
the current release. Therefore, Dell does not guarantee that significant issues will not occur and there is no
guarantee of support for such issues.
•
System Administration
•
Authentication Servers
•
ActiveSync Clients
•
ActiveSync Servers
•
Outlook Anywhere
•
Citrix Server Farms
•
Server Farms
•
Native Access Modules (NAMs)
•
SMA 8200v and CMS Platforms
•
API Support
System Administration
Table 16. System requirements for management computer accessing AMC
Operating system
Browser
Notes
Appliance Management Console (AMC)
•
•
•
Windows 10
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
Windows 7 x86 SP1/x64
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Firefox 44
•
IE11 (32 bit only)
•
Firefox 44
•
IE11(32 bit only)
•
IE10 (32 bit only)
•
Firefox 44
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
28
Authentication Servers
Table 17. Authentication Server requirements
Operating system
Version
Notes
Microsoft
•
Windows 2012 Server R2 x64
•
Windows 2008 Server R2 SP1
x64
•
Outlook Anywhere
LDAP servers
•
LDAP v3 compatible Servers
LDAP password change supported
on IDS
•
IBM Tivoli Directory Server
Enterprise Edition
•
V6.x
•
Oracle Directory Server
Enterprise Edition
•
V11
•
Novell eDirectory
•
V8.8 SP7
•
v8.1
•
v7.x
LDAP password change supported
on IDS
RADIUS Protocol
•
RSA Authentication Manager
•
General
•
Will support IP address
assignment
•
Quest Defender
•
v5.81
•
v5.7
•
RSA Clear Trust Agent 5.5
Single Sign-on Servers
•
RSA Federated Identity
Manager (Clear Trust)
SAML Servers/Providers
•
Office 365
•
Azure AD or Azure AD sync
with local AD
•
Workplace
•
Dell CAM
•
Google Apps/Email
•
Azure AD or Internal
Shibboleth IdP
•
Salesforce.com
•
Azure AD or any other IdP
•
Box
•
Azure AD or any other IdP
•
Onelogin.com
•
Onelogin.com
•
AWS
•
Azure AD or any other IdP
•
Workplace
•
CA SiteMinder
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
29
ActiveSync Clients
Table 18. ActiveSync Client requirements
Servers
•
•
•
Android Phone/Tablet
iPhone/iPad
Windows Phone
Notes
•
Android 6.x
•
Android 5.x
•
Android 4.x
•
iPhone/iPad OS V9.x
•
iPhone/iPad OS v8.x
•
iPhone/iPad OS v7.x
•
Windows Phone 10
ActiveSync Servers
Table 19. ActiveSync Server requirements
Servers
•
Microsoft Exchange
Notes
•
Exchange 2016
•
Exchange 2013
•
Exchange 2010
Outlook Anywhere
Table 20. Outlook Anywhere using MAPI over HTTP
Servers
Clients
•
Windows 10 Threshold 2 (build
10586) x86/x64
•
Outlook 2016
•
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
•
Outlook 2010 SP2
•
Windows 7 SP1 x86/x64
•
Outlook 2013 SP1
Table 21. Outlook Anywhere using RPC over HTTP
Servers
Clients
•
Windows 10 Threshold 2 (build
10586) x86/x64
•
Outlook 2016
•
Windows 8.1 x86/x64 Update
•
Outlook 2010
•
Windows 7 SP1 x86/x64
•
Outlook 2013
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
30
Citrix Server Farms
Table 22. Citrix Server Farm requirements
Servers
Version
•
•
Citrix XenApp 7.7
•
Citrix XenApp 7.6
•
Citrix XenDesktop v7.6
•
Citrix XenDesktop v7.7
Citrix
Server Farms
Table 23. Server Farm requirements
Servers
Version
•
vWorkspace
8.6
•
VMware Horizon View
6.X
Native Access Modules (NAMs)
The Secure Mobile Access appliance integrates with several popular third party agents. In some cases, the files
necessary for integration are already on the appliance, and in other cases they must be copied to the appliance.
Table 24. NAM requirements
Description
Notes
Terminal Services agent
•
Windows V4.x
•
Mac v12.x
•
Java 1.8 update 71
•
Linux v13.x
•
Java 1.8 update 71
Citrix Receiver
•
Windows v3.x
•
Mac v3.x
•
Linux v3.x
VMware View
•
Windows v3.x
•
Mac v3.x
•
Linux v3.x
vWorkspace
•
Windows - vWorkspace Connector 8.6
•
Mac OSX - vWorkspace Connector 8.6
•
Pre-installed Linux vWorkspace Connector 8.6
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
31
SMA 8200v and CMS Platforms
Table 25. vWorkspace Server Farm requirements
Component Web-based
Version
•
VMWare
•
ESX/ESXi 6.0, 7.x
•
Microsoft Hyper-V
•
Windows Server 2012 R2
API Support
Table 26. API Support
Component Web-based
•
•
Management API
Authentication API
Version
•
Ruby 1.9.3
•
Mechanize 2.7.4
•
Ruby 1.9.3
•
Mechanize 2.7.4
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
32
Part 2
Installation
•
Installation and Initial Setup
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
33
2
Installation and Initial Setup
This section shows where the appliance fits into your network environment, provides installation and cabling
instructions, and explains how to use the Web-based Setup Wizard (or alternatively use the command-line Setup
Tool) to perform basic network configuration.
•
Network Architecture
•
Preparing for the Installation
•
Installation and Deployment Process
•
Next Steps
Network Architecture
All Dell SMA appliances can be set up in either a dual interface or single interface configuration, both of which
are discussed in this section.
•
The SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 appliances include physical network interfaces
and can be set up in a cluster for high availability. They can also be set up to use an external load
balancer. (See Installing and Configuring a Cluster on page 562 and Configuring a High-Capacity Cluster
on page 642 for more information.)
Dual-homed configuration (internal and external
interfaces)
One network interface is used for external traffic (that is, to and from the Internet), and the other interfaces
are used for internal traffic (to and from your corporate network).
Figure 2. Dual-homed interface configuration
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
34
Single-homed interface configuration (internal
interface)
A single network interface is used for both internal and external traffic. In this configuration, the appliance is
usually installed in the demilitarized zone (or DMZ, also known as a perimeter network).
Figure 3. Single-homed interface configuration
In both configurations, incoming requests to the Secure Mobile Access services—including HTTP/S traffic for the
Web proxy service—are sent over port 80 (HTTP) and port 443 (HTTPS). Traffic from the OnDemand agent is
always sent over port 443. Because most networks are configured to enable traffic over these ports, you
shouldn’t need to reconfigure firewalls on your network.
You should install the appliance in a location where it can connect to resources on your network, including:
•
Application servers and file servers, including Web servers, client/server applications, and Windows file
servers.
•
External authentication repositories (such as an LDAP, Microsoft Active Directory, or RADIUS server).
•
One or more Domain Name System (DNS) servers.
•
Optionally, a Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) server. This is required for browsing Windows
networks using WorkPlace.
CAUTION: The Dell SMA appliance does not provide full firewall capabilities and should be secured
behind a firewall. Running without a firewall makes the appliance vulnerable to attacks that can
compromise security and degrade performance.
Although not required, enabling the appliance to communicate with these additional resources provides greater
functionality and ease of use:
•
Network Time Protocol (NTP) server for synchronizing the time on the appliance.
•
External server for storing syslog output.
•
Administrator’s workstation for secure shell (SSH) access.
You can configure the appliance to use a self-signed server certificate, or, for enhanced security, you can obtain
a certificate from a commercial certificate authority (CA). For more information, see Obtaining a Certificate
from a Commercial CA on page 155.
Preparing for the Installation
Before beginning the installation, you need to gather information about your networking environment and verify
that your firewalls are properly configured to permit traffic to and from the appliance.
•
Gathering Information
•
Verifying Your Firewall Policies
•
Helpful Management Tools
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
35
Gathering Information
Before configuring the appliance, you need to gather the following information. You are prompted for some of
this information when running Setup Wizard (see Web-Based Configuration Using Setup Wizard on page 51) or
Setup Tool (see Configuring a New Appliance Using Setup Tool on page 579), but most of it will be used when you
configure the appliance in AMC (see Network and Authentication Configuration on page 138).
If you are installing a cluster, you need some additional information. See Installing and Configuring a Cluster on
page 562 and Configuring a High-Capacity Cluster on page 642.
Settings required to start Appliance Management Console
•
The root password for administering the appliance
•
The name for the appliance (because this name is used only in log files, you don’t need to add it to DNS)
•
The internal IP address and, optionally, an external IP address
•
Select a routing mode and supply IP addresses for the network gateways to the Internet, and your
corporate network.
Certificate information
Several pieces of information are used to generate the server and AMC certificates:
•
A fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the appliance and for any WorkPlace sites that use a unique
name. These names should be added to your public DNS; they are also visible to users when they connect
to Web-based resources.
•
A FQDN for the Appliance Management Console (AMC) server. The AMC server name is used to access
AMC, which is a Web-based tool for administering the appliance.
Name lookup information
•
Internal DNS domain name of the network to which the appliance is connected
•
Primary internal DNS server address (additional DNS servers are optional)
•
IP address for an internal WINS server and the name of your Windows domain (required to browse files on
a Windows network using WorkPlace, but are otherwise optional)
Authentication information
•
Server name and login information for your authentication servers (LDAP, Active Directory, or RADIUS)
Virtual Address pool information
•
If you are planning to deploy either network tunnel client (Connect Tunnel or OnDemand Tunnel), you
must allocate IP addresses for one or more address pools. For more information, see Configuring IP
Address Pools on page 503.
Optional configuration information
•
To enable SSH access from a remote machine, you need to know the remote host’s IP address.
•
To synchronize with an NTP server, you need to know the IP addresses for one or more NTP servers.
•
To send data to a syslog server, you need to know the IP address and port number for one or more syslog
servers.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
36
Verifying Your Firewall Policies
For the appliance to function correctly, you must open ports on your external (Internet-facing) and internal
firewalls.
External Firewall
For secure access to the appliance from a Web browser or OnDemand, you must make sure that ports 80 and 443
are open on firewalls at your site. Opening your firewall to permit SSH access is optional, but can be useful for
performing administrative tasks from a remote system.
Table 27. Traffic types and ports used by SMA on external network
Traffic type
Port/protocol
Usage
Required?
HTTP
80/tcp
Unencrypted network access
x
HTTPS
443/tcp
Encrypted network access
x
SSH
22/tcp
Administrative access to the appliance
Internal Firewall
If you have a firewall on the internal network, you may need to adjust its policy to open ports for back-end
applications with which the appliance must communicate. In addition to opening ports for standard network
services such as DNS and email, you may need to modify your firewall policy before the appliance can access
the following services.
Table 28. Traffic types and ports used by SMA on internal network
Traffic type
Microsoft networking
Port/protocol
•
138/tcp and 138/udp
•
137/tcp and 137/udp
•
139/udp
•
162/snmp
•
445/smb
Usage
Used by WorkPlace to perform WINS name
resolution, browse requests, and access file
shares
LDAP (unencrypted)
389/tcp
Communicate with an LDAP directory or
Microsoft Active Directory
LDAP over SSL (encrypted)
636/tcp
Communicate with an LDAP directory or
Microsoft Active Directory over SSL
RADIUS
1645/udp or 1812/udp
Communicate with a RADIUS authentication
server
NTP
123/udp
Synchronize the appliance clock with an NTP
server
Syslog
514/tcp
Send system log information to a syslog server
SNMP
161/udp
Monitor the appliance from an SNMP
management tool
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
37
Helpful Management Tools
To manage the appliance from a remote system running Microsoft Windows, you may find the following
management tools useful. Both of these tools use encryption to protect information from eavesdropping, unlike
standard FTP or Telnet utilities:
•
A Secure Shell (SSH) client enables you to securely log in to the appliance and configure it from the
command line. This is useful for backing up the system, viewing log files, and configuring advanced
network settings. A popular SSH client for Windows is VanDyke Software’s SecureCRT. A trial download is
available at http://www.vandyke.com/products/securecrt/. Another popular client is PuTTY, a free
implementation of Telnet and SSH for Windows platforms. PuTTY is recommended by Cisco.
•
To connect to the appliance using SSH, you type root as the username and type the password you
created using Setup Wizard.
•
A Secure Copy (SCP) client makes it easy to securely transfer files from a PC running Windows to the
appliance. This is useful for copying certificates and other data to the appliance. A popular Windows
client is WinSCP, available at http://winscp.sourceforge.net/eng/.
Most of the configuration management tasks that you need to perform—backing up and restoring your appliance
configuration, applying upgrades, and so on—can be done on the Maintenance page in AMC, as described in
Managing Configuration Data on page 318. If you prefer to handle these tasks on the command line, see Saving
and Restoring Configuration Data on page 581.
Installation and Deployment Process
This section outlines the process of installing, configuring, and testing the appliance, and then deploying it in a
production environment. Here’s an overview of the steps:
Table 29. Installation steps
Installation step
Description
Make a note of your appliance serial number and You’ll need this information when you register your product
authentication code
on MySonicwall. The serial number and authentication code
are printed on your appliance label; they are also displayed
on the General Settings page in AMC.
Rack-mount the appliance and connect the
cables
See Specifications and Rack Installation on page 40 and
Connecting the Appliance on page 48.
Turn on the appliance and begin configuration
To connect to your appliance on your internal network you
must specify an internal IP address, the subnet mask, and
indicate whether your appliance is part of a cluster. Use the
controls on the front of the appliance. See Powering Up and
Configuring Basic Network Settings on page 49.
Run Setup Wizard
The wizard guides you through the process of initial setup
for your Dell SMA appliance. See Web-Based Configuration
Using Setup Wizard on page 51.
Register your appliance on MySonicwall
Register your appliance on MySonicwall. Product registration
gives you access to essential resources, such as your license
file and updates. To register, you need both the serial
number for your appliance and its authentication code.
The Dell SMA appliance uses a few different types of licenses. All license files must be retrieved from
www.MySonicwall.com and imported to the appliance, as described in Software Licenses on page 342:
•
Administration test license: To begin setting up your Dell SMA appliance, log in to MySonicwall to
retrieve your initial user license, which is valid for one user (the administrator plus one end user) for an
unlimited number of days. To become familiar with the AMC and test it in your environment with
additional users, either retrieve an appliance license, or request a lab license to add a few more users.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
38
•
Appliance licenses: The number of concurrent users supported with the appliance license varies,
depending on the appliance model you have:
•
SMA 7200 up to 10,000 users
•
SMA 6200 up to 2,000 users
•
EX9000: up to 20,000 users
•
EX7000: up to 5,000 users
•
EX6000: up to 250 users
•
SMA 8200v up to 250 users for Hyper-V and 5000 users for ESX
•
Component licenses: If the license for an appliance component (such as OnDemand) has expired, users
attempting to use that component see an error message in Secure Mobile Access WorkPlace. In the case
of a Spike License, the date on which it was activated and how many days still remain is displayed in
AMC.
If a license is about to expire, the AMC displays a license warning message in the status area that links to
the Licensing page.
•
Both Setup Wizard and AMC are Web-based applications for configuring the appliance. PCs running these
applications must have JavaScript enabled. JavaScript must also be enabled on the browsers used for
accessing WorkPlace.
If you are installing a cluster, see Installing and Configuring a Cluster on page 562 and Overview of Clustering on
page 642.
Related Topics
•
Specifications and Rack Installation
•
Front Panel Controls and Indicators
•
Connecting the Appliance
•
Powering Up and Configuring Basic Network Settings
•
Web-Based Configuration Using Setup Wizard
•
Configuring the Appliance Using the Management Console
•
Moving the Appliance into Production
•
Powering Down and Restarting the Appliance
•
Hyper-V for the SMA 8200v
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
39
Specifications and Rack Installation
After you’ve unpacked the box, you’re ready to install the appliance on your network and prepare for the
configuration process. The appliances are designed to fit on a standard, 19-inch telecom rack. Before
connecting the appliance, make sure that you have sufficient space and adequate power. The specifications for
each appliance model are listed below.
Dell SMA 7200 and SMA 6200 Hardware
The SMA 7200 and SMA 6200 include the following:
•
Rails (in kit, not attached)
•
Standard IEC 60320 C13 to NEMA 15 USA only power cord(s)
•
6 1Gb Ethernet ports
•
2 10Gb SFP+ ports (on SMA 7200)
•
2 USB ports
•
1 DIAG port
•
2 500 GB SATA hard drives:
Table 30. Specifications
SMA 7200
SMA 6200
Regulatory Model/Type
1RK30-0AF
1RK31-0B0
CPU
E3-1275 3.5GHz
I5-4570S 2.9GHz
RAM
4 x 16GB DDR3 1600MHz ECC
4 x 8GB DDR3 1600MHz ECC
Network ports
8 (6-port 1GE + 2-port 10Gb SFP+)
6 (6-port 1GE)
Power supply
Dual hot swappable
Fixed
Front panel illustration
See SMA 6200/7200 Front Panels on
page 42
See SMA 6200/7200 Front Panels on
page 42
Dell SonicWALL E-Class SMA EX9000 Hardware
The Dell SonicWALL E-Class SMA EX9000 includes the following:
•
Rails (in kit, not attached)
•
Standard IEC 60320 C13 to NEMA 15 USA only power cords
•
1 GB Ethernet ports
•
10 GB Ethernet ports
•
2 USB ports
•
1 DIAG port
•
2 80 GB SATA hard drive
•
Serial connection to appliance (115,200 baud)
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
40
Dell SonicWALL E-Class SMA EX7000 and EX6000 Hardware
The Dell SonicWALL E-Class SMA EX7000 and EX6000 include the following:
•
Rails (in kit, not attached)
•
Standard IEC 60320 C13 to NEMA 15 USA only power cords
•
1 GB Ethernet ports
•
2 USB ports
•
80 GB SATA hard drive
•
Serial connection to appliance (115,200 baud)
The models differ from each other most in terms of processor power, RAM, network ports, and power supply:
Table 31. Hardware specifications
SMA EX9000
SMA EX7000
SMA EX6000
2RK03-092
1RK15-059
1RK20-05A
Core2 Duo 2.1GHz CPU
Celeron 2.0GHz CPU
RAM
32 Gig
2Gig DDR533
1Gig DDR533
PCIe Gig network
ports
12 (8-port 1GE + 4-port
10GE)
6 (5 + 1 HA)
4 (3 + 1 HA)
Power supply
Dual hot swappable
Dual hot swappable
Fixed
Front panel
(illustration)
See EX9000 Appliance Front
Panel Controls on page 43
See EX7000 Appliance Front
Panel Controls on page 44
See EX6000 Appliance Front
Panel Controls on page 45
Regulatory
Model/Type
Intel processor
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
41
Front Panel Controls and Indicators
Before powering up the appliance, you should familiarize yourself with the front panel controls.
•
SMA 6200/7200 Front Panels
•
EX9000 Appliance Front Panel Controls
•
EX7000 Appliance Front Panel Controls
•
EX6000 Appliance Front Panel Controls
•
LCD Controls for the SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000
SMA 6200/7200 Front Panels
The front panels of the SMA 6200 and SMA 7200 are illustrated in this section. The power button is at the
bottom, right corner of the front panel.
Figure 4. Front panels of the SMA 6200 and SMA 7200
The following table describes the controls and indicators on the front panels.
Table 32. Controls and indicators on the front panels
Item
Description
Hard Drive modules
Dual hard drives.
LCD display screen
and controls
Displays status and configuration about the appliance. Keypad buttons are
used to display appliance status and configure initial settings:
•
For more information on displaying appliance status and using the
keypad to shut down or reboot the appliance, see LCD Controls for
the SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 on page 47.
•
For information on using the LCD controls during initial
configuration (so that you can run Setup Wizard), see Configuring an
SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 Appliance on
page 49.
Console port
Connects the appliance to a personal computer with an
Ethernet cable.
USB ports
There are two USB ports.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
42
Table 32. Controls and indicators on the front panels
Item
Description
LED indicators
From top to bottom, the LED indicators are:
•
Hard disk drive
•
Alarm
•
Test
•
Power 1 and 2
DIAG port
Diagnostics port.
X0: Internal network
Connects the appliance to your internal network.
X1: External network
Connects the appliance to your external network.
X2: Cluster interface
Connect the appliance to another appliance in a high-availability cluster.
X3-X5
Not used.
X6 SFP+: Internal network
Connects the appliance to your internal 10Gb network.
X7 SFP+: External network
Connects the appliance to your external 10Gb network.
EX9000 Appliance Front Panel Controls
This section describes the front panel controls for the EX9000 appliance. The power switch is located on the
rear panel.
Figure 5. Front panels of the EX9000
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
43
Table 33. Controls and indicators on the EX9000 front panel
Item
Description
Hard Drive modules
Dual hard drives.
LCD display screen
and controls
Displays status and configuration about the appliance. Keypad buttons are
used to display appliance status and configure initial settings:
•
For more information on displaying appliance status and using the
keypad to shut down or reboot the appliance, see LCD Controls for
the SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 on page 47.
•
For information on using the LCD controls during initial
configuration (so that you can run Setup Wizard), see Configuring an
SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 Appliance on
page 49.
Console port
Connects the appliance to a personal computer with a DB-9 serial cable.
USB ports
There are two USB ports.
LED indicators
From top to bottom, the LED indicators are:
•
HDD Hard disk drive—red indicates disk activity.
•
Alarm
•
Test
•
Power 2 and 1
DIAG port
Diagnostics port.
X8: 10GigE network
Connects the appliance to your internal 10GigE network.
X9: 10GigE network
Connects the appliance to your external 10GigE network.
X10: 10GigE network
Connect the appliance to another appliance in a high-availability cluster.
Use X10 when using a 10GigE network.
X11
Not used.
X0: Internal network
Connects the appliance to your internal network.
X1: External network
Connects the appliance to your external network.
X2: Cluster interface
Connect the appliance to another appliance in a high-availability cluster.
X3-X7
Not used.
EX7000 Appliance Front Panel Controls
This section describes the front panel controls for the EX7000 appliance. The power switch is located on the
rear panel.
Figure 6. Front panels of the EX7000
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
44
The following table describes the controls and indicators on the front panel.
Table 34. Controls and indicators on the EX7000 front panel
Item
Description
LCD display screen
and controls
Displays status and configuration about the appliance. Keypad buttons are
used to display appliance status and configure initial settings:
•
For more information on displaying appliance status and using the
keypad to shut down or reboot the appliance, see LCD Controls for
the SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 on page 47.
•
For information on using the LCD controls during initial
configuration (so that you can run Setup Wizard), see Configuring an
SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 Appliance on
page 49.
Console
Connects the appliance to a personal computer with a DB-9 serial cable.
USB ports
There are two USB ports.
LED indicators
From left to right, the LED indicators are:
X0: Internal network
•
Power 1 and 2
•
Test
•
Alarm
•
Hard disk drive—red indicates disk activity.
Connects the appliance to your internal network.
X1: External network
Connects the appliance to your external network.
X2: Cluster interface
Connect the appliance to another appliance in a high-availability cluster.
X3-X5
Not used.
EX6000 Appliance Front Panel Controls
This section describes the front panel controls for the EX6000 appliance. The power switch is located on the
rear panel. \
Figure 7. Front panels of the EX6000
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
45
Table 35. Controls and indicators on the EX6000 front panel
Item
Description
LCD display screen
and controls
Displays status and configuration about the appliance. Keypad buttons are
used to display appliance status and configure initial settings:
Console
•
For more information on displaying appliance status and using the
keypad to shut down or reboot the appliance, see LCD Controls for
the SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 on page 47.
•
For information on using the LCD controls during initial
configuration (so that you can run Setup Wizard), see Configuring an
SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 Appliance on
page 49.
Connects the appliance to a personal computer with a DB-9 serial cable.
USB ports
There are two USB ports.
LED indicators
From left to right, the LED indicators are:
•
Power
•
Test
•
Alarm
•
Hard disk drive
X0: Internal network
Connects the appliance to your internal network.
X1: External network
Connects the appliance to your external network.
X2: Cluster interface
Connect the appliance to another appliance in a high-availability cluster.
X3
Not used.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
46
LCD Controls for the SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000,
and EX6000
The four-button keypad to the right of the LCD display on the Dell SMA and EX Series appliances can be used to
display status and configuration information about the appliance, and to shut down or reboot the appliance.
CAUTION: SMA 6200, SMA 7200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 appliances: Remove any USB devices
from the appliance before you reboot it. If a USB device is plugged in to your appliance when it is
rebooted, the appliance tries to use it as a boot device. As a result, the boot information stored in the
BIOS on the appliance is overwritten, and the device becomes unusable.
Table 36. LCD keypad functions
Keypad Function
Description
Left button
Press the Left button once to reboot the appliance. The following prompt is
displayed:
Restart appliance?
<Yes No>
Press the Left button again to reboot the appliance, or press the Right button to
cancel the reboot.
Up button
Right button
Press the Up button once to display the configuration of the appliance’s network
settings. Each time you press it, the display shows another network setting:
•
Internal address
•
External address
•
Default gateway
•
Host name
•
Domain name
•
IP address
•
Netmask
Press the Right button once to shut down the appliance. The following prompt is
displayed:
Shut down now?
<Yes No>
Press the Left button again to shut down the appliance, or press the Right button
to cancel the shutdown.
Down button
To return to the default view at any time, or to refresh the display, press the
Down button once.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
47
Connecting the Appliance
Follow the appropriate instructions for your appliance model to connect the appliance to your network.
•
Connecting the SMA 6200 or SMA 7200 Appliance
•
Connecting the EX9000 Appliance
•
Connecting the EX7000 Appliance
•
Connecting the EX6000 Appliance
•
Powering Up and Configuring Basic Network Settings
Connecting the SMA 6200 or SMA 7200 Appliance
For a diagram of the appliances, see SMA 6200/7200 Front Panels on page 42.
To connect the SMA 6200/7200 appliance
1
Connect a network cable from your internal network to the internal interface on the appliance.
(X0 for 1GB and X6 for 10GB).
2
Optionally, connect a cable from your external network to the external interface on the appliance.
(X1 for 1GB and X7 for 10GB).
3
If you are setting up a cluster, connect one end of a network cable to the cluster interface adapter (X2).
Connect the other end to the X2 port on the other appliance in the cluster.
4
Connect the supplied power cord(s) to the appliance power supply and to an AC outlet.
Connecting the EX9000 Appliance
For a diagram of the appliance, see EX9000 Appliance Front Panel Controls on page 43.
To connect the EX9000 appliance
1
Connect a network cable from your internal network to the internal interface on the appliance (X0).
2
Optionally, connect a cable from your external network to the external interface on the appliance (X1).
3
If you are setting up a cluster, connect one end of the supplied network cable to the cluster interface
adapter (X2). Connect the other end to the X2 port on the other appliance in the cluster.
4
Connect a standard AC power cord to the power supply.
Connecting the EX7000 Appliance
For a diagram of the appliance, see EX7000 Appliance Front Panel Controls on page 44.
To connect the EX7000 appliance
1
Connect a network cable from your internal network to the internal interface on the appliance (X0).
2
Optionally, connect a cable from your external network to the external interface on the appliance (X1).
3
If you are setting up a cluster, connect one end of the supplied network cable to the cluster interface
adapter (X2). Connect the other end to the X2 port on the other appliance in the cluster.
4
Connect a standard AC power cord to the power supply.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
48
Connecting the EX6000 Appliance
For a diagram of the appliance, see EX6000 Appliance Front Panel Controls on page 45.
To connect the EX6000 appliance
1
Connect a network cable from your internal network to the internal interface on the appliance (X0).
2
Optionally, connect a cable from your external network to the external interface on the appliance (X1).
3
If you are setting up a cluster, connect one end of the supplied network cable to the cluster interface
adapter (X2). Connect the other end to the X2 port on the other appliance in the cluster.
4
Connect a standard AC power cord to the power supply.
Powering Up and Configuring Basic Network Settings
After you’ve connected the appliance, you’re ready to power up for the first time and begin the configuration
process. You’ll use a Web-based Setup Wizard to configure the settings needed to get the appliance up and
running quickly, but to start the wizard you must first enter information that will enable a Web browser to
connect to your appliance.
Once your appliance is configured you can control its configuration and operation from AMC, the Appliance
Management Console. On the LCD screen of the appliance you can also see basic information about the
appliance (its name and internal address, for example) or restart it, which is useful if your appliance is not in
the same area as the browser you use to run AMC.
NOTE: You cannot run Setup Wizard on an appliance that has already been configured unless you first
restore the appliance’s factory default configuration settings. This applies whether you initially
configured the appliance using Setup Wizard, or by running setup_tool from the command line. See
Configuring the Appliance Using the Management Console on page 52
Configuring Basic Network Settings
To start Setup Wizard you must first enter information that will enable a Web browser to connect to your
appliance. The recommended procedure for initial setup is to use the LCD controls (to the right of the LCD
screen on the front of your appliance) to enter minimal settings and then run Setup Wizard. Alternatively, you
have the option of using Setup Tool on the command-line. Both procedures are outlined below.
Once your basic settings are entered you’ll be able to run the Web-based Setup Wizard, as described in WebBased Configuration Using Setup Wizard on page 51.
Configuring an SMA 7200, SMA 6200, EX9000, EX7000, and EX6000 Appliance
To the right of the LCD screen on the front of your appliance are four buttons you'll use to enter your settings.
Configuring basic network settings using the LCD controls
1
Press the Up and Down controls to read the welcome screen, and press Right to continue past it.
2
Set the IP address for your internal interface: To change the IP address that appears, use the Left and
Right buttons to position your cursor over the number you want to change, and then use Up and Down to
change the number. Press Right to continue to the next screen.
3
Enter your subnet mask: Again, use the four buttons to change the IP address displayed on the LCD
screen. Press Right to continue to the next screen.
4
Cluster configuration: Specify whether the appliance you are configuring will be part of a cluster (a highavailability pair of appliances), and which node it is (the master is “1” and the slave node is “2”). Press
Right to continue to the next screen.
5
Confirm your settings: Review your settings and confirm them. In a few moments your settings are saved
and you’ll see instructions on browsing to a URL on your desktop computer. This is the URL for continuing
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
49
your appliance configuration with Setup Wizard. For instance, the LCD display might read as follows:
Please browse to: https://172.31.0.140:8443
For a description of configuring your appliance using Setup Wizard, see Web-Based Configuration Using Setup
Wizard on page 51.
Configuring an Appliance Using Setup Tool on the Command Line
To set the minimum configuration items necessary for running Setup Wizard, you must use Setup Tool. Below is
an overview of your steps; see Configuring a New Appliance Using Setup Tool on page 579 for detailed
instructions.
Overview of configuring basic network settings using Setup Tool
1
Use a terminal emulation program to establish a serial connection with the appliance from a laptop
computer or terminal.
2
Turn the appliance on. The first time you start the system from a serial connection, Setup Tool
automatically runs. When prompted to log in, type root for the username.
3
To configure the appliance, you are prompted to provide the following information:
•
IP address and subnet mask for the internal interface
•
Default gateway used to access the internal interface (optional)
•
In the case of a cluster, identify whether the appliance is the primary node (1) or secondary node
(2); a clustered deployment is possible on all appliances
For a description of configuring your appliance using Setup Wizard, see Web-Based Configuration Using Setup
Wizard on page 51.
Related Topics
•
Web-Based Configuration Using Setup Wizard
•
Configuring a New Appliance Using Setup Tool
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
50
Web-Based Configuration Using Setup Wizard
Setup Wizard guides you through a series of required and optional steps for configuring the appliance. The AMC
home page includes a Setup Checklist that indicates which items you have completed.
Running Setup Wizard requires the same system configuration as AMC (see System Requirements on page 21 for
details); in addition, JavaScript must be enabled in the browser.
1
License agreement: Read the terms of the End User License Agreement.
2
Basic Settings:
3
4
•
Specify the password you'll use to access the AMC. Your password must be at least eight
characters long, but no longer than 20 characters.
•
(Optional) Select a time zone, and then click Change to set the current time. You can synchronize
the time with an NTP server later in the AM. For more information, see Configuring Time Settings
on page 288. It’s important to ensure that the appliance’s date and time settings are correct for
your time zone before you import your license file.
Network Settings:
•
Enter a name for the appliance (the default is AventailSSLVPN). Because this name will be used
only in log files, you don’t need to add it to DNS.
•
The IP address and subnet mask for the internal interface (connected to your private network) is
shown here. For a dual-homed configuration, enter the IP address and subnet mask for the
external interface.
Routing: To leverage an existing router, select the dual gateway option to reach your resources. To
restrict incoming appliance traffic to just a few routes or subnets, select a single gateway option and
enter the routes or subnets as static routes later in the AMC.
If the appliance is on a different network than the computer you will use to access AMC, you must set up
routing to maintain access to AMC.
5
Name Resolution: The appliance must be able to perform name resolution to reach resources on your
internal network. Enter a default domain, which is the domain in which the appliance is located (such as
yourcompany.com).
6
User access: You can give users full network access by provisioning the OnDemand Tunnel access agent.
If you do, you’ll also need to specify the Source NAT address that will appear to back-end servers as the
source of client traffic. This must be an IP address that is on the same subnet as the internal interface,
and is not in use elsewhere.
Decide on an initial access policy for users (you can refine it later in AMC). This can be completely
permissive (granting access to the entire network protected by the SSL VPN), very strict (deny all
access), or in-between (give users access to all resources as you define them in AMC).
At the end of the Setup Wizard process you’ll see your settings and then proceed to AMC, the management
console, for the last steps in the configuration process. See Configuring the Appliance Using the Management
Console on page 52 for details.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
51
Configuring the Appliance Using the Management
Console
The final installation and deployment settings are done in AMC. The following is a checklist of configuration
items and pointers to detailed information.
1
Log in to AMC.
Log in to AMC, the Web-based application used to administer the appliance, and look at the setup
checklist on the right.
2
Register the appliance on MySonicwall and retrieve your license file.
When you register your appliance on www.MySonicwall.com, you must enter both your serial number and
your authentication code, which is the hardware identifier for the appliance you purchased:
•
The serial number is printed on a label on the outside of your appliance.
•
The authentication code is displayed in AMC: click General Settings from the main navigation
menu, and then look in the Licensing area.
When you receive your Dell SMA appliance there is a single user license on it, valid for an unlimited
number of days. To become familiar with the AMC and test it in your environment with additional users,
request a lab license. After initial setup and testing, download your license file from
www.MySonicwall.com and then import it to the appliance.
See Managing Licenses on page 345.
3
Define one or more authentication servers.
Authentication is used to verify the identity of users. When configuring an authentication server, you are
prompted to specify a directory type (LDAP, Microsoft Active Directory, RADIUS, or local users) and a
credential type (username/password, token, or digital certificate).
See Managing User Authentication on page 170.
4
Configure a server certificate.
The appliance encrypts information using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol. You can create a selfsigned certificate using AMC, or optionally obtain a certificate from a commercial certificate authority
(CA).
See Certificates on page 152.
5
Define application resources and groups.
Application resources include TCP/IP-based resources (such as client/server applications, file servers, or
databases), Web-based resources (including Web applications or Web sites) that run over HTTP, and
Windows network share resources (to be accessed in WorkPlace). Resource definitions can include
variables, so that a single resource can, for example, derive its network name or address based on each
user.
See Creating and Managing Resources on page 224.
6
Define users and groups.
User and group definitions are used in access control rules to control access to application resources.
See Managing Users and Groups on page 84.
7
Define realms and communities.
Realms enable the appliance to directly integrate with authentication servers, eliminating the need to
create and manage accounts for each user who needs access to your network. Communities aggregate
users with similar access needs and End Point Control requirements.
See Managing User Authentication on page 170.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
52
8
Create access control rules.
Access control rules determine what resources are available to users and groups.
See Access Control Rules on page 266.
9
Configure shortcuts for WorkPlace.
To provide your users with easy access to a Web, file system, or graphical terminal resource from within
WorkPlace, you may want to create shortcuts in WorkPlace.
See Working with WorkPlace Shortcuts on page 414.
10 (Optional) Configure the network tunnel service.
If you plan to deploy the network tunnel clients, you must configure the network tunnel service and
allocate IP address pools for the clients.
See Configuring the Network Tunnel Service on page 501.
11 (Optional) Enable and configure End Point Control.
End Point Control optionally deploys data protection components designed to safeguard sensitive data
and ensure that your network is not compromised when accessed from PCs in untrusted environments.
End Point Control is deployed through communities.
See End Point Control on page 349 and Using End Point Control Restrictions in a Community on page 69.
12 Apply your changes.
To activate your configuration changes, you must apply them.
See Applying Configuration Changes on page 134.
13 Test system accessibility.
Now you can verify that the appliance can access your external user repositories, and make sure that the
resources on your network are accessible.
See Troubleshooting on page 583.
Moving the Appliance into Production
After you have tested the appliance sufficiently in your network environment and determined how you want it
to work, you’re ready to move it into its permanent home. This section describes steps you may need to
perform when moving the appliance into production.
1
Reconfigure the appliance with new address information.
If the network environment changed when you moved the appliance into production, you must
reconfigure the basic network settings and adjust any of the following values if they have changed:
2
•
IP addresses for the internal and external interfaces
•
Default gateway IP addresses
•
Static routes
•
Default DNS domain and DNS server IP address
Register the appliance with DNS.
If you haven’t already registered the appliance with your company’s DNS, do this now. This ensures that
external users can access your network resources using a fully qualified domain name instead of an IP
address. Edit your DNS server’s database to include the fully qualified domain name contained in the
appliance’s certificate, and any WorkPlace sites.
3
Obtain a commercial SSL certificate.
You may want to obtain a commercial certificate for the appliance to assure users of its identity.
(Generally, a self-signed certificate is adequate for AMC.) For more information on generating server
certificates, see Obtaining a Certificate from a Commercial CA on page 155.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
53
4
Adjust your firewall policies.
If you have an Internet-facing firewall, you may need to adjust its policy to open ports required by the
appliance. By default, the Web proxy service communicates using port 443/tcp (it uses port 443/tcp for
HTTPS and port 80/tcp for HTTP). If you want to use SSH to connect to the appliance from outside the
network, you'll need to open port 22/tcp.
If you have a firewall that faces the internal network, you may need to adjust the policy for that firewall
to open ports for any back-end applications with which the appliance must communicate (if these ports
are not already open). For instance, if you use an LDAP or Microsoft Active Directory server for
authentication, you must open port 389/tcp on your internal firewall. For RADIUS, open ports 1645/ucp
and 1812/udp.
If you’re using WorkPlace to access Windows network shares, you must also open internal ports on your
internal firewall so that WorkPlace can perform name resolution, make browse requests, and connect to
file shares. For more information, see Gathering Information on page 36.
5
Create shortcuts and deploy WorkPlace.
If you use WorkPlace as an interface to Web-based resources and to provide Web-based access to
Windows network share and graphical terminal resources, you must create shortcuts (see Working with
WorkPlace Shortcuts on page 414). You should also publish the WorkPlace URLs so your users know how to
access resources through your VPN.
You may want to customize the appearance of WorkPlace for your environment. See Configuring
WorkPlace General Settings on page 413 for more information.
Powering Down and Restarting the Appliance
When it’s time to power down or restart the appliance, be sure to follow the proper procedure. The appliance
stores important data in memory while it is running. That data must be written to the hard disk before you turn
off the power.
CAUTION: Powering down the appliance improperly can result in loss of data and leave the system’s
files in an inconsistent state. EX9000, EX7000, EX6000, SMA 7200, and SMA 6200 appliances: Remove
any USB devices from the appliance before you reboot it. If a USB device is plugged in to your
appliance when it is rebooted, the appliance tries to use it as a boot device. As a result, the boot
information stored in the BIOS on the appliance is overwritten, and the device becomes unusable.
To power down or restart the appliance in AMC
1
From the main navigation menu, click Maintenance.
2
On the Maintenance page, click the appropriate button:
•
To restart the appliance, click Restart. AMC stops responding. After the appliance restarts, you
can log in to AMC again.
•
To shut down the appliance, click Shutdown. AMC stops responding and the appliance powers
down. You do not need to press the power button on the front panel.
All appliance models can be shut down or restarted at the appliance:
a
On the front of the appliance, press the Down button on the four-button keypad to get to the
main LCD menu.
b
Scroll down until you reach the option you want, Restart or Shutdown.
c
Both options display a confirmation message; press the Left button to continue.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
54
d
The results are the same as restarting or shutting down in AMC:
•
AMC stops responding; after the appliance restarts, you can log in to AMC again.
•
AMC stops responding and the appliance automatically powers down. You do not need to
press the power button on the front panel.
Hyper-V for the SMA 8200v
Microsoft Hyper-V in Windows Server 2012 R2 is supported as a host platform for both the Central Management
Server (CMS) and Secure Mobile Access (SMA) appliances. Customers using a Microsoft Hyper-V based
virtualization / private cloud infrastructure can host Dell SMA appliances and CMS.
Configuring Hyper-V for SMA 8200v
NOTE: Hyper-V is supported only on Windows Server 2012 R2 and later.
To create a new 11.4.0 SMA 8200v on a Hyper-V host:
1
Copy the SMA ISO file to a location that can be accessed by the Hyper-V Manager.
2
Create a Generation 1 virtual machine with 2 processors and 2GB of memory.
3
Create a new 64 Gb dynamic hard drive with a .vhdx suffix instead of a .vhd suffix.)
4
Add the hard drive to the virtual machine on IDE Controller 0.
5
Create a second network adapter.
NOTE: The virtual machine is created with just one network adapter.
6
The virtual machine gets created with a DVD, so
specify the media for the DVD to be the SMA ISO file, and
change the virtual machine BIOS boot order so that DVD is first.
7
Start the virtual machine. It will boot from the DVD.
8
After a successful boot, an SMA appliance is created, and the virtual machine is automatically stopped.
9
Remove ISO DVD as it is no longer needed.
10 Change the BIOS boot order so that the hard drive is higher than the DVD
11 Connect the network adapters to the appropriate virtual switch in the Hyper-V environment.
The next time the virtual machine is started, it will boot from the hard drive and the administrator can
configure the SMA 8200v from the console.
The maximum concurrent user count for the Hyper-V platform is 250 CCU.
For more details about configuring a Hyper-V, see the Dell™ Secure Mobile Access Virtual Appliance Hyper-V
Deployment Guide.
Next Steps
After you have completed the initial network setup, use AMC to continue configuring the appliance. AMC is
accessible using a Web browser:
•
If you’re new to AMC, you might want to read Working with Appliance Management Console on page 109.
If you’re ready to continue configuring the appliance, see Network and Authentication Configuration on page
138.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
55
Part 3
Management
•
User Management
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
56
3
User Management
Access control rules determine which resources are available for users or groups of users. Accordingly, you must
define users and groups in AMC that map to users or groups stored in external user directories or in the local
user authentication repository on the appliance. At a higher level, communities organize users or user groups
that share common characteristics, most notably access policy and access methods, and can also be used in
access control rules.
•
Overview: Users, Groups, Communities, and Realms
•
Using Realms and Communities
•
Configuring Realms and Communities
•
Integrating an SMA appliance with a Dell SonicWALL firewall
•
Managing Users and Groups
Overview: Users, Groups, Communities,
and Realms
A user is an individual who needs access to resources on your network, and a group is a collection of users. After
you’ve created users or groups on the appliance, you can reference them in an access control rule to permit or
deny access to resources.
Users and groups
Users and groups can be stored on an external authentication server or on the appliance in a local user
authentication repository. When an external authentication server, such as LDAP or Microsoft Active Directory, is
being used, you create references to existing users or groups stored in that server. These users or groups, as
well as local users and groups, are referenced in access control rules to control authorization. You can even
query the external directory (looking for users who share certain attributes, for example) and use the results to
create a group to use in an access control rule. This is useful when you do not want to create and manage users
directly on the appliance.
Creating local users and groups on the appliance is useful to allow external users to access a set of internal
company resources, such as a reseller who needs access to a special order status page on an internal system.
For deployments without an existing company-wide directory server in place, the local user authentication
repository allows group-based policy without the need to install, configure, and maintain another server.
You can define a user or group before referencing it in an access control rule; alternatively, you can define a
new user or group directly from the access control rule interface.
Communities
Communities are collections of users that determine which access methods and End Point Control agents are
deployed to the members of a user population when they log in to a realm. For example, you may want to
enable OnDemand for your mobile employees, but provide only Web access to your business partners. If End
Point Control is enabled, communities can also be used to determine which “zones of trust” members belong to.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
57
Realms
A realm references an authentication server and determines which access agents are provisioned to your users
and what End Point Control restrictions are imposed.
Using Realms and Communities
When you set up realms and user communities, AMC enables you to specify which access agents are provisioned
to members of the communities. You also have the option of classifying community members’ devices into
“zones of trust.” The following illustration shows how a realm authenticates users, assigns them to communities
to provision access agents and, with End Point Control enabled, assigns community members to different zones
based on the trustworthiness of their computers.
If your network uses only one authentication server to store user information, then you probably need to create
only one realm in AMC. If your network uses multiple authentication servers, you must create at least one realm
for each of them. You can also create multiple realms in AMC that reference separate user populations in a
single external repository.
Using only one authentication realm doesn’t limit your ability to create subsets of users based on their access
needs or other security considerations, because realms must be associated with communities of users. A
community can consist of all users in a realm or only selected users; it is used to deploy access agents and to
enforce End Point Control restrictions for members of a community. For information on communities, see
Configuring a Dell SMA Appliance to send RADIUS accounting records to a firewall on page 107.
•
Viewing Realms
•
Default, Visible, and Hidden Realms
•
Specifying the Default Realm
•
Enabling and Disabling Realms
•
Best Practices for Defining Realms
Viewing Realms
You can view the list of configured realms, including all “building blocks” that are associated with each one: the
authentication servers and communities. The communities, in turn, determine who has access using what
methods, what security zone to place a device in, based on its profile, and even the appearance of WorkPlace.
To view configured realms
1
From the main navigation menu, click Realms.
2
The unexpanded view gives you a quick summary of each realm. Click any item to go directly to its
corresponding configuration page in AMC:
a
All realms that are enabled appear in blue, while those in gray are disabled. Users and groups
associated with a disabled realm will be unable to log in. See Enabling and Disabling Realms on
page 61 for more details.
b
The Authentication server area shows the name or names of the servers that are used by a realm
to verify users’ identities.
c
The (optional) descriptive text you entered when creating a realm is on the right. You can use the
up and down arrow icons to re-order the list of realms, or use them to create a copy of a realm to
modify or delete a realm.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
58
3
4
Click the plus sign (+) next to a realm to see more detail:
a
Communities allow you to group realm members based on different security needs. For a quick
check of which members belong to a community, move the pointer over the community name.
b
The appearance of the WorkPlace portal is governed by a style and layout that you can configure.
If you have a community of mobile device users, for example, you might want to create a more
compact look and layout for it.
c
Security zones are used to allow or deny access using device profiles. For a quick check of which
device profiles are used by a particular zone, move the pointer over the zone name.
There are a number of community-level configuration changes you can make on this page in AMC. Move
the pointer over a community name:
Using the controls that appear when you are positioned over a community, you can do the following:
•
Add or delete a community.
•
Change the order in which users are grouped by moving the community left or right.
•
To see the session workflow, move the pointer over the community name and click the icon on the
far right.
Default, Visible, and Hidden Realms
To authenticate a user, the appliance must know which realm the user belongs to. If only one realm is enabled,
the appliance automatically uses it. However, if multiple realms are enabled, the appliance needs to know
which one to use.
When users log in, they typically select the appropriate realm from a list. You can make the choice easier for
them by defining a default realm in AMC (see Specifying the Default Realm on page 60 for more information). If
a default realm is defined, the realm selection box is automatically populated with that realm. The specific
behavior of each access method is outlined in this section. Dell strongly recommends that you specify a default
realm.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
59
You can also choose which realm names are visible to users. If a realm is hidden, the user must know its name
and manually type it during login. For example, you could create realms for various suppliers. If you’d prefer
that they not know about one another, you could configure the realm names to be hidden. Each supplier then
has to type the realm name when logging in to the appliance.
The following table describes the typical user login experience for various realm configurations.
Table 37. Typical user login experience for various realm configurations
Realms enabled
Default realm
configured?
Hidden realms
configured?
One
N/A
N/A
User does not need to select a realm during the login
process. Access methods automatically use the one
enabled realm for authentication.
Multiple
Yes
None
User selects a realm from the list. Realm text box is
initially populated with the default realm.
Multiple
No
None
User selects a realm from the list. Realm text box is
initially populated with the first realm (sorted
alphabetically).
Multiple
Yes
Yes
User selects a realm from the list. Realm text box is
initially populated with the default realm. If login
requires a hidden realm, user selects Other and then
types the realm name in a second text box.
User’s login experience
When users first access Secure Mobile Access WorkPlace, they are presented with one or more login pages. If
only one realm is enabled, they see only the page requesting their user credentials. If multiple realms are
enabled, they see a login page on which they select the appropriate realm from a drop-down list. If there are
one or more hidden realms, the login page prompts the user to type in the realm name.
NOTE: Up to 110 realms can be defined for user to choose from. As an alternative, to avoid manual
selection, WorkPlace sites can be set up with a unique realm configured for each WorkPlace site.
The default number of Workplace sites is 200, but there is no hard limit.
After clicking Next, users authenticating with user name and password are presented with the page for entering
credentials.
Specifying the Default Realm
If you specify more than one authentication realm, you must designate one as the default. To authenticate a
user, the appliance must know which realm the user belongs to. If only one realm is enabled, the appliance
automatically uses it. If multiple realms are enabled, the appliance needs to know which one to use. A user can
select the appropriate one from a list, but the process is easier for the user if you designate a default realm in
AMC. (Even if you configure only one realm, you should specify it as the default; otherwise AMC will display the
warning message “There is no default realm selected” on the Realms page.)
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
60
To specify a default realm
1
From the main navigation menu, click Realms.
2
In the Default realm list (at the bottom of the AMC page), select the authentication realm that will be
the default. This list shows only those realms that are enabled and configured to be displayed.
Enabling and Disabling Realms
The appliance supports the simultaneous use of multiple realms. You can control which realms are active by
enabling and disabling them. When a realm is disabled, users and groups associated with that realm are unable
to log in. If no authentication realm is enabled, users do not have access to the network.
To enable or disable an authentication realm
1
From the main navigation menu, click Realms to see the list of defined realms. If a realm is enabled, its
indicator icon in the Enabled column is green. If a realm is disabled, the indicator is gray.
2
Click the name of the realm you want to enable or disable. This displays the Configure Realm page for
that realm.
3
In the General area, select whether the Status for the realm is Enabled or Disabled, and then click
Save.
Best Practices for Defining Realms
When defining realms, follow these best practices to simplify your users’ login experience.
•
Your users select a realm name when logging in, so define realm names that clearly describe the user
population. For example, a realm that includes all internal employees might be named “employees,”
while a realm that includes external suppliers might be named “suppliers.”
If a realm will be referenced by mobile device users, keep the name short so that all of it is visible on
the mobile device. A Pocket PC device using standard text size, for example, can normally display a
name that is about 30 characters long, but a smart phone cannot.
•
If some users will be logging in to a realm that is hidden, make sure they know the name of the realm
and how to type it in (choose Other from the realm list and then type the realm name in the text box).
•
Enable multiple realms only if necessary. If only one realm is enabled, users do not need to select a
realm as part of the login process. When moving from a test to a production environment, verify that all
test realms have been removed.
Configuring Realms and Communities
This section describes how to configure realms and communities.
•
Creating Realms
•
Adding Communities to a Realm
•
Creating and Configuring Communities
•
Network Tunnel Client Configuration
•
Using the Default Community
•
Changing the Order of Communities Listed in a Realm
•
Configuring RADIUS Accounting in a Realm
•
Configuring a Dell SMA Appliance to send RADIUS accounting records to a firewall
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
61
Creating Realms
Perform the following steps to create and configure an authentication realm. If you create more than one
realm, you must specify one as the default.
After you create a realm and associate it with an external authentication server, you can either add one or more
communities to the realm or use the preconfigured Default community. If you create and save a realm without
assigning a community to it, AMC automatically assigns the Default community to the realm. See Using the
Default Community on page 80 and also Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting Objects in AMC on page 116.
To create a realm
1
From the main navigation menu, click Realms.
2
Click New. The Configure Realm page appears with the General settings displayed.
3
In the Name text box, type a meaningful name for the realm. If users will be required to select a realm
name when logging in to the VPN, make sure the name clearly describes the user population.
4
In the Description text box, type a descriptive comment about the realm. This is optional, but helpful,
especially if your VPN uses multiple authentication realms. The text you enter in this box is displayed in
the list of realms.
5
Enable or disable this realm by selecting the appropriate Status. See Enabling and Disabling Realms on
page 61 for more information.
6
If you want this realm to appear in the list seen by your users (recommended in most cases), select the
Display this realm check box.
7
Select the Authentication server that the realm will use to verify a user’s identity. This field is required.
You can also click New to configure a new authentication server and reference it in the realm. For more
information, see Configuring Authentication Servers on page 171.
CAUTION: Setting Authentication server to None allows unauthenticated, open access to this
realm and its resources. Do not do this unless you are sure this is what you intend.
8
If you want to save accounting information about this realm, select the Enable accounting records
check box. When selected, all RADIUS, syslog, and routing changes are saved.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
62
9
Click Advanced to display the advanced settings.
10 On the Advanced tab you can set up the appliance to use a second authentication server and create a
customized Acceptable Use Policy (AUP).
There are two ways to set up a second authentication server:
•
Chained authentication: Require users to provide more than one set of credentials. See
Configuring Chained Authentication on page 215.
•
Enable group affinity checking: Query a secondary authentication repository. See Enabling Group
Affinity Checking in a Realm on page 218 for more information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
63
11 In the Acceptable Use Policy area, select the Users must acknowledge a message before connecting to
this realm check box to force users to agree to an Acceptable Use Policy before being allowed to log in
to the realm.
12 In the Title box, type in the title of the AUP, up to 50 characters.
13 In the Message box, type in the AUP message to which the user will need to agree, up to 64,000
characters.
14 For the Style setting, select one of the following radio buttons:
•
Use policy (Agree/Disagree) – The use policy agreement is displayed and the user must click the
Agree button to continue connecting. If Disagree is clicked, the session is ended.
•
Message (Acknowledge) – The message is displayed and the user clicks the OK button to continue
connecting.
15 In the Configure CAPTCHA area, check the Enable CAPTCHA check box to require WorkPlace users to
enter CAPTCHA characters in addition to a user name and password during login. The CAPTCHA prompt is
displayed on the WorkPlace login page only if CAPTCHA is enabled here. CAPTCHAs are effective in
preventing the following types of malicious program attacks on password systems:
•
A bot that attempts to login by guessing the username/password by iterating through a dictionary
of password possibilities.
•
A denial-of-service attack from a bot that attempts to lock out user accounts by forcing a
sequence of numerous unsuccessful logins.
NOTE: This prompt is displayed and CAPTCHA can be enabled only when the
captchaCapable option is enabled in the setMicroInterrogationResult() API.
A CAPTCHA is configured at the realm level across all WorkPlace access methods and all authentication
service configurations (local Auth, LDAP, Active Directory, RADIUS). The CAPTCHA consists of 6
alphanumeric characters that are not case sensitive.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
64
Remember the following when using CAPTCHA:
•
In chained authentication mode, CAPTCHA is shown only for the primary authentication
•
CAPTCHA cannot be enabled on a Realm with token-based or certificate-based authentication.
The CAPTCHA configuration section is disabled in these cases.
16 In the Group authorization area, check the Enable group affinity checking check box and select the
server from the Server drop-down list to perform a group affinity check against an LDAP or Active
Directory server. Or, add a new authentication server by clicking the New button and configuring a new
server as explained in Configuring Authentication Servers on page 171.
17 Click Save.
You can then add user communities to the realm (see Adding Communities to a Realm on page 65). If you
create and save a realm without assigning a community to it, AMC automatically assigns the global
Default community to the realm. For more information, see Using the Default Community on page 80.
NOTE: For information on how to edit, copy, and delete communities, see Adding, Editing,
Copying, and Deleting Objects in AMC on page 116.
Adding Communities to a Realm
After you create a realm, the next step is to configure one or more communities that belong to it. If all users in
a realm should be treated the same, then only a single community needs to be defined. Create additional
communities if you want to subdivide users; you might want to give remote employees, for example, access
methods and End Point Control restrictions that differ from those for local employees. Each community defines
the following:
•
A subset of users within a realm
•
Which access methods are available to those users when they log in to a realm
•
What restrictions (if any) are placed on their end point devices
Each realm on the appliance must reference at least one community. Using multiple communities can be an
efficient way of segmenting your user population to provide specific access agents to certain users or to place
End Point Control restrictions on certain types of devices used by community members.
You can either use the preconfigured Default community (see Using the Default Community on page 80) or add
other communities to the realm. As your user access or security policy requirements change over time, you can
add additional communities to a realm, modify the user communities referenced by a realm or delete them.
To add a community to a realm
1
After creating a realm on the General tab of the Configure Realm page, go to the Communities page.
The Configure Realm - <name> page appears with the Communities tab highlighted.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
65
2
If you want to use an existing community as is (without changing it), you may need to change the order
in which the communities are listed. See Changing the Order of Communities Listed in a Realm on page
81.
3
To create a new community for the realm, click New, and to edit an existing community, click its link:
the Configure Community page appears. Follow the steps described in Creating and Configuring
Communities on page 66.
Creating and Configuring Communities
Creating a community involves these basic steps:
•
Assign members to the community
•
Select access methods for the community
•
Optionally, specify End Point Control restrictions for the community
•
Specify a style and layout for the WorkPlace portal.
Related Topics
•
Assigning Members to a Community
•
Selecting Access Methods for a Community
•
Using End Point Control Restrictions in a Community
•
Configuring the Appearance of WorkPlace
Assigning Members to a Community
The first step in creating a community involves specifying which users will be members. By default, a
community is configured to include all users from the authentication realm to which it is assigned. However, you
can configure a community to permit access to only a subset of users or user groups in a realm.
This is useful, for example, if you want to segment a realm into one community for employees and another
community for business partners. You can then provide each community with the appropriate access agents or
impose End Point Control restrictions if users are logging in from non-secure computers. Communities can also
be referenced in access control rules to permit or deny access to your resources.
To assign members to an existing community
1
From the main navigation menu, click Realms.
2
Within the realm, click the link for the community you want to configure. The Configure Community
page appears with the Members tab displayed.
3
The Members box specifies which users or groups belong to this community. Click Edit to select from a
list of users and groups. If no users or groups are specified, the default value of this field is Any, meaning
that any users from the authentication realm that references this community belong to this community.
4
In the Maximum active sessions box you can limit the number of sessions each member of this
community is allowed to have active at one time. For mobile users, for example, you may want to
restrict the number of sessions to 1—each session consumes one user license, and it’s impractical for a
mobile user to have more than one active session. With other communities, such as employees who
alternate between working from home and in the office, the number of allowed sessions should probably
be higher. See How Licenses Are Calculated on page 343 for more information.
5
To select which access methods will be available to members of the community, click the Access
Methods tab. See Selecting Access Methods for a Community on page 67 for more information.
6
To restrict user access based on the security of client devices, click the End Point Control restrictions
tab and specify which zones are available to users in this community. See Using End Point Control
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
66
Restrictions in a Community on page 69.
7
Click Save.
Selecting Access Methods for a Community
The second step in creating a community is to determine which access methods will be available for community
members to connect to the appliance and access your network resources. For information on which access
methods are compatible with your users’ environments, see User Access Components on page 18.
To specify the access methods available to community members
1
From the main navigation menu, click Realms.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
67
2
Click the link for the community you want to configure, and then click the Access Methods tab.
3
Select the access methods community members can use with a browser to connect to resources on your
network. Based on the capabilities of the user's system, the appliance activates the access agents you
have selected. For information on the capabilities and system requirements of the various access agents,
see User Access Components and Services on page 453.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
68
4
If you want to provide network tunnel client access to members of a community, select a combination of
the following:
•
In the tunnel access area, select Network tunnel client. You can use a built-in resource and
shortcut if you want users to download the Connect Tunnel client and activate it from a link in
WorkPlace.
•
For Web-based proxy access, select Client/server proxy agent (OnDemand), and then click Autoactivate from WorkPlace. This will automatically provision or activate the Web-based OnDemand
Tunnel agent to users when they connect to WorkPlace.
•
In the Web access (HTTP) area, select Web proxy agent for clientless access to most types of
Web-based resources for Windows clients. Select Translated Web access for clientless access to
Web resources that are mapped to custom ports or custom FQDNs for improved application
compatibility or that use aliases to obscure internal host names. Translated Web access can be
used as a fallback if the default Web proxy agent cannot run. See Web Access on page 462 for
information about the different types of Web access, and see Adding Resources on page 229 for
information about adding Web-based resources.
NOTE: Web proxy agent will be discontinued in future releases.
5
To deploy the network tunnel clients to users, you must first make one or more IP address pools available
to the community. By default, AMC makes all configured IP address pools available to a community;
however, you can select specific IP address pools if necessary. See Network Tunnel Client Configuration
on page 71.
6
You can require users to install a Secure Mobile Access agent or client before granting them access to
network resources when they log in to WorkPlace. Selecting Require agent in order to access network
provides better application compatibility for applications that need an agent: it means broader access
for users, and fewer Help Desk calls for you. When this setting is disabled, a user logging in to WorkPlace
can choose not to install an agent and proceed with translated, custom port mapped or custom FQDN
mapped Web access. In this case, the user is placed in either the Default zone or a Quarantine zone,
depending on how the community is configured.
7
When you have finished selecting access methods for the community, click Next to proceed to the End
Point Control restrictions area, where you can restrict access to community members based on the
security of their client devices. See Using End Point Control Restrictions in a Community on page 69. If
you don’t want to employ End Point Control for the community, click Finish.
NOTE: If the network tunnel client option is not enabled for a particular community, users who previously
had access to the Connect Tunnel client are still able to use it to access the appliance.
If the community is configured to provide only Translated Web access, terminal resources are unavailable
because the client PC will not have the network transport required to access a proprietary application protocol.
For information on configuring graphical terminal agents, see Managing Access Services on page 499.
Using End Point Control Restrictions in a Community
When you’re creating a community, you have the option of restricting access to users based on the security of
their client devices. To do this, specify which End Point Control zones are available to users in this community.
There are four types of zones—Deny, Standard, Quarantine, and Default. For more information on how to create
and configure End Point Control zones, and the device profiles they use to classify connection requests, see
Managing EPC with Zones and Device Profiles on page 357.
You can also set an inactivity timer, even if you don’t use End Point Control zones for a community, if your users
access the appliance using the Connect Tunnel client.
To apply End Point Control restrictions for a community
1
From the main navigation menu, click Realms.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
69
2
Click the link for the community you want to configure, and then click the End Point Control
restrictions tab.
3
Use a Deny zone if you have a device profile that is unacceptable in your deployment. You might, for
example, want to deny access to any user who has Google Desktop installed on the PC with which they
are trying to connect. Select (or create) an entry in the Deny zones list and click the >> button to move
it to the In use list. Deny zones are evaluated first (if there’s a match, the user is logged off).
To create a new EPC zone and then add it to the list, click the New button. For information on how to
create a zone, see Defining Zones on page 350.
4
You can assign one or more End Point Control Standard zones to the community, which are used to
determine which devices are authorized to access a community. If you don’t select a zone, community
members are assigned to the default zone, which could limit or even deny access to resources,
depending on your access policy. Select the check box for a zone in the Standard zones list and then
click the >> button to move it to the In use list.
5
If the community references more than one zone, use Move Up and Move Down to arrange their order in
the list. Zones are matched in the order they are listed, so it is important to you consider which devices
are authorized in each zone. You should place your most specific zones at the top of the list.
6
If a client device does not match a zone, use the settings in the Zone fallback options area to place it
into the default zone, or quarantine the device and (optionally) display a customized page with text and
links. See Creating a Quarantine Zone on page 369 for more information.
7
To set the inactivity timer (which is triggered when there is no keyboard or mouse activity) for
community members, select a time limit (ranging from After 3 mins to After 10 hours) from the End
inactive user connections list. This is a Windows-only setting that is used by the network tunnel client.
8
Click Save to complete the configuration of the community.
NOTE: The appliance uses EPC interrogation to check for certain device profile attributes
on the client and then classifies the device accordingly. If a Quarantine zone is your fallback
option, and if EPC interrogation somehow fails, a device that would normally be
quarantined may instead end up in the Default zone.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
70
Configuring the Appearance of WorkPlace
Each community can be assigned a style and layout for its WorkPlace portal content pages.
A WorkPlace style determines the colors, fonts, and images used to display the pages, and a layout determines
page content, how it is arranged, and how you navigate the portal. Keep in mind that the style for the login,
error, and notification pages is specified when you set up a site.
To create a style and layout for a community
1
From the main navigation menu, click Realms.
2
Click the link for the community you want to configure, and then click the WorkPlace Appearance tab.
3
Select an existing style or click Manage styles to modify or create one. For more information on
configuring a WorkPlace style, see Creating or Editing a WorkPlace Style on page 442.
4
Select an existing layout or click Manage layouts to modify or create one. For more information on
configuring a WorkPlace layout, see Creating or Editing a WorkPlace Layout on page 443.
5
The layout for this community is automatically changed to accommodate smaller devices; for example,
the Intranet Address box (if it is part of the layout) will be displayed on an advanced mobile device, but
not a basic one.
If that result is not acceptable, you can specify a different layout for different classes of devices in the
Small form factor devices area. A good approach when creating a community is to see how the
WorkPlace portal for this community looks on a mobile device by default, and then create a new layout
or modify an existing one only if you need to.
Network Tunnel Client Configuration
This section describes how to configure settings for the Connect Tunnel client and the OnDemand Tunnel agent.
•
IP Address Allocation
•
Session Persistence
•
Redirection Modes
•
Proxy Server Redirection
•
UDP Tunnel Mode
•
Secure Network Detection
•
Windows Tunnel Client Automatic Client Updating
•
Session Termination
•
Configuring Tunnel Client Settings
IP Address Allocation
Configuring the network tunnel service to manage TCP/IP connections from the network tunnel clients requires
setting up IP address pools for the allocation of IP addresses to the clients. Setting up the address pools is
typically done when you configure the network tunnel service. For information on how to initially set up IP
address pools, see Configuring IP Address Pools on page 503.
When you create communities that will deploy the network tunnel clients to users, you must specify which of
those IP address pools are available to members of that community. By default, AMC makes all configured
address pools available; however, you can select specific IP address pools if necessary.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
71
Session Persistence
The tunnel clients automatically handle the sorts of connection interruptions that users (and especially mobile
users) are familiar with, like undocking a laptop and taking it into a meeting or crossing cellular network
boundaries while on the road. Users can experience these temporary interruptions and then resume their
sessions without having to reauthenticate.
To allow sessions to be reestablished automatically when a user’s IP address changes (for example, when moving
from the office to home), select the Allow user to resume session from multiple IP addresses check box when
you set up EPC zones. See the steps described in Creating a Device Zone on page 360 or Configuring the Default
Zone on page 370 for more information.
Reauthentication is, however, required if this setting is disabled or if any of the following is true:
•
The user’s session on the appliance has expired
•
The credentials provided (such as a SmartCard) do not persist during suspend/resume
Redirection Modes
When configuring the network tunnel clients, you must specify a redirection mode, which determines how client
traffic is redirected to the appliance. The network tunnel service supports the following redirection modes:
Split Tunnel Modes
In Split tunnel mode, traffic bound for resources defined in AMC is redirected through the tunnel, and all other
traffic is routed as normal. This is less secure than redirect all mode, but also more convenient for users
because it doesn’t interfere with Internet access.
To safeguard against unauthorized access to users’ computers through their Internet connections, which could
potentially reach network resources by re-routing through the split tunnel, consider using End Point Control
restrictions to require that users’ computers are running personal firewalls or antivirus protection.
To also give users access to local printers and file shares, select Split tunnel, with access to local network.
When the appliance is configured for one of the split tunnel modes, you can allow users to decide whether to
give preference to local or remote network access. For example, let’s say you have a host resource—a Web
server—with an address of 192.168.230.1. The user goes on a business trip and it turns out that the printer he or
she wants to use, on a local network at a conference center, uses that same address. If you’ve selected the
Allow users to indicate which split tunnel redirection mode to use on the client option in AMC, you allow the
traveler to indicate a preference for local resources (in this case, the printer) when there is a network conflict.
The choice is made on the client in the Connect Tunnel Properties dialog box, on the Advanced tab.
Redirect All Mode
In Redirect all mode, traffic is redirected through the tunnel regardless of how resources are defined in AMC.
This option provides enhanced security, blocking users from being able to access any network device during
their tunnel sessions. It may also prevent Internet access, depending on your network configuration.
Redirect all mode is more secure than split tunnel redirection. After launching Connect Tunnel in redirect all
mode, users can still modify the routing table, but any traffic not in accordance with the redirection list the
appliance sent down to the client is immediately dropped. This prevents users from modifying the routing tables
on their computers to bypass the appliance and effectively creating their own split tunnel connection back to
the network. Once the routing table has been changed by the Connect Tunnel client, modifying the routing
table is ineffective. For more information, see Configuring the Network Tunnel Service on page 501.
To direct all traffic through the appliance, but also give users access to local printers and file shares, select
Redirect all, with access to local network. For example, if you have a community of remote employees,
working from home, you could use this redirection mode for maximum security, yet still allow them to use
resources on their home networks, such as a printer.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
72
Proxy Server Redirection
Optionally, you can configure traffic bound for the Internet to be redirected through an internal proxy server
when the VPN connection is active. This can be useful if you want to use an HTTP proxy server to control remote
users’ access to Internet resources. This option is available only when one of the redirect all modes is enabled.
For information about configuring these settings, see Configuring Tunnel Client Settings on page 76.
NOTE: If you have selected a redirection mode of Redirect all, with access to local network, users will
have access to local file shares and printers. You should be aware, however, that if you are using a .pac
file for a remote proxy, then its redirection rules take precedence for any traffic routed through the
WinINet networking library (such as Internet Explorer, Media Player, and Instant Messenger). For example,
a user may expect to be able to reach a Web application on a server—because it is on the local network—
but find that the request has been redirected through the remote proxy instead.
Tunnel Clients and Proxy Auto-Configuration Files (Linux Platform)
When OnDemand Tunnel or Connect Tunnel is launched on the Linux platform in an environment where a proxy
server is used for outbound access to the Internet, the Dell SMA appliance appends redirection settings to the
browser's proxy auto-configuration (.pac) file. These modifications are made for the duration of the session
only; the original browser settings are reinstated when the user logs out. There are some known issues involving
this combination of platform and client:
•
In the course of a user's session, one or more prompts may appear requesting approval for changes to the
browser's .pac file. In order to log in to WorkPlace and ensure proper functionality, the user must accept
these .pac file modifications.
•
If the server .pac file is updated, the user must either connect using the OnDemand Tunnel or Connect
Tunnel client to incorporate the changes or manually revert to the original proxy settings.
•
If a user has a Firefox browser window open when Connect Tunnel is started, the modifications that the
appliance needs to make to the browser's .pac file (for properly redirecting connections) are not applied
to any open browser windows.
The user must either close and then re-open Firefox or manually reload the browser's proxy settings.
UDP Tunnel Mode
A network address translator (NAT) allows multiple private network addresses to share a single, public IPv4
address. But address translation also means that client-to-client networking applications, such as VoIP and video
conferencing, will not work properly: these applications need to know a user's IP address in order to establish
and maintain a reliable connection.
ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) is a way to encapsulate and decapsulate packets inside of a UDP wrapper
(port 4500) for traversing NATs. Using it can improve the performance of UDP-streaming applications like VoIP.
For more information on ESP, see RFCs 2406 and 3948:
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2406.txt
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3948.txt
ESP encapsulation is the default setting for newly defined communities. UDP port 4500 must be open in network
firewalls for traffic to and from the appliance's external IP addresses and virtual IP addresses when using it. If
the external appliance traffic is subject to NAT, then NAT must be configured for UDP port 4500. Also, in rare
cases where the network environment does not properly implement PMTU discovery (see RFC 1191), certain
applications may run inefficiently or perhaps not at all when using ESP encapsulation.
When enabled, ESP use is automatically negotiated between a client and the EX Series appliance. You can
choose to use it for all traffic or just UDP traffic; if ESP fails or if the client does not support it, then the SSL
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
73
tunnel is automatically used instead. The User Sessions page in AMC indicates which type of tunnel is being
used.
The log files also indicate which tunnel was used: log messages will indicate UDP port 4500 packets for ESP
traffic and TCP port 443 packets for SSL tunnel packets.
Secure Network Detection
Secure Network Detection allows users to automatically establish a tunnel connection when attempting to login
from an unsecure location. The client determines whether the device is in a secure network by comparing the
client’s DNS suffixes and servers to the connected interface. Depending on this comparison, the following
occurs:
Table 38. Secure network detection
If connected...
If not connected...
DNS entry found
Disconnect and reconnect in SND state
Connect in SND state
DNS entry not found
Leave connected
Connect using dialer
Secure Network Detection (SND) is provided by Connect Tunnel and Mobile Connect. SND allows secure “always
on, always connected” SSL VPN sessions to SMA appliances from client endpoint devices. When Secure Network
Detection is enabled, the Connect Tunnel and Mobile Connect clients can detect when the user is located on a
non-secure network and automatically establish a tunnel connection. The connection status is indicated by an
icon on the systray:
Table 39. Systray icons
Systray Icon
Description
Connected
Disconnected
When using SND note the following considerations:
•
At the EPC Zone level, the Allow session to resume from multiple IP addresses check box must be
checked for SND to work.
•
When enabling Secure Network Detection without Credential Caching, the user
may be prompted for their credentials when they transition from secure to
non-secure networks (or vice-versa) if their session has been alive longer than
the maximum Credential Lifetime length under 'General Settings'. They will also
be prompted if a fallback server is used with Secure Network Detection, and
Connect Tunnel detects that the primary appliance is down or unavailable (since
the users session is not valid on the fallback appliance).
•
To workaround the fallback server issue, enable Credential Caching for the
Community your users are logging in to, as well as Secure Network Detection.
This will securely re-send the users credentials to the fallback appliance,
creating their session for them again without any interaction by the user. Note
that Credential Caching will only work with username/password type
authentication servers.
•
The team source check property in the AMC default zone will affect the appliance when EPC is disabled.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
74
•
An appliance running a version prior to 10.7 with End Point Control disabled will allow a user to login
from multiple different IP addresses because the default value for Allow user to resume session from
multiple IP addresses has changed to true (checked) since it follows the value in the default zone when
End Point Control is disabled.
Post-Connection Scripting
You can configure the client to launch an executable file or script on Windows, Mac OS X, or Linux computers
after a network tunnel connection has been established. For example, you could specify a Windows .bat file
that executes a command script that maps network drives. You can also specify command-line options to run
when the script launches.
The appliance does not provision the script to users: the client simply executes the script with any specified
command-line options. The specified script must already be present on users’ computers before the client can
execute it, and any specified scripts must be deployed and managed separately.
For information about configuring these settings, see Configuring Tunnel Client Settings on page 76.
Windows Tunnel Client Automatic Client Updating
For users who are running the Windows version of the Connect Tunnel or OnDemand Tunnel client (version 8.7
and later), you can ensure that they have the most recent version of the client by enabling automatic software
updating.
Each time a user starts a Windows tunnel client and authenticates, the current client software version is
checked against the newest version available on the appliance. If a newer version is available, the user is
alerted that an update is ready for download. You can configure (on a per-community basis) what options a user
has for installing client updates:
•
Allow the user to choose when to start the update process. The update can be deferred indefinitely;
however, the user will see the update alert whenever the tunnel client is started (once per day) until the
update is installed.
•
Make updates mandatory by either requiring them (the user must accept updates in order to access VPN
resources) or enforcing them (the install process begins immediately and the user cannot cancel it).
When a user accepts a tunnel client software update by clicking Install in the software-update dialog box, the
client software update is automatically downloaded and installed on the user’s computer (in the case of
Connect Tunnel) or activated (in the case of OnDemand Tunnel). After the installation is complete, the tunnel
client automatically restarts. Users do not need to reboot their computers after installing the update.
For information about configuring software updating, see Configuring Tunnel Client Settings on page 76.
Session Termination
By default, a tunnel client session is never terminated by the appliance once it has been established: users can
leave sessions idle and return to them later without having to reauthenticate. If this is a security risk in your
environment, there are a couple of ways to terminate sessions and require users to re-authenticate:
•
Manually: To see a list of sessions click User Sessions in the main navigation menu in AMC, and then
choose one of the available termination options. For more information, see Ending User Sessions on page
304.
•
Automatically: You can configure the tunnel client to prompt users to re-authenticate as soon as their
credentials expire. When Limit session length to credential lifetime is selected during tunnel client
configuration, sessions in a given community end and require re-authentication after the length of time
specified by Credential lifetime (on the Configure General Appliance Options page).
See Configuring Tunnel Client Settings on page 76 for more information about configuring this option.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
75
Configuring Tunnel Client Settings
Connect Tunnel is a client application that is installed on a user’s device, and OnDemand Tunnel is a lightweight,
Web-based agent that is activated each time a user logs in to WorkPlace from an ActiveX or Java-enabled
device. These two access methods differ in how they are installed or activated, but they share the same
configuration settings.
This section describes how to configure settings for the tunnel clients. For a more detailed description of these
settings, see Network Tunnel Client Configuration on page 71.
To configure tunnel client or agent settings
1
On the Access Methods page for the selected community, select one or both of these access methods:
•
Network tunnel client (OnDemand)
•
Client/server proxy agent (OnDemand)
2
Click Configure in the Smart tunnel Access area. The Network Tunnel Client Settings page appears.
3
By default, any configured IP address pool is available to the selected community. To select specific IP
address pools, click Edit in the IP address pools area and then select from the list of configured pools.
4
Select the Redirection mode used to route client traffic to the appliance. The network tunnel service
supports several redirection modes. For a more detailed description of the supported redirection modes,
see Redirection Modes on page 72.
•
Split tunnel: Traffic bound for resources defined in AMC is redirected through the tunnel, and all
other traffic is routed as normal.
•
Split tunnel, with access to local network gives users access to local printers and file shares.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
76
•
Redirect all: Traffic is redirected through the tunnel regardless of how resources are defined in
AMC.
•
To direct all traffic through the appliance, but also give users access to local printers and file
shares, select Redirect all, with access to local network.
5
(Optional) If the appliance is configured for one of the split tunnel modes, you can allow users to decide
whether to give preference to local or remote network access by selecting Allow users to indicate
which split tunnel redirection mode to use on the client. For more information and an example, see
Redirection Modes on page 72.
6
(Optional) Click to expand the Connect Tunnel options and complete the following:
7
•
In the Caption for start menu and icon box, type the customized text that you want to appear
for the Connect Tunnel client on the menu and beneath the Connect icon on the user’s desktop.
•
Create icon on desktop: Places the Connect Tunnel client icon on the desktop.
•
Run at system startup: Automatically runs the Connect Tunnel client when the operating system
starts on the user’s computer (Windows only).
To use Single Sign-on, select when cached credentials should be used:
•
Always: Always used cached credentials if available.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
77
•
At user’s discretion: Let the user decide when to used cached credentials.
•
Never: Prohibit users from using cached credentials.
Note that on a Windows system, Connect Tunnel uses cached system credentials. On other systems,
Connect Tunnel remembers the entered credentials and uses them on subsequent connection attempts.
8
9
Use one of the Software updates options to alert users when client updates are available or update their
software automatically. This setting is available only when the network tunnel client is configured to
provision client from Secure Mobile Access WorkPlace, and only with version 8.7 and later:
•
Manual—User must start updates manually.
•
At user's discretion—Allows users to decide when to install software updates. The update can be
deferred indefinitely; however, the user will see the software-update alert when he or she starts
the tunnel client (once per day) until the update is installed.
•
Required—User must accept updates in order to access VPN resources through the tunnel client.
•
Forced—Updates are required in order to connect. The update program starts, and a progress bar
is visible during installation, but the user is not prompted during the process.
(Optional) To automatically establish a tunnel connection when a user attempts to login from an
unsecure location, check the Enable secure network detection check box in the Secure Network
Detection section. For addition information, see Secure Network Detection on page 74.
10 (Optional) By default, the client is configured to access the realm and appliance name from which the
client was downloaded. However, you can override this default behavior and configure the client to
access a different realm or appliance. In the Custom connection area, select the Configure client with
custom realm and appliance FQDN check box, and then specify the following options as needed:
•
From the Realm name list, click the name of the default realm.
•
In the Appliance FQDN box, type the fully qualified domain name of the default appliance.
11 (Optional) By default, a tunnel client session is never terminated by the appliance once it has been
established: users can leave sessions idle and return to them later without having to reauthenticate. If
you want to require users to re-authenticate after a certain period of time, select Limit session length
to credential lifetime. This requires users to re-authenticate once the amount of time specified by
Credential lifetime (on the Configure General Appliance Options page) has passed. When this option is
selected, users are notified when a session is nearing the inactivity threshold and users can avert the
disconnect by performing any mouse or keyboard activity.
If you need a TCP connection or consistent UDP traffic flow between the same two address/port tuples
to live longer than eight hours, you must put the user in a community that has this option unchecked.
Even with the Limit session length to credential lifetime box unchecked, users cannot authorize new
flows within the tunnel after their credentials expire.
12 (Optional) If you enabled Redirect all in the Redirection mode area, you can configure Internet traffic
to be sent through an internal proxy server when the VPN connection is active. In the Proxy options
area, select the Redirect Internet traffic through internal proxy server check box, and then select one
of the proxy server options.
•
To specify a proxy auto-configuration (.pac) file, click Proxy auto-configuration file and then
type the URL, preceded by the http:// protocol identifier, for the .pac file. The .pac file
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
78
configures the user’s Web browser to load its proxy configuration settings from a JavaScript file
rather than from information that you manually specify; the JavaScript file specifies which proxy
servers can be used and can redirect specific URLs to specific proxy servers. For information
about formatting .pac files, see
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proxy_auto-confighttp://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proxy_auto-config
•
To manually specify a proxy server, click Proxy server and then type the server’s host name and
port number in host:port format (for example, myhost:80). Optionally, in the Exclusion list
box, you can type the host names, IP addresses, or domain names of any resources that you do
not want redirected through the proxy server. When defining these resources, wild cards are
valid, and multiple entries must be separated by semicolons.
13 (Optional) To launch an executable file or script after the connection has been established, click to
expand the Post-connection scripts area, select the Run a post-connection script check box that
corresponds to your operating system, and then specify your settings. For more information, see Secure
Network Detection on page 74.
a
In the Run this file box, type the path and name for the script file. For example:
%Program Files%\ACME\remote_access.bat
b
(Optional) In the Command line arguments box, type any command-line arguments that you
want to execute when running the script. For example:
-user=%USERNAME% -system=%OS%
c
(Optional) In the Working directory box, type the directory in which the script will be executed.
When defining the working directory, you can specify environment variables formatted as
%VariableName%, where VariableName represents the actual environment variable name. For
example:
%USERPROFILE%\ACME
14 In the Advanced area, Enable ESP encapsulation of tunnel network traffic is selected by default for all
network traffic (for all tunnel traffic). ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) is a way to encapsulate and
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
79
decapsulate packets inside of UDP packets for traversing Network Address Translators (NATs). Using it can
improve the performance of applications, especially UDP-streaming applications like VoIP.
For an ESP tunnel to function, UDP port 4500 needs to be open in the firewall for traffic to and from the
EX Series appliance external IP and Virtual IP addresses.
When ESP is enabled, the tunnel client tries to bring up an ESP tunnel, but falls back to a legacy SSL
tunnel if there is a problem establishing the ESP tunnel. The typical reason for this failure is that UDP
port 4500 is not open in the network firewall.
If you do not want to use ESP because you do not want to open UDP port 4500 in your firewall or for any
reason, then clear the Enable ESP encapsulation of tunnel network traffic check box. To disable the
default use of ESP in a community, clear the check box on the Realms > [your tunnel realm] >
Communities > [your tunnel community] > Access Methods > Configure under Smart Tunnel Access >
Advanced.
15 Click OK.
NOTE:
•
If users are running OnDemand Tunnel in “redirect all” mode, connections to translated Web
resources fail with “Page cannot be displayed” errors. To work around this issue, add an A
(Address) record to the internal DNS servers to assign the appliance VIP or external IP to the
appliance FQDN.
•
When At user’s discretion is enabled for Client software updates in the Software updates area,
the user sees an upgrade notification, and the Connect Tunnel client caches the user’s response for
24 hours. If the setting is then changed to Required or Forced, a user who opted to delay updating
may not be prompted again until the following day because the earlier response is still cached.
•
If you plan to run a VB script after a connection has been established, you cannot simply enter the
path and name of the .vbs script file: you must use the Windows Script Host utility in order to
invoke it. To work around this, configure the post-connection options as follows:
•
Run this file: <drive>:\windows\system32\cscript.exe
•
Command line arguments: <Path to script>. For example, c:\path\to\script.vbs or
\\path\to\script.vbs.
Leave Working directory empty.
•
When you specify a .pac file location, be certain that your tunnel users have access to it. You can
do this by defining a resource and creating an access rule. See Creating and Managing Resource
Groups on page 250 and Configuring Access Control Rules on page 266.
Using the Default Community
After you create a realm, you must associate one or more communities with the realm. This is because
communities are the mechanism that the appliance uses to deploy access agents and End Point Control
components to users.
The easiest way to associate a community with an authentication realm is to use the global Default community
that is preconfigured in AMC. The properties automatically assigned to the Default community are as follows:
•
Membership in the community is set to Any, meaning all users in the authentication realm are assigned to
the community.
•
Each member of the community is allowed a maximum of 5 active sessions.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
80
•
Web-based proxy access (TCP protocol) and Web access (HTTP) methods are made available to
community members.
•
No End Point Control restrictions are imposed on users’ computers.
NOTE:
•
You can modify the settings for a realm’s Default community the same as you can other
communities. See Configuring a Dell SMA Appliance to send RADIUS accounting records to a firewall
on page 107.
•
You can also create additional communities and associate them with a realm. See Adding
Communities to a Realm on page 65.
Changing the Order of Communities Listed in a Realm
When users log in to an authentication realm, the appliance looks up the community to which they belong so
that access agents and EPC policy can be deployed to them. If you use only one community per realm or if you
ensure that each user is assigned to only one community, then the process of logging in and receiving the
appropriate access agent is straightforward.
However, if some users belong to more than one community, the order in which the communities are listed on
the Communities tab of the Configure Realm page determines which community those users are assigned to.
The appliance attempts to match users to communities starting at the top of the list. Users are assigned to the
first community in the list that they match. The best practice is to place the most specific community at the top
of the list.
To change the order of the communities for a realm
1
From the main navigation menu, click Realms.
2
Click the name of the authentication realm whose communities you want to re-order. The General tab of
the Configure Realm page appears.
3
Click the Communities tab. The communities that are part of this realm will be matched in the order
that is listed here.
4
Use the Move Up or Move Down links to move the selected community up or down.
5
When the communities are listed in the order you want, click Save.
NOTE: The community a user is assigned to is displayed on the Secure Mobile Access WorkPlace home page
(click Details in the Connection Status area).
Configuring RADIUS Accounting in a Realm
If you use a RADIUS server for collecting accounting information, you can configure a RADIUS accounting server
in AMC and then enable accounting on a per-realm basis. The appliance sends RADIUS accounting messages to
the server identifying user sessions, the time and duration of their connections, and their source IP addresses.
The appliance can connect to one RADIUS server at a time. If two RADIUS servers are configured in AMC, the
appliance sends messages to just the primary server, and communicates with the secondary server only if there
is a communication failure with the primary one.
To configure a RADIUS accounting server
1
From the main navigation menu, click Authentication Servers.
2
In the Other servers area of the page, click the Edit link next to RADIUS Accounting.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
81
3
To enable the appliance to save RADIUS, syslog, and routing changes, select the Enable accounting
records check box.
4
In the Primary RADIUS server box, type the IP address for the primary accounting server. In the
Accounting port box, type the port number used to communicate with the server. If left blank, AMC will
use the default server port (1646).
5
If you are using a second RADIUS accounting server as a backup in case communication between the
appliance and the server fails, enter the server’s IP address in the Secondary RADIUS server box, and
the port number in the Accounting port box.
6
In the Shared secret box, enter the shared secret that will allow the appliance to communicate with the
RADIUS accounting server.
7
In the Retry interval box (in the Advanced area), type the number of seconds to wait for a reply from
the RADIUS server before retrying communication with the server.
8
By default, the appliance uses its appliance name (from the Configure Network Interfaces page) to
identify itself to the RADIUS accounting server. However, you can use the NAS-Identifier and NAS-IPAddress boxes to have the appliance send different identity information.
9
In the Locale encoding area, do one of the following:
•
Choose a character set from the Selected list box. See Selected RADIUS Character Sets on page
639 for a list of selected character sets.
•
Click Other and then type the name of a character set in the text box. See Other Supported
RADIUS Character Sets on page 640 for a list of character sets that can be entered.
10 Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
82
Editing, Copying and Deleting Communities
For information on how to edit, copy, and delete communities, see Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting
Objects in AMC on page 116.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
83
Managing Users and Groups
User and group management is an ongoing job. Although most user management is done through external user
repositories (users and groups are not stored directly on the appliance, but are instead referenced), keeping the
AMC list current is essential for delivering reliable access.
The users and groups defined in AMC are associated with any directories currently configured on the appliance.
•
Viewing Users and Groups
•
Managing Users and Groups Mapped to External Repositories
•
Managing Local User Accounts
Viewing Users and Groups
Users and groups configured in AMC are displayed on the Mapped Accounts and Local Accounts pages.
To view users and groups
1
On the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
Select the tab for the user object you want to view:
Table 40. Tab descriptions
Tab
Description
Mapped Accounts
Manage groups of users and individual users mapped to group information
stored on an external authentication server or create new groups based on
directory information.
Local Accounts
Manage users that are stored in a local user authentication repository on the
appliance.
3
Optionally use the Filters settings to display only the objects you are interested in. For information
about using filters, see the “Filters” section under A Quick Tour of the AMC Interface on page 111.
4
Review the data shown in the list of managed or local accounts:
•
The check-box column is used to select one or more list items to delete.
•
The plus sign (+) column expands the display of user, group, or local account information.
•
The Type column displays an icon identifying whether the object is a
user or
group.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
84
5
•
The Name column displays the name you assigned when creating a user, group, or local user
account.
•
The Description column shows the text you entered when creating an account.
•
The Realm column displays the realm with which a user, group, or local user account is
associated.
•
The Used column shows whether the user or group is currently in use.
Click a column heading to sort the list by that column.
Managing Users and Groups Mapped to External
Repositories
Unless defined as members of the local user authentication store, users and groups are not stored directly on
the appliance, but are instead referenced from external user directories. In most cases, you manage individual
users in AMC only when you need to assign them permissions that are different from those that their group
membership allows. There are two ways to form groups of users in AMC using information stored in external
directories:
•
Use the same group names as the external directory. In most directories, similar user accounts are
grouped together so they can be granted similar rights and permissions. Assuming that your directory is
organized in this way, your user management on the appliance is usually centered around groups, not
users. Set up the appliance to reference user groups stored in your directory, and then reference those
groups in access control rules.
•
Query the external directory using common attributes. The results can be used to create a new group
(one that is not referenced in the external directory) that can be used in access control rules. You might
create a new group named “Local employees” by querying the directory for all employees living within a
given set of zip codes.
For Microsoft Active Directory and LDAP directories, there are several ways to add groups (this feature is not
available for adding users referenced by a RADIUS realm or in the local user store):
•
Manually type a distinguished name (DN)
•
Search the contents of the directory and select groups from a list
•
Build a dynamic group expression
For testing and evaluation purposes, you can also create local users on the appliance. See Managing Local User
Accounts on page 93.
•
Adding Users or Groups Manually
•
Adding Users or Groups by Searching a Directory
•
Advanced Search Methods
•
Creating Dynamic Groups Using a Directory
•
Editing Users or Groups
•
Deleting Users or Groups
Adding Users or Groups Manually
When you create an access control rule, one of the things you do is specify the users and groups to which a given
rule applies. You must add users before you can specify them in access control rules. Users can be added
manually or by using the Active Directory or LDAP directory. To use a directory, click Browse to search the
directory. See Adding Users or Groups by Searching a Directory on page 87 for more information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
85
To add a user manually
1
From the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Mapped Accounts tab, and then click New.
3
Select Manual entry. The Add Mapped Account page appears.
4
In the Select realm list, select the realm to which the user belongs. If the user exists in multiple realms
and you want the appliance to search for any occurrence, select Any from the realm list.
5
In the User type field, select the type of account to add: Group or User.
6
If you selected Group, in the Group name box type the group name exactly as it appears in the external
repository. (Group names are case-sensitive.) The name depends on the type of directory to which you
are mapping:
Table 41. Name selection
Directory type
What to type
LDAP
Type a distinguished name (DN). For example,
cn=Sales,cn=Users,dc=example,dc=com.
Active Directory Type a common name (CN) or distinguished name (DN). A CN is
easier to enter than a DN (for example, you can type Sales
instead of cn=Sales,cn=Users,dc=example,dc=com), but
the CN is not guaranteed to be a unique match. When in doubt,
it’s best to use a DN.
RADIUS
Type a group name. For example, Sales.
When you specify an Active Directory or LDAP group, its sub-groups (if any) are also included. The
number of nesting levels that you want to include when evaluating group membership is configured when
you set up an authentication server; see Configuring LDAP with Username and Password on page 190 and
Configuring Active Directory with Username and Password on page 175 for more information.
NOTE: When using an external directory for authentication and you add a user group in
AMC, you are not actually grouping users. You are merely adding the name of a user group
that is defined in your external user repository.
The appliance also supports local users and groups. See Managing Local User Accounts on page 93.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
86
7
If you selected User, in the User name box type the user name exactly as it appears in the external
repository. (User names are case-sensitive.) The following table explains the syntax used to define users.
Table 42. Name selection
Directory type
What to enter
Active Directory or RADIUS
Type a user name. For example, jsmith.
LDAP
Type a distinguished name (DN). For example,
cn=jsmith,cn=Users,dc=example,dc=com.
8
(Optional) In the Display name box, type the name to display in AMC pages to identify the group or user.
9
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the group or user.
10 Click Save or Save and Add Another.
NOTE: If you enter the name incorrectly the user will not be authorized to access any
resources.
Adding Users or Groups by Searching a Directory
The most common way to add groups in AMC is to browse an external directory and add matching groups.
To add a user or group by searching a directory
1
From the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
On the Mapped Accounts tab, click New, and then select Directory search. The Search Directory page
appears.
3
Select the realm you want to search (only realms that use an Active Directory, Active Directory Tree, or
LDAP authentication server are available).
If you select a realm that uses an authentication server on which group checking is disabled, the Search
box will not be clickable and the message “Group checking has been disabled for this realm” is
displayed. See Disabling Authorization Checks on page 174 for more information.
4
If the realm you selected uses an Active Directory Tree authentication server, select the domain you
want to search.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
87
5
Define your search criteria:
•
In the Search directory box, type all or part of a user or group name. The default is *, which
returns all records in the realm. You can use the wild card character (*) anywhere in the search
string. For example, to find group names beginning with the letter “j,” you would type j*. Or, to
find users named “Mary” or “Marty” (but not “Max”), you could type m*y.
•
To narrow your search, type an select Groups only or Users only from the drop-down list. For
example, you might type sn to look for a user’s surname or cn to find a common name.
•
To specify more detailed search criteria, click the Advanced tab; see Advanced Search Methods
on page 88 for details.
6
Click Search, which displays all matches in the second column.
7
Locate the objects you want to add:
•
Use the arrow buttons (< and >) in the lower left pane to page through the results. Use << and >>
to display the first and last pages.
•
To view detailed information about a user or group, click its name. A detailed list of attributes
appears in the right-hand pane. If a group is nested, click the sub-group to see its details:
The number of nested levels that it is possible to display is configured when you set up an
authentication server; see Configuring LDAP with Username and Password on page 190 and
Configuring Active Directory with Username and Password on page 175 for more information.
•
Select the check box to the left of any users or groups you want to add to the appliance.
8
To add selections to the appliance, click the Add Selected button. The items are added to the list on the
appropriate page (Groups or Users) in alphabetical order.
9
When you’re finished, click the Close button in the upper right to close the Search Directory window.
NOTE: By default, the basic search is configured to locate users and groups by querying the
sAMAccountName, cn, uid, and userid attributes.
Most chained authentication deployments involve an LDAP or AD server paired with another
authentication server (like RADIUS). In the unlikely event that you are using chained
authentication with a combination of LDAP and AD servers, keep the following in mind:
•
If you are searching for users, only search results from the first LDAP or AD authentication
server in the chain are displayed. The policy server, however, returns results from both
servers in the chain.
•
The same is true when searching for groups (except if an affinity server is configured for
the realm: it will be searched instead of the authentication servers).
For example, if you have a group called Accounting on both LDAP or AD servers in your chained
authentication, any access control rules you create that are restricted to the Accounting group
will apply to group members on both servers, even though the Search Directory page shows
results from just the first server in the chain.
Advanced Search Methods
If you are familiar with LDAP syntax, you can create an advanced search to further narrow the scope of your
query. This is especially useful when querying a large directory. In some cases, you may also need to perform an
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
88
advanced search in order to query a directory using a non-standard schema. To perform an advanced search,
click the Advanced search tab.
The fields used to specify advanced search criteria are explained in the following table:
Table 43. Advanced search criteria
Attribute
Description
Search for value
Specify an LDAP search filter to reduce the scope of the search. Type all or part of a
user or group name. The default is *, which returns all records in the realm. You can
use the wild card character (*) anywhere in the search string. For example, to find
group names beginning with the letter “j,” you would type j*. Or, to find users
named “Mary” or “Marty” (but not “Max”), you could type m*y.
Attributes
Type an LDAP attribute in the Attribute box. For example, you might type sn to
look for a user’s surname or cn to find a common name.
Object classes
Specify the object class containing users or groups. For users, this is typically user
or inetOrgPerson. For groups, this is usually group, groupOfNames, or
groupOfUniqueNames.
Search base
Specify the point in the LDAP directory from which to begin searching. Usually, this
will be the lowest point in the directory tree that contains users or groups.
For LDAP, you might type ou=Users,o=example.com. To search Microsoft Active
Directory, you might use CN=users,DC=example,DC=corp,DC=com.
Search scope
Specify the containers that you want to search:
one
Retrieves information from one level below the search base. The search base itself
is not included in this scope.
sub
(The default) retrieves information from the search base and all levels below the
search base.
base
Retrieves information only from the search base. No containers below the search
base are searched.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
89
Table 43. Advanced search criteria
Attribute
Description
Additional filter
Specify an LDAP search filter that will reduce the scope of the search.
Syntax:
filter=(operator(LDAP attribute=value)(..))
Operators:
•
OR = “|”
•
AND = “&”
•
NOT = “!”
Examples:
(cn=Sandy Cane)
(!(cn=Tim Howes))
(&(objectClass=Person)(|(sn=Cane)(cn=Sandy C*)))
NOTE: For more information on LDAP search filters, see RFC 2254 at
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2254.txt.
The LDAP search syntax is flexible and provides several ways to accomplish the same result. For
example, you might use the object class to search for all groups in a directory:
objectclass=group;groupOfNames
Alternatively, you can get the same result using a search filter:
(|(objectclass=group)(objectclass=groupOfNames))
Creating Dynamic Groups Using a Directory
If you are using an external Microsoft Active Directory or LDAP directory, you can form AMC groups by building
your own directory query or, if you’re familiar with LDAP syntax, writing your own directory query. Whenever
this dynamic group is referenced in an access control rule, the external directory is queried and the results are
cached for 30 minutes.
Dynamic groups are useful if you want to create a policy that applies to a group that is not already defined in
the external directory. For example, you might want to create a group called Operations (Seattle). Although
the external directory might already have a group called Operations, you want to narrow it down to members
who are based in Seattle.
To add a dynamic group using an external directory
1
From the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
90
2
On the Mapped Accounts tab, click New and then select Dynamic group. A separate Add/Edit Dynamic
Group page opens.
Users who match the expression that you build or write in this page are dynamically included in this
group. If a user is added later and matches this expression, he or she is automatically included in this
group.
3
Select the realm to which this new group belongs from the Realm list. Only realms that have been
configured with an Active Directory or LDAP server (single or chained authentication) are available.
4
(Optional) Type a Name for this dynamic group and optionally type a Description that can be used when
creating access rules that apply to only certain groups.
5
Choose between Simple and LDAP syntax. Use the one you are most familiar with so that you can edit
the query (if needed) in the Expression text box.
6
Use these fields in the Expression area to build your query (see Advanced Search Methods on page 88 for
help with LDAP query syntax):
Table 44. Fields usage
Setting
Description
Expression
The query you create using the following fields is displayed here so that you can
edit it (if necessary).
Attribute
An initial query is sent to the external directory server to get a list of defined
attributes. (If this list does not look correct, check the name of the realm you
selected in the Realm list.)
Filter operators
A list of commonly used LDAP search operators (=, !=, >=, and <=) to filter the
values returned by the LDAP or Active Directory server.
Value
A user-entered value that can contain wild cards. Assuming an Attribute of
ZipCode, for example, you could type a Value of 98* to query for all
employees living in Washington state.
Operator
Common logical operators (AND, OR).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
91
Table 44. Fields usage
Setting
Description
Add to Expression
Adds the current attribute, value, and operator to the Expression text area.
You can cycle back through (as many times as needed), defining an additional
Attribute, Value, and Operator to further refine your query. Click Add to
Expression after each addition.
Base
(Optional) Base of the AD/LDAP authentication server. It specifies the point in
the LDAP directory from where to start the query. For example, to search users
in the Microsoft Active Directory: CN=users, DC=engineering, DC=sonicwall,
DC=com
If a base is not entered, the query is performed at the search based of the
authentication server.
Scope
Depth of the query. Selecting All levels below base (default) to retrieve
information from all levels below the base. Select One level below base to
retrieve information from the search base itself. No containers below the
search base are searched.
You can also type a query directly in the Expression text box.
7
Test the expression you’ve created. The results are displayed in the Members section and should tell you
whether you need to broaden or refine your search. To limit the number of members displayed, check
the Display check box and typing the maximum number of items in the Display field.
Testing an expression sends the LDAP search query displayed in the Expression area to the LDAP or AD
server and displays the results (a list of users) in the right-hand pane. If the results are not what you
expect, modify the query by either building the expression or editing the query directly in the
Expression text box and then test again.
A new group should not be saved until the expression has been tested.
8
Use the Show attributes as drop-down list in the lower right corner of the page to display details in the
Details sections about the member selected in the Members section. Selecting Summary shows a
summary of the member, and selecting All attributes shows all attributes of the member.
NOTE: Most chained authentication deployments involve an LDAP or AD server paired with another
authentication server (like RADIUS). In the unlikely event that you are using chained authentication with a
combination of LDAP and AD servers, keep the following in mind:
•
If you are searching for users, only search results from the first LDAP or AD authentication server in
the chain are displayed. The policy server, however, will return results from both servers in the
chain.
•
The same is true when searching for groups (except if an affinity server is configured for the
realm: it will be searched instead of the authentication servers).
For example, if you have a group called Accounting on both LDAP or AD servers in your chained authentication,
any access control rules you create that are restricted to the Accounting group will apply to group members on
both servers, even though the Search Directory page shows results from just the first server in the chain.
When conducting a multi-valued query against an LDAP or AD directory, you must specify the full DN of the
group being queried.
Editing Users or Groups
If a user or group name or distinguished name changes in your external directory, you must modify the account
on the appliance. You can also change local user accounts or group names on the appliance. For information
about editing local accounts, see Managing Local User Accounts on page 93.
To edit a user or group
1
From the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
92
2
Click the Mapped Accounts tab, and then click the name of the group or user that you want to edit. The
Add/Edit Mapped Account page appears.
3
Make any edits as needed. If the user or group is in an Active Directory or LDAP realm, you can click
Browse and then search for the user.
4
Click Save.
Deleting Users or Groups
When you delete a user or group that is mapped to an external user directory, its mapping is removed from the
system. Deleting a user or group mapping does not remove the user or group from the external user directory.
For information about deleting local users or group, see Managing Local User Accounts on page 93.
To delete a user or group
1
From the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Mapped Accounts tab, and select the check box to the left of any groups or users that you
want to delete.
3
Click Delete.
NOTE: You cannot delete a user or group if it is referenced by another object. For example,
if you try to delete a user or group that is referenced in an access control rule, AMC displays
an error message. You must first remove all references to the user or group before you can
delete it. See Deleting Referenced Objects on page 136 for more details.
Managing Local User Accounts
Create local user accounts on the appliance in one of the following ways:
•
Manually create local user accounts in AMC and store them in a local user authentication repository.
•
Import local user accounts from a comma-separated (CSV) text file and store them in a local user
authentication repository. See Importing New Local Users and Groups on page 98.
Regardless of the method you use, local users are stored on the appliance, unlike all other users who
are stored in external authentication repositories and referenced by AMC. AMC lets you create,
modify, and delete local accounts for individual users on the appliance, and also supports local
accounts for groups of users.
Related Topics
•
Adding Local Users
•
Editing Local Users
•
Deleting Local Users
•
Adding Local Groups
•
Editing Local Groups
•
Deleting Local Groups
Adding Local Users
Before you can add local users, you must first create a local user authentication repository on the appliance, as
described in Configuring Local User Storage on page 213. You do not need to configure a local authentication
realm before adding local users.
Once you’ve created a local user authentication repository, you can add local users to the appliance.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
93
To add local users to the appliance
1
On the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Local Accounts tab.
3
Click New and then select User. The Add Local User page appears.
4
In the Username box, type the name of the local user you want to add to the local user authentication
repository. The user name can be any length between one and 255 characters.
5
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the local user.
6
To enable the user to log in, select the User is enabled check box.
7
In the Password box, type a password for the local user, and type it again in the Confirm Password box.
The password must conform to the password policy configured for the local authentication server. For
information, see Configuring Local User Storage on page 213.
8
To require the user to change password at initial login, select the User must change password at next
login check box.
If using Virtual Assist, requiring users to change their password may not be advisable because Virtual
Assist does not prompt technicians to change their password.
9
In the User Group section, select a local group for the user from the Add this user to group drop-down
list. Select None if you do not want to add the user to a local group. To create a new group for this user,
select (New) and then enter the group name in the New group name field.
10 Expand the Advanced section to add an email address or device identifier for the user.
11 In the Email Address field, configure an email address for the user. This address is used for sending onetime passwords to the user, and overrides the default username@domain email address. This e-mail
address is assigned to the “mail” attribute for the user.
12 In the Device identifier(s) field, enter one or more (comma-delimited) device identifiers for computers
or other devices that are associated with this user. This value is used by the equipment identifier end
point control feature to enforce user-device affinity. These values are assigned to the “deviceId”
attribute.
13 Click Save to create the local user account and save it to the local user authentication repository on the
appliance. Click Save and Add Another to save it and then configure another local user.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
94
Editing Local Users
To change a local user’s settings
1
From the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Local Accounts tab.
3
Click the name of the user you want to edit. The Add/Edit Local User page appears.
4
Make any edits to the user’s settings, and then click Save.
Deleting Local Users
To delete a local user
1
From the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Local Accounts tab.
3
Select the check box for the user you want to delete, and then click Delete.
You cannot delete a local user if he or she is referenced by another object. For example, if you try to delete a
local user referenced in an access control rule, AMC displays an error message. Click the link in the error
message to see a list of all references to this user. See Deleting Referenced Objects on page 136 for more
details.
Adding Local Groups
Before you can add local groups, you must first create a local user authentication repository on the appliance,
as described in Configuring Local User Storage on page 213. You do not need to configure a local authentication
realm before adding local groups.
Once you’ve created a local user authentication repository, you can add local groups to the appliance. Either
add local groups manually or import groups, as explained in Importing and Exporting Local Accounts on page 97.
To add local groups to the appliance
1
On the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Local Accounts tab.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
95
3
Click New and then select Group. The Add Local User Group page appears.
4
In the Name box, type the name of the local group you want to add to the local user authentication
repository.
5
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the local group.
6
To add a user to the group, click the Add button. The Add User to Group window opens.
7
Select the check box beside each user you want to add to the group, and then click Add. Only users who
are not already in the selected group are displayed.
8
To create a new user, click the New button to display the Add User window. See Adding Local Users on
page 93 for a description of the fields.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
96
9
Click Save to create the local user group and save it to the local user authentication repository on the
appliance. Click Save and Add Another to save it and then configure another local group.
Editing Local Groups
To change a local group’s settings
1
From the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Local Accounts tab.
3
Click the name of the group you want to edit. The Add/Edit Local Group page appears.
4
Make any edits to the group’s settings, and then click Save.
Deleting Local Groups
To delete a local group
1
From the main navigation menu, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Local Accounts tab.
3
Select the check box for the group you want to delete, and then click Delete.
You cannot delete a local group if it is referenced by another object. For example, if you try to delete a local
group referenced in an access control rule, AMC displays an error message. Click the link in the error message to
see a list of all references to this group. See Deleting Referenced Objects on page 136 for more details.
Importing and Exporting Local Accounts
Dell SMA appliances use CSV files to import and export user and group information. User and group information
can be imported for new and existing user accounts as long as the CSV file conforms to the guidelines shown in
Creating the CSV File on page 99. Detailed import information is provided in Importing New Local Users and
Groups on page 98 and Importing Data for Existing Local Users on page 101.
Export creates a CSV file named LocalUsers.csv that contains all local user accounts in the local user
authentication repository. Follow the guidelines in Exporting Local User Accounts on page 102 to create the
export file.
Topics:
•
Importing New Local Users and Groups
•
Importing Data for Existing Local Users
•
Importing New Groups
•
Exporting Local User Accounts
•
Import and Export Error Messages
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
97
Importing New Local Users and Groups
To easily add or edit local users and groups, import local user information from a comma-separated (CSV) text
file into the appliance configuration. This time-saving feature is especially useful to new customers who must
add numerous local users to the appliance. Importing users is also very useful when you need to update one or
more properties for existing users. For example, you can quickly add a new group to several users when a new
group is created. See Importing Data for Existing Local Users on page 101 for additional information.
Before you can import local users and groups, you must first create a local user authentication repository on the
appliance, as described in Configuring Local User Storage on page 213. Once you’ve created a local user
authentication repository, you can import local users and groups to the appliance.
NOTE: A local authentication realm does not need to be created before importing local users and groups.
To import local users and groups to the appliance
1
Ensure the CSV file to be imported resides on the local computer and adheres to the guidelines in
Creating the CSV File on page 99.
2
On the main navigation menu under Security Administration, select Users & Groups.
3
Click the Local Accounts
tab.
4
Click the
Import button, which displays the Import Local Users page that you will use to
import local users from a CSV file into the local user authentication
repository.
The Administrator must have modify access to the Local Accounts page and a local user authentication
repository must be available.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
98
5
In the Choose a file to import box, click Browse and locate the file you want to import. Before
importing a file, ensure that it meets the requirements shown in Creating the CSV File on page 99.
6
Select how a user account that is in both the local user authentication repository and the imported file
should be handled:
Table 45. User account handling
Select...
To...
Update the User
Update the duplicate user data in the local user
authentication repository to match the user record in
the imported CSV file
Do not update the
user
Ignore the duplicate user record in the .CSV file and
leave the user data in the local user authentication
repository unchanged
Regardless of this setting, the passwords of existing users are never updated. However, passwords for
new users are imported.
7
In the Default new user password box, type the password that will be used by all new imported local
users who do not have a password defined in the CSV file. The password must conform to the password
policy configured for the local authentication server. New users will use this default password to login
the first time.
8
Retype the default password in the Confirm password box.
9
Click the Import button to add local user accounts to the local user authentication repository.
No data is imported if AMC encounters any errors in the CSV file. If using High Availability (HA), all local
user configuration is performed on the master node and then copied to the slave node.
Creating the CSV File
The CSV file used to import user accounts into the appliance must be generated with the guidelines shown
below, and fields must be in the order shown:
Table 46. Field order
Field
Required
or
Optional
Guidelines
Username
Required
1-255 characters (case-sensitive) Name the user enters to login
Description
Optional
Any number and type of
characters allowed
Password
Optional
Must conform to the password
Password the user enters to
policy configured for the local
login
authentication server (used only
when importing new users)
Enabled
Required
Must contain either “True” or
“False” (case-sensitive)
Whether the user is allowed
to login
E-mail
Optional
local user name and domain
name separated by a @ (up to
254 characters)
Valid e-mail address used to
send one-time passwords to
the user
Devices
Optional
Comma-separated list
Device IDs associated with
the user
Groups
Optional
Comma-separated list (up to 255 Comma-separated list of
groups to which the user
characters)
NOTE: A group is created if AMC belongs
Description
Additional information about
the user
tries to import an undefined
group.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
99
The following example shows the file format required to import users into AMC
:
The following guidelines are also required, as shown in the above example:
•
The first row of the file is ignored, because the CSV format uses the first row as column headers.
•
String values are typically quoted using double quotes (“).
•
String values containing commas must be quoted.
•
String values containing quotes must escape the quote by using another double quote character, e.g.
“The group name is “”Team1””.”
If AMC encounters any errors in the CSV file, no data is imported and an error message is displayed. Error
messages are shown in Import and Export Error Messages on page 102.
Downloading a CSV Template
To download a template that you can use to create the CSV file containing user data:
1
On the main navigation menu under Security Administration, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Local Accounts tab.
3
Click the
4
On the Import Local Users page, click the Click here link
Import button.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
100
5
When the Windows File Download dialog box appears, click the Save button.
6
When the Windows Save As dialog box appears, either click the Save button to accept the defaults or
select another file name and location for the CSV file. By default, the file is named
LocalUsersTemplate.csv and located in your Downloads folder.
7
After downloading the file, use it as a guide to add user data that you want to import into the local user
authentication repository.
Importing Data for Existing Local Users
As an alternative to manually editing user accounts, import users when you need to update one or more
properties for several user accounts already in the local user authentication repository. For example, you can
quickly add several users to a group when a new group is created. Simply export user accounts to a CSV file,
change the desired properties, and then import the revised user accounts back into the local user
authentication repository.
To import data for existing local users, follow the instructions in Importing New Local Users and Groups on page
98 with the following exceptions:
•
When selecting whether data should be updated for the user, be sure to select Update the User.
Passwords are imported for new users only. Regardless of this setting, the passwords of existing users are
never updated.
•
•
Use the same CSV file format used to import new users. See Creating the CSV File on page 99. However,
only the following properties are imported.
•
Description
•
E-mail Address
•
Device IDs
•
Groups
Properties can be added but not removed when importing users.
Importing New Groups
When importing data for new or existing local users, group memberships also are imported (if available in the
imported CSV file). AMC does not explicitly import local groups. However, if a user is a member of a group that
has not been configured in AMC, a new local group is created and the user is added as a member of the group.
CAUTION: Make sure all group names in the CSV file are correct. Otherwise, unwanted groups will be
created.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
101
Exporting Local User Accounts
The AMC provides the ability to create a CSV formatted text file by exporting local user accounts and related
group information currently defined in the local user authentication repository. This CSV file can then be used
to import user data into any database.
To export local user accounts:
1
On the main navigation menu under Security Administration, select Users & Groups.
2
Click the Local Accounts tab.
3
Click the
4
Click the Save button.
5
When the Windows Save As dialog box appears, either click the Save button to accept the defaults or
select another file name and location for the CSV file. By default, the file is named LocalUsers.csv and
located in your Downloads folder.
Export button, which displays the Windows File Download dialog box.
Import and Export Error Messages
The following error messages may occur when importing or exporting a CSV file. If an error is encountered
during import, no data is imported. Therefore, you must correct the error before the file can be imported.
•
Duplicate user names – If the same user name (case-insensitive) appears in more than one record in
the CSV file, an error message identifies the user name and line on which the duplicate user name
appears.
•
Wrong number of data columns – If a record contains an invalid number of columns, an error
message indicates that the data is invalid and identifies the line number of the record.
•
Invalid email address – If a record contains an e-mail address that is not a valid address (for
example “useratdomain.com”), an error message identifies the user name, invalid address, and line
number where the invalid address occurs.
•
Invalid default password – If the default password does not meet the password criteria configured
on the local authentication server, an error message identifies the criteria that is not met. For example,
if the password does not contain either an uppercase letter or a symbol but is required to have at least
one or both, the error message indicates that both are missing.
•
Invalid “enabled” value – If the value for the Enabled column is not “true” or “false”, an error
message identifies the problem and line number of the record.
•
Invalid user name – If a user name is invalid (for example, more than 255 characters), an error
message identifies the problem and line number of the record.
•
Invalid group name- If a group name is invalid (for example, more than 255 characters), an error
message identifies the problem and line number of the record.
•
Missing user name – If an entry is missing a user name, an error message identifies the problem and
line number of the record.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
102
•
Missing password (and no default provided for new users) – If an entry for a new user is missing a
password and no default password is provided, an error message identifies the problem and line number
of the record.
•
Invalid user password – If an entry for a new user contains a password that does not meet the
password policy configured on the local authentication server, an error message identifies that the
password does not meet the policy and the line number of the problem.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
103
Integrating an SMA appliance with a Dell
SonicWALL firewall
Dell Secure Mobile Access (SMA) 1000 series appliances running firmware version 11.4.0 and higher can be
integrated to work with Dell SonicWALL TZ, NSA and SuperMassive series firewalls running firmware version
SonicOS 5.9.X and higher.
These devices can be integrated to share session information using the SonicOS Single Sign-On (SSO) feature.
The Dell SonicWALL TZ, NSA or SuperMassive series firewall can be configured to act as a RADIUS accounting
server and to receive RADIUS accounting records from a Dell Secure Mobile Access (SMA) 1000 series appliance.
Topics
•
Configuring a firewall to receive RADIUS accounting records from an SMA Appliance on page 104
•
Configuring a Dell SMA Appliance to send RADIUS accounting records to a firewall on page 107
•
Viewing Dell SMA users on the firewall on page 108
Configuring a firewall to receive RADIUS accounting
records from an SMA Appliance
To configure a firewall to receive RADIUS accounting records from an SMA Appliance:
1
On the firewall, go to the Users > Settings page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
104
2
Click Configure SSO.
The Dell SonicWALL SSO Authentication Configuration page appears.
3
Select the RADIUS Accounting tab.
4
Select the Accounting Clients tab.
5
Click Add.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
105
The Settings tab appears.
6
In the Client host name or IP address field, enter the IP address or host name of the internal interface
on the Dell SMA appliance (RADIUS client) that is connected to the firewall (RADIUS server).
7
Enter the Shared Secret.
NOTE: The Shared Secret is a text string of your choice that serves as the password between the
RADIUS client and the RADIUS server. This instance of the Shared Secret is for the firewall, which is
acting as the RADIUS server. You will enter this same Shared Secret when you configure the SMA
appliance.
8
Enter the Shared Secret again in the Confirm Secret field.
9
Click Apply.
10 Click Ok.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
106
Configuring a Dell SMA Appliance to send RADIUS
accounting records to a firewall
To configure a Dell SMA Appliance to send RADIUS accounting records to a firewall:
1
On the Dell SMA appliance, go to the System Configuration > Authentication Servers page.
2
Under Other servers, click the Edit icon for RADIUS Accounting.
The RADIUS Accounting dialog appears.
3
Select the checkbox to Enable RADIUS Accounting.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
107
4
In the Primary RADIUS server field, enter the IP address of the firewall that you configured in
Integrating an SMA appliance with a Dell SonicWALL firewall on page 104.
a
5
In the Accounting port field, enter the port number you want to use. If the port field is left
blank, the default port (1813) is used. Port 1646 is also commonly used for RADIUS accounting.
In the Secondary RADIUS server field, enter the IP address of the firewall that you configured in
Integrating an SMA appliance with a Dell SonicWALL firewall on page 104.
a
In the Accounting port field, enter the port number you want to use. If the port field is left
blank, the default port (1813) is used. Port 1646 is also commonly used for RADIUS accounting.
6
In the Shared secret field, enter the same Shared Secret you configured on the firewall in Integrating
an SMA appliance with a Dell SonicWALL firewall on page 104.
7
Click Save.
8
Click Apply Pending Changes.
Viewing Dell SMA users on the firewall
When your Dell SonicWall firewall is connected to an SMA appliance via a VPN client, you can view the SMA users
on the firewall.
To view SMA users on the firewall:
9
On the firewall, go to the Users > Status page.
10 Select the checkbox for Include inactive users.
Dell SMA users should appear in the list.
Since the SMA users are logged into a device that is external to the firewall, the firewall treats those
user sessions as inactive. To see the SMA users displayed on this page, you must select the checkbox for
Include inactive users. Once the firewall is configured to receive RADIUS accounting information from
the SMA appliance, users are automatically added to this list as soon as they are successfully
authenticated by the SMA appliance. They are removed automatically when their SMA session ends.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
108
4
Working with Appliance Management
Console
This section introduces the Appliance Management Console (AMC), a Web-based interface for managing the
appliance.
•
Logging In to AMC
•
Logging Out
•
AMC Basics
•
Administrator Accounts
•
Managing Multiple Dell Secure Mobile Access Devices
•
Working with Configuration Data
•
Deleting Referenced Objects
Logging In to AMC
Before logging in to AMC, you need the host name or IP address you typed for the internal interface during the
initial setup with Setup Tool.
To log in to AMC
1
Start your Web browser and type the URL https://<ipaddress>:8443/console, where <ipaddress>
matches the address you specified for the internal interface when you ran Setup Tool or Setup Wizard.
2
Enter admin in the Username text field.
3
Enter the root password you created using Setup Tool in the Password text field.
4
Select the Management Console in the Log in using drop-down list.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
109
5
Click Login.
The AMC home page appears.
6
Review the system statistics and use the functions on the right to configure and maintain your system.
7
Click the Help Icon at the top for details about configuring your appliance.
For information on changing the AMC password, see Editing Administrator Accounts on page 120.
NOTE: Avoid multiple administrators making changes to AMC simultaneously. For more information, see
Avoiding Configuration File Conflicts with Multiple Administrators on page 130.
Logging Out
It is important to preserve the security of your AMC administrator account. When you’re finished working in
AMC, click Log out in the upper-right portion of the screen. If you terminate a session by simply closing your
Web browser, your session remains active until it times out (after 15 minutes of inactivity). There is an
exception to this rule that you should be aware of; see Appliance Sessions on page 613 for details.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
110
AMC Basics
This section describes the basics of working with AMC. All configuration data is encrypted using SSL as it’s
transferred between AMC and your browser, ensuring that it remains secure. To increase security, AMC should be
used within a trusted network (on an internal network that is behind a firewall). See Certificate FAQ on page
168 for more details.
•
A Quick Tour of the AMC Interface
•
Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting Objects in AMC
•
Getting Help
•
Administrator Accounts
A Quick Tour of the AMC Interface
The AMC interface will be familiar to anyone who has worked with similar Web-based security management
applications. Here are some basic notes about working with AMC.
Summary pages
Several top-level pages in AMC are summary pages that provide quick access to subordinate configuration pages
and display summaries of key configuration settings and other status information. These summary pages are:
•
Agent Configuration
•
General Settings
•
Network Settings
•
SSL Settings
•
Authentication Servers
•
Services
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
111
For example, the Agent Configuration page provides links to pages for configuring End Point Control, Secure
Mobile Access access, and other agents. You can see right away on this summary page whether a specific agent
is enabled or disabled.
Tables and tabs
Many AMC pages use a tabular layout to present the objects you’ll be managing. The tables include scroll bars,
which make it easier for you to keep the main elements on the page (including the navigation bar, header, and
footer) in view when working with long lists. You can also sort the data displayed in some tables by clicking the
underlined column headings.
In some cases, you’ll use tabs to switch between modes. For example, you’ll use tabs to switch between
managing resources, groups of resources, and variables used in defining resources.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
112
Filters
On pages in AMC that contain a list of items that can grow to many pages in a large configuration, filtering is
available to make it easier for you to find what you are looking for. Filters are available on the following pages
in AMC:
•
Resources
•
Resource Groups
•
Access Control
•
Users
•
Groups
•
Shortcuts
•
Shortcut Groups
•
Browse for Users (creating an access rule)
•
Browse for Resources (creating an access rule)
The exact filters vary slightly with each page, but the following functionality is consistent across all pages:
•
There is a reset link that resets the filter fields to their default values.
•
There is a red active indicator that indicates that the page was loaded using filters, meaning that the list
may not be displaying all the configured items.
•
There is a Refresh button that reloads the page with the specified filters applied.
•
The filters are stored so that the next time you loads the page, it uses the same filters that were last
applied. The filters are stored across sessions, so even if you log out and log back in, the same filters will
be used.
•
There is a footer at the bottom of the list that shows the number of items displayed and the total
number of items in the list. If filtering is active, there is a (filtered) indicator and a Show all link that
will reset the filters to the defaults and refresh the page to display all items in the list.
In general, the available filters map to the displayed columns in the list. In some cases, such as Resource Groups
or Shortcut Groups, you can filter the list based on the members of the group, which is not a column in the list.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
113
As another example, on the Resources page you could filter the list based on something in the Value attribute,
which is not a column but is visible when an item in the list is expanded.
One way that you could use this feature for custom filtering is to create your own “tags” by adding a custom
string to the Description field of related items. For example, if a certain set of resources are all used by one
department or for one customer, you could add a keyword or tag to the description of those resources, and then
use the filtering capability to quickly display only the resources that contain the special keyword or tag.
Page links
To save space, some AMC pages use a multi-page format with links at the top of the pages to access the related
configuration settings. The Configure Community page is an example of this:
Editing an object
In most of the tables used to display lists of objects, notice that the name field (or in the case of the Access
Control page, the rule number) is hyperlinked. To edit an object, click its hyperlink.
Changing the page view
Some of the longer, more complex pages in AMC hide the edit controls used to configure advanced features. This
makes it easier for you to focus on the most important configuration options. To view hidden options, click the
down arrow button (click the up arrow to hide them again):
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
114
Expanded view of list details
AMC pages that display lists of objects, such as the Access Control page, let you view details about an object by
clicking the plus sign (+) to the left of it. To return to the one-line view, click the minus sign (-).
Required fields and errors
Required fields are indicated in AMC with an asterisk. If you omit a value for a required field and click Save, a
red message appears beneath the field indicating that it is required. A red message is also used to indicate an
error (for example, if you type an invalid value).
Assigning names and descriptions
Most of your time in AMC will be spent managing three types of objects:
•
Access control rules
•
Resources
•
Users and groups
When you create these objects, AMC requires that you type a name. AMC also has a space for you to type an
optional description.
Although not required, meaningful descriptions can help you remember critical details about the objects you’re
managing, such as the purpose of an access rule or what resources are in a subnet range. A good description is
especially helpful when managing a group of objects; when you return to AMC later to manage a large group of
network resources, for example, you’ll be glad to have a description reminding you of what’s in the group.
Saving changes on a page
On some AMC pages you can Save or Cancel the changes you make. If you click Cancel, or use the Back button
in your browser, your changes are not saved.
The AMC status area
A status area just beneath the AMC header displays important information:
Table 47. Status area links
Status area link
Description
If your appliance license or a component license has expired, click License
warning to review and manage software licenses.
If more than one administrator is logged into AMC, click Multiple
administrators and check the list on the Administrator Sessions page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
115
Table 47. Status area links
Status area link
Description
If this appliance is configured to receive policy updates, click Configuration
recipient to see the appliances with which it will be synchronized.
If you’ve made configuration changes but have not applied them, click
Pending changes. On the Apply Changes page you can activate, schedule, or
discard the pending changes.
If you want to immediately apply configuration changes that are scheduled
for a later time, click Pending changes.
If you have pending scheduled configuration changes that you want to apply
to other appliances, click Pending changes and select the appliances where
you want to apply the changes.
The version number and product serial number
The version of the current system software and the product serial number are displayed at the bottom of the
left-hand navigation bar on every page in AMC. If the appliance is configured to send or receive configuration
data, its replication name is shown here.
In addition to the version number, the System Status and Maintenance pages display a list of any hot fixes that
have been applied. The version number and hot fix information is useful for planning system updates, and you
need to have it when contacting Dell Technical Support.
Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting Objects in
AMC
AMC features a standardized user interface for managing most objects, such as resources, access control rules,
users, communities, End Point Control zones and device profiles, and other items used to organize and operate
your VPN.
Following are the basic procedures for adding, editing, copying, and deleting objects in AMC, although there
may be some minor variations depending on the object and AMC page you’re working on. The examples
provided here use the End Point Control Zones page.
To add a new object in AMC
1
Click New on the page listing the type of object you want to create, and then select the option you want
to create.
This example uses Standard zone....
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
116
The Zone Definition - Standard Zone page appears.
2
Complete the relevant information for the object, and click Save at the bottom of the screen.
To edit an object in AMC
1
On the page that lists the object you want to edit, click the link for the name (or in some cases, the
number) of the object you want to modify. For a quick description of the object, an expand (+) button is
available on most lists.
2
Make any changes to the information for the object, and then click Save.
To copy an object in AMC
1
On the page that lists the object you want to copy, select the check box to the left of the object, and
then click Copy.
2
Make any changes to the information about the source object, and be certain to assign the object a new
name, and then click Save.
To delete an object in AMC
•
On the page that lists the object you want to delete, select the check box to the left of the object, and
then click Delete.
You cannot delete an object that is still associated with other objects. For information, see Deleting Referenced
Objects on page 136.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
117
Getting Help
Every AMC page includes a Help button (in the upper right portion of the screen) that displays context-sensitive
online Help in a new browser window:
The Help window includes a navigation pane on the left and help content on the right. Click an item in the
navigation pane to display help content for that item.
Administrator Accounts
This section describes how to manage AMC administrator accounts and how to avoid problems if more than one
administrator is managing the appliance.
•
Managing Administrator Accounts and Roles
•
Avoiding Configuration File Conflicts with Multiple Administrators
Managing Administrator Accounts and Roles
AMC enables you to create multiple administrator accounts, each with a separate username and password. You
can then assign roles to administrators, specifying which features in AMC they can use, and their levels of
access.
By default, AMC is configured with a primary administrator role that has full access to all areas of AMC. Only the
primary administrator can add, edit, or delete other administrator accounts.
•
Adding Administrator Accounts
•
Editing Administrator Accounts
•
Adding/Editing Legacy Local Administrator Accounts
•
Defining Administrator Roles
•
Adding Authentication Server
•
Editing Administrator Roles
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
118
Adding Administrator Accounts
You can create additional administrator accounts if more than one person is responsible for managing policy and
you want each person to have individual login credentials. Only the “primary” administrator—whose default
name of admin cannot be changed—can create, modify, and delete secondary administrator accounts.
To add an administrator account
1
From the main navigation menu, click General Settings.
2
In the Administrator accounts area, click Edit.
The Manage Administrator Accounts page appears.
3
Click New > Administrator....
The Add/Edit Administrator page appears.
4
In the User drop-down, select a user.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
119
5
In the Role drop-down, select an Administrator Role.
AMC provides the following preconfigured roles, which are defined on the Add/Edit Administrator Role
page. You can modify these preconfigured roles, or create new roles (see Defining Administrator Roles on
page 123):
Table 48. Preconfigured role descriptions
Preconfigured role
Description
Super Admin
Has read/write access to all pages in AMC
Security Admin
Has read/write access to security administration and monitoring
pages in AMC, and view access to system settings
System Admin
Has read/write access to system and monitoring pages, and view
access to security pages
6
Click Save and then click Pending Changes at the top of the page.
7
Click Apply Changes.
NOTE: For information on deleting administrator accounts, see Adding, Editing, Copying,
and Deleting Objects in AMC on page 116
By default, the preconfigured roles include the ability to view all forms of session data and to terminate
sessions. See Viewing User Sessions on page 302 and Ending User Sessions on page 304 for more
information.
Editing Administrator Accounts
To help keep your AMC password secure, you should change it from time to time. Each administrator can edit his
or her own account to change the password or update the description. The primary AMC administrator (whose
username is “admin”) can edit the account settings for any other administrator.
Your password must contain between eight and 20 characters, and is case-sensitive. A “strong” password—with
a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, and numbers—is recommended. You should also avoid using
words found in a dictionary.
After you change your password, record it somewhere and keep it secure. If you change a secondary
administrator’s password, be sure to share the password with the appropriate administrator.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
120
To edit an administrator account
1
From the main navigation menu, click General Settings.
2
On the General Settings page, in the Administrator accounts area, click Edit.
3
In the Name column on the Manage Administrator Accounts page, click the name of the administrator
that you want to edit.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
121
4
On the Add/Edit Administrator page, change the textual description, login password, or role
.
NOTE: The username and role of the primary or legacy local administrator cannot be
changed.
If the password for the primary administrator (whose username is “admin”) is changed, the password for
logging in to the appliance directly (as “root”) is also changed.
Adding/Editing Legacy Local Administrator Accounts
You can create or modify legacy local administrator accounts, which are supported for backwards compatibility
only. The recommended way to configure local administrators is to create users in a local authentication server
and map them to administrative roles. In previous versions, administrators could only be defined locally on the
appliance, rather than defined in an authentication server.
To add or edit a legacy local administrator account
1
From the main navigation menu, click General Settings.
2
In the Administrator accounts area, click Edit.
The Manage Administrator Accounts page appears.
3
To add a legacy local administrator account, click New > Legacy Local Administrator....
To edit an existing legacy local administrator account, click the name of the administrator that you want
to edit. The Add/Edit Administrator page appears.
4
In the Username field, enter the legacy local administrator’s username.
5
In the Description field, enter a descriptive comment about the legacy local administrator account.
6
In the Password field, enter the legacy local administrator’s password.
7
In the Confirm password field, type in the legacy local administrator’s password again.
8
In the Role drop-down, select an Administrator Role.
AMC provides the following preconfigured roles, which are defined on the Add/Edit Administrator Role
page. You can modify these preconfigured roles, or create new roles (see Defining Administrator Roles on
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
122
page 123):
Table 49. Preconfigured role descriptions
9
Preconfigured role
Description
Super Admin
Has read/write access to all pages in AMC
Security Admin
Has read/write access to security administration and
monitoring pages in AMC, and view access to system
settings
System Admin
Has read/write access to system and monitoring pages, and
view access to security pages
Click Save and then click Pending Changes at the top of the page.
10 Click Apply Changes.
For information on deleting administrator accounts, see Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting Objects in AMC
on page 116.
By default, the preconfigured roles include the ability to view all forms of session data and to terminate
sessions. See Viewing User Sessions on page 302 and Ending User Sessions on page 304 for more information.
Defining Administrator Roles
Role-based administration enables the primary administrator to grant limited administrative control to
secondary AMC administrators.
For defining administrator roles, the features in AMC are grouped into four categories. For each category, you
must specify the permissions you want to grant a role. The four categories of administrator permissions in AMC
are described in the following table:
Table 50. Administrator permissions
Category
Administrator permissions
Security administration
Controls administrator access to pages for access control rules,
resources, users and groups, WorkPlace, OnDemand, and End Point
Control.
System configuration
Controls administrator access to pages for network settings, general
appliance settings, SSL settings, access and network services,
authentication servers, and realms.
System maintenance
Controls administrator permission to shut down or restart the
appliance, update or roll back the system software, and import or
export configuration data.
System monitoring
View access permits the administrator to view system logs and graphs,
view active users, and run troubleshooting tools (such as starting,
stopping, downloading, and deleting network traces). Modify provides
additional permissions to terminate user sessions and modify log
settings.
The permission level for each category can be set as follows:
Table 51. Permission levels
Permission level
Description
Modify
Permits read/write access within a category.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
123
Table 51. Permission levels
Permission level
Description
View
Provides read-only access within a category.
None
Disables access to the relevant AMC pages within a category. When you
select None as the permission level for a category, AMC will not display
either the pages within that category, or the main navigation menu
commands that lead to those pages.
To create an administrator role
1
From the main navigation menu, click General Settings.
2
In the Administrators area, click Edit for the Administrator accounts.
The Manage Administrator Roles page appears and displays an overview of administrators’ roles and
permission levels.
3
Click the Roles tab.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
124
4
Click New
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
125
The Add Administrator Role page appears.
5
In the Name text field, type the name for the administrator role.
6
Optional. In the Description text field, type a descriptive comment about the role.
7
In the Administrator permissions area, select one or more categories of permissions that will be granted
to the role.
8
Click Save.
Adding Authentication Server
Secure Mobile Access allows you to choose the authentication server where your appliance administrators are
defined. If you do not already have accounts defined in an external directory server, you can create a local
authentication store and assign administrative roles to locally defined users and groups.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
126
To add an authentication server
1
From the main navigation menu, click Authentication Servers.
2
Click New....
The New Authentication Server page appears.
3
Enter your configuration settings, and then click Continue....
The Configure Authentication Server page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
127
4
Enter your configuration settings, and then click Save.
5
Navigate to General Settings.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
128
6
In the Administrators area, click Edit for the Administrator accounts.
The Manage Administrator Roles page appears.
7
Click the Authentication tab.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
129
8
In the Authentication server: drop-down, select the authentication server you added in step
9
Keep all other options as default.
10 Click Save.
11 Click Pending Changes in the upper-right of the page.
12 Click Apply Changes.
Editing Administrator Roles
The primary AMC administrator can modify any secondary administrator role to change permission levels, and
can also delete secondary roles. For more information, see Defining Administrator Roles on page 123.
Avoiding Configuration File Conflicts with Multiple
Administrators
If more than one administrator is managing your appliance, you should avoid working in AMC at the same time.
If multiple administrators make changes to the same object, AMC saves the most recent one. This can cause
unintentional results, and potentially cause security problems if conflicting changes are made to access control
rules.
If more than one administrator is logged into AMC, you are alerted by a link in the upper-right corner of AMC:
To see a list of the user names and IP addresses of all administrators who are logged into AMC, click this link:
the Administrator Sessions page appears in a separate window. If an administrator has multiple instances of the
Web browser logged into AMC, the administrator’s user name and IP address is listed more than once.
You should contact the other administrators and coordinate your activities to avoid configuration file conflicts.
To view the complete list of AMC administrators
1
Click General Settings in the main AMC navigation menu.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
130
2
Click Edit in the Administrator accounts area. The Manage Administrator Accounts page lists all
administrators, and shows which ones are currently logged in.
The management console audit log tracks any AMC configuration changes made by administrators.
See Management Audit Log on page 295.
To end an AMC session you must click Log Out; if you terminate a session by closing your Web browser, the
session appears in the list of active sessions until it times out (by default, in 15 minutes).
Managing Multiple Dell Secure Mobile
Access Devices
SMA appliances should be managed by the Dell Central Management Server (CMS).
In SMA 11.4, the Global Management System (GMS) functionality is hidden. After 11.4, GMS will not be
supported. Customers that want to keep on using GMS, can enable it through the Configuration Extension
Mechanism (CEM).
The Dell Central Management Server (CMS) is a single administrative user interface from which you can manage
all of your VPN appliances. The Central Management Server (CMS) is a virtual machine which reduces the total
cost of operation and simplifies the management of multiple VPN appliances for enterprise companies.
This section provides the following configuration procedures:
•
The Central Management Server (CMS)
•
Configuring an Appliance for GMS
The Central Management Server (CMS)
The VPN Administrator uses the Central Management Console (CMC) of the Central Management Server (CMS) to
manage all the VPN appliances regardless of location in the world. There is close integration between the CMS
and the managed appliances through a secure tunnel with native communications.
Central Management:
•
Provides enterprise customers a single plane of glass (the Dashboard) to manage their distributed VPN
infrastructure.
•
Reduces Total Cost of Operation (TCO) and operator errors associated with the management of multiple
appliances.
•
Provides a Central Management Console (CMC) to configure, maintain and monitor appliances.
•
Simplifies license management with a centralized license that eliminates the need for separate
appliance licenses.
•
Optimizes license usage, that is, licenses are dynamically allocated to appliances based on user load.
•
Facilitates centralized alerts via the console dashboard and SNMP traps.
•
Requires no dedicated appliance or hardware (The Central Management Server is a virtual machine.)
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
131
This dashboard view in the CMC gives the Administrator a summarized view of all managed appliances.
Administrators can apply a common configuration to managed appliances from the CMC. Consolidated
monitoring and reporting gives the Administrator an overview of all the appliances that are being managed.
Configuring an Appliance for GMS
The Global Management System (GMS) gives you a single management interface for centrally managing and
deploying E-Class SMA appliances and security policy configurations. GMS also provides centralized real-time
monitoring, and policy and compliance reporting. You can schedule appliance reports to be automatically sent
by e-mail on a regular basis. These reports currently contain the following:
•
User authentication-related events: The user login report shows the user name, source host IP address,
and time of login for users who have logged in to the appliance during the specified day; the failed login
report shows unsuccessful login attempts, which is useful for identifying unauthorized access attempts
and potentially malicious activity.
•
Status information: The GMS can log in to the E-Class SMA appliance automatically and request its
up/down status and appliance details, such as its model and serial numbers, language, up-time, and
firmware version.
•
Resource access events: The aggregated data on GMS is summarized by access method and user/realm
name; you can also go into further detail and see individual access items. If a user has logged in to
WorkPlace, for example, and clicked on various links, that information is relayed to GMS and can be
viewed in summary or detailed reports.
You can also configure the E-Class SMA appliance to be included in ViewPoint reporting.
To configure your SMA EX-Series appliance for GMS or ViewPoint
1
Click General Settings in the main AMC navigation menu.
2
Click Edit in the Centralized management area.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
132
3
Select the Enable GMS/ViewPoint check box, and then enter the host name or IP address of the GMS or
ViewPoint server, and the port number.
4
In the Heartbeat interval text box, set the interval (in seconds) at which the appliance indicates its
readiness to send a report on authentication-related events, in addition to status information
(status.xml). An interval of 60 seconds is typical.
5
Select Send only heartbeat status messages check box if you want to only manage the appliance, and
not generate any reports.
6
If needed, enable an additional server in the Additional ViewPoint server area.
7
In the GMS/ViewPoint credentials area, enter and confirm the password that will be used to add the
SMA E-Class appliance. On the GMS/ViewPoint Add Unit screen, you will add this E-Class SMA appliance
by entering GMS as the login name and the credentials you specified in the Password box.
8
Select Enable single sign-on for AMC configuration if you want to be able to open the Appliance
Management Console and make changes to its configuration from within GMS. If this setting is cleared,
you can still open AMC, but you must first enter your AMC login credentials; this is less convenient, but
more secure.
9
Click Save.
Refer to the documentation for the Dell Global Management System on www.MySonicwall.com for further
information.
Related Topics
•
Configuring GMS for SNMP Monitoring of the Appliance
Working with Configuration Data
This section explains how to save and activate configuration changes in AMC.
•
Saving Configuration Changes to Disk
•
Applying Configuration Changes
•
Discarding Pending Configuration Changes
•
Scheduling Pending Changes
Saving Configuration Changes to Disk
When you’re finished making changes on a page in AMC and you click Save, your changes are saved to disk. If
you click Cancel or use the Back button in your browser, your changes are not saved.
To save configuration changes to disk
1
Make any changes on a page in AMC.
2
Click Save at the bottom of the page.
Configuration changes are saved to disk, but are not applied to the active configuration. The status area in AMC
changes to indicate that you have pending changes that need to be applied to the appliance.
See Applying Configuration Changes on page 134 for more information.
There are several options for managing configuration data—exporting it or saving it on the appliance, or
restoring it, for example. See Managing Configuration Data on page 318 for more information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
133
Applying Configuration Changes
As you make configuration changes to the appliance, they are saved to disk but are not immediately applied.
These changes can either be activated (described in this section) or discarded (see Discarding Pending
Configuration Changes on page 135 for more information).
To activate your changes, you must apply them. You can apply most changes without interrupting service to
users, and new connections will use the new configuration. Low-level configuration changes (for example, an IP
address change) are a bit more disruptive: network services are automatically restarted and user connections
are terminated, forcing users to reauthenticate. If possible, you should apply these sorts of configuration
changes during off-peak houwrs (perhaps during a maintenance window) and notify your users beforehand.
If you need to restart services manually, see Stopping and Starting the Secure Mobile Access Services on page
501.
To apply your changes
1
From the main navigation menu, click Maintenance.
2
On the Maintenance page, click Apply changes. (You can also click the Pending changes link in the
upper-right corner of AMC.)
3
Assess the impact of applying your changes by looking at the message on the Apply Changes page:
Table 52. Warning messages
Warning message
Description
•
Applying changes will restart all services and
terminate all user connections.
Applying any of these changes terminates existing
user connections.
•
Applying changes will terminate existing TCP/IP
user connections.
CAUTION: This requires users to reauthenticate,
and may cause them to lose data.
•
Applying changes will terminate existing HTTP
user connections.
Your changes will require AMC to restart, which will end AMC will be unavailable after your current session
your current administrative session. When the request is ends. Close your browser and then log in to AMC
complete, open a new browser and log in to AMC again. again.
No authentication realms are enabled. This will prevent
users from accessing any resources.
4
At least one authentication realm must be enabled
for users to have access to resources. Otherwise,
users cannot authenticate to the appliance.
Click Apply Changes to apply configuration changes.
When you apply configuration changes to WorkPlace, AMC performs a restart of the services. Users do not need
to reauthenticate to WorkPlace, but if they provided Windows login credentials to access a network share, they
are prompted to re-enter them when WorkPlace restarts.
Any connections that exist when you apply changes continue to use the old configuration until the connection
terminates. Because Web connections are short-lived, most users accessing Web resources pick up configuration
changes fairly quickly. On the other hand, client/server connections can survive for a long period of time.
If the new configuration fails to load, existing connections remain in effect but new connection attempts will
fail. For details on what to do in this situation, see AMC Issues on page 587.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
134
Discarding Pending Configuration Changes
Configuration changes you make in AMC are saved to disk, but they are not in effect until you apply them, as
described in Applying Configuration Changes on page 134. You can use the AMC log file to find out what changes
are pending, and go to the Apply changes page in AMC to discard them. Pending changes can only be discarded
as a group: you cannot discard them selectively.
To discard pending changes
1
(Optional) You can review the list of pending changes in the management console audit log file.
a
From the main navigation menu, click Logging, and then select Management Console audit log in
the Log file list.
b
Any Info level item added since the last Applied configuration changes message appears is a
change that can be discarded.
See Management Audit Log on page 295 for more information.
2
From the main navigation menu, click Maintenance, and then click Apply changes.
3
On the Apply Changes page, click Discard. The time- and date-stamp of the configuration that will be
restored when you discard pending changes is displayed.
4
Click OK to confirm that you want to discard changes.
Scheduling Pending Changes
To schedule changes:
1
Either click the Pending changes link in the upper-right corner of AMC, or click the Apply changes
button on the Maintenance page to display the Apply Pending Changes dialog:
2
Expand the Advanced section by clicking the
3
To schedule the pending changes to be applied at a later time, click the At radio button and select the
desired time and date.
down arrow icon to the right of the Advanced heading.
You also may apply the pending changes immediately by selecting the Now radio button or discard the
pending changes by clicking Discard.
4
Click Apply Changes. Thereafter, clicking Pending Changes displays the scheduled actions.
A schedule can be changed or discarded at any time before the scheduled time using this same dialog.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
135
Deleting Referenced Objects
You cannot delete an object (such as a resource or a user) if it is still referenced by another object (the check
box next to it in AMC cannot be selected). In this example, the resource ahsiple cannot be deleted:
In order to delete an object that is in use by anther object—such as a Web shortcut, a WorkPlace layout, or an
access rule—you must first out what objects are using it. To do this, expand the list item by clicking on the plus
(+) sign next to it. In this example the resource is used by a WorkPlace shortcut named DFS; it can be deleted
only after the WorkPlace shortcut is removed. (The resource is also part of a resource group named Default
Resources, but it can be deleted if that is the only reference.)
The following table lists the object types that cannot be deleted if they are referenced by other objects.
Table 53. Object types that cannot be deleted if referenced by other objects
This object type...
Can be referenced by this object type
Resource
Access control rules, resource groups, WorkPlace Web shortcuts
Resource groups
Access control rules
Users
Access control rules
User groups
Access control rules
Realms
Users, user groups
Authentication servers
Realms
Communities
Realms
Web application profiles
Resources
End Point Control zones
Access control rules, communities
Device profiles
End Point Control zones
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
136
Part 4
Authentication
•
Network and Authentication Configuration
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
137
5
Network and Authentication
Configuration
This section provides information about essential network configuration tasks, including configuring network
interfaces, selecting a routing mode, configuring network gateways, defining static routes, and name
resolution. It also explains how to manage SSL and CA certificates, and configure user authentication.
This is the minimal network configuration required to get the appliance up and running. For information on
configuring additional services—including NTP, SSH, ICMP, and syslog—see System Administration on page 286.
•
Configuring Basic Network Settings
•
Configuring Routing
•
Configuring Name Resolution
•
Certificates
•
Managing User Authentication
•
Next Steps
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
138
Configuring Basic Network Settings
All basic network settings—including IP interfaces, routing, and name resolution—are configurable in AMC. The
starting point in AMC for configuring network options is the Network Settings page.
Topics:
•
Specifying System Identity
•
Configuring Network Interfaces
•
Configuring ICMP
•
Viewing Fully Qualified Domain Names and Custom Ports
•
Configuring Fallback Servers for Connect Tunnel
Specifying System Identity
You must name the appliance and specify the domain name in which it is located.
To specify system identity
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Network Settings.
2
In the Basic area, click Edit. The Configure Basic Network Settings page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
139
3
4
The Appliance name helps you differentiate appliances in several contexts (especially if more than one
appliance is running). The name is not visible to users:
•
It sets the command prompt for the Dell SMA appliance.
•
It is saved to a log file, so you can identify the appliance to which a particular log message
applies.
•
When you export a configuration file for the appliance (on the Maintenance page in AMC), the
Appliance name is prepended to the file name.
In the Default Domain box, type the name of the domain in which the appliance is located (for example,
yourcompany.com). This name defines the DNS namespace used to identify hosts accessed by the
appliance.
Related Topics
•
Configuring Network Interfaces
Configuring Network Interfaces
To configure the network interfaces, specify the IP address, subnet mask, and interface speed. You can run the
appliance using both the internal and the external interfaces (a dual-homed configuration), or optionally just
the internal interface (a single-homed configuration). For more information on the interface configuration
options, see Network Architecture on page 34.
To configure network interfaces
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Network Settings.
2
In the Basic area, click Edit. The Configure Basic Network Settings page appears.
3
In the Network interfaces area, configure the settings for the internal interface connected to your
internal (or private) network. Click the link for Internal and then configure these settings:
4
a
Type an Address and Netmask for the interface.
b
Select the appropriate interface Speed from the list (the default is Auto).
c
Click OK.
To configure the settings for the interface connected to the external network (or Internet) do the
following:
a
Click the link for External.
b
Select the Enabled check box.
c
Type the Address and Netmask settings used to access the Dell SMA appliance from the Internet.
The external IPv4 or IPv6 address must be publicly accessible.
d
Select the appropriate interface Speed from the list (the default is Auto).
e
Click OK.
5
Click Save.
6
Click Pending changes and then apply the changes. (For more information, see Applying Configuration
Changes on page 134.)
If you configure the appliance to use both the internal and external interfaces, verify your routing settings to
make sure that you have a network route to the internal interface. If the appliance is on a different network
than the computer you’re using to access AMC, you must set up routing (configure an internal default network
gateway that will pass traffic to an internal router, or define a static route to the network on which the
appliance is installed) to maintain access to AMC after you apply your network configuration changes. For more
information, see Configuring Routing on page 142.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
140
Configuring ICMP
Enabling ICMP (Internet Control Messaging Protocol) will let you use the ping command to test network
connectivity on a IPv4 or IPv6 interface.
To enable pings, select the Enable ICMP pings check box. To disable pings, clear the check box.
Viewing Fully Qualified Domain Names and Custom
Ports
The Fully qualified domain names section of the page provides a table of the IPv4 or IPv6 addresses, FQDNs,
and the WorkPlace sites and URL resources they are used by. You can sort the list forward or backward by any
column heading by clicking the column heading link. Under Used by, click a WorkPlace site name or URL
resource name that appears as a link to go to that page in AMC where you can edit the settings for it.
The Custom ports section provides a table showing the custom port number and the URL resource that uses that
port for all URL resources configured to use custom ports. Under Used by resource, click a URL resource name
that appears as a link to go to the Resources > Edit Resource page to edit the resource settings.
Configuring Fallback Servers for Connect Tunnel
You can set up one or more fallback servers for Connect Tunnel users in case their primary appliance becomes
unavailable due to a planned outage, for example, or a natural disaster. Users do not need to know the names of
the fallback servers you set up: any time a client successfully connects to an appliance that has any fallback
servers specified, the list of fallback servers is transmitted to the client and stored there.
To specify a fallback server for Connect Tunnel users
1
From the main navigation menu, click Network Settings.
2
In the Tunnel service area, click Edit. The Configure Network Tunnel Service page appears.
3
In the Fallback servers area, click New.
4
Specify the fallback Server by host name or IP address.
5
In the Realm box you have two choices:
•
Leave it blank: Whatever realm the user was logged in to before the primary server became
unavailable is the same realm name that will be used on this particular fallback server.
•
Specify a realm: Force users to log in to a particular realm when they connect to this server.
Fallback server settings are not replicated as part of policy replication. In a group of servers that have
designated fallback servers, each appliance has a unique list that should not be replicated on the other servers.
Related Topics
•
Fallback Servers and the User Experience
Fallback Servers and the User Experience
If an attempted connection to the primary server fails, the Connect Tunnel client automatically attempts a
connection to any fallback servers that are specified. This feature is available to Connect Tunnel clients running
on a Windows, Macintosh, or Linux operating system. Users will not be aware that a fallback server is being
contacted, except for an initial pause of about 20 seconds as the connection is attempted, and a status message
indicating that a backup host is being contacted.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
141
A fallback server is used only when the user manually initiates a new connection to the primary appliance
(which is down). If the primary server becomes unavailable during an active session, the session will exit and
the user must start a new session.
Session Limits
If the login credentials for users include a PIN or other parameter that is valid for only a limited period of time,
you should be aware of what your session limits are. For example, if Credential lifetime is set to only 30
seconds and the client works through several fallback servers while attempting to make a connection, the user’s
PIN or other parameter may time out before the list of possible servers is exhausted.
There are a few settings that govern how long a session can be resumed without requiring reauthentication:
•
Credential lifetime is a global setting that is specified on the Configure General Appliance Options
page (click General Settings in the main navigation menu, and then click Edit in the Appliance options
area).
•
Limit session length to credential lifetime is a setting that is configured on a per-community basis.
When selected, tunnel client sessions in a given community terminate and require reauthentication after
the length of time specified by Credential lifetime.
NOTE:
•
If the client connects to a fallback server and the requested realm (as configured in AMC) is
unavailable, the connection fails with an authentication error.
•
Users connecting to a high-availability pair of appliances operate with the same fallback
information, regardless of which member of the pair they initially connect to.
•
Once a server has been contacted, fallback will not continue even if the login attempt fails.
•
If a user manually changes from one appliance that has a fallback list of servers to another, the
second server will display the last known realm the user selected for that host.
Related Topics
•
Configuring Fallback Servers for Connect Tunnel
Configuring Routing
The Dell SMA appliance can be configured to route traffic using network gateways or static routes. These
routing methods can be used separately or in combination with each other.
•
Configuring Network Gateways
•
Choosing a Network Gateway Option
•
Configuring Network Gateways in a Dual-Homed Environment
•
Configuring Network Gateways in a Single-Homed Environment
•
Enabling a Route to the Internet
•
Configuring Static Routes
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
142
Configuring Network Gateways
A network gateway is the address of a router that serves as point of access to another network. Network
gateway options are based on your network architecture and depend on whether you have configured the
appliance as dual-homed (both internal and external interfaces are enabled) or single-homed (only the internal
interface is enabled). See Network Architecture on page 34 for more information.
•
Choosing a Network Gateway Option
•
Configuring Network Gateways in a Dual-Homed Environment
•
Configuring Network Gateways in a Single-Homed Environment
Choosing a Network Gateway Option
When configuring network gateways in a dual-homed environment, you can choose among four routing mode
options:
•
Dual gateway
•
Single gateway, restricted
•
Single gateway, unrestricted
•
No gateway
Use the following scenarios to help you decide which option is best for your needs.
•
Scenario 1: Using an Internal and Internet Router
•
Scenario 2: Managing Client Requests with Static Routes
•
Scenario 3: Returning Client Requests to a Specified Gateway
•
Scenario 4: Evaluating the Appliance in a Lab Setting
•
Scenario 5: Deploying Network Tunnel Clients in “Redirect All” Mode
Related Topics
•
Configuring Network Gateways in a Dual-Homed Environment
•
Configuring Network Gateways in a Single-Homed Environment
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
143
Scenario 1: Using an Internal and Internet Router
If you have an internal router as well as an Internet router, use the Dual gateway option. You can leverage your
internal router to access your internal resources.
Sample scenario—Company A has resources and a number of subnets on their internal network, and they
already have a robust routing system in place. With the dual gateway routing mode on the appliance, client
requests destined for internal resources on the corporate network can be delivered to an internal router.
Figure 8. Internal and Internet Router usage
Scenario 2: Managing Client Requests with Static Routes
If you’re not using an internal router, or prefer managing routing on the appliance, use the Single gateway,
restricted option. In this scenario you must define static routes for all of your client requests. Client requests
without a static route will be discarded by the appliance. This option requires more effort, but allows greater
control over in-bound traffic.
Sample scenario—Company B does not use a lot of internal resources, and prefers to manage its routing
information on the appliance. They create a static route for each resource to which their VPN users should have
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
144
access. If a VPN user attempts to reach an address that is not defined within the appliance’s routing table, then
the traffic is discarded.
Figure 9. Managing Client Requests with Static Routes
Scenario 3: Returning Client Requests to a Specified
Gateway
With the Single gateway, unrestricted option, the appliance delivers all client requests that do not match a
static route to the gateway that you specify (on either the internal or external interface of the appliance). This
option is less secure because it could allow traffic to pass to your Internet router and out of your network,
depending on the filtering and routing policies of your infrastructure. This configuration is also more difficult to
maintain.
Sample scenario—Like company B, company C prefers to manage its routing information on the appliance and
has created static routes for each resource to which VPN users need access. However, some users in this
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
145
organization also need access to Internet resources, and this traffic must be redirected from the appliance. For
example, a company’s users might need to access a public Web server that requires pre-registered IP addresses.
A user must first establish a VPN session with the appliance; the request is then redirected to the external
gateway of the appliance.
Figure 10. Returning Client Requests to a Specified Gateway
Scenario 4: Evaluating the Appliance in a Lab Setting
Use the No gateway option during evaluation if you will have the interfaces connected to your testing networks
without the need for routing.
Scenario 5: Deploying Network Tunnel Clients in “Redirect
All” Mode
If you are planning to deploy network tunnel clients in “redirect all” mode, you may need to give your network
tunnel users access to both your internal network and the Internet (for more information, see Redirection Modes
on page 72). This can be accomplished by either of these options:
•
Use the Dual gateway option, and make certain that your internal gateway router has been configured
with a route to the Internet.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
146
•
Use the Single gateway, unrestricted option, and then configure the appliance to use a route to the
Internet; see Enabling a Route to the Internet on page 148.
Figure 11. Deploying Network Tunnel Clients in “Redirect All” Mode
Configuring Network Gateways in a Dual-Homed
Environment
The following steps guide you through the setup of network gateways in a dual-homed environment, where both
the internal and external interfaces are enabled.
To configure network gateways in a dual-homed environment
1
From the main navigation menu, click Network Settings.
2
In the Routing area, click Edit. The Configure Routing page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
147
3
4
To route traffic to your network gateways, select a routing mode from the following options:
•
Dual gateway—Specify an IP address for both the external and the internal gateways. Network
traffic generated in response to client requests will be sent to the external gateway. All other
traffic that does not have a static route defined will be sent to the internal gateway.
•
Single gateway, restricted—Specify an IP address for just the external gateway. All other traffic
that does not have a static route defined will be discarded.
•
Single gateway, unrestricted—Specify an IP address to be used as both the external and internal
gateway. Network traffic not matching a static route will be sent to the external gateway.
•
No gateway—Network traffic received by the appliance but not matching a static route is
discarded.
Click Save.
Configuring Network Gateways in a Single-Homed
Environment
The following steps guide you through the setup of network gateways in a single-homed environment, where
only the internal interface is enabled. This configuration is less common than one that is dual-homed.
To configure a network gateway in a single-homed environment
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Network Settings.
2
In the Routing area, click Edit. The Configure Routing page appears.
3
To route traffic to your network gateway, select one of these routing modes:
4
•
Default gateway—Specify an IP address for the default gateway. Network traffic received by the
appliance, but not matching a static route will be sent to this address.
•
No gateway—Network traffic received by the appliance, but not matching a static route is
discarded.
Click Save.
Enabling a Route to the Internet
If Routing mode is set to Single gateway, unrestricted you can still enable a route to the Internet for your
network tunnel clients, provided your appliance is dual-homed (both internal and external interfaces are
enabled). When Enable route to Internet is set, all tunnel traffic originating from the client and destined for
the Internet (running in “redirect all” mode) will be routed to the specified IP address instead of being
discarded.
To enable a route to the Internet
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Network Settings.
2
In the Routing area, click Edit. The Configure Routing page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
148
3
Expand the Advanced area. The Connect Tunnel area appears.
4
Select the Enable route to Internet check box, and then type the IP address of your Internet router.
5
Click Save.
Configuring Static Routes
Static routes are added as entries to the routing table for networks reached from the internal interface.
Managing static route tables can be cumbersome, especially at a large site: you may want to create and edit the
routing information in a comma-separated value (CSV) text file outside of AMC and then import it. Static route
information that you import into AMC must be in an ASCII text file, with each entry on a new line (separated
from the previous entry by a CR/LF), and three values separated by commas: IP address, netmask, and gateway.
When you import a file, its contents entirely replace any static routes currently specified in AMC.
To configure static routing information
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Network Settings.
2
In the Routing area, click Edit. The Configure Routing page appears.
3
In the Static routes area, you can add or modify list entries one by one or as a group:
4
•
Add a single entry by clicking New and then typing the route information in the IP address,
Netmask, and Gateway boxes. To modify a list entry, click its link, and then make your changes.
After you add or modify an entry, click OK.
•
Click Import to select the static route table you want to import. The static route information
must be in an ASCII text file in CSV format. Each entry must be on a new line (separated from the
previous entry by a CR/LF), and must have three values separated by commas: IP address,
netmask, and gateway. When you import a file, its contents entirely replace any static routes
currently specified in AMC.
•
In order to modify an existing list of routes, you must either click the list item that you want to
change, or export the entire list, modify its contents, and then import it.
Click Save when you are finished making changes.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
149
To delete a static route
1
On the Configure Routing page, select the check box to the left of any static routes you want to
remove, and then click Delete.
2
Click Save.
Please note the following:
•
If you configure the appliance to use both the internal and external interfaces, verify the routing
settings to make sure that you have a network route to the internal interface. If the appliance is
on a different network than the computer you’re using to access AMC, you must set up routing
(configure an internal default network gateway that will pass traffic to an internal router, or
define a static route to the network on which the appliance is installed) to maintain access to
AMC after you apply your network configuration changes. For more information, see Configuring
Routing on page 142.
•
The routing information in AMC is sorted as follows:
•
•
The primary key is the Netmask, with entries sorted in descending order (from largest to
smallest)
•
The secondary key is IP address, with entries sorted in ascending order (from smallest to
largest)
If your internal network has a contiguous address space, you can combine multiple static routes
into one entry by specifying the proper subnet mask when you create the static route. The
following table provides two examples of using a subnet mask to route internal traffic to multiple
networks from a single static route entry:
Table 54. Multiple static routes combining
To route traffic to these networks:
Type this IP address
Type this subnet mask
192.168.0.0
192.168.1.0
192.168.2.0
192.168.3.0
192.168.0.0
255.255.252.0
192.168.*.*
(all networks in 192.168 range)
192.168.0.0
255.255.0.0
If necessary, you can explicitly create additional static routes for other subnets; the routing table
searches net masks from most to least specific.
Configuring Name Resolution
The appliance needs access to DNS servers to resolve host names to IP addresses. If you use WorkPlace to
browse Windows networks, you also need to specify a WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) server and
Windows domain name.
•
Configuring Domain Name Service
•
Configuring Windows Network Name Resolution
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
150
Configuring Domain Name Service
Configuring a DNS server enables the appliance to correctly resolve host names. Properly configuring DNS
ensures that the appliance can provide access to your network resources.
To configure DNS name resolution
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Network Settings.
2
In the Name resolution area, click Edit. The Configure Name Resolution page appears.
3
In the Search domains box, type the default DNS domain name for your company (such as
example.com). This domain name will be appended to unqualified host names to resolve them. You can
enter a maximum of six domain names, separated by semicolons.
4
In the DNS servers boxes, type the IP addresses of your primary and (if applicable) backup DNS servers.
The backup servers are used if the primary server is unavailable.
5
Click Save.
Configuring Windows Network Name Resolution
If you want to browse files on a Windows network using WorkPlace, you must specify a WINS (Windows Internet
Name Service) server and a Windows domain name. WorkPlace uses this information to perform name resolution
and build a list of resources for users to browse.
To configure Windows network name resolution
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Network Settings.
2
In the Name resolution area, click Edit. The Configure Name Resolution page appears.
3
In the Windows networking area, type:
4
•
The IP address of your primary and (if applicable) secondary WINS server.
•
Your Windows domain name using NetBIOS syntax (for example, mycompany).
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
151
Certificates
The Dell SMA appliance uses SSL certificates to secure information that the client computer sends to the server,
and to validate the appliance’s identity to connecting users. It requires at least two SSL certificates:
•
The Secure Mobile Access services use a certificate to secure user traffic from a Web browser to
WorkPlace, and from the Connect clients to the appliance. (If you want to provide several WorkPlace
sites, you can use a wildcard certificate for multiple sites, or associate a different certificate with each
one. In either case, the sites can have different host and domain names; for more information, see
Adding WorkPlace Sites on page 440.)
•
AMC uses a separate certificate to secure management traffic. This is usually a self-signed certificate.
Figure 12. Certificate usage
Subject Alternative Name (SAN) certificate support for Workplace, Workplace sites, and Connect Tunnel has
been added beginning in version 10.7. These certificates are used to securely encrypt communication channels
between a set of clients and multiple distinct SSL or TLS services.
SAN certificates simplify the IP address/hostname/certificate sets needed for a typical deployment. With a
single SAN certificate, you can utilize one IP address with multiple distinct SSL or TLS protected web or
client/server services, without the need for configuring additional IP addresses. Additionally, SANs can be used
for different host names on the same IP address, alleviating the need for a one-to-one mapping of SSL
certificate Common Names to FQDN.
NOTE: Only IPv4 addresses are supported in SAN certificates and Certificate Signing Requests (CSR).
Improvements include:
•
SANs-related features can be generated via the AMC instead of through mechanisms external to the
appliance:
•
CSR with SANs
•
Self-signed certificates with SAN entries
•
WorkPlace sites, custom FQDN URL resources, and ActiveSync resources can be created using existing
SAN certificates.
•
The appliance seamlessly handles Web connections to Workplace sites that use a combination of IP
address, FQDN, or SSL certificate, regardless of whether that Workplace site has its own dedicated IP
address or is sharing one with the Default Workplace site.
•
When using Connect Tunnel or Mobile Connect connections to Workplace sites, ensure Workplace sites
are not defined with a dedicated IP address, but share the Default Workplace site IP address. For
example, if a Default Workplace site of vpn.mycompany.com is bound to 192.168.200.160 with a SSL
certificate *.mycompany.com, and you want to add a new Workplace site for
contractors.mycompany.com, simply add the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) to the New Workplace
Site configuration page, and do not specify another IP address. This will allow Web or Tunnel
connections to connect to either vpn.mycompany.com or contractors.mycompany.com with no further
configuration needed on the appliance.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
152
The Administrator can generate, import, process, and otherwise use a SAN certificate for Workplace,
ActiveSync, Custom FQDN URL Mapping, or Tunnel-based access services.
CA certificates are also used for securing connections to back-end servers and authentication using client
certificates. See Importing CA Certificates on page 162 for more details.
•
Server Certificates
•
CA Certificates
•
Certificate FAQ
Server Certificates
To manage the SSL server certificates used to access WorkPlace and AMC, click SSL Settings in the main
navigation menu in AMC.
This is where you view, import, and delete SSL and CA certificates.
•
Certificate Strategy
•
Obtaining a Certificate from a Commercial CA
•
Creating a Self-Signed Certificate
•
Managing Server Certificates
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
153
Certificate Strategy
There are two types of certificates: commercial and self-signed.
•
A commercial CA verifies your company’s identity, vouching for your identity by providing you with a
certificate that the CA signs. A CA need not be commercial or third-party—a company can be its own CA.
Commercial certificates are purchased from a CA such as VeriSign (now part of Symantec)
(http://www.symantec.com/ssl-certificates), and are usually valid for one year.
•
With a self-signed SSL certificate, you are verifying your own identity. The associated private key data
is encrypted using a password. A self-signed certificate can also be a wildcard certificate, allowing it to
be used by multiple servers which share the same IP address and certificate, but have different FQDNs.
Although this kind of certificate is secure, a self-signed certificate is not in the browser’s built-in list of
CAs, so the user is prompted to accept it before each connection. There are a few ways to avoid this
prompting:
•
Configure the Secure Mobile Access clients to use the certificate root file.
•
Add the self-signed certificate to the user’s list of Trusted Root Certificate Authorities in the Web
browser.
•
Use a commercial CA, which is widely trusted by default.
When deciding which type of certificate to use for the servers, consider who will be connecting to the appliance
and how they will use resources on your network:
•
If business partners are connecting to Web resources through the appliance, they will likely want some
assurance of your identity before performing a transaction or providing confidential information. In this
case, you would probably want to obtain a certificate from a commercial CA for the appliance.
On the other hand, employees connecting to Web resources may trust a self-signed certificate. Even
then, you may want to obtain a third-party certificate so that users are not prompted to accept a selfsigned certificate each time they connect.
•
To accommodate users who connect to the appliance from small form factor devices, configure the
appliance with a certificate from a leading CA (such as VeriSign), or import the root certificate from your
CA to your users’ small form factor devices.
CAUTION: When the appliance is configured with a certificate from a CA that is not well known, or
one that is self-signed, small form factor device users may see an error message and be unable to log
in. Windows Mobile-powered devices, for example, are configured with the root files for only
VeriSign, CyberTrust, Thawte, and Entrust. For more information on small form factor devices, see
WorkPlace and Small Form Factor Devices on page 443.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
154
Obtaining a Certificate from a Commercial CA
Obtaining a certificate from a commercial CA provides verification of your identity for people who connect to
your network through the appliance. You must perform several steps to obtain and configure a certificate from
a commercial CA:
Figure 13. Obtaining a CA certificate
These steps describe how to obtain a commercial certificate.
•
Step1: Generate a Certificate Signing Request
•
Step2: Submit the CSR to a Commercial CA
•
Step 3: Review CSR Response and Add CA’s Root Certificate
•
Step 4: Import the CSR Response Into AMC
•
Step 5: Apply Your Changes
Step1: Generate a Certificate Signing Request
Using AMC, you can generate a certificate signing request (CSR). This process creates an RSA key pair that will
be used to secure server information, and a CSR containing your public key and identity information. The
information you provide is used by the commercial CA to generate your certificate, and may be visible to users
who connect to the appliance.
To generate a CSR
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
In the SSL certificates area, click Edit.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
155
3
In the Certificate signing requests list, click New. The Create Certificate Signing Request page
appears.
4
The Certificate information you fill out is stored in the CSR and used by the commercial CA when
generating your certificate; it may be visible to users who connect to the appliance.
a
In the Fully qualified domain name box, type the server name as you want it to appear in the
certificate. Also known as a “common name” (or CN), this is usually composed of a host and a
domain name; for example, you might type vpn.example.com.
Users with a Web-based client will use this name to access the appliance (in other words, to
access WorkPlace), so it’s best to use a name that is easily remembered. You’ll also reference this
name when configuring the Connect or OnDemand components to provide access to TCP/IP
resources. You must add this name to your external DNS to make the appliance accessible to
users.
Certificate Signing Requests can be created with multiple FQDN or IP addresses. On the SSL
Settings > SSL Certificate > Create Certificate Signing Request page, simply enter multiple FQDNs
and/or IP addresses separated by commas. Any number of SANs can be added to a certificate, but
the text input field is 1,000 characters maximum. Wild cards are permitted. The entered FQDNs
and IP addresses are encoded in the subject alternative name certificate extension and the
certificate FQDN is encoded as an additional SAN entry in the CSR.
b
In the Alternative name box, type any additional FQDNs or IP addresses that should appear in the
certificate using the Subject Alternative Name certificate extension. Separate multiple
alternative names and IP addresses with a comma.
c
In the Organizational unit box, type your division or department (for example, MIS Dept).
d
In the Organization box, type your company or organization name as you want it to appear in
your SSL certificate.
e
In the Locality box, type your city or town. Do not use an abbreviation.
f
In the State box, type the name of your state or province. Do not use an abbreviation.
g
In the Country box, type the two-letter abbreviation for your country. For a list of valid country
codes, see the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Web site at
http://www.iso.org and search for ISO 3166-1.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
156
h
In the Key length list, select the key length you want to use for the key: 512, 768, 1024 (the
default), 1280, or 1536. Larger keys increase security, but make the appliance run more slowly. A
key length of 1024 or 1280 is recommended for most installations.
5
In the Signature list, select the algorithm used for the certificate.
6
Review the information to verify that you’ve typed it correctly, and then click Save to generate the CSR.
The Create Certificate Signing Request page appears.
7
Copy the contents of the CSR text from AMC to the clipboard or into a text file, and then click OK.
NOTE: Some commercial CAs may have problems reading CSRs that contain characters produced by
pressing the SHIFT key, such as “&” or “!”. For example, when specifying your company name or other
information, you may want to spell out “&” (if used) as “and”.
Step2: Submit the CSR to a Commercial CA
The process of submitting a CSR will vary, depending on which commercial CA you choose. VeriSign is a popular
commercial CA that provides SSL certificates through their Secure Site Services; for information see
http://www.symantec.com/ssl-certificates.
To submit a CSR to a commercial CA
1
Copy the contents of your certificate signing request from the Create Certificate Signing Request page
in AMC.
2
Submit it to the CA using the method they request (usually you either copy and paste the CSR text into a
form on the CA’s Web site, or attach it to an email message).
Depending on what is specified by the CA, you may need to paste all the text, or only the text between
the BEGIN NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST and END NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST banners (including
the banners themselves). If you’re not sure, contact the CA.
3
Wait for the commercial CA to verify your identity. You may be asked to produce one or more documents
attesting to your corporate identity (such as a business license or article of incorporation).
NOTE: Submit your CSR only once; you may otherwise be billed twice by the CA. This would also change
the internal private key, making the response from the CA unusable.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
157
Step 3: Review CSR Response and Add CA’s Root Certificate
After you’ve submitted your CSR, you must wait for the CA to verify your identity. After they complete this
process, the CA will send you the certificate reply. It is usually in one of two formats:
•
A file attached to an email message. In this case, you can save the file to your local file system (the one
from which you’ll access AMC) and then import it into AMC.
•
Text embedded within an email message. In this case, you copy the text and paste it into a text box
provided in AMC. Be sure to include the BEGIN CERTIFICATE and END CERTIFICATE banners.
If the CA does not provide a full certificate chain in the CSR response (a common practice), AMC will try to
complete the certificate chain when you import the CSR response. If it is unable to complete the chain, AMC
displays an error message. If this occurs, you must upload the CA’s root certificate or any intermediary public
certificates to the appliance. If you are acting as your own CA, you will probably need to perform this step.
To complete a certificate chain
1
Obtain the trusted root certificate or intermediary public certificate from the CA. Most external
commercial CAs provide the certificates on their Web site; if the CA is run by your company, check with
the server administrator.
2
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
3
In the SSL certificates area, click Edit.
4
In the Certificate signing requests list, click the Process CSR response link for the appropriate
certificate. The Import CSR Certificate page appears.
5
Upload the certificate:
•
If the certificate is in binary format, click Browse and then upload the certificate reply from your
local file system (that is, the computer from which you’ve logged in to AMC).
•
If the certificate is in base-64 encoded (PEM) text format, click Certificate text and then paste
the certificate into the text box. Be sure to include the BEGIN CERTIFICATE and END
CERTIFICATE banners.
6
Click Import to return to the CA Certificates page.
7
To verify that the certificate was properly uploaded, click CA Certificate. The new certificate should
appear on the CA Certificates page.
Step 4: Import the CSR Response Into AMC
To create a certificate, import the CSR response into AMC.
To import a certificate reply
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
In the SSL certificates area, click Edit.
3
In the Certificate signing requests list, click the Process CSR response link for the appropriate
certificate.
4
Upload the certificate on the Import CSR Certificate page:
•
If the certificate is in binary format, click Browse and then upload the certificate reply from your
local file system (that is, the computer from which you have logged in to AMC).
•
If the certificate is in base-64 encoded (PEM) text format, select Certificate text and paste the
certificate into the text box. Be sure to include the BEGIN CERTIFICATE and END
CERTIFICATE banners.
5
In the Used by list, select AMC or WorkPlace/access methods (select None if you want to build a list of
certificates from which to choose later). If you defined additional WorkPlace sites (in addition to the
default WorkPlace site), their names are included in this list.
6
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
158
7
To verify that the certificate was properly uploaded, click the plus sign (+) next to it on the SSL
Certificates page.
Step 5: Apply Your Changes
To start using a new certificate, you need to apply your configuration changes. For more information, see
Applying Configuration Changes on page 134.
After applying the change, the appliance examines the new certificate and begins using it for all new
connections. If the appliance fails to correctly process the certificate, you see a failure message and the event
log records information about the failure. Typically, this occurs if there is no certificate, the certificate has
expired (or is not yet valid), or the cached password in the encrypted password file is incorrect.
NOTE: If your users authenticate using digital certificates, you must configure a trusted root file on the
server as well as on the clients. See Configuring Client Certificate Revocation on page 164.
Creating a Self-Signed Certificate
If you plan to use a self-signed SSL certificate (instead of obtaining a certificate from a commercial CA), you can
create one using AMC. A host is not selected for the certificate, because there is no one to one mapping of
certificates to hosts. Wildcard certificates allow one certificate to map to multiple hosts. In addition, a selfsigned SSL certificate can be created with multiple FQDN or IP addresses.
To create a self-signed certificate
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
In the SSL certificates area, click Edit.
3
Click New and then select Create self-signed certificate from the menu.
4
In the Fully qualified domain name box, type a wildcard domain name such as *.domainname.com, or
type the individual server name as you want it to appear in the certificate:
•
The main appliance certificate can be a wildcard certificate, or you might type something like
vpn.example.com. You must add this name to your external DNS to make the appliance
accessible to users.
This is the name users will enter for access to Web-based resources on your network. For a
wildcard certificate, the “*” matches any string of characters up to the dot, such as specific
server names. You will also reference this name when configuring the Connect clients to provide
access to TCP/IP resources.
•
If this certificate will be used by AMC (as opposed to WorkPlace), you might type something like
amc.example.com. In most cases, you should add this name to your internal DNS to simplify
access to AMC.
•
Any number of SANs can be added to a certificate, but the text input field is 1,000 characters
maximum. Simply enter multiple FQDNs and/or IPv4 or IPv6 addresses separated by commas.
SANs can contain wildcard entries (*.dell.com, *.access.dell.com), unique FQDNs
(access.dell.com, vpn.dell.com), and IP addresses.
The entered FQDNs and IP addresses are encoded in the subject alternative name certificate
extension and FQDNs are encoded as an additional SAN name in the certificate. If a SAN is an IP
address, it is encoded as an IPAddress in the SAN extension instead of a DNSName.
5
In the Alternative names box, type any additional FQDNs or IP addresses that should appear in the
certificate using the Subject Alternative Name certificate extension. Separate multiple alternative
names and IP addresses with a comma.
6
In the Organization box, type the company or organization name as you want it to appear in your SSL
certificate.
7
In the Country box, type the two-letter abbreviation for your country. For a list of valid country codes,
go to the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Web site at http://www.iso.org and look
for information on ISO 3166-1.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
159
8
In the Key size list, select the key length you want to use for the key. Larger keys increase security, but
make the appliance run more slowly. A key length of 1024 bits or 1280 bits is recommended for most
installations.
9
In the Signature list, select the algorithm used for the certificate.
10 Click Save.
11 Click Pending changes and then apply the changes. (For more information, see Applying Configuration
Changes on page 134.)
Creating the Trusted Root File for a Self-Signed Certificate
If you use a self-signed certificate, you will probably want to provide your users with a trusted root file
(otherwise they will see a security prompt at every login).
To create a trusted root file for a self-signed certificate
1
Log in to the appliance.
2
Make a copy of the server.cert file, which is located in /usr/local/extranet/etc.
3
Open the copied file in a text editor and remove everything except the root certificate. The file will
contain one or more certificates as well as the private key. The root certificate is the last certificate
block in the file, including the banners. In the following example, you would delete the first certificate
block and the private key block:
Certificate 1
Root certificate
Private key
The resulting file looks like this:
4
Distribute this file to your users. This increases security and prevents users from being prompted to
accept the SSL certificate each time they connect. See Importing CA Certificates on page 162.
•
If you want increased security for your Web-based users, this file should be imported into the
browsers for these users.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
160
NOTE:
•
Setup Tool creates a self-signed certificate for AMC. For most deployments, this self-signed
certificate is sufficient and there is no need to obtain a certificate from a commercial CA. It is
important, however, to use AMC within a trusted network. Self-signed certificates protect against
passive eavesdroppers but not against active attackers.
•
If you’re deploying OnDemand for Microsoft Internet Explorer users on Apple Macintosh systems,
you must obtain a commercial SSL certificate. A self-signed certificate will not work because the
Macintosh Java Virtual Machine (JVM) won’t accept a certificate signed from an unknown CA.
Managing Server Certificates
This section describes tasks related to managing SSL certificates in AMC.
Importing an Existing Certificate from Another Computer
If you already have a certificate from a commercial CA, you may want to transfer it and its private key to the
appliance. After you import the certificate, it will be used by the servers to secure user traffic on the
appliance.
A host is not selected for the certificate, because there is no one to one mapping of certificates to hosts.
Wildcard certificates allow one certificate to map to multiple hosts.
The appliance stores certificates in the PKCS #12 format. If your certificate is stored in a different format,
convert it to PKCS #12 before importing. After performing the conversion, confirm that the PKCS #12 file
contains the complete certificate chain.
To transfer an existing certificate to the appliance
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
In the SSL certificates area, click Edit.
3
Click New, and then select Import certificate from the menu.
4
On the Import Certificate page, click Browse and then upload the certificate from your local file system
(that is, the computer from which you have logged in to AMC).
5
In the Password box, type the password that was used to encrypt the private key.
6
Click Save.
The appliance uses the previous certificate until you apply your configuration changes.
Exporting an SSL Certificate
You can export the SSL certificate used to secure user traffic on the appliance. It will include the private key
and be saved in PKCS #12 format.
To export the SSL certificate from the appliance
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
In the SSL certificates area, click Edit.
3
Select the check box next to the certificate you want to export, and then click Export. The Export
Certificate page appears.
4
In the Password box, type the password that you want to use to encrypt the private key.
5
Click Save, and then download the certificate file to your local file system (that is, the computer from
which you’ve logged into AMC).
6
Click OK.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
161
CA Certificates
Every CA requires a certificate so that it can be “trusted” by entities that request digital certificates from it. If
a client trusts a CA certificate, it automatically trusts any other certificates that are issued by that CA. CA
certificates thus form one of the foundations of public key cryptography. The CA certificate is either signed by
the CA itself (a “root certificate”), or by a higher authority in a hierarchy of CAs in a public key infrastructure
(an “intermediate CA certificate”).
The appliance uses CA certificates to secure the following:
•
Connections to a back-end LDAP or AD authentication server
•
Connections to a back-end HTTPS Web server
•
Device profiling (End Point Control), to verify the validity of certificates submitted by users who connect
to the appliance. See Client certificate in Device Profile Attributes on page 379 for more information.
Figure 14. CA certificates usage
The appliance includes over 100 public root certificates from leading commercial CAs. If you’ve obtained a
certificate from a commercial CA, its root certificate or intermediary public certificate is probably already
installed on the appliance. However, if you are acting as your own CA you must import a root or intermediary
public certificate to the appliance.
To view the list of certificates, click Edit in the CA Certificates area of the SSL Settings page.
This is also where you delete CA certificates.
•
Importing CA Certificates
•
Configuring Client Certificate Revocation
•
Managing CA Certificates
Importing CA Certificates
If the appliance is not configured with the necessary CA certificate, you must obtain a copy and import it to the
appliance using AMC. The procedure is the same, whether the certificate will be used to secure connections to
back-end resources, or to authenticate users by means of a client certificate.
To import a CA certificate to the appliance
1
Obtain the trusted root certificate or intermediary public certificate from the CA. Most external
commercial CAs provide the certificates on their Web sites; if the CA is run by your company, check with
the server administrator.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
162
2
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
3
In the CA Certificates area, click Edit on the certificates line.
4
Click New. The Import CA Certificate page appears.
5
Do one of the following:
6
•
If the certificate is in binary format, click Choose File and then upload the certificate from your
local file system (that is, the computer from which you’ve logged in to AMC).
•
If the certificate is in base-64 encoded (PEM) text format, click Certificate text and then paste
the certificate into the text box. Be sure to include the BEGIN CERTIFICATE and END
CERTIFICATE banners.
Specify the connection types this certificate will be used to secure:
Table 55. Connection types for certificates
Connection type
Description
Authentication server
connections (LDAPS)
Securing your LDAP or Active Directory (AD) connection with SSL
enhances security by preventing attempts to impersonate the LDAP or
AD server. To configure LDAP or AD over SSL, you must add the root
certificate for the CA that granted your LDAP or AD certificate to the
SSL trusted roots file.
Web server connections
(HTTPS)
If you have a back-end Web resource that is secured with SSL (that is,
it uses HTTPS instead of HTTP), configure the Web proxy service to
verify the root certificate presented by the back-end server. This
important security check will help ensure that you can trust the
identity of the back-end server. See Configuring the Web Proxy
Service on page 510 for details.
If the back-end server’s root certificate is not pre-installed on the
appliance, you must obtain a copy and import it in AMC.
Device profiling
(End Point Control)
EPC can be used to verify the validity of certificates submitted by
users who connect to the appliance. If a client certificate is used in a
device profile to classify users into an EPC zone, the appliance must
be configured with the root or intermediary certificates for the CA
that issued the client certificate to your users.
When the appliance interrogates the user’s computer to determine if
the specified certificate is present, it can be configured to search just
the system store
(HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\SystemCertificates), or also
include the user store
(HKCU\Software\Microsoft\SystemCertificates).
OCSP response verification
The OCSP response signing certificate is used to verify a response
from a configured OCSP responder. When importing the OCSP
response signing certificate, enable OCSP response verification. This
is a different certificate than the CA certificate for the OCSP
responder or server itself, which is used in the PKI Authentication
server.
7
Click Import. The CA Certificates page appears and displays a confirmation message.
8
The new certificate appears in the alphabetical list on the CA Certificates page. When you upload a CA
certificate for use with client certificate authentication (and you apply the change), network services
are automatically restarted and user connections are terminated, forcing users to reauthenticate. You
may want to schedule the change during off-peak hours.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
163
NOTE:
•
If the certificate is being used to secure authentication server connections, check to see that the
appropriate LDAP over SSL or Active Directory over SSL settings are enabled on the Configure
Authentication Server page in AMC.
•
By default, the Web proxy service is configured to verify the root certificate presented by back-end
HTTPS Web servers. This important security check helps ensure that you can trust the identity of
the back-end server. See Configuring the Web Proxy Service on page 510.
•
If you do not want to trust a CA listed on the CA Certificates page, select the check box next to it,
and then click Delete.
•
When setting up devices profiles, avoid checking for client certificates within the same zone more
than three times. If there are multiple EPC checks for client certificates within the same zone,
users may see an error message (“An error was encountered encoding data to be sent to the Logon
Server”).
Configuring Client Certificate Revocation
Certificates installed on client devices can be used to authenticate users or devices, giving them access to a
particular realm. A certificate is usually valid until it expires, but it is possible for it to be compromised before
it expires. For example, a CA may decide that a certificate was improperly issued, or its private key may have
been compromised.
You can consult a certificate revocation list (CRL) to check a certificate’s validity (its location—the CRL
distribution point, or CDP—is typically included in the X.509 certificate). If a certificate is no longer valid, the
user is denied access. CRLs are published for each authority and can contain status of only the certificates
issued by that certificate authority. This requires a separate, hierarchical CRL server for each CA that you want
to trust. The client needs to know the public key for each CA in the chain to verify each certificate and CA at
each level in the chain.
Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) and an OCSP responder server can be used instead of a CRL server to
check the status of a certificate. OCSP responders take the certificate from a client, evaluate it and give back a
response to the server as “revoked”, ”unrevoked”, or ”unknown”. OCSP can save bandwidth in a large
organization, as the CRL server list can get very large. OCSPs can be configured to operate for any number of
CAs and certificates. A single OCSP server can be configured for the entire PKI infrastructure, irrespective of CA
relations.
NOTE:
•
If both CRL and OCSP are enabled for a CA certificate, only OCSP will be used.
•
Fallback from CRL to OCSP or OCSP to CRL is not supported.
Procedures for CRL and OCSP configurations are provided below.
•
Managing Certificates with a CRL
•
Configuring an OCSP Responder
Managing Certificates with a CRL
Use the Manage CA Certificate page in AMC to configure certificate revocation checking for individual
certificates, and determine the connection types the certificate is used to secure.
To verify the validity of a client certificate and configure certificate revocation
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
Under CA Certificates, click Edit on the certificates line.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
164
3
To see details about a certificate, click the plus sign (+) next to it in the Issued To list. To edit a
certificate, click its link. For example, click the plus sign next to “Thawte Server CA” to see details
about this certificate from Thawte Consulting, and click the link to edit it.
4
In the Used for area, specify the connection types this certificate is used to secure.
•
Authentication server connections (LDAPS)—See Configuring a PKI Authentication Server on
page 201.
•
Web server connections (HTTPS)—See CA Certificates on page 162.
•
Device profiling (End Point Control)—See Client certificate in Device Profile Attributes on page
379.
5
To specify CRL settings, check the Use Certificate revocation list in the Certificate revocation
checking area. The format for the CRL must be DER-based (.crl); the appliance cannot use a CRL that's
been created in PEM format.
6
The appliance retrieves lists of revoked certificates from a CRL distribution point (CDP). Specify the
location of this CDP:
•
The CDP is usually specified in the certificate itself. By default, the appliance uses the CDP from
the client certificate.
•
Alternatively you can specify a URL for it. Check the Use this certificate distribution point (CDP)
check box. If a login is required for it, type the credentials.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
165
7
If Use this certificate distribution point (CDP) is selected, you can specify how often the CRL should be
retrieved using the Download CRL every <n> hours option. If you don’t specify a download interval, a
new CRL is retrieved when the old one expires. (CRLs are updated frequently so that when a certificate
is revoked, that information is distributed in a timely manner.)
8
The appliance checks client certificates against this list. To perform CRL checking for the entire chain of
certificates, starting with the CA root certificate, select the Validate the entire chain check box.
9
Specify whether users should be allowed or denied access if the CDP is inaccessible by selecting Allow
user access or Block user access. The remote CDP you specified might be offline, or it may not be
indicated on the certificate. (It is an optional item for the X.509 standard, not a mandatory one.)
10 Click Save.
Configuring an OCSP Responder
Use the OCSP page in AMC to configure global settings for an OCSP responder. The OCSP responder can be
referenced when configuring a PKI authentication server.
To configure an OCSP responder
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
Under CA Certificates, click Edit on the OCSP line. The OCSP page is displayed.
3
In the Default responder URL field, enter the URL of the OCSP responder server.
4
In the Maximum clock skew field, enter the maximum number of seconds that the OCSP response time
can differ from the local time. The default value is 300 seconds, the minimum is 1 second, and the
maximum is 3600 seconds.
5
Click Save.
NOTE: Just importing a CA certificate and enabling OCSP is not sufficient for OCSP to work. You must
import the OCSP response signing certificate for the CA certificate being used and enable OCSP response
verification when importing it. See Importing CA Certificates on page 162.
Related Topics
•
Configuring a PKI Authentication Server
Managing CA Certificates
This section describes tasks related to managing certificates on the appliance; importing certificates is
described in Importing CA Certificates on page 162.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
166
Viewing CA Certificate Details
You can view the details for the appliance certificate, such as the subject, issuer, start and end time, serial
number, and MD5 checksum. Details of a newly imported certificate are not available until you have applied the
configuration change.
To view CA certificate details
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
In the CA Certificates area, click Edit.
3
Click the plus sign (+) to the left of the certificate you want to see details about.
Mapping Certificates to Hosts
Since multiple hosts on the appliance may use a single wildcard certificate, the Certificate usages table
provides a mapping of a single certificate to multiple sets of hosts. A set of hosts is defined as one or more
WorkPlace sites, Exchange sites, or custom FQDN mapped resources that are on the same IP address. Any given
set of hosts must use the same wildcard certificate and therefore are treated as a single item for mapping
certificates in the Certificate usages table. AMC is treated as a separate host even if it is on the same IP
address as other hosts on a single-homed appliance.
To map a new certificate to a host or set of hosts
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
In the SSL Certificates area, click Edit.
3
In the Certificates column of the Certificate usages table, click on the certificate to activate an inplace editor with a drop-down certificate selector.
4
Select the certificate. For individual hosts, all certificates are available for selection. For a set of
multiple hosts, only wildcard certificates are available for selection.
5
Click OK.
Exporting CA Certificates
You can export a CA certificate and its private key to your local computer. The certificate is saved in PKCS #12
format.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
167
To export a CA certificate
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
In the CA Certificates area, click Edit.
3
Select the check box to the left of the certificate you want to export.
4
Click Export.
5
In the Password text box, type the password that will encrypt the private key.
6
Click Save. The certificate is saved (by default) to a file named server_cert.p12.
Deleting CA Certificates
To make the list of certificates more manageable, you might want to delete those that you know you will never
need.
To delete a CA certificate
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click SSL Settings.
2
In the CA Certificates area, click Edit.
3
Select the check box to the left of any certificates you want to delete.
4
Click Delete.
Related Topics
•
Configuring Client Certificate Revocation
Certificate FAQ
This section addresses frequently asked questions about working with certificates.
How do I obtain a certificate from a non-commercial CA?
The process is identical to the one for obtaining a certificate from a commercial CA, except that you submit the
CSR to a non-commercial CA (such as a Microsoft Self-Signed Certificate Authority). This part of the process is
outlined in Step2: Submit the CSR to a Commercial CA on page 157.
When do certificates and CRLs expire?
Self-signed certificates are valid for five years. The expiration date for third-party certificates varies,
depending on who issued the certificate; contact the CA for more information. A Certificate Revocation List
(CRL) is valid for a much shorter period of time: days, or even hours.
When using certificates and CRLs, it is important for the clock on the appliance to be accurate, since it is used
to determine when these items expire.
Does Secure Mobile Access support SAN certificates?
Subject Alternative Name (SAN) certificate support for Workplace, Workplace sites, and Connect Tunnel has
been added beginning in version10.7. Certificates (also called UCC--Unified Communications Certificate) are
used to securely encrypt communication channels between a set of clients and multiple distinct SSL or TLS
services.
SAN certificates simplify the IP address/hostname/certificate sets needed for a typical deployment. With a
single SAN certificate, you can utilize one IP address with multiple distinct SSL or TLS protected web or
client/server services, without the need for configuring additional IP addresses. Additionally, SANs can be used
for different host names on the same IP address, alleviating the need for a one-to-one mapping of SSL
certificate Common Names to FQDN.
NOTE: Only IPv4 addresses are supported in SAN certificates and Certificate Signing Requests (CSR).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
168
Improvements include:
•
SANs-related features can be generated via the AMC instead of through mechanisms external to the
appliance:
•
CSR with SANs
•
Self-signed certificates with SAN entries
•
WorkPlace sites, custom FQDN URL resources, and ActiveSync resources can be created using existing
SAN certificates.
•
Global load balancing uses original web requests to direct traffic to a load balancer instead of the
default WorkPlace site.
•
Connect Tunnel seamlessly handles connections to Workplace sites that use a combination of IP address,
FQDN, or SSL certificate, regardless of the number of IP addresses associated with a WorkPlace site.
The Administrator can generate, import, process, and otherwise use a SAN certificate for Workplace,
ActiveSync, Custom FQDN URL Mapping, or Tunnel based access services.
Are intermediate certificates supported for end user certificate verification?
Yes, intermediate certificates are supported for end user certificate verification. This covers PKI and LDAP
certificate methods. This allows an intermediate certifying authority to be imported to validate a certificate
chain, without requiring trust of the root certifying authority.
A client machine can use a client certificate that was issued by an intermediate certifying authority. When such
a client certificate is imported directly on Windows 7, the client certificate is stored in the personal store, the
intermediate certificate is imported to the intermediate CA store, and the root CA certificate is imported to the
root CA store. This is the recommended method, and the certificates will work with tunnel clients and ExtraWeb
clients using PKI authentication. If all three certificates are stored in the personal store, which can happen if
certmgr.msc is used to import the client certificate, then Connect Tunnel may display an error and deny access.
This is not a recommended configuration.
What are the different CA certificates on the appliance and how are they used?
To see the list of CA certificates available on the appliance, click SSL Settings on the main navigation menu,
and then click Edit in the CA Certificates area. By default, any certificate in the list can be used to secure up to
three connection types (authentication server, secure Web server, and client certificate). Click on a certificate
to set the connection types you want it to secure.
How many CA certificates can be stored on the appliance?
The roots file can contain as many certificates as you want to trust. For instructions on how to import additional
CA certificates, see Importing CA Certificates on page 162.
Can private keys or CSRs generated from other tools be imported to the appliance?
Private keys and CSRs must be generated on the appliance using Setup Tool or the certificate generation tool.
However, you can copy private keys and CSRs from one Dell SMA appliance to another using the procedure
described in Managing Server Certificates on page 161. Any copied certificates are overwritten if you make
changes to them in AMC.
Where is the AMC certificate stored?
AMC’s self-signed certificate is stored on the appliance in /usr/local/app/mgmt-server/sysconf/active/.
For AMC, a self-signed certificate is sufficient for most environments. It is important, however, to use AMC
within a trusted network. Self-signed certificates protect against passive eavesdroppers but not against active
attackers.
Should I keep all CA certificates on the appliance, or just the ones I need?
For the sake of convenience, the appliance includes more than 100 CA certificates. To make your deployment
more secure, you may want to pare this list down so that it includes only the CA certificates you need for client
certificates, LDAPS, and HTTPS. A shorter list is also easier to manage.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
169
Managing User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying a user’s identity to ensure that the individual really is who he or she
claims to be. (Authentication differs from authorization: it verifies identity, while authorization specifies access
rights.) This section describes how to reference external authentication servers.
To manage user authentication, you must first define one or more external authentication servers in AMC, and
then set up realms that reference those authentication servers. These are the realms that users will log in to.
For information on realms, see Using Realms and Communities on page 58. You can also configure a local
authentication repository on the appliance for testing, as described in Configuring Local User Storage on page
213.
•
About Intermediate Certificates
•
Configuring Authentication Servers
•
Configuring Microsoft Active Directory Servers
•
Configuring LDAP and LDAPS Authentication
•
Configuring RADIUS Authentication
•
User-Mapped Tunnel Addressing
•
Configuring RSA Server Authentication
•
Configuring a PKI Authentication Server
•
Configuring a SAML Based Authentication Server
•
Configuring a Single Sign-On Authentication Server
•
Using RSA ClearTrust Authentication
•
Dell Defender
•
Configuring Local User Storage
•
Testing LDAP and AD Authentication Configurations
•
Configuring Chained Authentication
•
Enabling Group Affinity Checking in a Realm
•
Using One-Time Passwords for Added Security
•
Configuring Personal Device Authorization
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
170
About Intermediate Certificates
You can configure an authentication server to trust intermediate CAs without verifying the entire chain. This
provides benefits, such as distributing certificate management among several signing authorities, several of
whom might be remote to the root CA server and therefore would otherwise be unable to issue certificates, and
adds security because the compromise of any single signing authority does not compromise the entire network.
To configure trusted intermediate certificates, see Configuring a PKI Authentication Server on page 201.
For example, you could create a root certificate signing authority on a system that is not connected to the
corporate network. You can then issue a set of trusted intermediate signing authority certificates to be
deployed in various sectors of the network (often by department or organizational unit). For the VPN, this is
most often done to distribute machine or personal certificates to client systems.
The other alternative is to obtain a signing certificate from a certificate authority such as VeriSign or Thawte. In
this case, your main CA is actually an intermediate CA itself.
By SSL rules, the root CA certificate must be accessible in order to validate the entire chain. However, the
appliance makes no distinction between importing a CA certificate for trust and importing a CA certificate to
validate a certificate chain for the intermediate CA that you want the appliance to trust. If no options are
selected when a CA certificate is imported, the CA will only be used to validate certificate chains. (The options
are the connection types the certificate is used to secure: Authentication server connections (LDAPS), Web
server connections (HTTPS), and Device profiling (End Point Control)). Any CA certificate used only to validate
certificate chains is not offered as a trusted signer during client certificate authentication or EPC certificate
enforcement.
When an end user presents a client certificate signed by an intermediate CA, assuming the appliance trusts the
signing authority, the user is allowed to authenticate and access resources normally.
When an end user presents a client certificate issued by a root CA of the trusted intermediate CA, unless the
administrator has also imported the root CA for trust purposes, the end user authentication attempt fails due to
lack of valid and trusted certificate.
If a client presents a certificate that is signed by a CA that exists only for chain validation, the certificate will
be rejected. This results in an authentication failure or a failure for certificate authentication and in a failure
to match the device profile for certificate EPC.
Configuring Authentication Servers
Setting up authentication involves the following: a directory (such as LDAP, Microsoft Active Directory, or the
local authentication store on the appliance), an authentication method (username/password, token or smart
card, or digital certificate), and other configuration items that make the authentication process unique (for
example, an LDAP search base, or adding custom prompts and messages). The Dell SMA appliance supports the
leading authentication directories and methods.
After you reference an authentication server in a realm and associate users with the realm, the appliance
checks users’ credentials against the credentials stored in the specified authentication repository. You can also
set up chained (two-factor) authentication; see Configuring Chained Authentication on page 215 for details.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
171
To configure an authentication server
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click New.
2
In the User store area, specify the directory type or authentication method you want to configure:
Table 56. Directory type or authentication method selection
Authentication directory
Microsoft Active Directory
Credential type
For more information
•
Username/password
Configuring Microsoft Active
Directory Servers on page 174
•
Username/password
•
Digital certificate
Configuring LDAP and LDAPS
Authentication on page 189
•
Username/password
•
Token-based
authentication (such as
SecurID or SoftID)
•
Token-based
authentication (such as
SecurID or SoftID)
and
Microsoft Active Directory Tree
LDAP
RADIUS
RSA Authentication Manager
Server
Configuring RADIUS Authentication
on page 194
Configuring RSA Server
Authentication on page 200
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
172
Table 56. Directory type or authentication method selection
Authentication directory
Credential type
For more information
Public key infrastructure
(PKI)
•
Digital certificate (with Configuring a PKI Authentication
optional certificate
Server on page 201
revocation checking)
SAML 2.0 Identity Provider
•
Username/password
Configuring a SAML Based
Authentication Server on page 203
RSA ClearTrust
(single sign-on)
•
N/A
Configuring a Single Sign-On
Authentication Server on page 206
Local users
(local user storage)
•
Username/password
Configuring Local User Storage on
page 213
3
Select the Credential type of the authentication server (what types are available depends on the User
store you selected).
4
Click Continue. For information about the next step in the configuration process, follow the link for the
User store you selected in the previous step.
Related Topics
•
Defining Multiple Authentication Servers
•
Disabling Authorization Checks
•
Configuring Chained Authentication
•
Enabling Group Affinity Checking in a Realm
•
Using One-Time Passwords for Added Security
Defining Multiple Authentication Servers
The Dell SMA appliance supports the definition and use of multiple authentication servers. A realm references
one or two authentication servers and determines which access agents are provisioned to your users and what
End Point Control restrictions (if any) are imposed. See Overview: Users, Groups, Communities, and Realms on
page 57 for more about realms.
Following are examples of using multiple authentication servers referenced by realms:
•
Chained authentication (two authentication servers)
Example: RADIUS with Token/SecurID and LDAP with username/password
Users logging in to a realm are authenticated against two servers. You can configure AMC so that users
see only one prompt. See Configuring Chained Authentication on page 215 for details.
•
Use different servers to handle authentication and authorization
Example: RADIUS with Token/SecurID and Active Directory (for group information)
The user authenticates against one repository, and then the user’s group information is passed from a
second one. For more information, see Enabling Group Affinity Checking in a Realm on page 218.
•
Multiple credential types and a single authentication server
Example: RADIUS with username/password and RADIUS with Token/SecurID
Suppose your company employees log in with usernames and passwords, but the employees of your callcenter log in with SecurID tokens. You could create an employee realm and a callcenter realm, each
referencing the appropriate credential type and RADIUS server.
•
Multiple instances of the same directory/authentication method using different back-end servers
Example: Two RADIUS/password instances using different RADIUS servers
In this case you would define two authentication servers, each with the appropriate server information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
173
•
Multiple instances of the same directory/authentication method on the same server, configured
differently
Example: Two instances of LDAP with username/password on the same server but using different search
bases
In this case each realm would search a different subtree within the directory. For example, suppose
Partner A is in one LDAP subtree and Partner B is in another. You could define a partnerA realm and a
partnerB realm, each configured with the appropriate search base.
Disabling Authorization Checks
You can optionally disable the querying of group information used for authorization when configuring an
authentication server. A Use this authentication server to check group membership check box is available for
each server type that can contain group information used for authorization, including Active Directory, Active
Directory Tree, and LDAP servers.
Usually, when you use a directory server as part of authentication, you also want the group information stored
there to be used in policy authorization. However, in some cases a directory server is used for secondary
authentication and does not contain group information. In other cases, the secondary authentication server
does not use the same identifier for the user.
If a group query is made on both a primary and a secondary server, the authentication process takes longer.
However, if the user name is different on the two servers, a group query using the name from the primary server
will result in an error from the secondary server. Since the appliance policy always defaults to closed, such an
error will result in any deny rule being applied to the end user. By disabling group authorization checks on the
secondary server, you can avoid these problems.
If group checking is disabled for an authentication server, the server will not be available in the list of available
affinity servers on the realm configuration page. Conversely, if an authentication server is in use as an affinity
server for any realm, group checking cannot be disabled for that authentication server. See Enabling Group
Affinity Checking in a Realm on page 218 for more information.
Configuring Microsoft Active Directory Servers
The appliance can validate username/password credentials against Microsoft Active Directory (AD) configured
with either a single root domain, or one or more subordinate (child) domains. The following illustration shows
typical Active Directory configuration options:
Figure 15. Microsoft Active Directory configuration options
You must modify your firewall or router to allow the appliance to communicate with your AD server. The
appliance uses standard LDAP and LDAPS ports to communicate with Active Directory:
•
LDAP (389/tcp)
•
LDAP over SSL (636/tcp)
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
174
With Microsoft Active Directory Tree there are additional ports, which facilitate searches and logons:
•
Global catalog (3268/tcp)
•
Global catalog using SSL (3269/tcp)
•
Kerberos (88/tcp)
After configuring an AD server, you can validate the realm configuration settings by establishing a
test connection. For more information, see Testing LDAP and AD Authentication Configurations on
page 215.
Related Topics
•
Configuring Active Directory with Username and Password
•
Configuring Multiple Active Directory Trees
•
Configuring Active Directory with Subordinate Domains
•
Configuring LDAP to Authenticate Against Active Directory
•
LDAP Examples for Active Directory Authentication
Configuring Active Directory with Username and Password
Perform the following steps to configure an Active Directory authentication server with username/password
validation.
NOTE:
•
If you are using Active Directory with digital certificates, you must configure AD as an LDAP realm.
See Configuring LDAP to Authenticate Against Active Directory on page 188.
•
If your AD authentication server has subordinate (child) domains, see Configuring Multiple Active
Directory Trees on page 180 for more information.
To configure Active Directory
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click New.
2
Under User store, click Microsoft Active Directory.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
175
3
The only Credential type that is available for AD is Username/Password. Click Continue. The Configure
Authentication Server page appears.
4
In the Name box, type a name for the authentication server.
5
In the Primary domain controller box, type the IP address or host name of the AD domain controller. If
you are using a failover server (optional), specify its address in the Secondary domain controller box.
If the AD server is listening on a something other than the well-known port (389 for unencrypted
connections, or 636 for SSL connections), specify a port number as a colon-delimited suffix (for example,
ad.example.com:1300).
6
To specify a particular AD domain, type it in the Active Directory domain name box. This should be the
domain that you want to use as the search base (in other words, the domain that contains the
appropriate cn=users container). For example, if you want to search a single domain such as marketing,
type marketing.example.com. If you want to search your entire company’s domain, type
example.com. If you do not specify a domain, the appliance searches the first available default naming
context on the domain controller.
7
To perform AD searches, the appliance must log in to Active Directory (unless you have configured AD to
allow anonymous searches). In the Login name box, type the username or sAMAccountname attribute
used to log in to the Windows domain (such as jdoe or jdoe@example.com).
The login should be for a user who has privileges to perform searches and view user records, such as the
administrator on that domain controller. You may also specify a non-administrator user who has these
privileges.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
176
If you specify an AD domain, the appliance searches that domain for users. If you do not specify a
domain, the appliance searches the first available default naming context on the domain controller. If
the user information is not stored in either of these locations, you need to configure this realm as an
LDAP realm. See Configuring LDAP to Authenticate Against Active Directory on page 188.
8
Type the Password that corresponds to the Login name. After you’ve entered credentials, you can click
the Test button for each server you specified in order to test the connection.
9
Complete the information listed under Group lookup:
•
To enable group checking on this server, select the Use this authentication server to check
group membership check box. When this box is unchecked, the nested controls are disabled
because they apply only to group checking behavior. This check box, when unselected, allows an
authentication server for LDAP, AD, or AD-Tree to be configured without enabling it for
authorization checks. This improves efficiency by allowing better stacked/affinity authentication
support.
•
To specify the depth of the search (how many sub-groups to include in it), enter a number in the
Nested group lookup check box. Be aware that this type of search can take some time because it
requires searching the entire Active Directory tree; enabling Cache group checking is highly
recommended.
•
To reduce the load on your directory and get better performance, cache the attribute group or
static group search results. Select the Cache group checking check box and then specify a Cache
lifetime, in seconds. The default value is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
10 To secure the AD connection with SSL, expand the Active Directory over SSL area, and the configure the
following settings:
a
Select the Use SSL to secure Active Directory connection check box.
b
To view your certificate details and to verify that the root certificate can be used by the
appliance, click the SSL Settings link. This list should show the name of the CA (or CAs) that
issued the client certificates and the SSL certificates. If your AD server’s CA is not listed in the
file, or if you use a self-signed certificate, you must add your certificate to this file. See
Importing CA Certificates on page 162 for details.
c
To have the appliance verify that the AD domain controller host name is the same as the name in
the certificate presented by the Active Directory server, select the Match certificate CN against
Active Directory domain controller check box. Typically, your server name will match the name
specified in its digital certificate. If this is the case with your server, Dell recommends enabling
this option in a production environment. This makes it more difficult for an unauthorized server
to masquerade as your AD server if your digital certificate or DNS server is compromised.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
177
11 In the Advanced area, you can specify a username attribute, set up custom prompts, enable users to be
notified of expiring Active Directory passwords, configure NTLM authentication forwarding options, and
set up one-time passwords.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
178
12 Type the Username attribute you want to use to match user names. In most AD implementations,
sAMAccountName matches the user ID (for example, jdoe). You can use cn instead, but that would
require the user to authenticate with his full name (John Doe) instead of his user ID (jdoe).
13 To change the prompts and other text that Windows users see when they log in to the authentication
server, select the Customize authentication server prompts check box. If users should log in using an
employee ID, for example, you could change the text for the Identity prompt from Username: to
Employee ID:. (If you plan to use chained authentication, customized password prompts are especially
useful so that users can differentiate between them.)
14 If the connection between the appliance and the authentication server is secured with SSL (Use SSL to
secure Active Directory connection is enabled), you can allow users to change their passwords in
WorkPlace by selecting Enable user-initiated password change.
15 To allow the Active Directory server to notify users that their passwords are going to expire, select the
Notify user before password expires check box. Indicate when the advance notice should begin (the
default is 14 days, and the maximum is 30 days). The password prompt users see is controlled by the AD
server.
To allow users to manage their own passwords, select the Allow user to change password when notified
check box. This setting can be changed only if the Use SSL to secure Active Directory connection check
box in the Active Directory over SSL area is selected. Password management is available only to users
with Web access and those who are using Connect Tunnel.
16 To enable NTLM authentication forwarding, click one of the NTLM authentication forwarding options.
For more information, see NTLM Authentication Forwarding on page 207.
17 To configure authentication that includes an OTP, enable Use one-time passwords with this
authentication server. You must also configure your mail server: if OTPs are going to be delivered to
external domains (for example, an SMS address or external webmail address), you may have to configure
the SMTP server to allow passwords to be sent from the appliance to the external domain.
•
Enter the number of characters for the OTP in the Password contains field. The default length is
8, the minimum is 4, and the maximum is 20.
•
Select the type of characters in the OTP from the drop-down list. Select Alphabetic, Alphabetic
and numeric, or Numeric.
•
In the From address field, enter the email address from which the OTP will be sent.
•
In the Primary email address attribute box, enter the directory attribute for the email address
to which one-time passwords will be sent. If the primary attribute exists on the authentication
server, it is used.
•
The Secondary email address attribute, if specified, is used in addition to the primary email
address. The OTP is sent to both addresses.
To have OTPs sent as a text message (instead of an email message), enter the corresponding
attribute name (for example, SMSphone instead of Mail or primaryEmail). See Configuring
the AD or LDAP Directory Server on page 220 for more information.
•
In the Subject field, customize the subject line of the OTP email. You can use the replacement
variable {password} to indicate a position in the subject line where the actual password will
display.
•
In the Body field, customize the body of the OTP message. Use the replacement variable
{username} to indicate a position in the message where the user’s account name will display. Use
the replacement variable {password} to indicate a position in the message where the actual
password will display.
•
To test delivery of an OTP to a user, enter the email address of the user who will receive the OTP
into the Email address field and click the Send test message button. If the appliance is able to
send the message, the status Message successfully sent is displayed below the button. Failure
messages are also displayed below the button, such as errors connecting to the SMTP server, or
errors communicating with the AD/LDAP server or looking up the specified user on the AD/LDAP
server.
18 Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
179
NOTE:
•
The Login name and Password fields are not always required to connect to an Active Directory
server. However, if they are not provided (or you don’t specify a password) the appliance will bind
anonymously. In this case, if you have not configured Active Directory to allow anonymous
searches, the search will fail.
•
Users must have permission on the AD server to change their passwords during the password
notification period, and the administrator must have permission to change user passwords after
they expire. For security reasons, both of these operations replace passwords rather than reset
them.
•
If you define multiple Active Directory with SSL servers, you should specify the same Match
certificate CN against Active Directory domain controller setting for each server. (Dell
recommends enabling this option for a production environment.) Although AMC allows you to
configure this setting on a per-realm basis, the appliance actually uses the setting specified in the
last loaded ADS realm. For example, if you select this check box for three ADS realms, but clear it
for a fourth, the functionality would be disabled for all four realms.
CAUTION: If Active Directory over SSL is not enabled, passwords are transmitted in the clear to the AD
server. If the internal network is not trusted, you should enable SSL. Your AD server must also be
enabled to use SSL. See the Microsoft AD documentation for details.
Configuring Multiple Active Directory Trees
This feature expands user authentication and authorization from one Active Directory (AD) tree to multiple AD
trees within a trusted forest and AD Federated Forests. Configuring AD multi-forest/multi-realm support
consists of the following steps:
1
Configure AD forest authentication server with AD domains from the current AD forest and trusted
forests enabled.
2
Configure groups using multiple trees.
3
Configure groups using trees from trusted forests.
Once AD multi-forest/multi-realm support is configured, users from the designated forests can be authenticated
and log into WorkPlace and Connect Tunnel.
NOTE: A trusted domain is a domain that authenticates users when they login.
Configure AD Forest Authentication Server
Configure the AD forest authentication server and enable AD domains from the current AD forest and trusted
forests:
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
180
1
In the main navigation menu, select Authentication Servers and then click New... in the Authentication
servers section.
2
In the User Store section of the New Authentication Server page, select Microsoft Active Directory
(Advanced).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
181
3
Select any other applicable options, as explained in the Secure Mobile Access Administrator Guide, and
click Continue... to advance to the Configure Authentication Server page.
4
In the Name field, type the name that will be used to identify the Active Directory tree or forest.
5
In the Root Domain field, type the AD root domain of the forest.
6
Check the Enable cross-forest trust check box to enable appliance access to other trusted forests. If not
enabled, the appliance can access only the forest in a direct trust relationship with the configured
forest.
7
In the Login name and Password fields, type the user name and password for a user who has read access
to the entire Forest.
8
In the Active Directory DNS section, configure the DNS and Key Distribution Centers (KDCs) correctly.
•
Select Use DNS to lookup Active Directory domains to enable DNS lookups for a KDC/Kerberos
realm, and then select the domains that will be displayed on WorkPlace. Only domains fetched
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
182
from the configured forest are listed when Enable cross-forest trust is disabled (check box not
checked).
•
Select Use these Active Directory domains and KDCs to also use KDCs and then click New and
configure the KDCs.
Configure Groups Using Multiple Trees
Create groups of users and groups imported from the AD domains in the forest. Only users and groups from the
configured forest are included when cross-forest trust is disabled.
Configure Groups Using Trees from Trusted Forests
Create groups of users and groups imported from AD Domains in the configured forest and trusted forests. Users
and groups from the configured forest and all trusted forests are included when cross-forest trust is enabled.
User Login
Once AD multi-forest/multi-realm support is configured, users from the designated forests can be authenticated
and log into WorkPlace and Connect Tunnel.
Users login to WorkPlace or Connect Tunnel using one of the following:
•
Username in UPN form (for example, <username>@KERBEROS_REALM) and password
•
Username, Password and Domain - when Domain Selection option is configured)
•
Username and Password – when a default domain is configured
Configuring Active Directory with Subordinate Domains
Perform the following steps to configure authentication settings for a Microsoft Active Directory server that has
a single root domain and one or more child domains in the AD tree. In a given deployment, only one AD
authentication server with subordinate domains can be specified. In addition, a domain name server must be
configured before the appliance can support an AD tree authentication server; see Configuring Domain Name
Service on page 151.
If you are using Active Directory with digital certificates, you must configure AD as an LDAP realm. See
Configuring LDAP to Authenticate Against Active Directory on page 188.
If your AD authentication server does not have any subordinate (child) domains, see Configuring Active Directory
with Username and Password on page 175 for information on configuring it in AMC.
To configure Active Directory Tree
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click New.
2
Under User store, click Microsoft Active Directory Tree.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
183
3
The only Credential type that is available for AD tree is Username/Password. Click Continue. The
Configure Authentication Server page appears.
4
In the Name box, type a name for the authentication server.
5
In the Root domain box, type the fully qualified name of the AD root domain. For example,
company.com.
6
In the Login name box, type a fully-qualified Windows domain username (for example,
vpn_admin@company.com). The login should be for a user who has read access to the entire domain
tree, such as the administrator on that domain controller. You may also specify a non-administrator user
who has these privileges.
7
Type the Password that corresponds to the Login name. After you’ve entered credentials, you can click
the Test button for the root domain controller to test the connection.
8
Specify a combination of user authentication options:
•
Users can enter a domain name
If this is the only option you specify, users must type a domain name during authentication; for
example, username@domain.
•
Specify a default domain
To allow users to log in without entering or specifying a domain, select this option. The VPN will
assume the domain you specify here and try to authenticate the user.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
184
•
9
Users can choose from a list of domains
To display all domains that belong to this root domain, click Load all domains. You can select all
or some of the domains users will be able to choose from, and rearrange the order of the list.
Complete the information listed under Group lookup:
•
To enable group checking on this server, select the Use this authentication server to check
group membership check box. When this box is unchecked, the nested controls are disabled
because they apply only to group checking behavior. This check box, when unselected, allows an
authentication server for LDAP, AD, or AD-Tree to be configured without enabling it for
authorization checks. This improves efficiency by allowing better stacked/affinity authentication
support.
•
To reduce the load on your directory and get better performance, cache the attribute group or
static group search results. Select the Cache group checking check box and then specify a Cache
lifetime, in seconds. The default value is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
10 To secure the AD connection with SSL, expand the Active Directory over SSL area, and the configure the
following settings:
a
Select the Use SSL to secure Active Directory connection check box.
11 Every domain in the AD tree must have a certificate. To view your certificate details and to verify that
the root certificate can be used by the appliance, click the SSL Settings link. This list should show the
name of the CA (or CAs) that issued the client certificates and the SSL certificates. If your AD server’s CA
is not listed in the file, or if you use a self-signed certificate, you must add your certificate to this file.
See Importing CA Certificates on page 162 for details.
12 To have the appliance verify that the AD domain controller host name is the same as the name in the
certificate presented by the Active Directory server, select the Match certificate CN against Active
Directory domain controller check box. Typically, your server name will match the name specified in its
digital certificate. If this is the case with your server, Dell recommends enabling this option in a
production environment. This makes it more difficult for an unauthorized server to masquerade as your
AD server if your digital certificate or DNS server is compromised.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
185
13 In the Advanced area, you can specify a username attribute, set up custom prompts, enable users to be
notified of expiring Active Directory passwords, configure NTLM authentication forwarding options, and
set up one-time passwords.
14 Type the Username attribute you want to use to match user names. In most AD implementations,
sAMAccountName matches the user ID (for example, jdoe). You can use cn instead, but that would
require the user to authenticate with his full name (John Doe) instead of his user ID (jdoe).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
186
15 To change the prompts and other text that Windows users see when they log in to the authentication
server, select the Customize authentication server prompts check box. If users should log in using an
employee ID, for example, you could change the text for the Identity prompt from Username: to
Employee ID:. (If you plan to use chained authentication, customized password prompts are especially
useful so that users can differentiate between them.)
16 If you want to allow users to change their passwords in WorkPlace, select Enable user-initiated
password change.
17 To allow the Active Directory server to notify users that their passwords are going to expire, select the
Notify user before password expires check box. Indicate when the advance notice should begin (the
default is 14 days, and the maximum is 30 days). The password prompt users see is controlled by the AD
server. Password management is available only to users with Web access and those who are using
Connect Tunnel.
18 To enable NTLM authentication forwarding, click one of the NTLM authentication forwarding options.
For more information, see NTLM Authentication Forwarding on page 207.
19 To configure authentication that includes an OTP, enable Use one-time passwords with this
authentication server. You must also configure your mail server: if OTPs are going to be delivered to
external domains (for example, an SMS address or external webmail address), you may have to configure
the SMTP server to allow passwords to be sent from the appliance to the external domain.
•
Enter the number of characters for the OTP in the Password contains field. The default length is
8, the minimum is 4, and the maximum is 20.
•
Select the type of characters in the OTP from the drop-down list. Select Alphabetic, Alphabetic
and numeric, or Numeric.
•
In the From address field, enter the email address from which the OTP will be sent.
•
In the Primary email address attribute box, enter the directory attribute for the email address
to which one-time passwords will be sent. If the primary attribute exists on the authentication
server, it is used.
•
The Secondary email address attribute, if specified, is used in addition to the primary email
address. The OTP is sent to both addresses.
To have OTPs sent as a text message (instead of an email message), enter the corresponding
attribute name (for example, SMSphone instead of Mail or primaryEmail). See Configuring
the AD or LDAP Directory Server on page 220 for more information.
•
In the Subject field, customize the subject line of the OTP email. You can use the replacement
variable {password} to indicate a position in the subject line where the actual password will
display.
•
In the Body field, customize the body of the OTP message. Use the replacement variable
{username} to indicate a position in the message where the user’s account name will display. Use
the replacement variable {password} to indicate a position in the message where the actual
password will display.
•
To test delivery of an OTP to a user, enter the email address of the user who will receive the OTP
into the Email address field and click the Send test message button. If the appliance is able to
send the message, the status Message successfully sent is displayed below the button. Failure
messages are also displayed below the button, such as errors connecting to the SMTP server, or
errors communicating with the AD/LDAP server or looking up the specified user on the AD/LDAP
server.
20 Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
187
NOTE:
•
The Login name and Password fields are not always required to connect to an Active Directory
server. However, if they are not provided (or you don’t specify a password) the appliance will bind
anonymously. In this case, if you have not configured Active Directory to allow anonymous
searches, the search will fail.
•
Users must have permission on the AD server to change their passwords during the password
notification period, and the administrator must have permission to change user passwords after
they expire. For security reasons, both of these operations replace passwords rather than reset
them.
•
If you define multiple Active Directory with SSL servers, you should specify the same Match
certificate CN against Active Directory domain controller setting for each server. (Dell
recommends enabling this option for a production environment.) Although AMC allows you to
configure this setting on a per-realm basis, the appliance actually uses the setting specified in the
last loaded ADS realm. For example, if you select this check box for three ADS realms, but clear it
for a fourth, the functionality would be disabled for all four realms.
Configuring LDAP to Authenticate Against Active Directory
If you have customized Active Directory (by, for example, specifying a search base instead of using the AD
default), you need to authenticate to Active Directory using LDAP. The procedure for configuring an LDAP server
is defined in Configuring LDAP and LDAPS Authentication on page 189. When configuring LDAP, you should pay
special attention to the attributes you’re using to query the directory. Because every implementation of AD is
different, you must know how the object classes and related attributes are configured in your Active Directory
schema.
NOTE: When an Active Directory (AD) server is used as an LDAP server, ACL checks cannot be performed.
Short names (SN) or common names (CN) are not supported on LDAP servers. They are only supported on
AD servers.
The following table describes the key AD attributes used to validate username and password credentials. The
attributes are not case-sensitive.
Table 57. AD attributes for credential validation
Field
Description
Login DN
The DN used to establish a connection with your Active Directory server. In a generic
AD configuration located in the example.com domain, the DN for a user named
“John Doe” would be:
Search base
The point in the AD directory from which you want to search for user information.
Usually, this is the lowest point in the directory tree that contains user information.
The user binding to AD must have permissions to view the directory at this level.
cn=John Doe,cn=users,dc=example,dc=com
For a generic installation, a search base of cn=users,dc=example,dc=com will
find most users. You may want to search from a higher level (such as
dc=example,dc=com) if some users are stored in a different branch.
Username attribute
The attribute used to match usernames. In most AD implementations,
sAMAccountName matches the user ID (for example, jdoe). You can use cn instead,
but that would require the user to authenticate with his full name (John Doe)
instead of his user ID (jdoe).
If you create an access control rule that references a group, a user must be an explicit member of that group for
his or her request to match the rule. To include nested groups when evaluating group membership, make sure
that Nested group lookup is set accordingly when you configure the authentication server in AMC.
For example, assume that the SeattleCampus group contains a group called Marketing. Employee John Doe is
a member of the Marketing group, but is not explicitly a member of SeattleCampus. If Nested group lookup is
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
188
set to 0, the appliance will not recognize John Doe as a member of the SeattleCampus group; if it is set to 1,
he is recognized.
Microsoft provides a graphical tool that makes it easy to perform LDAP operations, including connecting,
browsing, and modifying a directory. The tool—called LDP (ldp.exe)—is available with the Support Tools for the
Windows Server platform; see the Microsoft Product Support site for more information.
LDAP Examples for Active Directory Authentication
Here are a few LDAP configuration examples.
Example 1—Active Directory
Table 58. Active Directory Configuration 1
Login DN
CN=AVtest,CN=Users,DC=testusrs,DC=example,DC=com
Search base
DC=testusrs,DC=example,DC=com
Username attribute
sAMAccountName
Example 2—Active Directory
Table 59. Active Directory Configuration 2
Login DN
CN=johnDoe,CN=Users,DC=na,DC=example,DC=com
Search base
CN=Users,DC=na,DC=example,DC=com
Username attribute
sAMAccountname
Example 3—LDAP with Domino Server
Table 60. LDAP Configuration with Domino Server
Login DN
CN=E-Class SMA,O=peoplesoft
Search base
o=peoplesoft
Username attribute
cn
Configuring LDAP and LDAPS Authentication
The Dell SMA appliance supports authentication using the LDAP or LDAPS (LDAP over SSL) protocols. Either
protocol can be used to validate username and password credentials. The following illustration shows typical
LDAP configuration options:
Figure 16. LDAP and LDAPS authentication configuration options
Securing your LDAP connection with SSL requires additional configuration. You must add the root certificate of
the CA that granted your LDAP certificate to the SSL trusted root file. This enhances security by preventing
attempts to impersonate your LDAP server. For more information, see Importing CA Certificates on page 162.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
189
After configuring an LDAP or LDAPS server, you can validate the realm configuration settings by establishing a
test connection. For more information, see Testing LDAP and AD Authentication Configurations on page 215.
Consider the following restrictions when configuring LDAP authentication:
•
Firewalls and routers - You must configure your firewall or router to allow the appliance to
communicate with your LDAP server. Standard LDAP uses port 389/tcp; LDAPS communicates over port
636/tcp.
•
LDAP Affinity servers - Although it is possible to configure LDAP Affinity servers for all authentication
servers, an Affinity server should be used only for an authentication server that does not include full
group search capabilities, such as a RADIUS, RSA, and PKI server. In addition, Secure Mobile Access does
not support Affinity servers for stacked authentication where any one of the authentication servers has
group checking capabilities.
NOTE: When an Active Directory (AD) server is used as an LDAP server, ACL checks cannot be
performed. Short names (SN) or common names (CN) are not supported on LDAP servers. They are
only supported on AD servers.
•
Digital certificate validation - Configuring an LDAP authentication server with digital certificate
validation is offered for legacy customers. New users should use the standard method described in
Configuring a PKI Authentication Server on page 201. The Trust intermediate CAs without verifying the
entire chain option is offered on the configuration pages for both the LDAP with Digital Certificate
option and the Public key infrastructure (PKI) option.
Related Topics
•
Configuring LDAP with Username and Password
•
Configuring a PKI Authentication Server
•
Importing CA Certificates
•
About Intermediate Certificates
Configuring LDAP with Username and Password
Perform the following steps to configure an LDAP authentication server with username and password validation.
To configure LDAP for username/password validation
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click New.
2
Under Authentication directory, click LDAP.
3
Under Credential type, click Username/Password, and then click Continue. The Configure
Authentication Server page appears.
4
In the Name box, type a name for the authentication server.
5
Complete the information listed under General:
•
In the Primary LDAP server box, type the host name or IP address of your LDAP server. If you are
using a failover server (optional), specify its address in the Secondary LDAP server box.
If the LDAP server is listening on a something other than the well-known port (389 for
unencrypted LDAP connections, or 636 for SSL connections), specify a port number as a colondelimited suffix (for example, myldap.example.com:1300).
•
In the Login DN box, type the distinguished name (DN) used to establish a connection with the
LDAP server.
•
In the Password box, type the password used to establish a connection with the LDAP server.
•
In the Search base box, type the point in the LDAP directory from which you want to begin
searching for user information. This will usually be the lowest point in the directory tree that
contains user information. For example, you might type ou=Users,o=xyz.com. The user
binding to the LDAP directory must have permissions to view the directory at this level.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
190
6
7
•
In the Username attribute box, type the attribute used to match usernames. This is usually cn or
uid.
•
Click the Test button for each server you specified in order to test the connection.
Complete the information listed under Group lookup:
•
To enable group checking on this server, select the Use this authentication server to check
group membership check box. When this box is unchecked, the nested controls are disabled
because they apply only to group checking behavior. This check box, when unselected, allows an
authentication server for LDAP, AD, or AD-Tree to be configured without enabling it for
authorization checks. This improves efficiency by allowing better stacked/affinity authentication
support.
•
If you want the LDAP search to determine a user’s group membership by searching the group
attribute in the user container, select the Find groups in which a user is a member check box
and then type the Group attribute. This attribute is most often memberOf. Do not select this
check box unless attribute-based groups are supported by and enabled on your LDAP server.
•
If your LDAP server does not support attribute-based groups or you have not enabled this
functionality, you can select the Look in static groups for user members check box; to specify
the depth of the search (how many sub-groups to include in the search), enter a number in the
Nested group lookup check box. Be aware that this type of search can take some time because it
requires searching the entire LDAP tree; enabling Cache group checking is highly recommended.
•
To reduce the load on your directory and get better performance, cache the attribute group or
static group search results. Select the Cache group checking check box and then specify a Cache
lifetime, in seconds. The default value is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
To secure the LDAP connection with SSL, complete the information under LDAP over SSL:
•
To secure the LDAP connection with SSL, select the Use SSL to secure LDAP connection check
box.
•
View your certificate details and verify that the root certificate can be used by the appliance.
See Importing CA Certificates on page 162 for details.
•
To configure the appliance to verify that the LDAP host name is the same as the name in the
certificate presented by the LDAP server, select the Match certificate CN against LDAP server
name check box. Typically, your server name will match the name specified in its digital
certificate. If this is the case with your server, Dell recommends enabling this option in a
production environment. This makes it more difficult for an unauthorized server to masquerade
as your LDAP server if your digital certificate or DNS server is compromised.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
191
8
Optionally, complete the information listed under Advanced.
•
When an LDAP server cannot answer a client’s query, you can refer it to other LDAP servers by
selecting the Enable LDAP referrals check box. Use caution when enabling this feature because it
can slow down the authentication process. If you are configuring LDAP to authenticate against
Microsoft Active Directory, you may want to disable this feature.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
192
9
•
In the Server timeout box, type the number of seconds to wait for a reply from the LDAP server.
The default value is 60 (one minute).
•
To change the prompts and other text that Windows users see when they log in to the
authentication server, select the Customize authentication server prompts check box. The page
title, message, and login prompts can all be customized. If users log in using a PIN as a password,
for example, change the text for the Proof prompt from Password: to PIN: (a customized Message
could explain how to retrieve a forgotten PIN).
•
You can allow users to change their passwords (in WorkPlace only) by selecting Enable userinitiated password change. If a realm is configured with stacked authentication and requires two
sets of username/password credentials, a user who changes his or her password will be changing
the credentials for just the first of the two authentication servers.
•
To allow the LDAP server to notify users that their passwords are going to expire, select the
Notify user before password expires check box. To also permit them to change their passwords
when prompted by the LDAP server, select the Allow user to change password when notified
check box. The password prompt users see is controlled by the LDAP server.
•
To enable NTLM authentication forwarding, click one of the NTLM authentication forwarding
options. For more information, see NTLM Authentication Forwarding on page 207.
To configure authentication that includes an OTP, enable Use one-time passwords with this
authentication server. You must also configure your mail server: if OTPs are going to be delivered to
external domains (for example, an SMS address or external webmail address), you may have to configure
the SMTP server to allow passwords to be sent from the appliance to the external domain.
•
Enter the number of characters for the OTP in the Password contains field. The default length is
8, the minimum is 4, and the maximum is 20.
•
Select the type of characters in the OTP from the drop-down list. Select Alphabetic, Alphabetic
and numeric, or Numeric.
•
In the From address field, enter the email address from which the OTP will be sent.
•
In the Primary email address attribute box, enter the directory attribute for the email address
to which one-time passwords will be sent. If the primary attribute exists on the authentication
server, it is used.
•
The Secondary email address attribute, if specified, is used in addition to the primary email
address. The OTP is sent to both addresses.
To have OTPs sent as a text message (instead of an email message), enter the corresponding
attribute name (for example, SMSphone instead of Mail or primaryEmail). See Configuring
the AD or LDAP Directory Server on page 220 for more information.
•
In the Subject field, customize the subject line of the OTP email. You can use the replacement
variable {password} to indicate a position in the subject line where the actual password will
display.
•
In the Body field, customize the body of the OTP message. Use the replacement variable
{username} to indicate a position in the message where the user’s account name will display. Use
the replacement variable {password} to indicate a position in the message where the actual
password will display.
•
To test delivery of an OTP to a user, enter the email address of the user who will receive the OTP
into the Email address field and click the Send test message button. If the appliance is able to
send the message, the status Message successfully sent is displayed below the button. Failure
messages are also displayed below the button, such as errors connecting to the SMTP server, or
errors communicating with the AD/LDAP server or looking up the specified user on the AD/LDAP
server.
10 Click Save.
Remember the following when configuring LDAP:
•
The Notify user before password expires and Allow user to change password when notified settings in
the Password management area have some constraints:
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
193
•
They are supported only on IBM Directory Server.
•
They are available only for users who connect to the appliance using Web access (the Web proxy
agent or translated, custom port mapped, or custom FQDN mapped Web access), or using Connect
Tunnel.
•
Users must have permission on the LDAP server to change their passwords.
•
The Login DN and Password fields are not always required in order to connect to an LDAP server.
However, if they are not provided (or you do not specify a password), the appliance binds to LDAP
anonymously, which does not usually provide the appropriate permissions for performing user and group
information searches.
•
If you define multiple LDAPS servers, you should also configure the Match certificate CN against LDAP
server name setting to be the same for each realm. (Enabling this option is recommended in a
production environment.) Although AMC allows you to configure this setting per realm, the appliance
actually uses the setting configured in the last loaded LDAPS realm. In other words, if you selected this
check box for three LDAPS servers, but cleared it for a fourth LDAPS realm, the functionality would be
disabled for all four servers.
•
Configuring an LDAP authentication server with digital certificate validation is offered for legacy
customers. New users should use the standard method described in Configuring a PKI Authentication
Server on page 201.
Configuring RADIUS Authentication
The appliance can validate username/password or token-based credentials against a RADIUS database. The
following illustration shows typical RADIUS configuration options:
Figure 17. RADIUS authentication configuration options
You must modify your firewall or router to allow the appliance to communicate with your RADIUS server. The
RADIUS authentication protocol typically uses port 1645/udp. In addition, you must configure your RADIUS
server to include the IP address of the appliance as a RADIUS client (most often referred to as a Network Access
Server).
NOTE: Affinity servers should be used only for authentication servers that do not include full group search
capabilities, such as RADIUS, RSA, and PKI servers.
Related Topics
•
Configuring RADIUS with User or Token-Based Credentials
•
Configuring Advanced RADIUS Settings
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
194
Configuring RADIUS with User or Token-Based Credentials
The appliance supports two different types of credentials for RADIUS: username and password, and token-based
user credentials, such as SecurID or SoftID, which are validated against a database on a RADIUS server. You can
configure the RADIUS authentication method to use either type of credential.
You can also deploy PhoneFactor authentication using RADIUS. When a user logs into their company’s VPN, a
RADIUS request is made to the PhoneFactor Agent, which acts as a RADIUS proxy server. It first validates the
user name and password with the target RADIUS server before initiating a PhoneFactor authentication. There
are two methods for two-factor authentication using PhoneFactor:
•
The user enters his username and password and is then called by PhoneFactor. The user answers his
phone and presses # or enters a PIN.
•
The user enters his username and password and then PhoneFactor sends him a text message containing a
one-time passcode. The user replies to the text message with the passcode, or the passcode and his PIN,
to authenticate.
To configure RADIUS for user- or token-based credentials
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click New.
2
Under Authentication directory, click RADIUS.
3
Under Credential type, click Username/Password or Token/SecurID, and then click Continue. For
PhoneFactor, select Token/SecurID.
4
In the Name box, type a name for the authentication server.
5
In the Primary RADIUS server box, type the host name or IP address of your primary RADIUS server. If
your RADIUS server is listening on a port other than 1645 (the well-known port for RADIUS), you can
specify a port number as a colon-delimited suffix.
6
In the Secondary RADIUS server box, type the host name or IP address of your secondary RADIUS server.
You can also add a port number (:<port number>) if necessary.
7
In the Shared secret box, type the password used to secure communication with the RADIUS server. This
must be the same secret that is specified on the designated RADIUS server.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
195
8
In the Match RADIUS groups by list, select the attribute containing the groups of which the user is a
member. The value returned from RADIUS will be used in the group portion of the appliance access rule.
There are three possible values:
Table 61. RADIUS groups matching
9
Match RADIUS groups by
Description
None
Ignores the group attribute
filterid attribute (11)
Matches against the FilterID attribute
class attribute (25)
Matches against the Class attribute
In the Connection timeout box, type the number of seconds to wait for a reply from the RADIUS server
before timing out the authentication attempt. The default is 5 seconds, with a range of 5 to 300 seconds.
When using PhoneFactor, increase this value to give users time to receive the confirmation call.
10 Expand the Advanced button to see additional, optional settings; these are described in Configuring
Advanced RADIUS Settings on page 197.
11 Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
196
Configuring Advanced RADIUS Settings
For further customizing and configuring, use these advanced RADIUS settings.
To configure additional (optional) RADIUS settings
1
Click the Advanced button to display additional (optional) RADIUS settings.
2
In the Service type box, type a RADIUS Service-Type integer indicating the type of service being
requested. For most RADIUS servers, type 1 (for Login) or 8 (for Authenticate Only).
3
When a user’s credentials are accepted, the RADIUS server normally sends a confirmation message (for
example, “Passcode accepted”). If you do not want this message displayed, select the Suppress RADIUS
success message check box.
4
The appliance normally identifies itself using its host name. If the RADIUS server is unable to accept that
name, specify a NAS-Identifier or NAS-IP-Address (specifying both is allowed but not typically
necessary).
5
To change the prompts and other text that Windows users see when they log in to the authentication
server, select Customize authentication server prompts. The page title, message, and login prompts
can all be customized. For example, if a user logs in using his employee ID, you could change the text for
the Identity prompt from Username: to Employee ID:.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
197
6
If the RADIUS server uses an older version of the RADIUS protocol that does not support
UTF-8 character encoding, select a Local encoding scheme from the Selected list, or type one in the
Other box. For more information, see RADIUS Policy Server Character Sets on page 638.
7
(RADIUS with a Credential type of Username/Password only) To enable NTLM authentication forwarding,
click one of the NTLM authentication forwarding options. For more information, see NTLM
Authentication Forwarding on page 207.
User-Mapped Tunnel Addressing
User-Mapped Tunnel Addressing enables network administrators to identify network traffic from a specific user
by the source IPv4 address of the traffic.
On an internal network, administrators may sometimes be able to associate specific end users with specific IPv4
addresses, that are assigned to the user by the administrator.
Although assigning IP addresses to specific users is currently supported through the use of external RADIUS
servers, User-Mapped Tunnel Addressing enables administrators to specify the assignment from an attribute in
the appliance's local authentication server.
Administrators who deploy a RADIUS server as their authentication server can include an IPv4 address in the
RADIUS Framed IP Address parameter for a specific user and associate that user's Community with a RADIUS
address pool. This type of assignment can be done only if the address is available and no addressing conflicts
prohibit it.
NOTE: If an address conflict prevents this type of assignment, the normal tunnel addressing process
continues with the next tunnel in the list that is allowed by the Community. If no more pools are available,
the tunnel configuration fails.
The RADIUS Pool in the Configure Network Tunnel Service is now called the User-Mapped Pool. When a RADIUSframed IP address is available from the authentication server, that address is available to the User-Mapped Pool.
An IPv4 address that is provided by a user’s local authentication server, is also available to the User-Mapped Pool
and is used exactly the same as if it was from the RADIUS Pool. The User-Mapped Tunnel Addressing feature
extends user-mapped addresses to the local user’s authentication server. No other address pools may supply
addresses.
More than one address may be obtained from the authentication server, enabling a single user to establish more
than one tunnel simultaneously, on separate devices. The number of simultaneous tunnel connections that a
single user can establish can be configured by specifying the number of addresses for a user in the
authentication server. This value can also be configured by setting the Maximum Active Sessions limit for all
users of a particular community on the Configure Community page.
The User-Mapped Tunnel Address Pool, like RADIUS, can be used to provide a strict correspondence (or mapping)
between virtual IPv4 addresses and tunnel clients. You can specify that a particular client gets a virtual address
from a particular pool on the Network Tunnel Client Settings page. The client is assigned to a specific
community and that community only gets IPv4 addresses from a particular address pool.
The User-Mapped Tunnel Address Pool attempts to establish an IPv4 address as the tunnel virtual address at
tunnel connect time. If the address is available and no client-side conflicts arise, the virtual address is assigned.
If the address fails, then the system proceeds to the next address pool in the list allowed by the community. If
no other address pools are available, the tunnel connection attempt fails.
The authentication server used to get IPv4 addresses is not limited to its own authentication server. The UserMapped Tunnel Address Pool may get addresses from its own authentication server or from the client’s local
authentication server
The authentication server may supply an ordered list of IPv4 addresses, not just a single address, so that you
can assign multiple simultaneous tunnel connections to a single client, on separate devices.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
198
On the Users & Groups page, on the Add/Edit Local User dialog, under the Advanced section, you can
configure the following fields:
•
Email address
•
Device identifier(s)
•
IP address(es)
In the Email Address field, configure an email address for the user. This address is used for sending one-time
passwords to the user, and overrides the default username@domain email address. This e-mail address is
assigned to the “mail” attribute for the user.
In the Device identifier(s) field, enter one or more (comma-delimited) device identifiers for computers or
other devices that are associated with this user.
In the IP address(es) field, enter either a single IPv4 address or list of IPv4 addresses (comma-delimited).
•
If you enter a single IPv4 address, each IPv4 address should match the network address of the resource
interface.
•
If you enter a list of IPv4 addresses, these addresses are presented to the User-Mapped Tunnel Address
Pool, in the order they appear in the list.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
199
Configuring RSA Server Authentication
The appliance supports SecurID, token-based user credentials that are validated against a database on an RSA
Authentication Manager server. Configuring this type of authentication involves changes on both the RSA server
and the Dell SMA appliance, which are outlined below. For step-by-step instructions for RSA Authentication
Manager 7.1, see Knowledge Base article 6571:
https://support.software.dell.com/sonicwall-e-class-sra-series/kb/sw6571
NOTE: Affinity servers should be used only for authentication servers that do not include full group search
capabilities, such as RADIUS, RSA, and PKI servers.
To configure RSA Authentication Manager for token-based credentials
1
Create an agent host on the RSA server with the IP address for the internal interface of the Dell SMA
appliance.
2
Make the configuration changes necessary to resolve the names of both the RSA server and the Dell SMA
appliance:
3
4
•
DNS must be able to resolve the RSA server’s name; simply adding the appliance and its IP address
to your /etc/hosts file will not work.
•
The appliance’s name (as configured on the RSA server) must resolve to the internal IP address of
the appliance.
DNS must be able to resolve the RSA server’s name in both directions:
•
The appliance’s name (as configured on the RSA server) must resolve to the internal IP address of
the appliance; simply adding the appliance and its IP address to your /etc/hosts file will not
work.
•
The RSA server requires a reverse DNS entry for the internal interface of the Dell SMA appliance.
After adding the agent host on the RSA server, make sure that you generate the configuration file
(sdconf.rec) for the correct agent host.
If the appliance is part of an HA pair, generate a single sdconf.rec for both servers. When you generate
the configuration file you are prompted to specify the agent host: choose all or range (range should
contain both of the HA appliances). Choose individual only if you are setting up a single appliance.
5
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click New.
6
Under Authentication directory, choose RSA; the Credential type is automatically set to Token/
SecurID. Click Continue.
7
In the Name box, type a name for the authentication server.
8
Specify the location of your RSA Authentication Manager server SecurID configuration file, sdconf.rec,
and then click Save to upload it to the appliance.
This configuration file is in binary format and contains the ports and processes associated with the RSA
authentication service. Once in place, this file is used by the RSA libraries to communicate over the
network to an RSA server.
9
The node secret is negotiated when the first authentication request is made from the agent host. Make
sure that the “node secret created” flag is cleared on the RSA server.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
200
NOTE:
•
If you make any changes to the RSA server (for example, change its IP address, host name, or reinstall it), the sdconf.rec file must be uploaded to the appliance again.
•
After upgrading some older versions, users may not be able to authenticate through the RSA server
because the node secret did not migrate properly. In this case, clear the node secret for the
authentication agent on the RSA server.
Configuring a PKI Authentication Server
You can set up a certificate server so that a user authenticates using a client certificate on his or her device.
Digital certificate authentication can be used alone or in conjunction with another authentication method, such
as RADIUS. (If you set up chained authentication and a digital certificate is one of the methods you use, it must
be the first method; for more information, see Configuring Chained Authentication on page 215.)
NOTE: Affinity servers should be used only for authentication servers that do not include full group search
capabilities, such as RADIUS, RSA, and PKI servers.
To configure a PKI authentication server
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click New.
2
Under Authentication directory, click Public key infrastructure (PKI). The only possible Credential
type is Digital certificate.
3
Click Continue. The Configure Authentication Server page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
201
4
In the Name box, type a name for the authentication server.
5
Under Trusted CA certificates, optionally select the Trust intermediate CAs without verifying the
entire chain check box. This allows a set of trusted intermediate signing authority certificates to be
deployed in various sectors of the network (often by department or organizational unit). For more
information, see About Intermediate Certificates on page 171.
6
On the left you’ll see a list of All CA certificates used by the appliance. Specify one or more root
certificates for establishing a trust relationship with the client device by selecting the check box to the
left of a certificate and then clicking the >> button (a root certificate is one where the Subject and
Issuer are the same). A client’s certificate will be trusted if it matches a root certificate listed in the
Trusted CA certificates list.
7
Under Advanced, in the Username attribute box, type the attribute used for single sign-on (for
example, cn or uid).
8
To use an OCSP responder to determine client certificate status, select the Use OCSP to verify client
certificates check box. If selected, a user may use any access method (ExtraWeb or Connect Tunnel) to
authenticate to a realm that uses this PKI authentication method.
9
Select one of the following options for Use this OCSP responder:
•
System default – A manually configured OCSP responder has priority. The configured OCSP
responder URL is shown here if configured. You can configure it by clicking the here link, which
takes you to the OCSP page available from SSL Settings.
•
User certificate’s AIA extension – The user certificate is parsed to extract the URL of the OCSP
responder. The Authority Information Access (AIA) certificate extension contains URL locations
that provide the issuing CA’s certificate. The AIA extension can contain HTTP, FTP, LDAP, or FILE
URLs.
•
CA certificate’s AIA extension – The CA certificate is parsed to extract the URL of the OCSP
responder.
10 Select the Allow certificate if responder is unavailable check box if the authentication should succeed
in cases where an error occurs, an “unknown” status is returned, or the OCSP responder is not available.
11 Select the Trust signing certificates in response check box to trust certificates in the OCSP response.
This is enabled by default.
You must import the OCSP response signing certificate for the CA certificate being used and enable OCSP
response verification when importing it. The OCSP response signing certificate can be copied from the
OCSP responder or server to a local management machine and then imported from the SSL Settings page
while you are logged in to AMC.
12 Select the Send nonce in request check box and Require nonce in response check box to guard against
malicious replay attacks, in which a successful response is replayed to the client after the subject
certificate is revoked.
13 Click Save.
NOTE:
•
If the CA certificate that you trust for this method of user authentication is not shown in the list,
you may need to add it. See Importing CA Certificates on page 162.
•
If both CRL and OCSP are enabled for a CA certificate, only OCSP will be used.
•
Fallback from CRL to OCSP or OCSP to CRL is not supported.
•
When using Internet Explorer 8 and higher to authenticate using PKI with X.509 certificates from
WorkPlace, if the certificate is not found on the endpoint, it results in an IE error page. The
certificate selection dialog appears only if a valid certificate exists in the client end point;
otherwise IE does not prompt for certificate selection.
•
Connect Tunnel Users Only: Authentication using client certificates is not supported on the
Windows 2003 operating system or the Windows Server platform.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
202
Additional Field for Custom Certificates
The custom SSL client certificate has an additional field to contain an employee ID number (a 10-digit number).
This employee ID number can be parsed and passed to an Active Directory authentication server, which will use
this additional information to determine the authorization and client access privilege of the client and add that
client to the authorized group.
To generate and gain access to SMA with a custom certificate:
1
Create a custom certificate and include the Employee ID number in the custom field.
2
Create a user group on the Active Directory authentication server based on the Employee ID number
field.
3
Create an SMA access policy for that user group on the Active Directory authentication server.
4
Configure the Employee ID number field as the SSO username on the Active Directory authentication
server.
5
Configure Group Affinity Checking on the Active Directory authentication server.
6
Add the appropriate resources and enable SSO for the configured username.
The custom certificate is assigned to the client with that username and is installed on the client’s
device. The client can now use that device to access SMA and all resources that are enabled with SSO for
that client.
Configuring a SAML Based Authentication Server
Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) is an XML-based framework for communicating user authentication,
entitlement, and attribute information. SAML provides a foundation for Web based single sign-on (Web SSO) by
allowing business entities to make assertions regarding the identity, attributes, and entitlements of a subject
(such as a human user) to other entities, such as a partner company or another enterprise application.
In Web SSO, a user either accesses a resource via a service provider (such as the EX Series appliance), or
accesses an identity provider (IDP) such that the service provider and desired resource are understood or
implicit. The user authenticates to the IDP, which then produces an authentication assertion and the service
provider consumes the assertion to establish a security context for the user. Once the security context for the
user exists, the user can access resources at another site without additional authentication. SAML also provides
a Single Logout (SLO) service.
This release supports external IDPs that are deployed in the public Internet. It is assumed that the user uses a
standard browser and can authenticate to the IDP by some means outside the scope of SAML. The user accesses
the appliance through a SAML Authenticated Realm.
When configuring the EX Series appliance to use an SAML 2.0 Identity Provider, such as CA SiteMinder, refer to
the following configuration information:
•
The appliance hosts the SAML SSO Service at https://<appliance>/saml2ssoconsumer
•
The appliance hosts the SAML SLO Service at https://<appliance>/saml2sloconsumer
•
On the IDP:
•
HTTP-POST and HTTP-Redirect Bindings should be enabled and configured
•
SAML SSO and SLO services should be enabled and configured
•
Encryption of nameIDs and Assertions should be disabled
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
203
Configuring a SAML 2.0 Identity Provider Authentication
Server
SAML 2.0 Identity Provider (IDP) provides a centralized security management foundation that enables the secure
use of the Web to deliver applications and cloud services to customers, partners, and employees.
SMA has replaced CA SiteMinder with SAML 2.0 Identity Provider, which supports CA siteMinder as well as other
IDPs. SAML 2.0 Identity Provider supports the following IDPs:
•
Microsoft Azure IDP
•
Dell One Identity Cloud Access Manager
•
Shibboleth IDP
•
OneLogin
•
CA Single Sign-On (CA SiteMinder)
•
PingIdentity PingOne
•
CA SiteMinder
To configure a SAML 2.0 Identity Provider authentication server
1
In the AMC, go to the System Configuration > Authentication Servers page.
2
Click New.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
204
The New Authentication Server dialog appears.
3
Under Authentication directory, select SAML 2.0 Identity Provider.
4
Under Credential type, select Username/Password.
5
Click Continue. The Configure Authentication Server page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
205
6
In the Name field, type a name for the authentication server.
7
In the Appliance ID field, enter the SAML entity ID of the appliance. This is a URI of not more than 1024
characters in length.
8
In the Server ID field, enter the SAML entity ID of the IDP server. This is used by the appliance to
determine the IDP authentication server identity. This is a URI of not more than 1024 characters in
length.
9
In Authentication Service URL, enter the URL where IDP hosts the SAML SSO service.
10 In Logout service URL, enter the URL where IDP hosts the SAML Single Logout (SLO) service.
11 Select the CA certificate for the IDP server from the Trust the following certificate drop-down list. To
configure the CA certificate, you can click the here link in the explanatory text at the right. This CA
certificate needs to be imported onto the appliance if it is not there.
12 Select the Sign AuthnRequest message using this certificate check box and then select the signing
certificate from the drop-down list. The appliance uses this certificate to sign authentication request
messages before sending them to the IDP server. To configure the SSL signing certificate, you can click
the here link in the explanatory text at the right. The signing certificate needs to be imported onto the
appliance if it is not there.
13 Click Save.
NOTE:
•
The SAML 2.0 Identity Provider Authentication Server is supported for Web-based access. Tunnel
agents are not supported.
•
The SAML 2.0 Identity Provider Authentication Server cannot be used for chained authentication.
Configuring a Single Sign-On Authentication Server
Single sign-on (SSO) allows you to configure the appliance to forward user credentials to back-end Web
resources. It also means that the user does not need to log in multiple times (once to get to the appliance, and
again to access an application resource).
The appliance supports various types of Web SSO (as a security measure, SSO is disabled by default).
NOTE:
•
To use SSO functionality when accessing Web applications during tunnel sessions, you can enable
Web resource filtering. See Configuring Web Resource Filtering on page 508 for more information.
•
The Web proxy agent does not support single sign-on to back-end Web servers secured with SSL.
Links to these resources accessed through the Web proxy agent will not provide single sign-on. To
provide either basic authentication or NTLM authentication forwarding to an HTTPS resource,
create an alias for the Web resource and then add it as a link in WorkPlace. This forces the
appliance to provide translated, custom port mapped, or custom FQDN mapped Web access.
•
By default, Web content is proxied directly through the appliance for users running OnDemand
Tunnel. Select Use Web content translation in the Web shortcut access area of the Configure
WorkPlace page in AMC.
Related Topics
•
Forms-Based Single Sign-On
•
Basic Authentication Forwarding
•
NTLM Authentication Forwarding
•
Using RSA ClearTrust Authentication
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
206
Forms-Based Single Sign-On
Many Web applications use forms-based authentication, where the user interface for authentication is a Web
form. You can use AMC to set up a single sign-on profile that will forward a user's appliance credentials to a Web
application that uses forms-based authentication. There are some built-in profiles that you can modify for your
environment:
•
OWA (multiple versions)
•
Citrix Nfuse 1.7
•
Citrix XenApp
See Creating Forms-Based Single Sign-On Profiles on page 257 for more information.
NOTE: Forms-based SSO is supported only with translation. For other access agents (Web proxy and OD
Tunnel) access the backend Web application cookies required for translation are not provisioned to the
server.
Basic Authentication Forwarding
This form of authentication forwarding is supported on a wide variety of platforms, but is not very secure
because it sends passwords in the clear across the network. The appliance can be configured to send each user’s
authentication credentials, or “static” credentials (that is, the same credentials for all users).
To configure basic authentication forwarding
1
Configure a Web application profile to use SSO and specify which user credentials to use.
2
Attach the Web application profile to any Web resources for which you want to use SSO.
Basic authentication forwarding is configured within a Web application profile. For more information, see
Adding Web Application Profiles on page 253.
NTLM Authentication Forwarding
NTLM (Windows NT LAN Manager) uses a challenge/response mechanism to securely authenticate users without
sending passwords in the clear across the network. It provides a secure method for sending Windows network
credentials to a Microsoft IIS (Internet Information Services) Web server.
NTLM authentication forwarding passes a Windows domain name along with the user’s authentication
credentials. This enables users accessing Web resources on Windows networks to be securely authenticated
without sending their passwords in the clear.
To configure NTLM authentication forwarding
1
Enable the SSO options in a Web application profile, and then attach the profile to any Web resources to
which you want to forward user credentials.
2
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers.
3
Click the Edit link for the server you want to configure. The Configure Authentication Server page
appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
207
4
Expand the Advanced settings. Specify the domain name you want to forward in the NTLM
authentication forwarding area:
•
You can type a custom name in the Domain name box, but it is not required. If you do not specify
a name, an empty (null) domain name is forwarded, along with the user credentials.
•
To forward the authentication server name (as specified in the Name box at the top of the page)
along with the user credentials, click Forward the authentication server name as domain
name.
NOTE:
•
To use NTLM authentication forwarding in situations in which the credentials do not match, users
must be running a Web browser that supports NTLM.
•
When single sign-on is enabled, the Web proxy service and the back-end server determine which
authentication method is used. If only one authentication method (basic authentication or NTLM
authentication) is enabled in AMC, that method is used. However, if both methods are enabled in
AMC, NTLM authentication is used because it is the more secure of the two.
Using RSA ClearTrust
With single sign-on, user authentication credentials are forwarded to the appliance from an RSA ClearTrust
server, and the appliance then forwards the credentials to any back-end resource that requires them for
authentication. See RSA ClearTrust Configuration on page 209 for information on setting up the appliance in this
authentication environment.
Using RSA ClearTrust Authentication
The Dell SMA appliance supports authentication by accepting credentials in an RSA ClearTrust authentication
environment. Users can authenticate through the RSA ClearTrust server only when connecting using a Web
browser.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
208
The following illustration shows the typical sequence of events as a user logs in to authenticate in an RSA
ClearTrust environment:
Figure 18. RSA ClearTrust Authentication sequence
1
The user enters the URL for WorkPlace and picks a ClearTrust realm from the drop-down list. If you’ve
configured only one realm for users, it is automatically selected.
2
The Dell SMA appliance forwards the request to the appropriate Web agent. The ClearTrust Web agent is
on a separate ClearTrust-enabled Web server that you specified in AMC.
3
The Web agent checks with the ClearTrust policy server and displays the corresponding authentication
page, prompting the user for credentials.
4
The user's credentials are forwarded to the Web agent, which validates them against its policy server.
5
The user is either authenticated or denied access. If authentication is successful, the credentials are
saved in a cookie and the user has access to VPN resources during the WorkPlace session.
RSA ClearTrust Configuration
To configure RSA ClearTrust to authenticate users, you must specify the URL of the external server because the
appliance does not host the ClearTrust agent. Configuration also requires using AMC to export a .zip file
containing a private key and CGI script, both of which must be installed on the ClearTrust-enabled Web server.
To configure the RSA ClearTrust authentication
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click New.
2
Under Single sign-on server, click RSA ClearTrust (only one ClearTrust server can be specified; if one has
already been configured, this option is dimmed).
3
Click Continue. The Configure Authentication Server page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
209
4
In the Name box, type a name for the authentication server.
5
In the ClearTrust server URL box, type the URL of the Web server that hosts the ClearTrust agent. If the
ClearTrust-enabled Web server is listening on a port other than the default of 636, you can specify a port
number as a colon-delimited suffix. If you want to use a secure SSL connection, include the https://
protocol identifier in this box.
6
A private key and CGI script must be installed on the RSA ClearTrust server, or the computer on which the
RSA ClearTrust Web agent is installed. Click Export to save these items in a .zip file (with a default name
of ctAgent.zip), then install them as follows:
7
•
The private key file (named webagent.key) must be available on the RSA ClearTrust server in the
/usr/local/webagent directory. The computer on which the RSA ClearTrust Web agent is installed
should have openssl libraries in the /usr/lib directory. Or, at a minimum, the libraries
libssl.so.0.9.7 and libcrypto.so.0.9.7 should be available in the same directory.
•
The CGI script must be placed in the /cgi-bin directory of the RSA ClearTrust server.
Click Save.
NOTE: When installing the CGI script file on an RSA ClearTrust-enabled Web server, you must ensure that
the file’s owner, group, and permissions are set appropriately for that server.
Dell Defender
Dell Defender is Dell's product for 2-factor authentication. SMA supports Dell Defender configuration as a
generic RADIUS server.
To configure a new Authentication Server with Dell Defender:
1
Log in to AMC
2
Go to System Configuration > Authentication Servers.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
210
3
Click on New.
The New Authentication Server dialog appears.
4
Select the Dell Defender option.
5
Under Credential Type, select either Token/SecurID or Username/Password.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
211
6
Click Continue.
The Configure Authentication Server dialog appears.
7
In the Name field, enter a name for the authentication server.
8
In the Primary Defender server field, enter the IP address of the primary defender server.
9
In the Secondary Defender server field, enter the IP address of the secondary defender server.
10 In the Shared Secret field, enter your shared secret.
11 In the Connection Timeout field, enter the connection timeout value in seconds. .
12 Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
212
Configuring Local User Storage
You can create local user accounts in AMC and then map them to a local authentication repository. For
information on creating local user accounts, see Managing Local User Accounts on page 93.
Only one local user store can be created on the appliance.
To configure local user authentication
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click New.
2
Under Local user storage, click Local users (if a local store already exists, this option is dimmed).
3
Click Continue. The Configure Authentication Server page appears.
4
In the Name box, type a name for the authentication server.
5
In the Password policy area, specify the minimum and maximum number of characters allowed for
passwords. The minimum can be as low as 4, and the maximum can be up to 256.
6
Select the Lowercase letters check box to specify that user passwords must contain at least one
lowercase character.
7
Select the Uppercase letters check box to specify that user passwords must contain at least one
uppercase character.
8
Select the Numeric digits check box to specify that user passwords must contain at least one number (09).
9
Select the Symbols check box to specify that user passwords must contain at least one symbolic
character ( ~`!@#$%^&*()_-+={}[]|\:;"'<,>.?/ ).
NOTE: UTF-8 characters are supported in the password.
10 In the Password expiration area, select the Passwords expire after check box and enter the number of
days after which user passwords will expire. Clear the check box to allow user passwords to never
expire. If selected, the default is 60 days, the minimum is 1 day, and the maximum is 365 days.
11 Select the Begin prompting user check box and enter the number of days before expiration that the user
will be prompted to change the password. The default is 14 days.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
213
12 To change the prompts and other text that Windows users see when they log in, expand the Advanced
section and select the Customize authentication server prompts check box.
The page title, message, and login prompts can all be customized. For example, if an employee ID
number is used to identify a user, you could change the text for the Identity prompt from Username: to
Employee ID:. If this configuration is being used for testing, a customized Message could point to test
procedures or other instructions.
13 Enter the password or other proof of identity into the Proof field.
14 In the One-Time Passwords area, to configure two-factor authentication with one-time passwords,
select Use one-time passwords with this authentication server.
15 Define the password format by entering the number and type of characters into the Passwords contain
field.
16 In the From address field, enter the email address from which one-time passwords will be sent.
17 In the Default domain field, optionally enter the domain to be appended to each username to create an
email address for local users to which one-time passwords will be sent.
18 You can override the default domain by configuring an email address for each local user in the Email
Address field. This email address will be available as a User attribute type policy variable named
“primaryEmail”. One email address per user is supported.
19 Click the Send test message button to send a test email message to verify that the message, password,
and SMTP settings are correct.
20 In the Subject field, enter the text for the subject line when e-mailing the one-time password.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
214
21 In the Body field, enter the content of the email that will contain the one-time password.
For more information about one-time passwords, see Using One-Time Passwords for Added Security on
page 219.
22 Click Save.
Testing LDAP and AD Authentication Configurations
To help you validate your authentication configuration settings, the AMC pages used to configure Microsoft
Active Directory and LDAP servers include a Test Connection button. Clicking this button establishes a
connection with your external user repository and provides status information.
If you have correctly configured the appliance, a message reading “Valid connection!” appears. If there is an
error in the configuration settings, the message provides a description of the problem.
NOTE: The test connection feature is intended only for testing whether the appliance can bind to an
external directory. If you enter login credentials, the appliance will use them, but it will otherwise
attempt to bind to the directory anonymously. Because it does not actually search the directory, testing a
connection will not validate that your login credentials provide access to the configured domain.
Configuring Chained Authentication
For increased security, you can require users to authenticate to a single realm using two different
authentication methods. For example, you could set up RADIUS or a digital certificate as the first authentication
method, and LDAP or Active Directory as the second one. The local authentication store can be used as either
the primary or secondary authentication server. You can require that the user names are the same on the
primary and secondary authentication servers. To make the login experience for your users a one-step process
you can configure AMC such that users see only one set of prompts.
To configure chained authentication
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Realms.
2
Click the name of the realm you want to modify, or click New and then select an entry in the
Authentication server drop-down list. This is your primary authentication server.
If one of your credential types for chained authentication is a digital certificate, the corresponding
authentication server must be the primary one: you can’t configure a PKI server as your secondary
authentication server.
3
Click Advanced, and then select a Secondary authentication server (if none is defined, click New; see
Configuring Authentication Servers on page 171 for the steps involved in setting up an authentication
server).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
215
4
The remaining (optional) settings can provide more security, help with troubleshooting, and simplify the
login process:
Table 62. Authentication settings
Setting
Description
Audit username from this server
Show the username from the secondary server in the audit and
accounting logs (instead of the username from the primary
authentication server).
Forward credentials from this
server
For single sign-on, one set of credentials must be forwarded to
back-end Web resources. Select this check box to forward the
credentials from this (the secondary) authentication server.
Usernames must match
When this check box is selected, authentication will fail if the
user ID submitted for the first authentication step differs from
the user ID submitted in the second step. This option is available
when the authentication methods use either a
username/password or a token or certificate.
One use case for this option is when the primary authentication
server uses a certificate and the secondary uses a
username/password. Without this option enabled, an end user
could log in with another user's certificate if the first user had
valid credentials. When this setting is turned on, that
authentication attempt would fail because the username in the
certificate would not match the username in the
username/password credentials.
Combine authentication prompts
on one screen
When this check box is selected, the appliance verifies that the
username is the same on both authentication servers. If it is, the
prompts for a user’s credentials are combined on a single screen;
if the usernames differ, the login is rejected and (for security
reasons) there is no error message explaining why.
Authentication prompts cannot be combined if user credentials
involve a digital certificate, though the system still ensures that
the username is the same on both servers.
Customize authentication server
prompts
(Available only when Combine authentication prompts on one
screen is selected, and only for Windows clients.)
When configuring an authentication server, you have the option
of customizing the prompts that users see. When two such
servers are chained together, you can present the user with a
combined authentication prompt that includes customized Title,
Message, and Identity fields. The name for the password fields is
picked up from each authentication server configuration.
If this customization setting is not selected, the user sees the
prompts that are configured for the two authentication servers.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
216
Chained Authentication Login Example
In this example, the system administrator has set up two authentication methods for a realm named Employees:
•
The primary authentication server uses RADIUS; the Proof prompt (on the Configure Authentication
Server page, under Advanced settings) was customized to read Passcode.
•
The secondary authentication server uses LDAP; the Proof prompt was customized to read Remote
access password.
The Advanced settings on the Configure Realm - Employees page look like this, with customized Title,
Message, and Identity prompts:
Based on these AMC settings, the login screen that users see would look like this:
Because the usernames on both authentication servers are the same, the user types his or her username only
once.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
217
NOTE:
•
If the user makes an error while entering username or password information, an error message
appears (“The credentials provided were invalid”) and only the prompts for the secondary
authentication server are displayed. To re-enter his or her credentials, the user must first go to the
original login page by clicking the browser’s Back button.
•
When a username and password are used for both authentication methods, the usernames do not
need to be the same (although they typically are). If the primary username is mapped to a role in
AMC, such as the AMC Administrator Role, the secondary username does not need to be assigned to
the same role. If authentication succeeds on both servers for both usernames, the user is granted
access corresponding to the role of the primary username.
•
Chained authentication is not supported when connecting to the appliance by launching the Virtual
Assist Technician client. When you start the Virtual Assist Technician client and connect to the
appliance, a drop-down list of Domains is available when chained authentication is enabled. The
Management Console domain (realm) is used for logging in to AMC with chained authentication. (If
chained authentication is not enabled, you log in to AMC with an external authentication server.)
The other domain is displayed as Management Console - Legacy. The Virtual Assist technician can
log in to the legacy admin account. See Adding/Editing Legacy Local Administrator Accounts on
page 122.
Enabling Group Affinity Checking in a Realm
The appliance supports “group affinity checking,” a network environment in which a user authenticates against
one server, and a second directory provides information on what groups (if any) a user belongs to. This is a
common requirement when RADIUS SecurID tokens are used for authentication but the user’s group information
comes from an LDAP or Active Directory server. (In contrast, chained authentication requires users to
authenticate against two authentication servers. See Configuring Chained Authentication on page 215 for more
information.)
Group membership is an important part of access control: you can set up the appliance to reference user groups
stored in your directory, and then reference those groups in access control rules.
NOTE: When an Active Directory (AD) server is used as an LDAP server, ACL checks cannot be performed.
Short names (SN) or common names (CN) are not supported on LDAP servers. They are only supported on
AD servers.
To enable group affinity checking
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Realms.
2
Click the name of the realm you want to modify.
3
Click Advanced. In the Group authorization area, select the Enable group affinity checking check box.
4
in the Server list, select the name of the LDAP or Active Directory server that stores the group
information. You can also click New to define a new group affinity server.
If group authorization checking is disabled for an authentication server, the server will not appear in the
list of available affinity servers. See Disabling Authorization Checks on page 174 for more information.
5
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
218
If you are enabling group affinity checking during the process of creating the realm, the available buttons are
different:
•
Click Next to display the Communities tab on the Configure Realms page.
•
Click Finish to return to the Authentication page.
Using One-Time Passwords for Added Security
A one-time password (OTP) is a randomly generated password that is used only once. Using an OTP as the
second factor for authentication provides additional security for users: after standard user name and password
credentials are submitted, the system generates a one-time password, which is sent to the user at a predefined
SMS or email address. The user then logs in to that email account to retrieve the OTP and enters it when
prompted. The likelihood of the password being compromised is reduced because a new OTP is generated after
each successful, cancelled, or failed login, or when a login attempt has timed out.
In order to configure authentication that includes an OTP, you must do the following:
•
Configure your mail server. If one-time passwords are going to be delivered to external domains (for
example, an SMS address or external webmail address), you may have to configure the SMTP server to
allow passwords to be sent from the appliance to the external domain.
•
Configure an OTP in the Advanced area of the authentication server configuration. Specify the directory
attributes that store the email addresses to which OTPs are sent.
Related Topics
•
Configuring SMTP to Deliver One-Time Passwords
•
Configuring an Authentication Server for One-Time Passwords
•
Configuring the AD or LDAP Directory Server
Configuring SMTP to Deliver One-Time Passwords
If the email addresses to which you want to deliver one-time passwords are in an external domain (such as SMS
addresses or external webmail addresses), you must configure your SMTP server to allow passwords to be sent
from the appliance to the external domain.
To configure Microsoft Exchange to support one-time passwords
1
Navigate to Exchange System Manager and expand Servers > Protocols > SMTP.
2
Right-click on Default SMTP Virtual Server, or the appropriate SMTP server instance.
3
Click Properties, and then select the Access tab.
4
Click Relay in the Relay Restrictions area.
5
Select Only the list below, and then click Add.
6
Enter the IP address of your Dell SMA appliance (for example, 10.50.165.5), and then click OK. Your
appliance should be listed with a status of Access Granted.
7
Click OK.
Configuring an Authentication Server for One-Time
Passwords
If the email addresses to which you want to deliver one-time passwords are in an external domain (such as SMS
addresses or external web mail addresses), you must configure your SMTP server to allow passwords to be sent
from the appliance to the external domain, as described in Configuring SMTP to Deliver One-Time Passwords on
page 219.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
219
For each authentication server, you must also specify the directory attribute that stores the email addresses to
which OTPs are sent. You must specify a primary attribute; alternatively, you can specify a secondary attribute
that is queried when the first one cannot be found.
To configure an authentication server to support one-time passwords
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Authentication Servers, and then click Edit next to the AD
(Microsoft Active Directory or Microsoft Active Directory Tree), LDAP, or local authentication server
you want to reconfigure.
2
Select a Credential type, if applicable, and then click Continue.
3
Expand the Advanced area, and then select Use one-time passwords with this authentication server.
4
Enter the directory attribute for the email address to which one-time passwords will be sent. If the
primary attribute exists on the authentication server, it is used, otherwise the secondary attribute, if
specified, is queried.
Configuring the AD or LDAP Directory Server
The schema for your AD or LDAP directory server must include an attribute that contains the email address to
which a one-time password will be sent. The local authentication store uses the “primaryEmail” attribute,
which can be configured per user by editing the local user account. See Managing Local User Accounts on page
93.
This address is not necessarily the user’s corporate email address. In order to complete authentication, a user
has to be able to open the email containing the OTP; if it is sent to a corporate address the user may not yet
have access to the account.
One-time passwords can be configured to be sent in an email message directly to SMS-capable phones. Contact
your cell phone service provider for further information about enabling SMS.
The schema for your directory server (AD or LDAP) must be changed to accommodate an attribute (for example,
SMSphone) that contains the SMS address for a given user. The address that you use depends on the user’s
number and service provider. The attribute value for a Verizon phone with a U.S. domestic number, for
example, looks like this: <10-digit number>@vtext.com.
Configuring Personal Device Authorization
With Personal Device Authorization users connecting to the corporate network with a personal device that is not
registered with the appliance are prompted to register the device. They must agree to the personal device
corporate policies and privacy policies to access corporate resources.
Once the user consents to the corporate policies for a device, the device’s unique Device ID is determined and
the appliance registers the device to the user. Subsequent connections from this device do not require device
authorization.
In addition, the Administrator can monitor usage of personal devices that have accessed the appliance, as
explained in Viewing User Access and Policy Details on page 305
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
220
Perform the following steps to create an Application Zone for Personal Device Authorization:
1
In the Zones section select Application zone from the drop-down list. The Zone Definition Application Zone page appears.
Only those profiles that are Application Access Control aware are included in the profiles.
2
In the All Application Zone Profiles list, select the check box for any profiles that you want to require in
the zone, and then click the right arrow (>>) button. Only one of the profiles in the In Use list needs to
match for the application to be placed in the zone you are creating.
3
If there are no device profiles for this zone, click New to add one. See the Secure Mobile Access
Administrator Guide for more information on creating profiles.
4
Check the top check box in the Device Authorization area to require users to authorize their personal
device before a VPN connection is established. By default, this check box is checked when EPC is enabled
for application zones.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
221
NOTE: Device authorization is not supported by ActiveSync clients. Device authorization should not be
enabled in zones that allow ActiveSync clients.
5
To change the authorization terms that users must agree to, type the desired authorization terms in the
Terms section of the Device Authorization area. The Device Authorization check box must be checked
to edit the terms.
6
By default, a user authorization expires 180 days after the device was last used. When device
authorization is enabled, you can disable zone authorization expiration by unchecking the expiration
check box or change the number of days before expiration by typing the desired number of days.
7
By default, user connections to a zone are not dropped when the connection is inactive. However, a
inactivity timer can be set In the Inactivity timer area to end the connection after a set period of
inactivity. The inactivity timer interval can be set from 3 minutes to 10 hours.
8
Add the zone to a community as explained in Using End Point Control Restrictions in a Community on
page 69.
Next Steps
After you have performed the basic network setup, obtained an SSL certificate for the appliance, and
configured authentication settings, you are ready to start managing users and user groups, defining resources,
and configuring access control rules.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
222
Part 5
Administration
•
Security Administration
•
System Administration
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
223
6
Security Administration
Managing security is perhaps your most important job as an administrator. The Appliance Management Console
(AMC) makes it easy for you to manage the fundamental elements of security administration: resources and
access control rules.
•
Creating and Managing Resources
•
Access Control Rules
Creating and Managing Resources
This section explains how to create and manage individual resources, resource groups, and configuration
settings for resources. You can define a resource before referencing it in an access control rule, or define it
directly from the access control rule interface. (For more information about the latter, see Adding Users and
Resources From Within Access Control Rules on page 281.)
There’s a tool you can use on the appliance command line to see whether you reference any hosts that cannot
be resolved in DNS, or whether your access control rules contain any unreferenced resources. See Validating
Hosts on page 582 for more information.
•
Resource Types
•
Resources and Resource Groups
•
Using Variables in Resource and WorkPlace Shortcut Definitions
•
Creating and Managing Resource Groups
•
Web Application Profiles
•
Creating Forms-Based Single Sign-On Profiles
•
Kerberos Constrained Delegation
•
Configuring SMA Support for Microsoft Outlook Anywhere
Resource Types
The Dell SMA appliance provides access to a wide variety of corporate resources, which fall into three
categories: Web, client/server, and file share resources.
•
Built-In Resources
•
Web Resources
•
Client/Server Resources
•
File Share Resources
Built-In Resources
There are several resources that are built into your appliance to help you get a WorkPlace portal set up quickly.
These built-in resources cannot be deleted—access to some of them is granted through WorkPlace shortcuts:
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
224
Secure Mobile Access WorkPlace (Resource Type: URL)
The WorkPlace portal gives users access to Web-based resources. This particular resource is used by another
built-in item, which you can modify: an access “permit all” rule that allows any user from any zone to have
access to the default WorkPlace portal.
Value: http://127.0.0.1:8085/workplace/
Connect Tunnel (Resource Type: URL)
Connect Tunnel is an application that provides broad access to network resources. You determine how users
access the Connect Tunnel client:
•
Allow users to download the Connect Tunnel client and activate it from a link (shortcut) in WorkPlace.
Keep in mind that when you give users access to this resource, you allow them to both install and use the
client: a user without access to this resource cannot use Connect Tunnel for access to network resources.
The WorkPlace shortcut for this resource (Install Connect Tunnel) can be modified or deleted; the
resource itself cannot.
•
Deploy the Connect Tunnel client setup package without requiring users to log in to Secure Mobile Access
WorkPlace.
Value: http://127.0.0.1:8085/ctdownload/
Network Explorer (Resource Type: Network Share)
Network Explorer is a Web-based extension, accessible from WorkPlace, that provides access to any Windows
file system resources that the user has permission to use (even from desktop browsers on non-Windows
platforms). These resources can include servers, computers, workgroups, folders, and files. The WorkPlace
shortcut for this resource (Network Explorer) can be modified or deleted; the resource itself cannot.
Value: smb://127.0.0.1/networkexplorer/
Web Resources
Web resources include Web-based applications or services that are accessed using HTTP or HTTPS. Examples
include Microsoft Outlook Web Access and other Web-based email programs, Web portals, corporate intranets,
and standard Web servers.
Web traffic is proxied through the Web proxy service, a secure gateway through which users can access private
Web resources from the Internet. When you define a Web resource as a destination in an access control rule,
make sure that Web browser is among the client software agents available for the rule. For more information,
see Resolving Invalid Destination Resources on page 285.
A Web resource can be defined in various ways:
Table 63. Web resource example definitions
URL Type
Example
Standard URL
http://host.example.com/index.html
Standard URL with port number
http://host.example.com:8445/index.html
URL for secure site
https://host.example.com/index.html
URL containing IP address
http://192.0.34.0/index.html
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
225
Table 63. Web resource example definitions
URL Type
Example
Matching URL
Use wildcards to refer to a group of Web resources:
http://mailserver*.company.com/
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot
convert host name, URL, or domain type resources containing wildcards to
an IP address and, therefore, cannot redirect them to the appliance.
URL with path and query string
matching
Block email attachments, or prevent a Web-based application from
displaying restricted data by matching a path element or query string
value to a particular URL:
http://www.patient-records.com/reports.aspx?last_name=
NOTE: Some Web-based applications use Java applets or other browser extensions using protocols other
than HTTP. Although these applications are accessed using a Web browser, they must be defined as
client/server (not Web resources), and they must be accessed using either a network tunnel client or
client/server proxy agent. Examples of such applications include Citrix NFuse, Oracle J-Initiator, and
certain versions of SAP and PeopleSoft.
Client/Server Resources
Client/server resources are enterprise applications that run over TCP/IP (including applications that use UDP).
Examples include thin-client applications such as Citrix; full client/server applications such as Microsoft
Outlook; Lotus Notes; SAP; and terminal servers.
You define these types of client/server applications by specifying a host name, an IP address or IP range, a
subnet IP address, or a DNS domain. These resources can also be used to define a network object containing
multiple Web resources (such as a domain), or to define a network object that can be used to control access
based on the source of a connection request.
The following table explains the syntax used to define each of these resource types. Host names can be fully
qualified or unqualified.
Table 64. Resource type syntax
Resource type
Example
Domain
private.example.com
Host name
bart.private.example.com
Host IP address
192.0.34.72
IP range
192.0.34.72 - 192.0.34.74
Subnet
192.0.34.0 / 255.255.255.0
Example
In this example, a Web development team has a single Web server with three virtual Web servers, one for each
stage in their development process. Each virtual Web server listens on a different port.
Rather than creating three different URL resources, the Web development team can define the Web server,
which proxies traffic on all ports, as a resource type of Host name or IP (for example,
webdev.yourcompany.com). In addition, they attach a single sign-on Web application profile to it, and now
all three of the virtual Web servers are defined at once, and they share the same SSO profile:
webdev.yourcompany.com
webdev.yourcompany.com:8080
webdev.yourcompany.com:8443
NOTE: Microsoft Outlook connects to Microsoft Exchange using an unqualified host name. When defining a
Microsoft Exchange server as a resource, define it as an unqualified name (for example, CorpMail).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
226
To use Exchange on Symbian, Android, iPad and iPhone devices, create a URL resource of the type ActiveSync
for Exchange.
File Share Resources
When users log in to WorkPlace, they have access to file system resources that you set up. These can include
computers containing shared folders and files and Windows network servers.
You can define a specific file system share by typing a UNC path, or you can define an entire Windows domain:
•
A specific file system resource can be an entire server (for example, \\ginkgo), a shared folder
(\\john\public), or a network folder (\\ginkgo\news).
•
Defining an entire Windows domain gives authorized users access to all the network file resources within
the domain. These resources are the same ones you would see if you were to browse the network using
Windows Explorer (My Network Places > Entire Network > Microsoft Windows Network).
You can use resource variables to dynamically reference multiple folders on the network. For example, to give
each user access to a personal folder, create a resource using a variable for the user name, and then use that
variable when you create a shortcut on WorkPlace. See the example in Using Session Property Variables on page
243 for more information.
Resources and Resource Groups
This section describes how to work with resources and resource groups.
•
Viewing Resources and Resource Groups
•
Adding Resources
•
Example: Specifying a URL Alias
•
Example: Blocking Email Attachments
•
Example: Supporting Exchange on iPhones
•
Example: Restricting Access to Sensitive Data
•
Editing Resources
•
Deleting Resources
•
Using the Resource Exclusion List
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
227
Viewing Resources and Resource Groups
You can view and define individual resources or groups of them in AMC.
To view the list of available resources and resource groups
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
On the Resources tab, review the list of available individual resources. (The Resource Groups tab
displays collections of resources.)
3
Use the Filters settings at the top of the page to filter the resources that are displayed here. For
information about using filters, see the “Filters” section under A Quick Tour of the AMC Interface on
page 111.
The Type column displays the type of each resource (Domain name, Host name, etc.). Remember that a
client/server resource can contain both Web and client/server applications.
The Used column indicates whether a resource has been specified in a shortcut on WorkPlace.
4
For an overview of a particular resource, click the plus sign (+) next to it. This shows the resource type,
its value, and whether it is used by a WorkPlace shortcut or access rule.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
228
5
To edit a resource, click its link in the resource list.
NOTE: By default, there are some read-only resource definitions included with the appliance, for
example, Secure Mobile Access WorkPlace and Connect Tunnel Download. These definitions are required
by the appliance services and cannot be deleted (a read-only resource has no check box next to it).
Adding Resources
Creating application resources—Web, client/server, and file share resources—is the first step in forming access
policies for your users.
To add a resource
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click New and then choose a resource type from the drop-down list:
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
229
3
The Add Resource page is displayed. The options you see on the Add Resource page depend on the
resource type you selected.
The following options are shared across the specified resource types:
Table 65. Shared options
Option
Description
Resource type
Name
Resource name
All
Description
Resource description
All
URL
URL of the resource
This destination is on the Select this option if this resource is on an
external network.
external network.
Variable
Use a variable to define dynamic resources;
see Using Variables in Resource and
WorkPlace Shortcut Definitions on page 243.
•
Citrix server farm
•
Domain
•
Host name or IP
•
Matching URL
•
Network share
•
URL
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
230
Table 65. Shared options
Option
Description
Create shortcut in
WorkPlace
Add a shortcut to a Web resource in
WorkPlace. The name you assign to the
resource will appear in the list of Shortcuts
on the Secure Mobile Access WorkPlace
page. You can add the shortcut to a new or
existing shortcut group in order to keep
shortcuts with similar usage requirements
together on the WorkPlace portal page.
•
Domain
•
Network share
•
URL
This list contains preconfigured Web profiles
that are recommended for several popular
Web applications, custom Web profiles, and
a default Web profile. If you are unsure
about which profile to select, choose
Default. To see a profile, click View
selected profile. Also see Adding Web
Application Profiles on page 253.
•
Domain
•
Host name or IP
•
IP range
•
Matching URL
•
Subnet
•
URL
Web application profile
(Web proxy options or
Advanced area)
Resource type
The following options are unique to the URL resource type:
Table 66. URL resource type unique options
Option
Description
URL
If you do not enter a protocol identifier, AMC automatically inserts
http:// before the URL. If this is a URL for a secure site, you must include
the https:// protocol identifier. For example, type
https://example.domain.com.
Custom access area
(Web Proxy Options)
You can choose to Translate this resource or Access this resource on a
custom port or Access this resource using a custom IPv4 or IPv6 FQDN.
Translation uses URL rewriting, but the other alternatives provide
clientless Web application access and do not incur the limitations of URL
rewriting. URL rewriting can have problems with Web programming
technologies such as AJAX.
The options below will vary according to your choice.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
231
Table 66. URL resource type unique options
Option
Description
Alias name
(Web proxy)
Specify a public alias to represent a private URL. The alias name is visible
to users—make it short and descriptive so that it is easy to remember. You
should specify an Alias name if:
•
You want to obscure the internal host name for this resource.
•
The URL resource is not contained within a search domain
configured for Name resolution on the Network Settings page.
•
You normally redirect traffic through a network agent, but in this
case you want to force the resource to be proxied using translated
Web access. See Adding Web Shortcuts on page 415 for more
information.
Notes
•
The private URL that you are representing with the alias must point
to a directory on the back-end server, not a particular file.
•
Use ASCII characters when specifying an alias. Users who connect to
WorkPlace using translated Web access will see an error message if
non-ASCII characters are used.
•
Creating an alias works only for URLs (addresses with an http or
https prefix); you cannot specify an alias for a UNC path or FTP
resource (ftp://), for example.
Also see Example: Specifying a URL Alias on page 237 for a detailed
description of how an alias is used.
Port
(Web proxy)
The Port option is available when you select Access this resource on a
custom port under Custom access. Enter the custom port number. The
resource becomes available at that port on each WorkPlace site. The port
must be open on any firewalls and must not be already in use on the
external side of the appliance. Actual delivery of Web content depends on
policy checks in accordance with normal appliance operation.
Custom FQDN
(Web proxy)
The Custom FQDN option is available when you select Access this
resource using a custom FQDN under Custom access. Type the Custom
FQDN name (such as custom.mydomain.com) to be hosted by an externally
accessible Web server on the appliance.
By default, AMC listens on all interfaces for all services and connects the
request to the correct service based on the FQDN being requested. The
host name cannot be relative to any WorkPlace site. A maximum of 32 IPv4
or IPv6 addresses for externally defined host names are allowed between
independently hosted Web application names and WorkPlace sites,
supporting up to 64 total host names.
Custom FQDN mapped Web access provides Single Sign-on support. If the
host name or IP address on the certificate does not match the Custom
FQDN or IP address that you specified for this site, a security warning is
displayed when users access the site. Custom FQDNs are handled similar to
configuring a WorkPlace site, as explained in To add a WorkPlace site on
page 440.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
232
Table 66. URL resource type unique options
Option
Description
Listen on an additional IP
address
IP address
(Web proxy)
(Migrated/imported configurations only)
https://10.4.124.222/workplace/assets/help/index.html. An additional
listening address can be specified if AMC was upgraded from a previous
version where a virtual IP address is configured for the WorkPlace site or
the CEM is used. To listen on an additional address, check the Listen on an
additional IP address check box and type the IP address.
For new installations, the Listen on an additional IP address fields are
hidden. On a partial import, virtual IP address information is lost, and
applying pending changes forces the Administrator to fix any WorkPlace
site or URL resource configured to use a different IP address. In this case,
the Listen on an additional IP address fields are visible, with the check
box checked to enable listening on an additional address. Either enter an
IP address or uncheck the check box.
For migrated/imported configurations with existing virtual hosts, the UI
section is visible, but the Administrator cannot create new virtual
addresses. If necessary, use CEM to create virtual host addresses in a new
or migrated/imported configuration.
If the host name or IP address on the certificate does not match the IP
address that you specified for this site, a security warning is displayed
when users access the site.
IP address
(Web proxy)
(Migrated/imported configurations only)
New IP address
(Web proxy)
Type in the IP address of the resource in dotted decimal form (w.x.y.z).
This address must be on the same subnet as the appliance interface.
SSL certificate
(Web proxy)
Select an existing SSL certificate or select (New) to add a new SSL
certificate for this resource. If a certificate that matches the name is
already available on the appliance, it is selected. Otherwise, select one
from the SSL certificate list or import a certificate.
Organization
(Web proxy)
Type in your company or organization name.
Country
(Web proxy)
Type in the 2-letter abbreviation for your country (such as US or AU).
Synonyms
(Web proxy)
Define alternative names for the URL resource name. This is convenient for
users if they access the server using a different name (perhaps an
unqualified or condensed name), or if a Web page contains links pointing
to a DNS alias and the name is not properly translated by the Web proxy
service. Separate multiple synonyms with semicolons.
Select an existing IP address or select (New) to add an IP address in the
New IP address field.
The appliance automatically defines a shortened name for the resource as
a synonym. For example, if the URL is http://mail.example.com, the
appliance adds the synonym mail. This synonym does not, however,
appear in the Synonyms box.
When Translate this resource is selected and you specify Synonyms, there
must be something in the Alias name field. For the other Custom access
options, the Synonyms field is independent of other fields.
Provide Exchange
ActiveSync and Outlook
Anywhere access to this
resource (Exchange
Server)
Select this check box to allow Exchange ActiveSync and Outlook Anywhere
access to this resource. For more information, see Exchange ActiveSync
Web Access on page 471. For an example use case, see Example:
Supporting Exchange on iPhones on page 239. For Outlook Anywhere, see
Configuring SMA Support for Microsoft Outlook Anywhere on page 262.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
233
Table 66. URL resource type unique options
Option
Description
Exchange server FQDN
(Exchange Server)
Type the Exchange server FQDN (IPv4 or IPv6) name (such as
Listen on an additional IP
address
IP address
(Web proxy)
(Migrated/imported configurations only)
custom.mydomain.com) to be hosted by an externally accessible Web
server on the appliance. By default, AMC listens on all interfaces for all
services and connects the request to the correct service based on the
FQDN being requested.
An additional listening address can be specified if AMC was upgraded from
a previous version where a virtual IP address is configured for the
WorkPlace site or the CEM is used. To listen on an additional address, check
the Listen on an additional IP address check box and type the IP address.
For new installations, the Listen on an additional IP address fields are
hidden. On a partial import, virtual IP address information is lost, and
applying pending changes forces the Administrator to fix any WorkPlace
site or URL resource configured to use a different IP address. In this case,
the Listen on an additional IP address fields are visible, with the check
box checked to enable listening on an additional address. Either enter an
IP address or uncheck the check box.
For migrated/imported configurations with existing virtual hosts, the UI
section is visible, but the Administrator cannot create new virtual
addresses. If necessary, use CEM to create virtual host addresses in a new
or migrated/imported configuration.
If the host name or IP address on the certificate does not match the IP
address that you specified for this site, a security warning is displayed
when users access the site.
IP address
(Exchange Server)
(Migrated/imported configurations only)
Realm
(Exchange Server)
Select the realm from the drop-down list. ActiveSync access requires the
use of a realm that uses a single Active Directory authentication server.
The realm must be already configured.
Fallback Exchange server
URL
(Exchange Server)
Enter the URL for the Exchange Server you want to use as the fallback
server. See Configuring Fallback Servers on page 510 for details on
configuring a fallback server.
Select an existing IP address or select (New) to add a new IP address.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
234
The following options are unique to the Matching URL resource type:
Table 67. Matching URL resource type unique options
Option
Description
URL
If you do not enter a protocol identifier, AMC automatically inserts
http:// before the URL. If this is a URL for a secure site, you must include
the https:// protocol identifier. For example, type
https://example.domain.com.
The wildcard characters “*” and “?” can be used within address segments
(between periods) of a Matching URL resource. Do not use the “?”
character after the domain name—it indicates a URL query string.
Use wildcard characters in the following situations:
•
Type www.yourcompany*.com to reference several domains that
begin with yourcompany and end with .com, or type
www.yourcompany.* to reference both
http://www.yourcompany.com and http://www.yourcompany.de.
•
Create an entry, such as mail*.yourcompany.com, that gives
the user access to anything in the yourcompany domain that begins
with mail. This example provides access to mail.yourcompany.com
and mail2.yourcompany.com, but not to
mail3.wemmet.yourcompany.com.
The URL is not case-sensitive.
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot
convert host name, URL, or domain type resources containing wildcards to
an IP address and, therefore, cannot redirect them to the appliance.
Path and query string
matching
These options allow you to block email attachments, or prevent a Webbased application from displaying restricted data by matching a path
element or query string value to a particular URL. See Example: Blocking
Email Attachments on page 237 and Example: Restricting Access to
Sensitive Data on page 240 for more information.
The Query string value is case-sensitive, while the Path element is not.
The following options are unique to the Host name or IP resource type:
Table 68. Host name or IP resource type unique options
Option
Description
Host name or IP
A host can include any computer on your network; for example,
bart.private.example.com or 192.0.34.72.
When you specify a host name, the wildcard characters “*” and “?” can be
used within an address segment (between periods). For example, the
entry mail*.yourcompany.com gives the user access to anything in the
yourcompany domain that begins with mail (for example,
(mail.yourcompany.com and mail2.yourcompany.com), but not to
mail3.wemmet.yourcompany.com. The host name is not case-sensitive.
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot
convert host name, URL, or domain type resources containing wildcards to
an IP address and, therefore, cannot redirect them to the appliance.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
235
The following options are unique to the Network share resource type:
Table 69. Network share resource type unique options
Option
Description
Network share
Type a UNC path. This can be an entire server (for example, \\ginkgo),
a shared folder (\\john\public), or a network folder
(\\ginkgo\news).
The following options are unique to the IP range resource type:
Table 70. IP range resource type unique options
Option
Description
IP range
An IP range typically identifies a partial range of computers within a
subnet; for example, 192.0.34.72-192.0.34.74.
The following options are unique to the Subnet resource type:
Table 71. Subnet resource type unique options
Option
Description
Subnet IP
A subnet is a portion of a network that shares a common address
component. For example, 192.26.34.0.
Subnet mask
For example, 255.255.255.0.
The following options are unique to the Domain resource type:
Table 72. Domain resource type unique options
Option
Description
Domain
A domain encompasses one or more hosts.
If the Windows domain check box is cleared, the domain name must be in
DNS syntax. For example, sampledomain.com.
Windows domain
To define an entire Windows domain, select the Windows domain check
box, and then type the name of the Domain in either NetBIOS or DNS
syntax (such as example or example.com). Defining a domain gives
authorized users access to all the network file resources within the
domain.
The following options are unique to the Server farm resource type:
Table 73. Server farm resource type unique options
4
Option
Description
Server farm list
Specify the Host name or IP address and service Port of up to six Citrix
servers running the XML service or VMware servers running the XML
service or VMware servers running the broker service. For more
information, see Adding Citrix Server Farm Resources on page 514 or
Adding VMware View Resources on page 516.
After you’ve finished defining a resource, click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
236
Example: Specifying a URL Alias
Any Web resource—such as a Web application, a Web portal, or a Web server—can be defined as a “URL
resource.” Defining a Web resource as a URL provides several advantages:
•
You can create a Web shortcut for WorkPlace to give users quick access to a URL resource.
•
You can define very specific access rules to control which users can access the URL.
•
You have the option of obscuring (or “aliasing”) the internal host name so it is not publicly exposed.
When a user accesses an alias, the request is proxied to the downstream Web resource and its private
URL is translated using the alias you specify. The user sees only the public (or “aliased”) URL.
The following figure illustrates how the private address for an inventory application might be translated into a
public URL.
The private URL for this resource is http://inventory.example.com, and the administrator has created an alias
for it named supplier.
Instead of using the private URL (which would publicly expose a sensitive host name), suppliers access a public
URL: https://vpn.example.com/supplier.
A public URL consists of the following:
•
An https:// prefix rather than http://: this is because all traffic to and from the Dell SMA appliance is
secured using SSL
•
The appliance’s fully qualified domain name (in this example vpn.example.com)
•
The resource’s alias name (in this example supplier)
NOTE:
•
Some Web-based applications use Java applets or other browser extensions that submit traffic
using protocols other than HTTP. Examples of such applications include Citrix NFuse and certain
versions of SAP. Although accessed using a Web browser, these applications may need to be defined
as a client/server resource and proxied through OnDemand using the client/server access service.
•
The private URL for which you create an alias must be a directory on the back-end server; it cannot
be a file, and it must begin with either http:// or https://.
•
Use ASCII characters when specifying an alias. Users who connect to WorkPlace using translated
Web access will see an error message if non-ASCII characters are used.
•
For information on defining URL resources, see Adding Resources on page 229.
Example: Blocking Email Attachments
Your organization may need to restrict access to sensitive data for users working from an unmanaged or
untrusted public system. For example, you may want to allow users to view email messages, but prevent them
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
237
from downloading email attachments that could be left behind on the computer and accessible to unauthorized
users.
The following example demonstrates how to use an access control rule, together with a Matching URL resource
and End Point Control zone, to block attachments from being downloaded to untrusted devices. For an overview
of access control, see Access Control Rules on page 266.
The example assumes that you have an EPC zone configured (named Untrusted in this example) into which
devices that are not IT-managed are classified; see Managing EPC with Zones and Device Profiles on page 357 for
information about configuring and using zones.
To block email attachments using a Matching URL resource
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
2
Click New. The Add/Edit Access Rule page appears.
3
In the Position box, type a number to specify the rule’s position in the access rule list.
4
Use the Action buttons to specify Deny. This will deny users access to any resource that matches the
pattern you specify in the next step.
5
Complete the information under Basic settings:
a
Leave User selected (so that the rule users trying to access a resource).
b
The From box specifies the users to whom the rule applies. For this example, leave the value as
Any user.
c
In the To box, click Edit to specify the target resource for this rule. A Resources window appears.
d
Click New and then select Matching URL. The Add Resource - Matching URL page appears.
e
Type a name for the resource. For example, Block email attachments.
f
In the URL box, type the URL address of your mail server.
g
In the Path and query string matching area, select Exchange/OWA attachments from the Type of
match list.
h
Click Save. The Add Resource - Matching URL window closes.
6
In the End Point Control zones area, click Edit to select the zone from which you will deny access to the
resource (Untrusted).
7
When you create a rule that specifies a Matching URL resource type, the user must be allowed to use a
browser as an access method. On the Advanced tab, in the Access method restrictions area, make sure
that the Client software agents are either set to Any, or that Web browser is among the selected
agents.
8
Click Finish.
NOTE:
•
Some Web-based applications automatically redirect users to other Web pages. Be certain to use
the target URL address (the Web page to which users are redirected) when configuring the
appliance to block email attachments. See Example: Working with a URL Redirect on page 251 for
more information.
•
You cannot configure a Matching URL resource to block attachments for users who connect to the
appliance using OnDemand Tunnel or Connect Tunnel.
Related Topics
•
Example: Restricting Access to Sensitive Data
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
238
Example: Supporting Exchange on iPhones
Exchange ActiveSync Email and related functions are supported on Android, Windows Mobile, and Apple iPad
and iPhone.
The following example describes configuring a URL resource to support iPhone users who wish to access
Microsoft Exchange.
NOTE: This example assumes you have a realm which uses single Active Directory authentication.
Allow iPhone users to access corporate Exchange server
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click New. Select URL. The Add Resource URL page appears.
3
Enter the name, description, and externally-facing URL. Enter only the server name without a starting or
index page. In this example, we will use internalexchangeserver.SMA.com.
4
Choose a group to add this resource to. In this example, we have left this in the default group.
5
Click Exchange Server options. The Exchange Server options section appears.
6
Select the Enable Exchange ActiveSync and Outlook Anywhere access to this resource check box.
7
In the Host and domain name field, type the external host name and domain that will be accessed by
iPhone users.
8
Select the realm from the Realm drop-down list. Only realms that use Active Directory for
authentication are available as choices.
9
Click Save.
10 To configure an ActiveSync device profile for iPhones, click End Point Control in the main navigation
menu in AMC.
11 On the Device Profiles tab, click New and select Exchange Activesync.
12 Enter a name and description for the device profile in the Name and Description fields.
13 In the Add attribute(s) section, select Equipment ID for the Type.
14 In the Device identifier field, enter the user attribute variable that contains the device identifier. For
iPhone, the identifier is the serial number of the device. For details, see the Equipment ID table under
Device Profile Attributes on page 379.
15 Click Save.
16 Notify your iPhone users of the externally-facing URL and instruct them to log in using their Active
Directory credentials. Users must configure ActiveSync for Exchange on the device:
a
On the iPhone, navigate to Settings > Mail > Contacts and Calendars > Add Account > User’s
account info.
b
Set the server name to the URL (external host name and domain) provided by the administrator.
NOTE: To ensure that your Exchange server is correctly configured to work with iPhones, it is
recommended that you test iPhone access with the Exchange server directly. After confirming iPhone
access to email, then add the Dell SMA appliance between the iPhone and the Exchange server. If your
Exchange server is not accessible from the Internet, you can set up a WiFi access point to test iPhone
access to it.
For details about setting up an Exchange server for iPhone access, refer to the iPhone Enterprise Deployment
Guide, available at: http://images.apple.com/ie/iphone/business/docs/Enterprise_Deployment_Guide.pdf.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
239
Example: Restricting Access to Sensitive Data
The following example demonstrates how to use an access control rule, together with a Matching URL resource
and End Point Control zone, to prevent a Web-based application from displaying restricted data to untrusted
devices.
•
For an overview of access control, see Access Control Rules on page 266.
•
The example assumes that you have an EPC zone configured (named Untrusted in this example) into
which devices that are not IT-managed are classified; see Managing EPC with Zones and Device Profiles
on page 357 for information about configuring and using zones.
Prevent a Web-based application from retrieving data using a Matching URL resource
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
2
Click New. The Add/Edit Access Rule page appears.
3
In the Position box, type a number to specify the rule’s position in the access rule list.
4
Use the Action buttons to specify Deny. This will deny users access to any resource that matches the
pattern you specify in the next step.
5
Complete the information under Basic settings:
a
Leave User selected (so that the rule applies to users trying to access a resource).
b
The From box specifies the users to whom the rule applies. For this example, leave the value as
Any user.
c
In the To box, click Edit to specify the target resource for this rule. A Resources window appears.
d
Click New and then select Matching URL. The Add Resource - Matching URL page appears.
e
Type a name for the resource. For example, Patient Records.
f
In the URL box, type the URL address of your Web-based application. For example,
www.patient-records.com.
g
In the Path and query string matching area, select Custom from the Type of match list.
h
Click New and then select Path element. Type reports.aspx and then click OK (the path is not
case-sensitive).
i
Click New again and select Query string. Type last_name= and then click OK (the query string is
case-sensitive).
j
Click Save. The Add Resource - Matching URL window closes.
6
In the End Point Control zones area, click Edit to select the zone from which you will deny access to the
resource (Untrusted).
7
When you create a rule that specifies a Matching URL resource type, the user must be allowed to use a
browser as an access method. On the Advanced tab, in the Access method restrictions area, make sure
that the Client software agents are either set to Any, or that Web browser is among the selected
agents.
8
Click Finish.
Once you save and apply your changes, users who attempt to open the Patient Records resource (using a URL
that matches http://www.patient-records.com/reports.aspx?last_name=) and who are classified
into the Untrusted zone will be denied access.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
240
NOTE:
•
Some Web-based applications automatically redirect users to other Web pages. Be certain to use
the target URL address (the Web page to which users are redirected) when configuring the
appliance to block email attachments. See Example: Working with a URL Redirect on page 251 for
more information.
•
You cannot configure a Matching URL resource to restrict access to sensitive data for users who
connect to the appliance using OnDemand Tunnel or Connect Tunnel.
Related Topics
•
Example: Blocking Email Attachments
Editing Resources
Before modifying a resource, carefully examine any Access Control rules associated with it to understand how
your changes will affect your security policy.
To edit a resource
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click the name of the resource that you want to edit.
3
On the Add/Edit Resource page, make your edits as needed.
4
Click Save.
NOTE: You cannot change an existing client/server resource’s definition setting (for example, change a
host name to an IP range); instead, you must create a new resource and apply the appropriate definition
setting.
Deleting Resources
You cannot delete a resource that is referenced in an access control rule, resource group, or WorkPlace
shortcut. Before deleting a resource, you must first remove it from any rules in which it is referenced. See
Deleting Referenced Objects on page 136 for more details.
To delete a resource
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
On the Resources page, select the check box to the left of any resources that you want to delete.
3
Click the Delete button. If this resource is still referenced by an access control rule, resource group, or
WorkPlace shortcut, AMC displays an error message. Click the link in the error message to see a list of all
references to this resource.
Using the Resource Exclusion List
By default, access agents and Web browsers redirect connections through the appliance for destination
resources that you’ve defined in AMC. This redirection is a little different, depending on the user’s means of
access:
•
The tunnel access agent redirects connections through the appliance for any destination resource that
the user is permitted to access.
•
A Web browser redirects to the appliance all destination resources that have been defined in AMC; if the
user does not have access, a “permission denied” Web page is displayed.
There may, however, be resources that you don’t want redirected through the appliance. For example, a user
starts Outlook Web Access through the appliance and reads an email message with a link to a public site that is
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
241
within a domain resource configured on the appliance. The traffic generated by following that link would be
sent through the appliance. You can prevent this by specifying the public resource in the exclusion list.
Use the resource exclusion list to specify any resources (including host names, IP addresses, or domains) from
being redirected through the appliance. When specifying a domain, you can also use the wildcard characters
asterisk (*) and question mark (?). This list is global and all access services.
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot convert host name, URL, or
domain type resources containing wildcards to an IP address and, therefore, cannot redirect them to the
appliance.
The resource exclusion list does not affect access control or security. If you want to prevent access to particular
resources, add a Deny rule to the access control list.
To see which resources are configured to be redirected through the appliance, click the Show network
redirection list link. This displays the Redirection List page.
To delete a resource from the exclusion list, select its check box and then click Delete.
If you exclude a resource by specifying its fully qualified domain name (FQDN), users who connect to WorkPlace
from a realm that provides access using translated Web mode can still access the resource if they type its
unqualified domain name in the WorkPlace Intranet Address box.
To add a resource to the resource exclusion list
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click the Resource exclusion list link at the bottom of the page.
3
In the Exclusion list box, click New, and then type the host name, IP address, or domain that you want
to exclude from being redirected through the appliance. Wildcard characters (* and ?) are permitted.
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot convert host
name, URL, or domain type resources containing wildcards to an IP address and, therefore,
cannot redirect them to the appliance.
For example, if you have three public web servers (www.YourCompany.com, www2.YourCompany.com,
and www3.YourCompany.com), you can allow the network traffic associated with them to avoid the
appliance, which will improve performance. Add all three public sites to the Exclusion list by using a
wildcard character: www*.YourCompany.com. Resources in this list can also contain variables; see Using
Variables in Resource and WorkPlace Shortcut Definitions on page 243 for more information.
4
Click OK after each addition to the Exclusion list.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
242
5
Click Save.
CAUTION: If you create a Domain resource in AMC (for example, win.yourcompany.com), and you
exclude a resource from that domain using its IP address (10.20.30.40), the resource can still be
accessed using its FQDN (server.win.yourcompany.com). This note of caution applies only to agents
that use the Web proxy service, not the tunnel clients.
Using Variables in Resource and WorkPlace Shortcut
Definitions
Using variables, you can define a single resource or WorkPlace shortcut that derives its value from a property
that is unique for each user. Variables can be defined by a property associated with the session a user has
started (the user name, for example, or the name of the zone to which he or she has been assigned), or by
querying an external LDAP store for a specific set of attributes, such as a group or computer name.
Variables can be used for all resource types except IP range and Subnet. If a variable resolves to nothing, any
configuration item using it will be undefined. For example, you might query an LDAP store for a user’s IMEI
number (the built-in ID number on a mobile device). In the case of a user who does not have an IMEI number, the
variable would not resolve to anything during that user session. A WorkPlace shortcut that uses the variable
would not be displayed, for example, and a policy rule that uses it will also fail.
Related Topics
•
Using Session Property Variables
•
Using Query-Based Variables
•
Modifying Query Results
•
Displaying a Series of Shortcuts Using a Single Definition
Using Session Property Variables
Once a user has started a WorkPlace session by logging in, there are several session properties that are known,
such as the name of the community to which the user has been assigned. You can use these properties to create
dynamic resources.
For example, you might want mobile users to have access to a different network share than users with desktop
computers. The way you would do this is as roughly as follows:
•
Define two communities (Mobile and Desktop).
•
Set up two file shares on your network. For example, \\company\Mobile and \\company\Desktop.
•
Define a resource for WorkPlace: \\company\{Session.communityName}.
A single resource can in this manner present both kinds of users with the link that’s appropriate for their
devices.
Table 74. Built-in variables
Built-in variables
Description
{Session.activeDirectoryDomain}
The FQDN or IP address of the AD domain to use as a search base.
{Session.activeDirectoryDomain2}
The FQDN or IP address of a second AD domain to use as a search
base (if you’re using chained authentication).
{Session.communityName}
The name of the community to which the user was assigned when
he or she logged in. The community controls which access agents
are available and the end point.
{Session.ntDomain}
The login domain. For example, server3 in this FQDN:
server3.uk.company.com.
{Session.password}
The password from the first authentication method.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
243
Table 74. Built-in variables
Built-in variables
Description
{Session.password2}
The password from the second authentication method, if used.
{Session.qualifiedName}
For your primary (or only) authentication method, this is the fully
qualified user name (username@userdomain.company.com).
{Session.qualifiedName2}
For your secondary authentication method, this is the fully
qualified user name.
{Session.realmName}
The name of the realm the user is logged in to.
{Session.remoteAddress}
The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the user's host as seen by the
appliance.
{Session.userName}
The short name for the user from the first authentication method.
The short name is usually used for both the user’s email address
and home folder.
{Session.userName2}
The user’s short name from the second authentication method, if
used.
{Session.zoneName}
The name of the zone to which the user has been assigned, based
on the profile of his or her device.
To create a WorkPlace shortcut to a network share based on user name
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click New, and then select Network share.
3
Give this resource a name (for example, Personal Folder), and then type the UNC path for the user
folders on your network in the Network share box. For example, \\marine_lab\users\.
4
Click {variable} and select Session.userName to add a variable that represents the short login name for
the user. When you click Insert, the entry for Network share looks like this:
\\marine_lab\users\{Session.userName}
5
Select the Create shortcut on WorkPlace check box, and then click Save. By default, the resource you
created will be displayed as a link in WorkPlace titled Personal Folder. If you want to change the link
text, go to the WorkPlace page in AMC, and then click the link for the new shortcut.
When the user jdoe connects to WorkPlace, the variable is automatically replaced with the name entered
during login and provides access to a folder named \\marine_lab\users\jdoe. When user rsmith follows the
same link, he has access to the \\marine_lab\users\rsmith folder.
NOTE:
•
For instructions on defining a new variable based on an LDAP query, see Using Query-Based
Variables on page 244.
•
There is an additional built-in variable named {URL_REF_VALUE}, which is the value of the first
variable in the URL of a shortcut. See Displaying a Series of Shortcuts Using a Single Definition on
page 247 for an example of how to use this.
Using Query-Based Variables
When you configure a realm to use an Active Directory or LDAP authentication server, resources can be defined
by querying the external LDAP store for a specific attribute or set of attributes. For example, you can use an
LDAP query to create a single resource offering each user a WorkPlace link to his or her personal desktop from
home or elsewhere, using the remote desktop protocol (RDP) that is built into Windows.
To create a resource variable that points to users’ remote desktops
1
Modify your LDAP store and add an attribute named rdp.
2
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
244
3
Click the Variables tab, and then click New.
4
Enter a name for the variable (for example, Desktop), and then select User attribute as the Type.
5
Enter rdp in the Attribute text box.
6
In the Output list, leave Single result selected if each user has only one computer associated with him or
her in the LDAP store.
7
Select the realm to which this new variable applies, and then enter the username of someone who has
access to that realm in the User text box.
8
Click Test to make sure that the user attribute you specified returns a value for this user.
9
Click Save.
10 On the Resources tab, click New, and then select Host name or IP.
11 Give a name to this resource (for example, Personal computer).
12 In the Host name or IP address text box, click {variable}, and then select {Desktop}, the variable you
created earlier. Click Insert.
13 Edit the entry for Host name or IP address to add the portion of the address that the personal
computers on your network share. The completed entry might look something like this:
{Desktop}.dept.company.com
As each user logs in, {Desktop} is replaced by the machine name associated with him or her in the LDAP
store using the rdp attribute.
14 Click Save.
To create a WorkPlace link to give users access to their remote desktops
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click WorkPlace.
2
Click New, and then select Graphical terminal shortcut.
3
In the Resource list, select Personal computer, and then specify what the link text will be in WorkPlace.
For example, My remote desktop.
4
Click Save. By default, the resource you created will be displayed as a link in WorkPlace titled My
remote desktop.
When the user John Doe connects to WorkPlace from home or on the road, {Desktop} is replaced by the
contents of the rdp attribute associated with him in the LDAP store, and he sees a WorkPlace link (My remote
desktop) that points to his office computer (john_doe-340.dept.company.com). When Paula Smith follows the
same link, she has access to paula_smith-452.dept.company.com. If the rdp attribute is empty for a given
user, then that user will not see a WorkPlace shortcut when he or she logs in.
To create a variable that contains a variable
You can simplify the creation of user-specific links or shortcuts by using one or more variables to define another
one. For example, in the procedure above, a Host name or IP address resource was defined as follows, using a
variable named {Desktop} followed by a string, in this case the path:
{Desktop}.dept.company.com
You could instead create a variable named {Desktop_path} that resolves to the entire path above.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
245
In another example of using multiple variables to create a single variable, you could replace dept in the path
above with the user’s ou (organizational unit) attribute in the LDAP store. This table summarizes the
possibilities in the examples outlined here:
Table 75. AMC variables
AMC variable name
Resolves to...
Based on...
{Desktop}
john_doe-340
rdp (LDAP attribute)
{dept}
Sales
ou (LDAP attribute)
{Desktop_path}
john_doe-340.dept.company.com
AMC variable defined as follows:
{Desktop}.dept.company.com
{Desktop_by_dept}
john_doe-340.Sales.company.com
AMC variable defined as follows:
{Desktop}.{ou}.company.com
Variables cannot be nested more than two deep: you cannot create a variable that refers to a variable that in
turn refers to another variable.
Modifying Query Results
You can create a variable by querying an external AD/LDAP store for a specific attribute or set of attributes. To
make the query results more useful, you can automatically extract data from them: after the query is sent and
the full variable string has been determined, you can perform search and replace operations on its value.
For example, let’s say you have a company with offices in multiple locations, and each office uses a different
Exchange server for email. Using some editing options, you can define a single variable that represents both
Exchange servers, regardless of location.
To define a variable by automatically editing the results of a query
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click the Variables tab, and then click New.
3
Enter a name for your variable. For example, Exchange_server.
4
In the Type list, select User attribute.
5
Select the appropriate realm from the list: it should point to the AD/LDAP store that you will query.
6
In the Attribute list, select msExchHomeServerName.
7
Query the directory server for two different employees—for example, one at headquarters in London,
and one in California—by entering the user name and clicking Test for each one. In this example the only
difference is in the server name at the end of the resulting strings:
/o=Your Company, Inc./ou=UK/cn=Configuration/cn=Servers/cn=LN0EXL09
/o=Your Company, Inc./ou=UK/cn=Configuration/cn=Servers/cn=CA0EXV08
8
Now modify the query results by clicking New in the Editing options area:
a
In the Search box, enter the following:
/o=Your Company, Inc./ou=UK/cn=Configuration/cn=Servers/cn=
b
Leave the Replace box empty, and then click OK.
For an employee in the London office or one in California, the variable named Exchange_server will contain the
appropriate name, either LN0EXL09 or CA0EXV08, depending on the user.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
246
Using the same query, you can create an additional variable that indicates where an employee is based. For
example, create a new variable named Location and replace the name of each directory server with its
location:
The Location variable will resolve to London or California, depending on the user.
For example, when you enter a London employee’s name in the User box and click Test, you’ll see the following
results:
Displaying a Series of Shortcuts Using a Single Definition
When you create a variable based on a user’s session properties or the results of a query, the variable can
resolve to one value per user attribute (for example, sAMAccountName and lastLogon), or multiple values
(such as a list of groups to which a user belongs, or the workstations a user is permitted to log in to). When a
variable can have multiple values, you have the option of creating one shortcut for it that is automatically
displayed as a series of shortcuts in WorkPlace.
In this example, we’ll create a single shortcut that will result in a series of WorkPlace shortcuts, one for each
workstation the user is allowed to access. Here’s an overview of the process:
Table 76. Shortcut creation process
Step
Description
A
Create a variable named User_workstations that points to a multi-valued attribute in an AD or LDAP
server named userWorkstations. In the directory store, this attribute lists the workstations a user is
allowed to access. For example, a user might have a personal workstation at work, and another
workstation that’s used for order inventory.
B
Create a host resource named Workstation_list that points to the User_workstations variable. For
the user in this example, the resource has two possible values.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
247
Table 76. Shortcut creation process
Step
Description
C
Create a WorkPlace graphical terminal shortcut that points to the Workstation_list resource. The
link for this shortcut will refer to a special, built-in variable named {URL_REF_VALUE}, which will
automatically result in separate links in WorkPlace for each of the workstations a user is permitted
to use.
D
Test WorkPlace. If the shortcut does not appear, it may be because the directory store query is not
returning any results. Testing it will also help you see whether you need to adjust the location of the
shortcuts in your WorkPlace layout.
A: Create a variable that points to a user attribute in the AD server
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources, and then go to the Variables page.
2
Click New, and then enter a name for the variable: User_workstations.
3
Select User attribute in the Type list, and then specify the realm that uses the directory store you want
to query.
4
In the drop-down list of attributes returned from the AD store, select userWorkstations.
5
In the Output list, select Multiple results.
6
In the User text box, enter the name of a representative user (someone who is likely to use this
shortcut), and then query the AD/LDAP store for the values of userWorkstations by clicking Test.
7
The test results will indicate what character (for example, a comma or a semicolon) you should enter in
the Delimiter box.
8
Click Save. The new variable ({User_workstations}) appears in the list and can now be used to define or
describe other variables, resources, or WorkPlace shortcuts.
B: Create a host resource that points to the {User_workstations} variable
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click New, and then select Host Name or IP Address.
3
Enter Workstation_list as the resource name.
4
In the Host name or IP address box, click {variable}, and then select {User_workstations}, the variable
you created in step A.
5
Click Insert, and then click {variable} again to close the list.
6
Edit the entry for Host name or IP address to add the portion of the address that the computers on your
network share. The completed entry might look something like this:
{User_Workstations}.dept.company.com
C: Create a WorkPlace shortcut that points to the Workstation_list resource
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
248
2
On the Shortcuts page, click New, and then select Graphical terminal shortcut from the list. The
General tab of the Add Graphical Terminal Shortcut page appears.
3
In the Position box, specify the shortcut’s position in the list. (It’s possible to change its position later in
your WorkPlace layout.)
4
In the Resource list, select the resource to which this shortcut will be linked: Workstation_list.
5
In the Link text box, type the first part of the hyperlink users will see. For example, enter My
workstation(s): followed by a space.
6
Using a variable you can have the link end in each succeeding value for Workstation_list; if there is more
than one, then more than one shortcut will be displayed in WorkPlace. Click {variable}, and then select
{URL_REF_VALUE} from the list. Click Insert to add the variable to the link text, and then close the list
by clicking {variable} again. The entry for Link now looks like this:
My workstation(s): {URL_REF_VALUE}
7
Click Finish to save the shortcut. (For a description of the settings on the Advanced page, see Adding
Graphical Terminal Shortcuts to Individual Hosts on page 525.)
This shortcut will automatically result in separate links in WorkPlace for each of the workstations a user
is permitted to use. The two WorkPlace links in our example—one to a personal workstation and one to a
workstation for entering orders—would look like this for the user “ageorge”:
D: Troubleshooting WorkPlace
1
2
If users log in to WorkPlace and do not see the shortcut you created, check the following:
a
Is the user in the right community? In the main navigation menu in AMC, click User Sessions, and
then click the user’s name to get session details. The user may not be assigned to the right
community, or there may be a rule preventing him or her from accessing the resource.
b
Does the variable return a result for this user? In the main navigation menu in AMC, click
Resources, and then go to the Variables page. Click the variable named User_workstations,
enter the name of the person who is not seeing the shortcut, and then click Test. If no result is
returned, the shortcut will not be displayed.
Check your WorkPlace layout. When you create a shortcut, you have the opportunity to add it to a group
of shortcuts or to the default group (Standalone shortcuts). To change the position of the shortcut, click
Realms, and then click the name of the community to which this user belongs. The WorkPlace
Appearance page indicates which layout is being used. To modify page content, click Manage layouts.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
249
Creating and Managing Resource Groups
You can define individual resources or manage them in resource groups, which are collections of individual
resources. Grouping resources provides a convenient way to manage access to a set of resources with similar
characteristics. For example, you might define a resource group containing applications that are important only
to your remote employee, simplifying the process of managing access to those resources.
There is no limit to the number of resources that a resource group can contain. When you create a new resource
group, it is added to your list of available resources and groups; you can then use the resource group in access
control rules.
•
Adding Resource Groups
•
Example: Working with a URL Redirect
•
Editing and Deleting Resource Groups
Adding Resource Groups
When you create a new resource group, it is added to the list of available groups on the Resource Groups tab of
the Resources page.
To add a resource group
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click the Resource Groups tab.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
250
3
Click New to add a resource group.
4
Type a Name for the resource group.
5
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the group.
6
Select the check box for each resource you want to include in the group, or leave the group empty and
add resources to it later. There is no limit to the number of resources that a group can contain.
7
After you have finished, click Save.
Example: Working with a URL Redirect
Some Web-based applications automatically redirect users to other Web pages. A user accessing the application
may browse to a particular Web address, but then be redirected to a different address.
For example, an organization has a mail server with the following URL:
http://domino.example.com/dwa.nsf
A user who accesses this site is then automatically redirected to a different URL:
http://domino.example.com/mail/dwa1.nsf
To give users access to the application using the Dell SMA appliance, you need to add both the original and the
redirected URLs as resources.
The following example demonstrates how to add your Web-based application as a pair of URL resources, how to
group the resources together, and then how to define an access control rule so that your users have access to
the application.
Configure URL resources for your Web-based application
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click New and then select URL from the drop-down list. The Add/Edit Resource – URL page appears.
3
In the Name box, type a name for the resource. For example, Mail Web App.
4
In the URL box, type the address of the mail server. For example,
http://domino.example.com/dwa.nsf.
5
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
251
6
Repeat the previous steps to create a second Web resource specifying the redirected URL address. If your
application uses more than one redirected URL, create an additional URL resource for each address; this
example assumes there are only two URLs involved.
Create a resource group for both URL resources
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
2
Click the Resource Group tab, and then click New. The Add/Edit Resource Group page appears.
3
In the Name box, type a name for the group resource. For example, Mail Web App Group.
4
Select the check boxes for each of the Web resources previously created.
5
Click Save.
Define an access control rule for the resource group
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
2
Click New. The Add/Edit Access Rule page appears.
3
In the Position box, type a number to specify the rule’s position in the access rule list.
4
Use the Action buttons to specify Permit. This will allow users to access the group resource that you
specify in the next step.
5
Complete the information under Basic settings:
6
a
Leave User selected (so that the rule applies to users trying to access a resource).
b
The From box specifies the users to whom the rule applies. For this example, leave the value as
Any user.
c
In the To box, click Edit to specify the target resource for this rule. A Resources window appears.
d
Select the resource group previously created. In this example, Mail Web App Group.
Click Save.
For an overview of access control, see Access Control Rules on page 266.
Editing and Deleting Resource Groups
Before modifying a resource group, carefully examine the associated rules to understand how your changes will
affect your security policy. You cannot delete a resource group that is referenced in an access control rule.
Before deleting a resource group, you must first remove it from any rules in which it is referenced. See Deleting
Referenced Objects on page 136 for more details.
Web Application Profiles
Web application profiles provide single sign-on and translation control for Web applications that use Windows
NTLM authentication (v1 and v2 are both supported), or basic authentication.
•
With a Web application that uses Windows NTLM authentication, access is granted only to users whose
Windows credentials can be verified. Support for NTLM is built into Microsoft IIS (Internet-based services
for Windows machines) and supported in Internet Explorer.
•
Basic authentication is supported on a wide variety of platforms (note, however, that it sends passwords
in the clear across the network).
You can also configure the Web proxy service in AMC to support forms-based authentication, in which users
authenticate by filling out a standard HTML form Web using any combination of browser and Web server. See
Creating Forms-Based Single Sign-On Profiles on page 257 for more information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
252
•
Viewing Web Application Profiles
•
Adding Web Application Profiles
•
Preconfigured Web Application Profiles
•
Web Application Profile Examples
•
Editing and Deleting Web Application Profiles
Viewing Web Application Profiles
Web application profiles are listed on the Configure Web Proxy Service page.
To view your list of available Web application profiles
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Services.
2
In the Access Services area, click the Configure link for Web proxy service.
3
To view your available Web profiles, click the Web Application Profiles tab. The Configure Web Proxy
Service page appears.
4
The list includes preconfigured Web application profiles that are recommended for several popular Web
applications, any custom Web profiles you created, and a default Web profile. To view the settings for a
Web application profile, click its name.
Adding Web Application Profiles
Web application profiles control single sign-on characteristics, as well as content translation options for a
particular Web resource. Each Web resource should have a Web application profile associated with it.
•
Single sign-on options control whether and how a user’s login credentials are forwarded to downstream
Web applications. These options are disabled by default. In addition, one of the following is required in
order to configure single sign-on:
•
Click Use Web content translation on the Configure WorkPlace page in AMC.
•
Define a WorkPlace link as an aliased URL. This is the approach you should take if you normally
redirect traffic through a network agent, but in this case you want to force the resource to be
proxied using translated, custom port mapped, or Exchange server FQDN mapped Web access for
single sign-on.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
253
For more information, see Web Shortcut Access on page 413 and Configuring WorkPlace General
Settings on page 413.
•
Content translation options control whether hyperlinks in JavaScript code, in cookie bodies, and in
cookie paths are translated by the Web proxy service. The options are used only by the translated Web
access agent: they are ignored by standard Web access.
Web application profiles are not used if Web shortcut access is set to Redirect through network agent on the
Configure WorkPlace page in AMC. See Configuring WorkPlace General Settings on page 413.
To add a Web application profile
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Services.
2
In the Access Services area, click the Configure link for Web proxy service. The Configure Web Proxy
Service page appears.
3
Click the Web Application Profiles tab, and then click New. The Add Web Application Profile page
appears.
4
In the Name box, type a name for the profile. If you are creating a profile to associate with a specific
application, you might want to give it a name similar to that of the application.
5
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the profile.
6
In the Single Sign-On area, specify if and how you want user credentials to be passed along to the Web
resource. Forwarding user credentials prevents the user from having to log in multiple times (once to get
to the appliance, and again to access an application resource).
•
If you select the Forward each user’s individual username and password check box, the
username and password used to authenticate to WorkPlace are forwarded to the back-end Web
server.
•
If you select the Forward static credentials check box, the appliance forwards the same
username and password for all users. This is useful for Web sites that require HTTP basic
authentication, but don’t provide personalized content for each user based on the login name.
It’s also useful for users who authenticate with a client certificate or token.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
254
7
•
If you do not select either option, single sign-on functionality is disabled. If you select both
options, the individual username and password option takes precedence. For example, if the user
provides a username/password pair, it is forwarded, but if username/password is not provided,
the Web proxy service forwards the static credentials.
•
If you select the Enable Kerberos single sign-on check box and specify the Kerberos realm where
the resources are hosted, WorkPlace and Connect Tunnel users can access http resources. This
realm is used for authenticating environments like Active Directory, Active Directory Tree, and
Active Directory Forest where Kerberos is configured as a preferred authentication mechanism.
In the Content translation area, select the items that you want the Web proxy service to translate.
•
Select the Translate JavaScript code check box if you want the Web proxy service to translate
links embedded in JavaScript code used by the Web resource. This is useful for JavaScript that
contains absolute URLs or absolute references (/to/path/xyz), or that dynamically generates
URLs (for example, location=“http://” + host name + “/index.html”). This improves
compatibility with Microsoft Outlook Web Access and other applications that rely on JavaScript.
This option is enabled by default.
However, if you notice problems with searching mail based on the Subject, From, or Sent To
fields, or if you see an error after logging in when you access OWA using a WorkPlace shortcut,
clear the Translate JavaScript code check box for the OWA profile.
8
•
Select the Translate content based on file extension check box if you want the Web proxy
service to determine content type by examining the file extension, not the MIME type. Normally,
the Web proxy service translates certain content types (including text and HTML). It determines
the content type from the MIME type in the HTTP header. If a Web resource is sending the
incorrect MIME type, select this option and the Web proxy service will decide whether or not to
translate a file based on its file extension. This option is disabled by default.
•
Select the Translate cookie body check box if you want the Web proxy service to translate URLs
embedded in the body of a cookie. If a Web resource uses embedded URLs in the body of a cookie
(which is not common practice), and you do not have this option enabled, users can experience
problems. A common symptom is being unexpectedly redirected to another URL. This option is
enabled by default.
•
Select the Translate cookie path check box if you want the Web proxy service to translate the
path attribute of cookies sent by back-end resources. The browser uses cookie paths to determine
when to send a cookie back to the server. The appliance changes the path that the browser sees,
so if the cookie path is not translated, the browser will never send the cookie. A common
symptom of this situation is a user being prompted repeatedly for login credentials after already
entering valid ones. If this occurs, you should enable this option. This option is enabled by
default.
Click Save.
NOTE:
•
You can configure single sign-on when you create a WorkPlace shortcut for accessing a Windows
Terminal Services or Citrix host. See Adding Graphical Terminal Shortcuts to Individual Hosts on
page 525.
•
The Web translation that AMC performs is more complete and robust in recent versions of the
appliance software. Beginning in version 10.x, it is no longer possible to revert to the legacy
translation for Web application profiles that worked in version 8.6.x.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
255
Preconfigured Web Application Profiles
Several preconfigured Web application profiles are included with the appliance and are recommended for
certain commonly used Web applications. (More can be added; see Adding Web Application Profiles on page
253.) Preconfigured profiles include:
Table 77. Preconfigured Web Application profiles
Web application profile
Description
Default
A default profile that you can use for most Web applications or sites that
don’t use NTLM or basic authentication single sign-on
Domino Web Access 6.x
A profile for Lotus Domino Web Access (versions 6.x only)
iNotes 5.x
A profile for Lotus iNotes (versions 5.x only)
Onyx CRM
A profile for the Onyx CRM Employee Portal (versions 4 and later)
OWA/Single Sign-On
A profile for Microsoft Outlook Web Access and other sites that use NTLM or
basic authentication single sign-on
WorkPlaceCfg
A read-only profile for WorkPlace
Web Application Profile Examples
The following explains how the appliance determines which Web application profile to apply to an incoming
request, and demonstrates the flexibility of using profiles when specifying resources.
How requests for Web resources are evaluated
Because Web resources can be defined quite broadly, the appliance follows a rule for determining which Web
application profile to apply to an incoming request: it chooses the profile associated with the most specific
resource.
For example, suppose you’ve defined these two resources:
•
A DNS domain (xyz.com) with Web application profile A attached
•
A specific Web server (web1.xyz.com) with Web application profile B attached
If a user request comes in for https://web1.xyz.com/timesheet.html, the appliance uses Web application
profile B because it is associated with a more specific resource (the Web server) than Web application profile
A (the domain). The actual order that the appliance uses is as follows:
URL —> Host name —> IP address —> Subnet/IP range —> DNS domain
Associating one profile with an entire domain
If you want to associate the same Web application profile to all resources within a single domain, associate a
profile with that domain, and then select None as the profile for any individual resources you define that are
within that domain. The individual resource will inherit the domain’s profile. If there is no profile associated
with a particular resource, and there is no profile to inherit, the appliance uses the system defaults for the
profile.
Editing and Deleting Web Application Profiles
Before modifying a profile, confirm that the changes will be compatible with its associated applications.
If a profile is still associated with one or more resources, AMC prevents you from deleting it. You must remove
all associations before you can delete the profile. See Deleting Referenced Objects on page 136 for more
details.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
256
Creating Forms-Based Single Sign-On Profiles
Many Web applications use forms-based authentication, in which the user enters a set of credentials into HTML
form fields, and a session token is stored in a browser cookie. This type of authentication is popular because it
is supported on any combination of browser and Web server. The other benefit is that you can customize the
login page.
Use AMC to set up a single sign-on profile that will forward a user’s appliance credentials to a Web application
that uses forms-based authentication. This process is not automated and may require help from Dell Technical
Support; you should be familiar with the HTML code and know things like the form element names and the name
of the cookie that stores user credentials.
There are also some built-in profiles that you can modify for your environment:
•
OWA 2003
•
OWA 2007/2010
•
OWA 2013
•
Citrix Nfuse 1.7
•
Citrix XenApp
•
Citrix XenDesktop
To modify the built-in single sign-on profile for Outlook Web Access
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Services.
2
In the Access services area, under Web proxy service, click Configure.
3
Click the Single Sign-On Profiles tab, and then click New. The Configure Single Sign-On Profile page
appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
257
4
Type a Name and Description, and then select the applicable OWA (Outlook Web Access) application
from the Application list. (To start from scratch and specify elements from a custom form, select Other.)
5
In the Application URL box, type the URL for the application type (for example, the Citrix
XenApp/XenDesktop site or the Microsoft Exchange OWA form-based authentication DLL). For an OWA
DLL this is usually the FQDN of your Exchange server followed by /exchweb/bin/auth/owaauth.dll.
For example:
https://owaserver.domain.com/exchweb/bin/auth/owaauth.dll
6
In the Cookie name text box, type the file name of the cookie used to store user credentials. The cookie
name for OWA 2013 is cadata.
7
Make changes to the form elements by clicking a link. (At a minimum, you must change the destination
element to match the Application URL.)
8
Click Save.
After a profile is set up, a user’s credentials are automatically sent to the back-end server every time the user
logs in, regardless whether the WorkPlace link is clicked. This can be a problem where there is a limit to the
number of allowed licenses.
When a user logs in, his or her credentials are sent to all Web applications for which an a single sign-on profile
is configured. Unlike a Web application profile, a single sign-on profile is not associated with a resource in
AMC—the application resource is defined within the profile.
For information on configuring SSO for a Web application that uses Windows NTLM or basic authentication, see
Web Application Profiles on page 252.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
258
Kerberos Constrained Delegation
SMA supports Kerberos Constrained Delegation (KCD). Kerberos Constrained Delegation (KCD) provides
authentication support using an existing Kerberos infrastructure, which does not need to trust front-end
services to delegate a service.
With Kerberos Constrained Delegation (KCD), users who are authenticated using non-Kerberos methods, such as
Certificate, Smart Card, or RADIUS, can gain access to Kerberos protected resources without having to enter any
additional credentials. For example, a user that autenticates using Single Sign-On (SSO), rather than Kerberos,
is allowed access to Kerberos protected web resources.
Most Single Sign-On (SSO) methods rely on the conventional username/password credentials. However, these
credentials do not work with Certificate, Smart Card, or RADIUS autentication. With Kerberos Constrained
Delegation (KCD), the administrator configures the usernames and passwords for Kerberos Constrained
Delegation (KCD).
Microsoft’s Kerberos v5 extension is called Services for Users (S4U) and is compromised of two parts:
•
S4U2Self
•
S4U2Proxy
S4U2Self allows a service to obtain a service ticket to itself on behalf of a client and is usually used with a client
certificate. S4U2Self is the Kerberos Protocol Transition extension.
S4U2Proxy allows a service to obtain a service ticket to an arbitrary service on behalf of a user with only the
user's service ticket. The services are constrained by the administrator. S4U2Proxy is the Kerberos Constrained
Delegation (KCD) extension.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
259
Configuring Kerberos Constrained Delegation
To enable Kerberos Constrained Delegation (KCD):
1
Go to the Services > Configure page.
2
Under Web proxy service, click Configure.
3
In the Configure Web Proxy Service dialog, select Web Application Profiles.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
260
4
From the list of Web Proxy Services, select the Web Proxy Service you want.
The Edit Web Application Profile dialog appears.
5
Select the checkboxes for the options you want:
•
Enable Kerberos Constrained Delegation
The Enable Kerberos Constrained Delegation option should be checked only if the Kerberos
Single Sign-On option is checked.
•
Enable fallback
The Enable fallback option should be checked only if the Enable Kerberos Constrained
Delegation option is checked.
The Enable fallback option prompts the user to enter their credentials again if KCD has failed for
some reason. If Enable fallback is unchecked and KCD has failed, an error page is displayed.
NOTE: On Firefox, Enable fallback works only if both Negotiate and NTLM are enabled on
the backend resource, in their respective order. Enable fallback does not work on Safari in
this case. Safari displays a prompt to re-enter credentials, but it keeps failing. Enable
fallback works only when NTLM is the only authentication provider on the backend, which is
not a supported configuration for KCD.
6
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
261
Configuring SMA Support for Microsoft Outlook
Anywhere
Dell SMA supports Microsoft Outlook Anywhere for Windows Outlook Clients. Outlook Anywhere is basically an
Outlook client that connects to the Microsoft Exchange server using one of these protocols:
•
Remote Procedure Call (RPC) over HTTP
•
MAPI over HTTP
Microsoft Outlook Anywhere allows end users with Microsoft Office Outlook to connect to their Exchange servers
over the Internet from outside the corporate network.
To configure SMA Support for Outlook Anywhere:
1
On your SMA device, go to the Security Administration > Resources page.
2
Click on the resource you want to edit.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
262
The Edit Resource - URL dialog appears.
3
Click on the Web proxy options panel to open it.
4
In Web application profiles drop-down menu, select OWA/Single Sign-on.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
263
5
Click on the Exchange Server options panel to open it.
6
Select the checkbox for Enable Exchange ActiveSync and Outlook Anywhere access to this resource.
7
In the Exchange server FQDN field, enter the external FQDN URL of the user’s Exchange server.
This should be the same value that is configured as the external FQDN URL for Outlook Anywhere
services (RPC/HTTP and MAPI/HTTP protocols and EWS service) at the Exchange server.
8
In the Realm drop-down menu, select the Realm that you want.
9
In the Exchange Autodiscover FQDN, enter the FQDN of the Exchange Autodiscover service, for
example: autodiscover.example.com.
The Autodiscover FQDN is used by the Outlook client to determine the Autodiscover service which
enables Outlook to configure the Outlook options by just accepting the user’s Email address. For
example, the Email address, user@yourcompany.com, would have an Autodiscover FQDN of
autodiscover.yourcompany.com.
The name autodiscover.yourcompany.com must be configured in a public DNS server with the public IP
address of the appliance.
10 Leave the Fallback Exchange server URL field blank for Outlook Anywhere.
NOTE: For Outlook Anywhere using RPC over HTTP, only basic authentication is supported. So, the
backend exchange server should be configured to support basic authentication for Outlook
Anywhere - ExternalClientAuthenticationMethod. For MAPI over HTTP, any authentication method
can be configured.
NOTE: For requests coming from the Outlook client, zone classification is done without any
attributes, and the user is classified into whichever zone it matches.
The Autodiscover FDQN is also displayed on the System Configuration > Network Settings page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
264
Viewing User Sessions
SMA users that are using Exchange ActiveSync and Outlook Anywhere can be displayed on the Monitoring > User
> Sessions page by selecting Exchange as the filter from the Agents drop-down menu. The Exchange filter will
filter Exchange ActiveSync and Outlook Anywhere users. The detailed view will show what the Access Agent is
for that user.
To view Outlook Anywhere user sessions:
1
Go to the Monitoring > User Sessions page.
2
In the Agents drop-down menu, select Exchange.
If you hover over the Exchange Server option, it shows that Exchange ActiveSync and Outlook Anywhere
users will be displayed for this option.
3
Click Refresh to see the new list of users.
4
To see a detailed view of any user listed, click on that user.
The Access Agent field in the detailed view shows which agent the user is using. Outlook Anywhere will
be shown in the Access-Agent field.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
265
Access Control Rules
Access control rules determine which resources are available to users or groups. Rules can be defined broadly to
provide access using any method, or defined narrowly so that only a specific access method—Web browser,
Connect and OnDemand, or Network Explorer—is permitted.
In addition to evaluating whether users can access resources based on who they are, access control rules can
also factor in the trustworthiness of users’ access points using End Point Control zones and device profiles,
which are described in Managing EPC with Zones and Device Profiles on page 357.
•
Configuring Access Control Rules
•
Resolving Deny Rule Incompatibilities
•
Resolving Invalid Destination Resources
Configuring Access Control Rules
As your network changes over time, you will need to configure the access control rules that determine what
application resources are available to your various users and groups.
Before adding an access control rule, carefully examine your existing rules; you might find that you can modify
a rule instead of creating a new one. You can also copy an existing rule and then modify its parameters.
If you decide to add a new rule, review your current configuration to determine where the new rule should fit in
the rule order. New rules are added to the top of the list by default; you can then move them to their proper
positions.
•
Viewing Access Control Rules
•
Access Control Rules for Bi-Directional Connections
•
Requirements for Reverse and Cross-Connections
•
Securing Application Ports for Reverse Connections
•
Adding Access Control Rules for a Forward Connection
•
Specifying Advanced Access Control Rule Attributes
•
Adding Access Control Rules for a Reverse Connection
•
Adding a Pair of Access Control Rules for a Cross-Connection
•
Adding Access Control Rules for Application Access Control
•
Configuring Advanced Access Control Rule Attributes
•
Access Methods and Advanced Options
•
Adding Users and Resources From Within Access Control Rules
•
Editing, Copying, and Deleting Access Control Rules
Viewing Access Control Rules
Access control rules are displayed in numerical order on the Access Control page. The appliance evaluates the
rules in numbered order. All access control rules are displayed by default, but you can use the Filters settings to
filter them by resource type or other criteria.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
266
To view access control rules
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
2
By default, all rules that you have created, regardless of resource type, are displayed. Use the Filters
section to display a subset of rules. For information about using filters, see the “Filters” section under A
Quick Tour of the AMC Interface on page 111. To see a particular rule set, select one of the following
from the Method drop-down list in Filters:
Table 78. Rule set descriptions
Method
Description
Web browser
Display rules controlling access to Web-based (HTTP and HTTPS)
resources.
Connect
Display rules controlling access to client/server (TCP/IP) resources.
Tunnel/OnDemand Mapped
Mode
Network Explorer
3
Display rules controlling access to Windows file system resources
using WorkPlace.
Review the data shown in the access control rule list:
•
Use the check-box column to select one or more rules to delete, copy, or reorder (using the Move
Up and Move Down buttons).
•
The number column indicates the order in which the rule will be evaluated. To edit a rule, click
its corresponding number.
•
To display configuration details and the objects referenced in a rule, click the plus sign (+) next to
it.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
267
•
The Action column indicates whether a rule permits or denies access, or is ignored:
Table 79. Rule action indicators
Indicator
Description
Green
Access is permitted.
Red
Access is denied.
Gray
The rule is not evaluated. (Disabling a rule is a convenient way to temporarily
stop using a rule without deleting it.)
•
The Description column lists the descriptive text you typed when creating the rule.
•
The From column indicates the users to whom the rule applies (Any all users). In the case of a
reverse connection, this column indicates the resource that is connecting to a user or group. See
Access Control Rules for Bi-Directional Connections on page 268.
•
The To column lists the destination resources to which the rule applies (Any all users). In the
case of a reverse connection, this column can also indicate the user or group that is connecting
back to a resource. See Access Control Rules for Bi-Directional Connections on page 268.
•
The Method column indicates whether a specific access method is associated with a rule. A globe
icon signifies Web browser-based HTTP access; a globe icon with a folder represents Network
Explorer, which provides Web access to file system resources; the Secure Mobile Access logo
indicates access using the Connect Tunnel or proxy clients, or the OnDemand Tunnel or proxy
agents. Any indicates that the rule applies to all access methods.
•
The Zone column indicates whether an access rule is associated with a particular End Point
Control zone. EPC zones are used to classify a connection request based on the attributes of the
client device. Any indicates the rule applies to all EPC zones; a red “restricted” icon indicates
that the rule controls access for one or more specific zones.
Access Control Rules for Bi-Directional Connections
VPN connections typically involve “forward connections,” which are initiated by a user to a client/server
resource. However, if you deploy Dell’s network tunnel clients (Connect Tunnel or OnDemand Tunnel) to your
users, bi-directional connections are enabled.
With the Dell VPN, bi-directional connections encompass the following:
•
Forward connections from a VPN user to a client/server resource. See Adding Access Control Rules for a
Forward Connection on page 269.
•
Reverse connections from a client/server resource to a VPN user. An example of a reverse connection is
an SMS server that “pushes” a software update to a user’s machine. See Adding Access Control Rules for
a Reverse Connection on page 274.
•
Cross-connections refer specifically to VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) applications that enable one
VPN user to telephone another VPN user. Cross-connections require a pair of access control rules: one for
the forward connection and one for the reverse connection. See Adding a Pair of Access Control Rules for
a Cross-Connection on page 275.
Other examples of bi-directional connections include an FTP server that downloads files to or uploads files from
a VPN user, and remote Help Desk applications.
Requirements for Reverse and Cross-Connections
Before you can configure access control rules for reverse connections and cross-connections, the following
requirements must be met:
•
The network tunnel service must be running on the appliance. On the Services page in AMC, check the
status for Network tunnel service; it should be Running.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
268
•
An IP address pool for the network tunnel clients must be configured. See Configuring IP Address Pools on
page 503 for information on how to set one up.
•
Users who have access to a VoIP application must belong to a community that is configured to deploy the
network tunnel clients (Connect Tunnel or OnDemand Tunnel) to their computers. See Creating and
Configuring Communities on page 66.
Securing Application Ports for Reverse Connections
By default, reverse connections from resources to users have access to all ports on users’ computers. For
enhanced security, create access control rules for reverse connections that confine access to the ports that an
application specifically uses. Consult the application’s documentation for information about which firewall
ports must be open in order to use the application.
When configuring an access rule for a reverse connection, use the Destination restrictions option to confine
access to the ports required by the application making the reverse connection. See Configuring Advanced Access
Control Rule Attributes on page 280 for information on this option.
Adding Access Control Rules for a Forward Connection
Perform the following steps to add an access control rule for a forward connection from users to destination
resources. For information about creating an access control rule for a cross-connection (for example, for a VoIP
application), see Adding a Pair of Access Control Rules for a Cross-Connection on page 275.
To add an access control rule for a forward connection
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
269
2
Click New. The Edit Access Rule page appears.
3
Type a number in the Number box to specify the rule’s position in the access rule list. By default, new
rules are added to the top of the list, but you can use this box to place the rule anywhere you want. For
example, if you assign the number 3 to a new rule, the new rule will be inserted before the current rule
3 (which will become rule 4). This field is required.
To the right of the Number box is a unique identifier for the rule, which you can use for troubleshooting.
When you add or change a rule, for example, the Management Console audit log shows a record of the
change using this ID. Logging is described in detail in System Logging and Monitoring on page 289.
4
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the rule. This step is optional, but a
description can be helpful when viewing your list of rules later; it also appears in log files where can be
useful for debugging. The ID is a unique identifier automatically assigned by AMC; it cannot be edited.
5
Use the Action buttons to specify whether the rule will be used to Permit or Deny access, or if the rule
is Disabled.
6
Complete the information listed under Basic settings.
•
Click User to configure a forward connection (from a user to a resource).
•
If you deploy a network tunnel client, click Resource to create a rule controlling a reverse
connection (resource to user) or a cross-connection (user to user). The network tunnel service
must be configured with an IP address pool before you can use reverse connections (see
Configuring IP Address Pools on page 503).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
270
•
The From box specifies the users or user groups to whom the rule applies. Click Edit to
select from a list of users and groups. If no users or groups are specified, the value for this
field is Any user.
•
The To box specifies the destination resources or resource groups for the rule. Click Edit
to select from a list of resources. If no destination resources are selected, the value for
this field is Any resource. A warning appears if the destination resource contains a
wildcard indicating a Mobile Connect incompatibility.
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot
convert host name, URL, or domain type resources containing wildcards to an
IP address and, therefore, cannot redirect them to the appliance.
7
In the End Point Control zones area, select the zones from which you will permit or deny access to the
resources. Click Edit to select from a list. The default for this field is Any zone. See Managing EPC with
Zones and Device Profiles on page 357 for information about configuring and using zones.
8
Click Next to configure additional settings (see Specifying Advanced Access Control Rule Attributes on
page 271), or click Finish to save the current settings.
Specifying Advanced Access Control Rule Attributes
For most rules, a basic configuration that includes users or groups, destination resources, and access methods is
sufficient. However, additional options are available to provide even tighter access. For example, you can
control a connection based on the location of the user (by IP address). Source networks are referenced in an
access rule to permit or deny a connection to a destination resource based on the location from which the
request originates, provides even greater security.
To configure advanced settings for an access control rule
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
2
Click New. The Edit Access Rule page appears.
3
Click the Advanced tab.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
271
4
In the Access method restrictions area, select one or more methods for access to the resource. Any is
the recommended setting in most circumstances, unless your security environment requires you to use a
particular method for access to a resource.
When you select access methods, the advanced options are enabled or disabled based on whether they
apply to the methods you specified. Click Selected to choose the access methods this rule will require:
Table 80. Access method selecting
Access method
Description
Web browser
Manages access from HTTP or HTTPS resources for users connecting using a
Web browser.
The available Advanced settings are:
Network Explorer
•
User’s network address
•
Time and date restrictions
Manages access from Windows file system resources for WorkPlace users
connecting using Network Explorer.
The available Advanced settings are:
Connect and/or
OnDemand
•
User’s network address
•
Read/write permissions
•
Time and date restrictions
Manages access from TCP/IP resources such as client/server applications, file
servers, or databases, for users connecting with one of the following:
•
The Connect Tunnel or proxy clients
•
The OnDemand Tunnel or proxy agents
For example, suppose you want to provide access to a network domain for
users who have Connect or OnDemand, but you don’t want to allow browser
access to Web resources within that domain. You can do that by creating a rule
that specifies Connect Tunnel and/or OnDemand Mapped Mode as the only
access method, and specifies the network domain in the Client restrictions
area.
The available Advanced settings are:
•
Protocols
•
User’s network address
•
Destination restrictions (ports)
•
Time and date restrictions
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
272
Click Selected to specify the Protocols that the network tunnel or proxy service will accept from the
client. A brief description of each command is included here, but for more details, see
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1928.txt.
Table 81. Protocol selecting
5
Protocol
Description
TCP
Enables normal TCP connections (for example, SSH, telnet, SCP, and so forth).
UDP
Allows the network tunnel or proxy service to make a UDP data transfer. This is
necessary for operations such as streaming audio and Microsoft Outlook new-mail
notification.
ICMP
(Internet Control Message protocol) Enables the ping and traceroute network
troubleshooting commands. Selecting this option will configure the network tunnel
or proxy service to allow these operations on your behalf. This option also enables
ICMP packets to flow through the network tunnel or proxy service.
Accept bind
requests from
server
Used in protocols that require the client to accept connections from the server.
FTP is a notable example: bind usually occurs with a Connect/Bind pair of
connections.
Under Client restrictions, in the User’s network address box, specify the names of any source networks
you want evaluated in the rule.
This is useful for controlling access based on the origin of the connection request. Click Edit to select
from the list of resources. If no source network is specified, the default value of this field is Any. For
reverse connections, this option can be used to block access requests to users’ computers that originate
from specific ports or application resources.
6
Use Destination restrictions to restrict access over individual Ports or a range of ports. To enable access
on any port, click Any. To specify multiple ports, click Selected and type the port numbers, separated by
semicolons. To specify a port range, type the beginning and ending numbers separated by a hyphen. For
example, if you are building a policy to control access to an SMTP mail server, you might allow access
only over port 25 (the well-known port for SMTP traffic). A list of the latest port number assignments is
available at http://www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers.
Use Permissions to specify whether the rule will allow Read or Read/Write access to the file system
resources. These access privileges work in conjunction with Windows access control rules. For a user to
have certain file permissions, both entities (that is, Windows and the appliance) must allow them. If you
disable file uploads, no user can write to a file, although users with write access will be able to move
and delete files. These settings are ignored by reverse connections.
7
Under Time and date restrictions, specify when the rule will be in effect. (The time zone for the time
restriction fields is your local time.) You can specify a Shift or a Range, or you can specify that the rule
remain in effect at all times.
8
Click Save or, if you want to define another rule, click Finish and Add Another.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
273
Because AMC gives you the flexibility to assign multiple access methods to resources, situations may arise in
which there is a mismatch between access methods and resources. This happens if you create a rule that assigns
an access method that is incompatible with the specified resource. For example, designating Web browser as
the method for accessing a Windows domain resource will trigger an “Invalid destination resources” error
message in AMC. For more information, see Resolving Invalid Destination Resources on page 285.
In some cases you can create a Deny rule that contains a mix of resources and access methods that may prevent
subsequent rules from being evaluated. This could inadvertently block user access to other resources
referenced in the access policy. The logic used to determine access method and resource compatibility is
described in Resolving Deny Rule Incompatibilities on page 284.
Reverse connections are available only when IP address pools are configured for the network tunnel clients. AMC
displays an error message if you attempt to change the rule from a forward connection to a reverse connection
and no IP address pools are configured.
Adding Access Control Rules for a Reverse Connection
Perform the following steps to add an access control rule for a reverse connection from a destination resource
to users. Examples of reverse connections include IBM’s Tivoli provisioning products, and Microsoft’s Systems
Management Server (SMS). For more information, see Requirements for Reverse and Cross-Connections on page
268.
To add an access control rule for a reverse connection
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
2
Click New. The Edit Access Rule page appears.
3
In the Number box, type a number to specify the rule’s position in the access rule list. By default, new
rules are added to the top of the list, but you can use this box to place the rule anywhere you want. For
example, if you have four rules and you assign the number 3 to a new one, it is inserted before the
current rule 3 (which will become rule 4). This field is required.
4
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the rule. This step is optional, but a
description can be helpful when viewing your list of rules later, and also appears in log files where it is
useful in debugging. The ID is a unique identifier automatically assigned by AMC; it cannot be edited.
5
Use the Action buttons to specify whether the rule will be used to Permit or Deny access, or if the rule
is Disabled.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
274
6
Complete the information listed under Basic settings:
•
Select the Resource button to create a rule controlling a reverse connection from a resource to a
user. The User and Resource buttons toggle between forward-connection and reverse-connection
rules.
Reverse connections are available only when IP address pools are configured for the network
tunnel clients. If you attempt to create a reverse connection with no IP address pools configured,
AMC displays an error message. For more information, see Access Control Rules for Bi-Directional
Connections on page 268.
•
The From box specifies the resources that will connect to users. Click Edit to select from a list of
resources. If no resources are specified, the default value for this field is Any resource.
•
The To box specifies the users to which the resource will connect. Click Edit to select from a list.
If no users are selected, the default value for this field is Any user.
7
In the Access methods area, select Any to automatically manage access to all resources in the rule
regardless of the access method making the request. This ensures that either the Connect Tunnel client
or the OnDemand Tunnel agent, which is required for reverse connections, is managed by the rule. The
other access methods do not support reverse connections and will be bypassed.
8
When you are finished creating the rule, click Save.
Adding a Pair of Access Control Rules for a Cross-Connection
Most of the steps involved in creating an access control rule for a cross-connection are the same as those for
creating a rule for a forward connection or a reverse connection. However, there are some key differences and
requirements.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
275
For example, to permit your VPN users to call each other using a VoIP application, create one rule for your users
to connect to an IP address pool on the appliance, and a second rule for the IP address pool to connect to the
users.
You would also need to follow this procedure to create a pair of rules to permit bi-directional connections
between an FTP server and users.
To add an access control rule for a cross-connection
1
Ensure that the requirements for configuring a reverse connection are met. For more information, see
Requirements for Reverse and Cross-Connections on page 268.
2
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
3
Click New. The Add/Edit Access Rule page appears.
4
Type a number in the Position box to specify the rule’s position in the access rule list. By default, new
rules are added to the top of the list, but you can use this box to place the rule anywhere you want. For
example, if you have four rules and you assign the number 3 to a new one, it is inserted before the
current rule 3 (which will become rule 4). This field is required.
5
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the rule. This step is optional, but a
description can be helpful when viewing your list of rules later. The description also appears in log files
where it is useful when examining logs to determine why a connection did not match a specific rule. The
ID is a unique identifier automatically assigned by AMC; it cannot be edited.
Since a cross-connection requires a pair of forward-connection and reverse-connection rules, you should
assign similar names to the two rules to make it easy to locate them in the list of access control rules.
6
Use the Action buttons to specify whether the rule will be used to Permit or Deny access, or if the rule
is Disabled.
7
Under Basic settings, use the User and Resource buttons to select forward-connection or reverseconnection rules.
8
9
•
To create a forward-connection rule from the users to the IP address pool, click User.
•
To create a reverse-connection rule from the IP address pool to the users, click Resource.
In the From box under Basic settings, specify the users or resources to which this rule applies:
•
For a forward-connection rule, specify the users or user groups to whom the rule applies. Click
Edit to select from a list of users or groups. The default value is Any user.
•
For a reverse-connection rule, specify the address pool that will be used for the VoIP application.
Click Edit to select the address pool from a list of resources. The default value is Any resource.
In the To box under Basic settings, specify the users or resources to which this rule applies:
•
For a forward-connection rule, specify the address pool that will be used for the VoIP application.
Click Edit to select the address pool from a list of resources. The default value is Any resource.
•
For a reverse-connection rule, specify the users to whom the rule applies. Click Edit to select
from a list of users or groups. The default value is Any user.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
276
10 In the Access method restrictions area, select Any. This enables the appliance’s Smart Access feature to
determine the appropriate access method for the users’ end point devices, which for a reverse
connection is either the Connect Tunnel client or the OnDemand Tunnel agent. The other access methods
do not support cross-connections or bi-directional connections and will be bypassed.
11 In the Access method restrictions area, select Any to automatically manage access to all resources in
the rule regardless of the access method making the request. This ensures that either the Connect
Tunnel client or the OnDemand Tunnel agent, which are required for reverse connections, are managed
by the rule. The other access methods do not support reverse connections and will be bypassed.
12 Click Finish after you have created the first rule in the pair of cross-connection rule, and then create
and save the second rule. (Alternatively, you can save the first rule in the pair, make a copy of it, and
then reverse the user and resource settings.)
After you have configured the forward-connection rule and the reverse-connection rule that make up the crossconnection rule pair, you should position the two rules next to each other in the access control list. That will
make it easier to identify them as related rules.
AMC displays an error message if you attempt to create a cross-connection rule with no IP address pools
configured. For more information, see Access Control Rules for Bi-Directional Connections on page 268.
Adding Access Control Rules for Application Access Control
Perform the following steps to add an access control rule to control which users or groups are allowed to access
which resources using a specific application from a personal device (within the context of a specific Application
Zone). For more information, see Application Access Control on page 399.
To add an access control rule for Application Access Control
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
2
Click New. The Add Access Rule page appears.
3
In the Position box, type a number to specify the rule’s position in the access rule list. By default, new
rules are added to the top of the list, but you can use this box to place the rule anywhere you want. For
example, if you have four rules and you assign the number 3 to a new one, it is inserted before the
current rule 3 (which will become rule 4). This field is required.
4
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the rule. This step is optional, but a
description can be helpful when viewing your list of rules later, and also appears in log files where it is
useful in debugging. The ID is a unique identifier automatically assigned by AMC; it cannot be edited.
5
Use the Action field to specify whether the rule will be used to Permit or Deny access. The default is
Permit.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
277
6
In the Applies to field, select Device zones, Device and Application zones, or Application zones as the
type of zone associated with the rule. The default is Device Zones.
NOTE: Access Control rules can apply to Device zones, Application zones, or Device and
Application zones (any of the Applies to options). Individual user connections apply to a
single Device zone or Application zone at any given time. Thus, user connections apply for a
single zone at any one time, but the Access Control List can be written to apply to Device
zones, Application zones, or Device and Application zones.
7
8
Complete the information listed under Basic settings:
•
Select the Direction to create a rule controlling a connection from a resource or a user. The User
and Resource buttons toggle. The default is User.
•
The From box specifies the users or groups allowed or denied access to the related Resource list
using an application on the selected Application list. Click Edit to select from a list. If no
resources are specified, the default value for this field is Any user.
•
The To box specifies the required resources to which the user or group can access using an
application on the selected Application list. Click Edit to select from a list. If no users are
selected, the default value for this field is Any resource.
Complete the information listed under End Point Control zones.
•
For Applications zones either use the default of Any application zone or click the Application
zone Edit button and select the application zones that will use this rule.
•
For Applications click the Applications Edit button and select at least one application that users
are permitted to use when contacting the corporate network with this rule. You must choose at
least one application from the displayed list before the rule can be saved.
NOTE: Applications must be learned before they are listed, as explained in Application
Access Control on page 399
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
278
9
Click the Next> button at the bottom to display the Advanced tab.
10 In the Access method restrictions section, select Any or Selected for Client software agents, Client
platforms, and Protocols to permit or deny access based on the software agent or client initializing the
connection. If you choose Selected, check all desired types from the options that are displayed. Possible
options are:
Client software agents:
•
Web browser (HTTP/HTTPS)
•
Network Explorer (Web access to file system resources)
•
Connect Tunnel and/or Dell OnDemand VPN Connection (TCP/IP)
Client platforms:
•
Windows
•
Mac OS
•
iOS
•
Android
•
Linux
Protocols:
•
TCP
•
UDP
•
ICMP
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
279
11 In the Client restrictions section either use the default of Any User’s network address or click the Edit
button and select the resources that will use this rule.
12 In the Destination restrictions section either use the default of Any port to enable access on any port or
select Selected to restrict access over individual Ports or a range of ports and type the ports to allow.
For example, if you are building a policy to control access to an SMTP mail server, you might allow access
only over port 25 (the well-known port for SMTP traffic). A list of the latest port number assignments is
available at http://www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers.
To specify multiple ports, separate the port numbers with a semicolon. To specify a port range, type the
beginning and ending numbers separated by a hyphen.
13 In the Permissions field specify whether the rule will allow Read or Read/Write access to the file system
resources. These access privileges work in conjunction with Windows access control rules. For a user to
have certain file permissions, both Windows and the appliance must allow them. If you disable file
uploads, user cannot write to a file, although users with write access will be able to move and delete
files.
14 In the Time and date restrictions section, specify when the rule will be in effect. (The time zone for the
time restriction fields is your local time.) You can specify a Shift, Range, or use the default of Any to use
the rule at all times.
15 Click Finish to save your entries.
Configuring Advanced Access Control Rule Attributes
For most rules, a basic configuration that includes users or groups, destination resources, and access methods is
sufficient. Settings that provide even tighter access are available on the Advanced page for Add/Edit Access
Rule.
For example, if you want to restrict connections to those coming from an individual IP address, select the
User’s network address option. Source networks are referenced in an access rule to permit or deny a
connection to a destination resource based on the location from which the request originates, which provides
you with even greater security.
To configure advanced settings for an access control rule
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
2
Click the link for an existing rule.
3
On the Edit Access Rule page, click the Advanced tab.
4
Under Access method restrictions, permit or deny access based on the software agent or client
initializing the connection. In most cases, you can leave this set to Any.
5
To restrict the Protocols that the network tunnel or proxy service will accept from the client, click
Selected. A brief description of each command is included here, but for more details, see
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1928.txt.
Table 82. Advanced Access Control Rule Attributes
Protocol
Description
TCP
Enables normal TCP connections (for example, SSH, telnet, SCP, and so forth).
UDP
Allows the network tunnel or proxy service to make a UDP data transfer. This is
necessary for operations such as streaming audio and Microsoft Outlook new-mail
notification.
ICMP
(Internet Control Message protocol) Enables the ping and traceroute network
troubleshooting commands. Selecting this option will configure the network tunnel
or proxy service to allow these operations on your behalf. This option also enables
ICMP packets to flow through the network tunnel or proxy service.
Accept bind
requests from
server
Used in protocols that require the client to accept connections from the server.
FTP is a notable example: bind usually occurs with a Connect/Bind pair of
connections.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
280
6
Specify the names of any source networks you want evaluated in the rule with the User’s network
address option. This is useful for controlling access based on the origin of the connection request. Click
Edit to select from the list of resources. If no source network is specified, the default value of this field
is Any. For reverse connections, this option can be used to block access requests to users’ computers that
originate from specific ports or the application resources.
7
Use Destination restrictions to restrict access over individual Ports or a range of ports. For example, if
you are building a policy to control access to an SMTP mail server, you might allow access only over port
25 (the well-known port for SMTP traffic). A list of the latest port number assignments is available at
http://www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers.
To enable access on any port, click Any. To specify multiple ports, click Selected and type the port
numbers, separating each with a semicolon. To specify a port range, type the beginning and ending
numbers separated by a hyphen.
8
Use Permissions to specify whether the rule will allow Read or Read/Write access to the file system
resources. These access privileges work in conjunction with Windows access control rules. For a user to
have certain file permissions, both entities (that is, Windows and the appliance) must allow them. If you
disable file uploads, no user can write to a file, although users with write access will be able to move
and delete files. These settings are ignored by reverse connections.
9
Under Time and date restrictions, specify when the rule will be in effect. (The time zone for the time
restriction fields is your local time.) You can specify a Shift or a Range, or you can specify that the rule
remain in effect at all times.
10 When you are finished creating the rule, click Save.
Access Methods and Advanced Options
When you restrict your access methods, the advanced options are enabled or disabled based on which ones
remain selected (if you select Any as the access method, all the advanced options are available). When AMC
validates the rule it prevents you from selecting rule attributes that are not relevant to the access methods.
The following table shows the advanced options that apply to each access method.
Table 83. Access method advanced options
Access method
Applicable advanced options
Web browser
(HTTP/HTTPS)
•
User’s network address
•
Time and date restrictions
Network Explorer
(Web access to file system resources)
•
User’s network address
•
Read/write permissions
•
Time and date restrictions
•
Protocols
•
User’s network address
•
Destination restrictions (ports)
•
Time and date restrictions
Connect Tunnel and/or OnDemand (TCP/IP)
Adding Users and Resources From Within Access Control
Rules
Some administrators prefer to define all policy objects (users, groups, and resources) before creating access
control rules. Although this structured approach works particularly well for the initial configuration, you may
find it inconvenient for ongoing management. If so, you can define new resources directly from the interface
used to create access control rules.
To add a user or resource to an existing access control rule
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Access Control.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
281
2
Click the link for an existing rule. The Edit Access Rule page appears.
3
In the Basic settings area, click Edit beside the From box. A separate window appears displaying your
current users and groups.
Icons shown in the first column represent:s
Table 84. Icon descriptions
Icon
Description
Any user belongs to the specific community
Dynamic group
Any user belongs to the specific realm
Technician
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
282
4
In the Basic settings area, click Edit beside the To box. A separate window appears displaying your
resources and resource groups.
5
Click New. The page displayed next depends on the type of object you are creating.
6
Define the settings for the new user, group, or resource.
7
When you are finished creating the object, click Save.
8
Select the check box beside the object you want to add to the access rule and then click Save.
Editing, Copying, and Deleting Access Control Rules
Before modifying or deleting an access control rule, carefully examine your existing rules to understand how
your changes will affect your security policy. Use caution when deleting rules because you are not prompted to
confirm the deletion.
•
You can reorder the placement of rules in the access control list. But before you do any reordering,
carefully examine them to understand how the new order will affect your security policy.
•
Rather than creating a new access control rule from scratch, you can save time by making a copy of an
existing rule and changing some parameters to fit the new rule. Choose a rule that shares characteristics
with the rule you plan to create.
Copying is also useful when experimenting with a new access rule: you can edit the copied rule and
disable the original rule during your testing. This way you can roll back to your original rule if necessary.
For more information on editing, deleting, and copying access control rules, see Deleting Referenced Objects on
page 136.
When you use the Filters settings to filter the view of the access rules by a specific access method or other
criteria, you cannot use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the list. You can move an access
control rule only when Method is set to All.
To move a rule more than one position in the list, it’s usually faster to change the Number box on the Add/Edit
Access Rule page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
283
Resolving Deny Rule Incompatibilities
In a Permit rule, you can safely mix and match resources and access methods. However, Deny rules containing
specific combinations of resources and access methods may prevent subsequent rules from being evaluated.
This can inadvertently block user access to resources referenced later in your access policy.
During its policy evaluation, the appliance may in some cases be unable to determine whether a Deny rule
matches an incoming connection request. As a security precaution, it stops processing your rule set and blocks
user access.
If you attempt to define a Deny rule referencing any of the three combinations described in the following table,
AMC displays this warning message:
“Some of the resources in this rule are not supported by the selected access method(s), which could
inadvertently deny access to some resources.”
The following table lists the rule combinations that trigger this warning:
Table 85. Rule Incompatibilities
Rule action
Resource type
Deny
Windows domain
Deny
Deny
URL
File share
Access methods
•
Any
•
Connect and OnDemand
•
WorkPlace
•
Any
•
Connect and OnDemand
•
Any
•
Connect and OnDemand
Example
Suppose you create a Deny rule blocking access to a Windows domain and you leave Access methods set to Any.
A Windows domain is accessible from WorkPlace, so when the appliance receives a connection attempt from
WorkPlace, it matches the rule and denies access.
However, if the user makes a connection request from Connect or OnDemand, the appliance is unable to
determine whether the Windows domain rule matches the request (regardless of which destination resource is
requested). The appliance then stops evaluating any further rules in your policy and immediately denies access.
If the Windows domain rule is at the top of your access control rule list, it prevents the user from accessing any
VPN resources. And if the next rule in the list is a Permit rule allowing the user to access a VPN resource, it is
not evaluated.
Resolving the Problem
To resolve rule incompatibilities, modify the rule so it doesn’t reference indeterminate access methods. In the
case of a Windows domain or network share, select Network Explorer as the only access method. For a URL,
select only Web browser or Connect Tunnel and/or OnDemand Mapped Mode.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
284
Resolving Invalid Destination Resources
If you attempt to create a rule that assigns an access method to an incompatible destination resource, AMC
prevents the conflict and displays an “Invalid resources” warning.
The following table lists the access method/destination resource combinations that trigger this warning.
Table 86. Invalid access method/destination resource combinations
Access method
Web browser
Invalid destination resource
•
Windows domain
•
Network share
Network Explorer
•
URL (and Matching URL)
Connect or OnDemand
•
URL (and Matching URL)
•
Windows domain
“Invalid Resource” Examples
AMC will not permit you to save a rule that contains a method/resource conflict: if you click Save, AMC removes
the invalid resource from the rule. If the rule contains only one mismatched resource, it is replaced with Any.
Examples of method/resource conflict are:
•
If a rule specifies Web browser as the only available access method, it cannot refer to a Windows
domain resource. (A Windows domain resource is one that has Domain as its type, and for which the
Windows domain check box is selected).
•
A rule that specifies a Matching URL resource requires Web browser as an access method; if the allowed
access methods for a rule don’t include Web browser, the “Invalid resource” warning appears.
To resolve a destination resource error, modify the rule so that the type of access method is compatible with the
destination resource. The simplest way to avoid an access method/destination resource conflict is to remove
any Access method restrictions on the Advanced tab of the Add/Edit Access Rule page by leaving both Client
software agents and Protocols set to Any.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
285
7
System Administration
This section describes how to configure and use system logging and monitoring, and how to configure Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption options. It also describes how to use a variety of tools to upgrade, roll back, or
reset software versions and to back up or reset configuration files.
•
Optional Network Configuration
•
System Logging and Monitoring
•
Managing Configuration Data
•
Upgrading, Rolling Back, or Resetting the System
•
Managing Schedules
•
SSL Encryption
•
FIPS Certification
•
Software Licenses
Optional Network Configuration
This section describes how to configure a variety of network services and tools. It explains how to enable SSH
access from remote hosts, and how to enable Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) so you can ping the
appliance. It also describes how to configure the time settings on the appliance.
For information about configuring and using SNMP, see SNMP Configuration on page 308.
•
Enabling SSH Access from Remote Hosts
•
Enabling ICMP
•
Configuring Time Settings
Enabling SSH Access from Remote Hosts
Enabling SSH provides an easy way to access the appliance console from another system. You can enable SSH
access from your internal or external network. The local SSH server daemon (sshd) listens on port 22 (the wellknown port number for SSH).
To enable SSH access
1
From the main navigation menu, click Services.
2
In the Network Services area, click the Configure link for SSH.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
286
3
To enable SSH, select the Enable SSH check box.
4
To add a host from which you want to enable SSH access, click New, type the IP address and subnet mask
for the host you want to add, and then click OK.
5
Click Save.
To delete a host
1
Select the check box to left of any hosts you want to remove.
2
Click Delete, and then click Save.
NOTE: You can enable SSH access from any host by typing 0.0.0.0 for both the IP address and the subnet
mask. Keep in mind, however, that the trade-off for this convenience is decreased appliance security.
Enabling ICMP
Enabling ICMP allows you to use the ping command to test network connectivity to the appliance from another
computer on the same subnet. This will not enable broadcast pings.
CAUTION: Enabling ICMP makes it possible to ping the appliance from both network interfaces
(external and internal). Unless you suppress ICMP Echo Request traffic using a firewall or other
network device, it will be possible to discover the appliance from the Internet.
To enable ICMP
1
From the main navigation menu, click Network Settings.
2
In the Basic area, click the Edit link. The Configure Basic Network Settings page appears.
3
In the ICMP area, select the Enable ICMP pings check box.
4
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
287
Configuring Time Settings
To set the date and time referenced on the appliance and in system logs, select a time zone and then set the
local time, if necessary. There are two ways to set the current time: manually, or by synchronizing with one or
more Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers.
To change the time zone
1
From the main navigation menu, click General Settings.
2
In the Appliance options area, click Edit.
3
In the Date/time area, select your current local time zone from the Time zone list, and then click Save.
By default, the appliance is set to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
4
Apply your pending changes.
To manually configure the system time
1
From the main navigation menu, click General Settings.
2
In the Appliance options area, click Edit.
3
In the Date/time area, click Change and then enter the current date and time. Click Set to apply your
changes immediately.
NOTE: If you are using a Dell-provided evaluation license, do not move your system time backward from
the current time; doing so will disable all services on your appliance for licensing reasons.
To configure the system time using NTP
1
From the main navigation menu, click Services.
2
In the Network services area, click the Configure link next to NTP.
3
To enable NTP, select the Enable NTP check box.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
288
4
To configure NTP, type the IP addresses for one or more NTP servers in the Primary server and Backup
server boxes. The appliance attempts to synchronize with the primary server, and uses the secondary
servers as needed if the primary server is unavailable.
5
Click Save.
NOTE: The appliance does not use NTP authentication keys, making it possible for someone to spoof an
NTP server and provide the appliance with incorrect time settings. We recommend that you synchronize
only with NTP servers on your internal network.
System Logging and Monitoring
The Dell SMA appliance logs a variety of useful information, including user access, system events, and changes
in AMC. This section explains how to configure and view logs in AMC, and how to send messages to an external
syslog server. It also describes the system status information displayed by AMC.
If a central syslog server is not available, you can review log files from the command-line interface on the
appliance itself using standard UNIX commands. For information on how to manually view and interpret raw log
data, see Log File Output Formats on page 625.
•
Overview: System Logging and Monitoring
•
Log Files
•
Monitoring the Appliance
•
SNMP Configuration
Overview: System Logging and Monitoring
The appliance logs data for the operation of AMC and the services on the appliance; it also collects data on how
administrators have used and changed the system. All system logs are collected and stored in the syslog format,
and log messages are handled using an updated version of the standard syslog format.
The appliance is initially configured to store log files locally. If you configure it to send log files to a central
syslog server, you can monitor system-level events in near real time, and receive notifications about significant
events. You can also export log message data to a comma-separated values (.csv) file for viewing and analysis
with other applications.
Log Files
The appliance generates several types of log files that can be viewed and exported from the Logging page in
AMC. There are also two log files related to WorkPlace that can’t be viewed in AMC; they are described in
WorkPlace Logs on page 637.
•
Viewing Logs
•
Sorting, Searching, and Filtering Log Messages
•
Exporting Log Files
•
Configuring Log Settings
•
System Message Log
•
Management Message Log
•
Management Audit Log
•
Network Tunnel Audit Log
•
Web Proxy Audit Log
•
Client Installation Logs (Windows)
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
289
Viewing Logs
There are several log files generated by the Dell SMA appliance, and AMC enables you to sort, search, and filter
them.
To view logs
1
From the main navigation menu, click Logging. The View Logs page appears.
2
Select the system or service log file you want to view from the Log file list. The columns of information
displayed are different for each type of log file:
Table 87. Log file column descriptions
Log file
Description
System message log
Displays server processing and diagnostic information about the
network tunnel service and the Web proxy service. It also provides
detailed messages about all access control decisions: each time a
user request matches a policy rule, a log file entry is recorded
explaining the action taken.
Network proxy/tunnel
audit log
There are two access service audit logs: one for the Web proxy
service (called ExtraWeb in the log files), and one that combines
messages from both the network proxy and network tunnel services
(called Anywhere VPN in the log files). These two logs provide
detailed information about connection activity, including a list of
users and the amount of data transferred.
For details, see System Message Log on page 294.
Web proxy audit log
For details, see Network Tunnel Audit Log on page 297 and Web
Proxy Audit Log on page 298.
3
Use the Show last box to select the number of log messages you want to display. You can choose 50, 100,
250, 500, or 1000 messages.
4
Click the Refresh button to update the page to show the most recent log messages, or to view the
results of any filtering selections you’ve made.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
290
By default, the log viewer’s Auto-refresh option is set to 1 min. You can optionally set the refresh time
to 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., or turn it Off during your AMC session.
5
Use the optional Search for and Level, Source, and Status sorting options to find log messages that
meet specific criteria. See Sorting, Searching, and Filtering Log Messages on page 291.
6
A plus sign is displayed in the message column when a log entry is more than a few lines long: click it to
expand the entry.
NOTE: When Auto-refresh is set to any time interval other than Off and the View Logs page is displayed,
the refresh activity prevents the AMC session from automatically timing out after the default inactivity
period (15 minutes). This means that if you leave AMC unattended while the View Logs page is displayed
and in auto-refresh mode, AMC will not time out. A good security practice is to always switch to another
page in AMC when you are done viewing log messages. See Appliance Sessions on page 613 for more
information.
Sorting, Searching, and Filtering Log Messages
The AMC log viewer allows you to customize the display of log message data using sorting, searching, and
filtering options. You can use these options separately or in any combination.
Sorting
Data displayed in each of the columns in the log table can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking
the column heading. By default, log messages are sorted by the Time column, with the most recent messages
shown at the top.
Searching
To search for text strings in the log files, such as an IP address or a user ID, type the (case-sensitive) search
criteria in the Search for box and then click Refresh to view the results. You can use the wildcard characters *
and ? in your search criteria. To clear the search criteria, click the reset link.
When you’re viewing a system message log, you can click a session ID number in the ID column to automatically
search for all log messages that share the same session ID. For information on session ID see the table of field
descriptions in System Message Log on page 294.
In the Web proxy audit log and the network proxy/tunnel audit log, you can click a user ID in the Username
column to automatically search for all log messages about a specific user.
Filtering
With the filtering options, you can include or exclude certain types of logging data for each log file. For
example, if you want to see Management message log entries that are not AMC-related (such as system control
authority messages), select all of the Level check boxes and make sure the AMC check box under Source is
cleared. The available options vary depending on the type of log file you are viewing.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
291
Exporting Log Files
If you need to perform additional analysis of the log message data, or display the data differently, you can
export selected data to files for use by another application, such as Microsoft Excel (in the case of logs with
comma-separated values) or an XML editor (in the case of the log for unregistered devices).
You can reduce the size of the exported file by first applying filter or search criteria. The Show last <n>
messages setting determines the maximum number of messages included in the exported log file.
To export a log file
1
From the main navigation menu, click Logging. The View Logs page appears.
2
Use the Log file list to select the system or service log file you want to view.
3
Apply any filter or search criteria to the log data. See Sorting, Searching, and Filtering Log Messages on
page 291.
4
Click Export.
5
You are prompted to save or open the file. Click Save.
6
In the Save As dialog box, browse for the location where the file will be saved, optionally rename the
file, and then click Save. By default, AMC assigns the following file names to the exported files:
Table 88. File names for the exported logs
File name
Description
sysmessage.csv
System message log
management.csv
Management message log
consoleaudit.csv
Management audit log
netaudit.csv
Network proxy/tunnel audit log
webaudit.csv
Web proxy audit log
UnregisteredDevices.xml
Log of devices with an equipment ID that is not recognized. For the
steps necessary for collecting device identifiers in this log, see
Collecting Equipment IDs from Unregistered Devices on page 391.
Configuring Log Settings
If you are debugging the system, you can set the message log level for the services in AMC. Additionally, you can
configure the appliance to send log files to an external syslog server.
Setting Log Levels
You can specify how much detail is written to the message logs for each service. Increasing the message log
detail requires more disk space and has a greater impact on system performance.
To set the logging level
1
From the main navigation menu, click Logging. The View Logs page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
292
2
Click the Configure Logging tab.
3
Select the appropriate level of message detail for the services on the appliance, which are listed in order
of increasing detail. The highest detail log levels (Verbose and Debug) are valuable for troubleshooting
purposes, but they require more disk space and can have a significant performance impact: they should
not be used in normal operation.
4
You can also configure the appliance to send system logs to one or more syslog servers. Type the IP
addresses and port numbers for the syslog servers in the Syslog configuration area. port 514 is the
standard syslog-ng port, but you can use another port as needed to match your server configuration.
Regardless of whether you configure syslog, all system events are logged locally.
5
Click Cancel to discard any changes you’ve made, or click Save.
Sending Log Files to a Syslog Server
The Dell SMA appliance can send system logs to a syslog server. Regardless of whether you configure syslog, all
system events are logged locally. To avoid flooding the network with log information, the appliance forwards log
messages for only the three highest severity levels (fatal, error, and warning).
For information on the syslog protocol, see RFC 3164 (http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3164.txt).
To send log files to a syslog server
1
From the main navigation menu, click Logging. The View Logs page appears.
2
Click the Configure Logging tab.
3
Under Syslog configuration, type the IP address and port numbers for one or more syslog servers. The
default for the syslog-ng port is 514, but you can use another port as needed to match your server
configuration. Use the Protocol list to specify whether the appliance will communicate with syslog using
the TCP or UDP protocol.
4
Click Cancel to discard any changes you’ve made, or click Save.
NOTE: Because syslog data is not encrypted, sending log messages to an external server is a potential
security issue.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
293
System Message Log
The system message log displays server processing and diagnostic information about the Web proxy service,
network proxy, and the network tunnel service. It also provides detailed messages about all access control
decisions: each time a user request matches a policy rule, a log file entry is recorded explaining the action
taken. To view this log, select System message log from the Log file list on the View Logs page in AMC.
The View Logs page displays the following information from the system message log file:
Table 89. System message log file information
Column
Description
Level
Log message detail level: Fatal, Error, Warning, Info, or Verbose.
Time
Date and time when the message was generated by the service.
Source
Indicates which service generated the message: Network proxy, Network tunnel,
Web proxy, or Policy server.
ID
The unique ID number assigned to each user session. Click a session ID number to
automatically search for all log messages associated with it. For more information on
session ID numbers, see System Message Log on page 626.
Message
Message text.
NOTE: For information on manually reviewing log files from the command-line interface on the appliance,
see System Message Log on page 626.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
294
Management Message Log
The Management message log contains entries regarding the operation of AMC, including when the console was
started and stopped, and what errors occurred during administration of the appliance. If the replication of
configuration data fails, for example, a detailed message is added to the log to help diagnose the issue. To view
this log, select Management message log from the Log file list on the View Logs page in AMC.
The View Logs page displays the following information about the Management message log:
Table 90. Management message log information
Column
Description
Level
Log message detail level: Error, Warning, Info, Verbose, or Debug.
Time
Date and time message was logged.
Source
Shows the source for the change: AMC or Other, which includes WEEKPRUN and
sysctrl.
Message
Describes the log entry in more detail.
Management Audit Log
The Management audit log provides an audit history of configuration changes made in AMC by administrators,
showing when changes were made and by which administrator. Configuration changes are either active or
pending:
•
Active configuration: Configuration items that precede the log message “Applied configuration
changes” are ones that have been applied and are currently active.
•
Pending changes: As changes are made, they are saved to disk but not immediately applied. In the
Management audit log, these pending changes follow the “Applied configuration changes” message and
can be discarded. See Discarding Pending Configuration Changes on page 135 to find out how to do so.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
295
To view this log, select Management audit log from the Log file list on the View Logs page in AMC.
The View Logs page displays the following information about the Management audit log:
Table 91. Management audit log information
Column
Description
Level
Log message detail level: Fatal, Error, Warning, or Info.
Time
Date and time of the AMC configuration change.
Username
Shows the name of the administrator as it is configured on the Manage Administrator
Accounts page.
Message
Shows configuration changes made in AMC.
NOTE: For information on manually reviewing log files from the command-line interface on the appliance,
see Management Console Audit Log on page 636.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
296
Network Tunnel Audit Log
The network proxy/tunnel audit log provides detailed information about connection activity for users who are
accessing resources using Connect Tunnel or OnDemand Tunnel, including a list of users and the amount of data
transferred. To view this log, select Network tunnel audit log from the Log file list on the View Logs page in
AMC.
The View Logs page displays the following information about the network proxy/tunnel audit log file:
Table 92. Network proxy/tunnel audit log information
Column
Description
Status
Displays color-coded connection status for each connection request:
•
Red: Error
•
Orange: Information
•
Green: Success
When you move the pointer over a connection status code for a specific log message,
AMC displays explanatory text below the message.
Time
Date and time of the connection.
Source
Indicates which service generated the message: Network proxy, Network Tunnel, Web
proxy, or Policy server.
Source IP
The IP address and port number of the computer using the network proxy or tunnel
service.
Destination IP
Indicates the IP address and port number of the resource being accessed.
Bytes
Shows three sets of values:
Username
•
The number of bytes sent
•
The number of bytes received
•
The connection duration (in seconds)
The user who requested the resource. You can search for all log messages for a specific
user by clicking a username link.
NOTE: For information on manually reviewing log files from the command-line interface on the appliance,
see Network Tunnel Audit Log on page 632.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
297
Web Proxy Audit Log
The Web proxy audit log provides detailed information about connection activity for users who are accessing
resources using Web Proxy Access or Translated Access, including a list of users and the amount of data
transferred. To view this log, select Web proxy audit log from the Log file list on the View Logs page in AMC.
The View Logs page displays the following information about the Web proxy audit log file:
Table 93. Web Proxy audit log information
Column
Description
Status
Displays color-coded return codes for each HTTP request. Move the pointer over an
HTTP return code number to see explanatory text. The code numbers are in the
following ranges and colors:
Time
•
500: server error (red)
•
400: client error (orange)
•
300: redirection (green)
•
200: success (green)
The date and time at which the request was received by the appliance.
Source IP
The IP address and port number of the computer that used the Web proxy service.
Bytes
The number of bytes sent in the body of the response, excluding the size of the HTTP
headers.
Username
The name with which the user authenticated to the Web proxy service. You can search
all log messages related to a specific user by clicking a username link.
Request
Shows the first line of the HTTP request, which contains the HTTP command (such as
GET or POST), the requested resource, and the HTTP version number.
NOTE: For information on manually reviewing log files from the command-line interface on the appliance,
see Web Proxy Audit Log.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
298
Client Installation Logs (Windows)
When users log in to a realm, the access methods available to them depend on a few different things:
•
The network access agents or clients that are permitted for a particular community, which is something
that you specify when you set up a realm
•
The user’s environment: the operating system, browser, the availability of ActiveX or Java, and whether
any clients or agents are already present
If something goes wrong during client or agent installation on a computer running Windows, the error is
recorded in a client installation log. These logs are automatically uploaded to the appliance and listed in AMC if
the user has Secure Endpoint Manager installed. See Client and Agent Provisioning (Windows) on page 455 for
details about Secure Endpoint Manager.
To see the list of client logs for all users, select Client installation logs from the Log file list on the View Logs
tab in AMC.
You can sort the client installation logs by time or username; to download a log file, click on it. The log appends
information about each step in the provisioning process: bootstrapping, provisioning new components, and
interrogating the device (for device profile matching). The last set of information is probably where the
installation problem occurred.
When troubleshooting, first look at a user’s client installation log in AMC, and then (if necessary) the log file
epiBootstrapper.log, stored on the user’s local machine in the \Documents and
Settings\<username>\Application Data\Aventail\LogFiles folder.
Monitoring the Appliance
AMC displays a variety of information that is helpful in monitoring basic system settings, disk and memory
usage, current connections, and network bandwidth use.
This section describes how to monitor system status and active users, and how to terminate VPN connections for
selected users.
•
Monitoring Overall Activity
•
Monitoring System Status
•
Viewing User Sessions
•
Open vs. Licensed Sessions
•
Ending User Sessions
•
Viewing User Access and Policy Details
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
299
Monitoring Overall Activity
The AMC home page (also known as Dashboard) displays a graphical summary of information that is helpful in
monitoring system status. The graphs show average usage for the selected interval and is optionally refreshed at
intervals based on your Auto-refresh selection.
NOTE: Warnings are displayed based on the selected interval. Change the interval to increase or decrease
warnings.
Click the Home link at the top right of an AMC page to display the AMC home page. In addition to the system
status graphs, this page provides a convenient access point to:
•
Often used functions, such as starting and stopping services and viewing logs.
•
Hardware and licensing information.
•
Links to the default WorkPlace, mySonicWALL.com, online help, and support options.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
300
Monitoring System Status
1
From the main navigation menu, click System Status. The System Status page appears, displaying
information about the appliance’s current status, such as memory utilization.
2
In the Show drop-down list, select the type of data you want to view.
Table 94. System status data
Type of data
Description
Active users
Displays the number of active user sessions for the specified time
period. This graph includes a horizontal line that indicates the
maximum number of concurrent users allowed by your license.
NOTE:
•
In a clustered environment, this list shows just the active
users on the node from which you are accessing AMC, not
the users on both nodes.
•
“Active” user sessions are not the same as licensed ones;
for more information, see Open vs. Licensed Sessions on
page 303.
CPU utilization
Displays the percentage of the CPU capacity that was used for the
specified time period.
Memory utilization
Displays the percentage of memory that was used for the specified
time period. The percentage is calculated from information
returned by the meminfo utility on the appliance:
((MemTotal - Cached - MemFree) / MemTotal) * 100
3
Network bandwidth
Displays the network bandwidth in Mbps for the specified time
period. If both the internal and external interfaces are enabled,
graph data for the internal interface is represented by a green line
and data for the external interface is displayed in blue. The scale
of this graph automatically adjusts to reflect the amount of traffic
(for example, the graph might use a 1 Mbps scale or a 100 Mbps
scale, depending on traffic).
Swap utilization
Displays the amount of free swap space available for the specified
time period.
In the second Show box, indicate the time interval you want to show:
Table 95. Time interval selection
Interval
Description
Hourly
Displays average activity during the last hour based on samples collected
every 20 seconds.
Daily
Displays average activity for the last day based on samples collected every
ten minutes.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
301
Table 95. Time interval selection
Interval
Description
Weekly
Displays average activity for the last week based on samples collected every
60 minutes.
Monthly
Displays average activity for the last 32 days based on samples collected
every four hours (six samples per day).
4
In the Auto-refresh box, select a value that indicates how often AMC will automatically update the
selected data.
5
Optionally, in the Also show box, you can select another type of data graph. This can be useful if you
want to compare two types of data for a given time period.
6
To update the page at any time, click Refresh.
NOTE: When Auto-refresh is set to any time interval other than Off and the System Status page is
displayed, the refresh activity prevents the AMC session from automatically timing out after the default
inactivity period (15 minutes). This means that if you leave AMC unattended while this page is displayed
and in auto-refresh mode, AMC will not time out. A good security practice is to always switch to another
page in AMC when you are done reviewing status. See Appliance Sessions on page 613 for more
information.
Viewing User Sessions
You can monitor, troubleshoot or terminate user sessions on your appliance, or HA pair of appliances, in AMC. By
sorting through the list and filtering the sessions—by user name, realm (authentication server), community,
access agent, traffic load, and so on—you can narrow your search to particular sessions and view further details
about them. Here are two filtering examples.
To view all open user sessions
1
From the main navigation menu, click User Sessions.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
302
You can get a quick read on what state a session is in by looking at its icon. See Open vs. Licensed
Sessions on page 303 for a complete description of each state.
2
In the View list, select All open sessions. This displays sessions that are either licensed or idle. An idle
session is one that can be resumed: its license is released after the connection is inactive for more than
15 minutes, but up until that moment the session can be resumed. See Open vs. Licensed Sessions on
page 303 for more information on what sessions are considered “open.”
3
You can filter your list of sessions further using a combination of other properties, such as realm and
zone. Click Refresh to update the list of sessions based on your filters.
4
Review the session list. To resort the list, click the heading at the top of a column.
5
For a quick summary of a particular session, expand the item in the session list.
For complete session details, such as the resource a user attempted to access and what policy rules were
applied in the process, click the username link. See Viewing User Access and Policy Details on page 305
for more information on this troubleshooting tool.
To search for sessions with a high traffic load
1
From the main navigation menu, click User Sessions.
2
In the View list, select All sessions.
3
If you plan to end sessions that are taking up too much bandwidth, restrict the list to licensed sessions:
in the Filters area, select Licensed in the Status list, and then click Refresh.
4
To isolate the time range you’re interested in, make a selection in the Time period list box:
•
Select All to see data from sessions that are up to one week old, and select Last 24 hours to see
user activity for the last day.
•
Select Custom to specify a particular range by date and time.
Click Refresh to view updated results.
5
To find out which sessions involve the most traffic, sort the list by clicking Avg data (the amount of
traffic for the last hour) or Total data (the total amount for the session) at the top of the column.
Open vs. Licensed Sessions
When you look at user sessions in AMC it’s important to understand the distinction between different types of
sessions. For example, if a user has a question about access to a resource, you will want to see all sessions
associated with that user (even the failed ones), not just the ones that are licensed. Session types are defined
as:
Licensed sessions
A licensed session does not represent a person, but rather a user authentication. A user who is logged in on two
devices, for example, consumes two licenses as soon as a resource protected by the appliance is accessed.
Until the user explicitly logs out of a session or the session has timed out (after 15 minutes of inactivity), a
license is consumed (simply closing the browser window in WorkPlace, for example, does not free up a license).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
303
All open sessions
An open session is defined as a session that is either licensed or that can be resumed. This idle, “can be
resumed” state is different for browser and tunnel sessions:
•
A browser session will have its license released after the connection is inactive for more than 15
minutes.
•
A Connect Tunnel session will have its license released 15 minutes after the tunnel has been
disconnected due to a network event, for example, when a mobile user moves out of range or a laptop
lid is closed. (Even when the user has stopped using a tunnel session, it remains active because of
network traffic, such as keep-alive packets.)
Unlicensed sessions in this open state can be resumed as long as the authentication token remains valid and a
license is available when the session is resumed. By default, the authentication token is valid several hours
after a session is started.
Authorization Terms Not Accepted
This category is used for sessions that were blocked because the user was using a personal device and did not
accept the authorization terms.
All sessions
This category includes all open sessions, plus sessions that were ended or where the login has failed after
successive retries. If the user abandons his or her login attempts before receiving a final failure message, no
information about those attempts is displayed in this list. Data about sessions that ended more than 7 days ago
is discarded.
NOTE: See How Licenses Are Calculated on page 343 for more information.
Ending User Sessions
You can immediately terminate a user’s session, even if the user has multiple connections on different services
or nodes, or temporarily disable a user’s network access for 10 minutes (the user can log in to the network again
after that period if your access policy allows it). To permanently prevent a user from logging in to your VPN, you
must do one of the following:
•
Modify the applicable access control rules
•
Modify or delete the applicable user and group definitions
•
Delete the user from your user directory
To end open user sessions
1
From the main navigation menu, click User Sessions.
2
In the View lists, select the number of sessions you want to display, and then select All open (only
sessions that are open can be terminated).
3
You can filter the list of sessions using a combination of other properties:
•
User: Enter all or part of a user name. You can use wildcard characters (* or ?) anywhere in the
search string.
•
Realm: Select a realm, or all realms.
•
Community: Select a community, or all communities. If you selected a realm, the communities
you see in this list are restricted to those that are associated with it.
•
Zone: Select a zone, or all zones.
•
Agent: Select an agent or All access agents, or specify that none have been activated (translation
only).
•
Platform: Select a platform or All platforms.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
304
4
There are two ways to terminate sessions manually in AMC. Only open sessions—those for which there is
either a license or those that can be resumed—can be terminated. Select the check box next to any
session you want to end, or select the check box at the top to select all the users in the list, and then
click one of the session termination buttons:
Terminate session
When you click Terminate session, all connections associated with the selected sessions are terminated.
This is a good way to free up a license from an idle session, for example. Termination occurs on a
session-by-session basis, so if a user has several sessions you can be selective about which ones you end.
The user whose session was terminated can immediately reauthenticate and log in to the appliance.
Terminate session - restrict logins
This type of termination is the same as above, but there is a ten-minute interval during which the user is
not allowed to generate new sessions. If there are any existing sessions, they can be used, but until ten
minutes elapse, no new sessions can be created. This is the type of termination you would use, for
example, if you wanted to end all of a user’s sessions and prevent any new ones from being established
while you remove his or her credentials from the authentication store.
Viewing User Access and Policy Details
If a user is experiencing trouble with a session—for example, he is logged in but cannot establish a connection or
is denied access to resources—you can use the Session Details page to diagnose the problem. It enables you to
troubleshoot a session, whether or not it’s still active, by assessing its status, determining why a user’s device is
classified into a particular zone, and discovering what policy rules are applied, editing them as needed.
To view user session details
1
From the main navigation menu, click User Sessions.
2
Click the username link for the session you want more details about; if needed, narrow the displayed list
by setting filters, and then click Refresh.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
305
•
To troubleshoot access to resources, look at the Access requests list. You can expand a list item
to see the access control rule that determined whether this particular connection request should
be allowed or denied. If the rule still exists, you’ll also see a link for editing the item.
•
Information for resources accessed using application access control identify the client software
and platform for the session, the application used to access the resource, and the rule that
allowed or denied access.
•
An End Point Control zone classifies a connection request based on the presence or absence of a
device profile. On the Zone classification page you can see what EPC zones (if any) were
evaluated during this session and what the outcome of each evaluation was. In this example, the
mobile device was placed in the Pocket PC zone, but it did not match the Equipment ID device
profile.
•
If the user’s session has any current Connect Tunnel connections, they are listed by IP address on
the Active connections page. Other access agents are not listed here because they do not keep
the VPN connection open.
•
If the user connected using a personal device, device and authorization information is provided
on the Device Authorization page. Users who were denied access because they did not accept the
authorization terms are also identified on this page.
•
If the user connected using application access control, information about the applications found
on the end point that are under control are also identified.
Exporting User Session Data
User session data can be exported from AMC to a comma-separated (CSV) file that can be displayed and edited
in Microsoft Excel. Once user session data is exported to a CSV file, you may archive user session data
indefinitely, create custom reports without using Secure Mobile Access Advanced Reporting (AAR), or use the
file for any other special needs.
To export user session data to a CSV file:
1
From the main navigation menu, click User Sessions.
2
Optionally, filter the displayed user data so that only the data you want to export is displayed. See
Viewing User Sessions on page 302 for additional filtering information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
306
3
Click the Export button located at the top of the user session data.
NOTE: The Export button is enabled only if the Administrator has view access to the User
Sessions page.
4
When the Windows File Download dialog appears, click the Save button.
5
Select the location on the local computer and file name where user data should be saved or use the
defaults. The default file name is UserSessions.csv and default location is your Downloads folder.
6
Click the Save button to export user session data to the csv file. All user sessions that meet the current
filter criteria are exported.
The CSV file may include the following information for each user session, depending on the filters used:
Table 96. User session data
Type of data
Description
System Version
Secure Mobile Access version number
Session ID
Unique numeric ID used to identify the session internally
State
State of user session: Login Failed, Licensed, Idle, or Ended
Username
Short username
Long Username
Full username and realm, including Common Name (CN) for AD/LDAP
sessions
Start Time
Session start time in MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS format, uses appliance local
time
End Time
Session end time in MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS format or blank if session is Idle
or Licensed
Elapsed Seconds
Seconds between the session start and end times or start and current time
for active and idle sessions
Average Bytes per Minute (Last
Hour)
Average bytes (upload and download) per minute used by session over the
last hour, used to determine high-usage users/sessions
Total bytes
Total number of bytes uploaded and downloaded by session
Realm
Realm name used to authenticate the user
Community
Community name the user was placed in
Zone
Zone the user/device was placed in
EPC Agent
End Point Control Agent used: Cache Cleaner
Access Agents
Access Agents used: Web only, Tunnel, Tunnel (ESP), OnDemand, Web Proxy,
or Exchange
Remote Address
IP address of the client computer
Local Address
Local address assigned to the client connection, left blank for non-tunnel
sessions
Following is an example of a user session csv file generated by AMC:
Version,SessionID,State,Username,LongUsername,StartTime,EndTime,ElapsedSeconds,AverageBytesPerMinuteLa
stHour,TotalBytes,Realm,Community,Zone,EPCAgent,AccessAgents,RemoteAddress,LocalAddress
10.6.1-auto404320,7,Ended,"ljones@am.us.sonicwall.com","(ljones)@(snwl) (CN=Laura
Jones,OU=Users,OU=Engineering,OU=AM Domain Users,DC=am,DC=us,DC=sonicwall,DC=com)",03/09/2012
03:35:05,03/09/2012 03:36:41,96,120750,205276,"snwl","Default community","Default Zone","","Web
only",10.10.10.1,
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
307
SNMP Configuration
If you have an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) tool, you can use it to monitor the appliance as an
SNMP agent. The appliance supports SNMP versions 2 and 3, and provides a variety of management data in
Management Information Base (MIB) II format.
You can enable SNMPv2 or SNMPv3, but not both at the same time. When SNMPv2 is enabled, SNMPv3 requests
are ignored. When SNMPv3 is enabled, SNMPv2 requests are ignored. You can also disable SNMP support entirely,
in which case any SNMP request directed at the system will be ignored and no traps will be generated.
SNMPv3 addresses the security deficiencies that have plagued both SNMPv1 and SNMPv2. SNMPv3 supports all
the operations defined by versions 1 and 2. The new security functionality provided by SNMPv3 can be generally
divided into three principle areas: authentication, privacy (encryption), and access control.
Where authentication in SNMPv2 was provided, insecurely, by the clear text “community string”, authentication
in SNMPv3 uses the SHA algorithm to provide secure authentication. For each SNMP “user”, both a username and
a passcode as well as the desired algorithm are configured on the agent (in our case, the SMA appliance) and
must match the username, passcode, and algorithm choice provided to the management software that will be
communicating with the appliance.
Prior to SNMPv3, all communications were unencrypted. In SNMPv3, the AES algorithm is used to encrypt and
decrypt SNMP messages. As with authentication, a username, password and encryption algorithm are used to
seed the encryption and must be configured on both the agent and the management station.
The combined authentication and encryption levels supported by Secure Mobile Access for SNMPv3 are as
follows:
Table 97. Combined authentication and encryption levels
Level
Authentication
Encryption
Effect
noAuthNoPriv
Username
No
Uses a username match for authentication.
authNoPriv
SHA
No
Provides authentication based on the HMACSHA algorithm.
authPriv
SHA
AES
Provides authentication based on the HMACSHA algorithm. Provides AES encryption in
addition to authentication.
The SMA EX Series supports a subset of SNMPv3 functionality, designed to utilize the security benefits of the
protocol while minimizing administrative complexity. At this time, access control as defined in the SNMPv3
specification is not supported. The addition of SNMPv3 functionality does not change in any way the
management information that is reported by the appliance – this is exactly the same as it was in prior releases.
•
Configuring SNMP
•
Downloading the Dell MIB File
•
Configuring GMS for SNMP Monitoring of the Appliance
•
Retrieving Management Data Using SNMP
•
Dell MIB Data
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
308
Configuring SNMP
This section describes how to configure SNMP settings in AMC.
To configure SNMP
1
From the main navigation menu, click Services.
2
Under Network services, click the Configure link for SNMP.
3
To enable SNMP, select either the Enable SNMPv2 or the Enable SNMPv3 radio button. (If you leave this
page to configure SNMP hosts before clicking Save, the status of this setting will not be saved.) To
disable SNMP, select the Disable SNMP radio button and then click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
309
4
Select the network interface you want SNMP to use by selecting the appropriate option (Internal,
External, or Both) from the Interface selection list.
5
Under Agent properties, describe the appliance agent in the System location and System contact
boxes. For example, you might specify the physical location of the appliance (for example, Server lab)
and the system administrator contact information (such as Jim Jamerson, 206-555-1212).
6
If using SNMPv2, under SNMPv2 Agent properties, type the string your network management tool uses to
query the Dell SMA appliance in the Community string box. This field is required, and set to public by
default. It is a good security practice to change your community string to a different passphrase because
public is not secure.
7
If using SNMPv3, under SNMPv3 Agent properties, type the user name your network management tool
uses to query the Dell SMA appliance in the Username box.
8
To enable secure authentication, select the Enable authentication (SHA-1) check box, and type the
password into the Password and Confirm password fields. MD5 is not supported, as SHA-1 is more
secure.
9
To enable encryption for privacy, select the Enable privacy (AES) check box, and type the password into
the Password and Confirm password fields. DES is not supported, as AES is more secure.
10 Under SNMP Hosts, define the management systems from which the appliance will allow SNMP requests.
You can allow the request to come from any host by typing 0.0.0.0 for both the IP address and the
subnet mask. Keep in mind, however, that the trade-off for this convenience is decreased appliance
security.
a
In the SNMP hosts area, click New.
b
Type the IP address and a Netmask for the host, and then click OK.
11 Under Trap receivers, select the Enable support for SNMP traps check box to enable traps being sent.
You can clear the check box to disable traps from being sent.
If traps are enabled then all traps will be sent to all hosts defined in the list. If traps are disabled then
the list of hosts will be ignored.
12 Define the management systems to which the appliance will send SNMP traps.
a
In the Trap receivers area, click New.
b
Type the IP address and a Netmask for the host, and then click OK.
13 Click Save.
NOTE:
•
You must configure your SNMP manager with the Management Information Base (MIB) used by the
appliance. The appliance supports version 4.2.3 of the University of California, Davis (UCD) MIB,
and MIB II. For SNMPv2, you must also configure your SNMP manager with the community string
required to query the appliance. For SNMPv3, configure your SNMP manager with the same
username, passcode, and algorithm choice as configured on the appliance.
•
Ensure that your internal firewalls are configured to allow port 161/udp traffic.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
310
Downloading the Dell MIB File
AMC enables you to download the Dell Secure Mobile Access MIB file, which adds VPN-specific data to already
supported MIBs. See Dell MIB Data on page 312 for details on the information provided by the MIB.
To download the Dell MIB
1
From the main navigation menu, click Services.
2
Under Network Services, click the Configure link for SNMP.
3
Click the Download MIB button. A file download message appears.
4
Click Save, browse to the correct directory, and then save the AventailCustomMibs.tar file.
Configuring GMS for SNMP Monitoring of the Appliance
Dell Global Management System (Dell GMS) is a web-based application (purchased separately) that can help you
centrally configure and manage Dell and non-Dell Internet security appliances. It enables you to monitor the
status of and apply configurations to all managed Dell appliances.
There is a MIB compiler/importer integrated into GMS Net Monitor that you can use to analyze MIB files. Once
you configure Net Monitor, you can browse the Secure Mobile Access OID tree and create your own monitors, use
mathematical expressions involving OIDs to create alerts, and so on. Complete details on configuring Net
Monitor are included in the GMS documentation; a summary of how to do it is described here.
To configure GMS Net Monitor to view Secure Mobile Access MIBs
1
Download the Secure Mobile Access MIB file archive (AventailCustomMibs.tar), described in Downloading
the Dell MIB File on page 311.
2
Expand the archive and add a .mib extension to the files it contains.
3
Copy the MIB files to the <GMS-Install-Folder>/etc/mibs folder.
4
Add a unit in Net Monitor, making sure to choose SNMP.
5
Click Advanced, and then select MIBs.
6
Once the unit is acquired, select the SNMP Options/SNMP Manage Realtime Monitors menu for the
device you just added.
NOTE: Refer to the documentation for Dell GMS Net Monitor on www.mysonicwall.com for further
information.
Retrieving Management Data Using SNMP
SNMP data is arranged in a standardized hierarchy made up of structured text files that describe valuable
management data. These text files (called MIBs) contain descriptions of specific data variables, such as system
information or status.
To retrieve information through SNMP, you query the system for an “object identifier,” or OID. Each OID includes
a text name, but is usually referenced using a number. For example, the OID for system uptime (sysUpTime) is
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.
If you don’t have an SNMP management package, you can retrieve SNMP data by connecting to the appliance,
logging in as root, and then running the snmpwalk or snmpget command. For example, to retrieve information
about disk space availability, you could type the following snmpwalk command to query OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.9:
snmpwalk -v 1 localhost -c public 1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.9
To view a list containing all MIB variables, type:
snmpwalk -v 1 -O n localhost -c public |more
This command returns a list like this:
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
311
.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0 = Linux E-Class SRAvpn 2.4.20_004 #1 SMP Thu Apr 10 14:35:50 PDT
2003 i686
.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.250.10
.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 = Timeticks: (1707979) 4:44:39.79
.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0 = Root < root@localhost> (configure /etc/snmp/snmp.local.conf)
.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0 = E-Class SRAvpn
.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6.0 = Unknown (configure /etc/snmp/snmp.local.conf)
.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.8.0 = Timeticks: (7) 0:00:00.07
.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.9.1.2.1 = OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.31
..
To view a list containing all MIB names (which are helpful for use with the snmpget command) type:
snmpwalk -O S localhost -c public |more
This command returns a list like the following:
SNMPv2-MIB::sysDescr.0 = Linux E-Class SRAvpn 2.4.20_004 #1 SMP Thu Apr 10 14:35:50
PDT 2003 i686
SNMPv2-MIB::sysObjectID.0 = OID : SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.2021.250.10
SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (1712451) 4:45:24.51
SNMPv2-MIB::sysContact.0 = Root (configure /etc/snmp/snmp.local.conf)
SNMPv2-MIB::sysName.0 = E-Class SRAvpn
SNMPv2-MIB::sysLocation.0 = Unknown (configure /etc/snmp/snmp.local.conf)
SNMPv2-MIB::sysORLastChange.0 = Timeticks: (7) 0:00:00.07
SNMPv2-MIB::sysORID.1 = OID: IF-MIB::ifMIB
..
NOTE:
•
For more information on MIB II (including an explanation of the MIB II variable names), see
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1213.txt.
Dell MIB Data
The Dell MIB modules reference object identifiers (OIDs) or text names that provide the following information
about the Dell SMA appliance:
Table 98. Dell MIB data
MIB data
For more detailed information
System information
MIB Data: System Information Module on page 313
System health
MIB Data: System Health Module on page 313
Service health
MIB Data: Service Health on page 314
Security history
MIB Data: Security History Module on page 314
Network tunnel service
MIB Data: Network Tunnel Service Module on page 315
System traps
MIB Data: Traps on page 315
Other SNMP data
MIB Data: Other SNMP Data on page 317
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
312
MIB Data: System Information Module
The OIDs in the Dell System Information module provide basic information about the appliance.
Table 99. MIB Data: System Information module
Item
OID
Description
version
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.1.1.0
The version of Secure Mobile Access firmware running
on this node in major.minor.micro-hotfix-build format
(for example, 10.0-145).
Hardware model
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.1.2.0
The model number of the appliance (for example,
EX9000, EX7000, EX6000, SMA 7200, or SMA 6200). New
model numbers may be added in the future.
MIB Data: System Health Module
The OIDs in the Dell System Health module provide information about the operational status of the appliance.
Table 100. MIB Data: System Health module
Item
OID
Description
Currently logged in
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.1.1.0
The number of currently authenticated active user
sessions.
Maximum licensed
users
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.1.3.0
The maximum number of active user sessions for which
the appliance (or cluster of appliances) is licensed.
Current connections
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.2.1.0
The number of concurrent connections currently being
serviced by the appliance (or cluster of appliances).
CPU utilization
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.3.0
The percentage of the CPU (or sum of CPUs, on a dualprocessor machine) being used on a single appliance
node over a time span of five seconds.
RAM utilization
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.4.1.0
The current virtual memory (RAM) percentage in use.
Swap utilization
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.4.2.0
The current virtual memory (swap) percentage in use.
Log utilization
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.9.0
The percentage of the log file disk partition being
used.
Peak logged in
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.1.2.0
The maximum number of authenticated, active user
sessions since the last reset; the reset interval is 24
hours.
Peak connections
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.2.2.0
The maximum number of concurrent appliance
connections since the last reset; the reset interval is 24
hours.
Internal interface
current throughput
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.5.1.0
Over a time span of five seconds, the current VPN
throughput (inbound and outbound) in megabits per
second as measured on the internal interface of the
node.
Internal interface
peak throughput
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.5.2.0
The peak VPN internal interface throughput (inbound
and outbound) in megabits per second since the last
reset.
External interface
current throughput
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.5.3.0
Over a time span of five seconds, the current VPN
throughput (inbound and outbound) in megabits per
second as measured on the external interface of the
node.
External interface
peak throughput
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.5.4.0
The peak VPN external interface throughput (inbound
and outbound) in megabits per second since the last
reset.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
313
Table 100. MIB Data: System Health module
Item
OID
Description
Cluster interface
current throughput
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.5.5.0
Over a time span of five seconds, the current mean
average VPN cluster interface throughput (inbound and
outbound) in megabits per second. The reset interval is
24 hours.
Cluster interface peak 1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.2.5.6.0
throughput
The peak VPN cluster interface throughput (inbound
and outbound) in megabits per second since the last
reset. The reset interval is 24 hours.
MIB Data: Service Health
The OIDs in the Dell Service Health module provide information about the status of each service running on the
appliance. For each service, the MIB provides a service ID, service description, and a service state of up or
down.
Table 101. MIB Data: Service Health module
Item
OID
Description
Service ID
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.1.1
The service ID for the AMC is 1.
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.1.3
The service ID for the Dell Web proxy service is 3.
Service description
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.1.4
The service ID for WorkPlace is 4.
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.1.5
The service ID for syslog-ng (the process that writes out
the E-Class SMA appliance log files) is 5
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.2.1
Appliance Management Console (AMC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.2.2
Service state
(Obsolete) Client /Server Access Service (AVPN)
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.2.3
Secure Web access service (ExtraWeb). This is also
referred to as “Web proxy service.”
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.2.4
ASAP WorkPlace; this is the same as “WorkPlace.”
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.2.5
Syslog-ng (the process that writes out the E-Class SMA
appliance log files)
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.3.1
The current state of AMC: 1 (up) or 2 (down).
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.3.3
The current state of the Web proxy service: 1 (up) or 2
(down).
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.3.4
The current state of WorkPlace:
1 (up) or 2 (down).
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.3.1.1.3.5
The current state of syslog-ng:
1 (up) or 2 (down).
MIB Data: Security History Module
The OIDs in the Dell Security History module provide information on login and access denials.
Table 102. MIB Data: Security History module
Item
OID
Description
Number of login
denials
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.4.1.0
The number of login denials in the last 24 hours.
Last user denied login 1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.4.2.1.0
The last user who was denied authentication, shown in
the format user@realm.
Last denied login
time
The time and date when the last user was denied
authentication. The string is in the form Wed Jun 30
21:49:08 2008, in the same time zone for which the
appliance is configured.
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.4.2.2.0
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
314
Table 102. MIB Data: Security History module
Item
OID
Description
Number of access
denials
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.4.3.0
The number of access denials in the last 24 hours.
Last user denied
access
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.4.4.1.0
The last user who was denied access, shown in the
format user@realm.
Last resource access
denied
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.4.4.2.0
The URL, host:port or host of the last resource to which
access was denied.
Last access denied
time
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.4.4.3.0
The time and date when the last user was denied
access. The string is in the form Wed Jun 30 21:49:08
2008, in the same time zone for which the appliance is
configured.
MIB Data: Network Tunnel Service Module
The OIDs in the Dell NG Server module provide information status of the network tunnel service.
Table 103. MIB Data: Network Tunnel Service module
Item
OID
Description
NG server state
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.1.0
The current state of the network tunnel service: Active,
Down, or Crashed.
Number of client
address pools
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.2.0
The number of client address pools assigned to the
network tunnel service.
Client address pool
range table
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.3
A table showing how many IP address pools are currently
active and their IP address ranges.
Client address pool
entry
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.3.1
The number of currently active IP address pools.
Client address pool ID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.3.1.1.0
An ID number assigned to an IP address pool.
Client address pool
utilization
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.3.1.2.0
Percentage of virtual IP addresses (VIPs) that are issued
from a client address pool.
Client IP address pool 1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.3.1.3.0
start range
The starting IP address of a client IP address pool range
Client address pool
end range
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.3.1.4.0
The ending IP address of a client IP address pool range.
Number of NG SLL
tunnels
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.4.0
Total number of active network tunnels.
SSL tunnel table
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.5
A table showing network tunnel statistics.
SSL tunnel ID
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.5.1.1.0
An ID number assigned to a network tunnel session.
SSL tunnel user
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.5.1.2.0
The user name associated with a network tunnel session.
SSL tunnel VIP
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.5.1.3.0
The virtual IP address (VIP) associated with a network
tunnel session.
Number of flows per
tunnel
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.5.1.4.0
The number of data flows in a network tunnel session.
SSL Tunnel Uptime
1.3.6.1.4.1.4331.5.5.1.5.0
Uptime statistics for a network tunnel session.
MIB Data: Traps
A trap is a message the SNMP agent sends to indicate that a significant event has occurred that needs an
administrator’s attention. To download the Secure Mobile Access MIBs, click Services in the main navigation
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
315
menu, and then click Configure in the SNMP area. Click Download MIB to save a copy of the file
(AventailCustomMibs.tar).
Table 104. MIB Data: Traps
Item
MIB filename
Description
ngServerStateChange
DellNGServer
The server core functionality depends on user space
processes (avssld and avpsd) and two avevent kernel
threads. The SNMP agent monitors these processes and
when any of these go down this trap is triggered. The
trap description specifies the component; for example,
avssld(0).
ngclientAddrPoolUtilizatio
nWarning
DellNGServer
This trap is triggered when the use of the client address
pool exceeds the threshold.
asapServiceUp
DellServiceHealth
A service on a single node system, identified by the IP
address from which the trap is sent, is up. The
serviceDescription OID is sent along with the trap.
asapServiceDown
DellServiceHealth
A service on a single node system, identified by the IP
address from which the trap is sent, has gone down. The
serviceDescription OID is sent along with the trap.
cpuCapacityWarning
DellSystemHealth
The heuristically determined percentage of CPU
capacity used on a single node system has exceeded the
capacity for a single node (cpuCapacityUtilization).
cpuCapacityUtilization OID is sent along with the trap.
memoryCapacityWarning
DellSystemHealth
The heuristically determined percentage of memory
capacity used on a single node system has exceeded 90
percent of capacity (memoryCapacityUtilization).
memoryCapacityUtilization OID is sent along with the
trap.
logCapacityWarning
DellSystemHealth
The percentage of log file disk space used on a single
node system has exceeded 90 percent of the total
capacity. logUtilization OID is sent along with the trap.
userLimitWarning
DellSystemHealth
Notification is generated if the concurrent number of
authenticated users on a single node system
(currentlyLoggedIn) has reached 90 percent of the
license capacity limit. currentlyLoggedIn OID is sent
along with the trap.
userLimitReached
DellSystemHealth
The number of currently authenticated, active user
sessions on a single node system (currentlyLoggedIn)
has reached the current license capacity limit.
currentlyLoggedIn OID is sent along with the trap.
userLimitExceeded
DellSystemHealth
The number of concurrent, authenticated users on a
single node system has reached the current license
capacity limit (currentlyLoggedIn), plus grace count,
for authorized users. currentlyLoggedIn OID is sent along
with the trap.
asapSystemUp
DellSystemInfo
For a single appliance (not in an HA pair): the appliance
from which the notification is sent (identified by IP
address) is back online.
asapSystemDown
DellSystemInfo
For a single appliance (not in an HA pair): the appliance
from which the notification is sent (identified by IP
address) is going offline.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
316
MIB Data: Other SNMP Data
Here is some other information about the appliance that you can retrieve from the standard MIB file using SNMP.
Table 105. MIB Data: Other SNMP data
Item
OID
Description
Service status table
1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.2
Checks the status of any of the following services. The
return data references the following process names. If a
process status is listed as “not running”, an error is flagged.
•
apache2 (Web proxy service)
•
logserver (log server)
•
syslog-ng (syslog)
•
policyserver (policy server)
In appliance version 8.9.0 and later, srvcmond (cluster
manager) is replaced with a service named AVFM (Secure
Mobile Access Flow Manager). AVFM does not appear in a
process list on the appliance because it is run as a kernel
module.
Disk space
availability table
1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.9
Checks disk space availability for the following partitions:
“/”, “/var/log”, and “/upgrade”. If the disk space on a
partition drops below 10MB, an error is flagged.
Load average checks
table
1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.10
Checks the load average for intervals of one, five, or 15
minutes. An error is flagged if the load average is greater
than 12 at the one-minute interval, or greater than 14 for
the five- and 15-minute intervals.
Software version
number table
1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.50
Checks the current version of the Dell system software.
System name
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0
Checks the name of the system.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
317
Managing Configuration Data
The configuration data for your appliance is stored in a single export archive (.aea) file that includes the
following types of configuration data:
Table 106. Configuration Data types
Type of configuration data
Description
Access policy
Rules, resources, users and groups, WorkPlace shortcuts,
and EPC signatures and zones.
Certificates
Certificates, private keys, and certificate passwords.
WorkPlace customization
General appearance settings, custom content, and custom
templates.
Node-specific and network-specific settings
Host names, IP addresses, default route information, DNS
settings, and cluster settings.
It’s a good practice to back up the configuration data on your appliance, especially if you are working on system
changes and may need to revert to an earlier configuration. For example, if you plan to add new access control
rules, first save your configuration, and then make your changes: you can then revert to the saved (working)
configuration if the new rules don’t work as expected.
There are several options for saving and restoring configuration data:
•
Export configuration data to a local machine, and later import it. Exporting involves the complete set of
configuration data, but it is possible to do just a partial import. See Exporting the Current Configuration
to a Local Machine on page 319 and Importing Configuration Data on page 320 for more information.
•
Save and restore configuration data files on the appliance. This involves the complete set of
configuration data: you cannot save or restore a partial configuration. For more information, see Saving
the Current Configuration on the Appliance on page 319 and Restoring or Exporting Configuration Data
Stored on the Appliance on page 321.
•
Distribute configuration data to a group of appliances. Before the configuration on one appliance is
pushed to another one, the configuration data on the receiving appliance is automatically saved. For
more information, see Replicating Configuration Data on page 321.
•
You can export the policy from an older Dell Secure Mobile Access appliance and import it to a newer
one, provided the older appliance predates the newer one by no more than three versions. For example,
if you own a version 9.0.0 appliance and you deploy a new appliance, you can import the policy
configuration from your v9.0.0 appliance to the new one. See Updating the System on page 329 for a
description of the version number conventions that Dell uses.
CAUTION: Only configuration data that was generated by AMC is saved or exported. If you have made
manual edits (by editing the Dell files on your appliance directly), these changes are not included.
Manual changes are rare and usually done with the help of Dell Technical Support.
Related Topics
•
Exporting the Current Configuration to a Local Machine
•
Saving the Current Configuration on the Appliance
•
Importing Configuration Data
•
Restoring or Exporting Configuration Data Stored on the Appliance
•
Saving and Restoring Configuration Data
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
318
Exporting the Current Configuration to a Local
Machine
You can export your complete set of appliance configuration data to a local machine (you cannot export a
partial configuration). Only saved changes are included; changes that are pending when you export a
configuration are discarded.
To export the current configuration
1
From the main navigation menu, click Maintenance.
2
In the System configuration area, click Import/Export.
3
Click Export. The Export Configuration page appears, and a File Download dialog box prompts you to
open the DellSMAAppliance-<date>-<nnn>.aea file or save it to your hard drive.
4
Click Save, browse to the correct directory, and then save the .aea file.
5
Click OK on the Export page.
Saving the Current Configuration on the Appliance
In contrast to exporting, saving configuration data stores it on your appliance (up to 20 saved configurations can
be stored). You cannot save a partial configuration, and only changes that have been applied are included.
To save configuration data on the appliance
1
From the main navigation menu, click Maintenance.
2
In the System configuration area, click Import/Export.
3
Click New in the Saved Configurations list.
4
Describe this configuration in the Description box and (if there are multiple administrators) it is a good
practice to identify who is saving it. For example, an entry might read as follows: Saved by MIS before
adding access control rules for mobile devices.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
319
5
Click Save. The current configuration data is stored on the appliance and added to the Saved
Configurations list.
If your appliance is set up to receive configuration data from another appliance, its configuration data is
automatically saved before replication occurs. For more information, see Replicating Configuration Data on
page 321.
Importing Configuration Data
Exporting always involves the complete set of configuration data, but it is possible to do just a partial import
(for example, if you want to import only policy and WorkPlace settings).
The following table describes the types of data that you can import into an existing AMC configuration:
Table 107. Configuration Data for importing
Type of configuration data
Partial configuration
Entire configuration
Description
•
Access policy: Includes rules, resources, users and groups, and
EPC device profiles and zones.
•
WorkPlace customization: Includes general appearance
settings, custom content, shortcuts, and custom templates.
•
CA certificates: Includes the CA certificates that are used to
secure authentication server connections, or back-end Web
resources, with SSL.
•
End Point Control: If you use client certificates in device
profiles, a partial configuration includes the CA that issued
them to your users.
•
Partial configuration data (see above).
•
SSL certificates: Includes certificates for AMC and the
appliance, along with private keys and passwords.
•
Node-specific and network-specific settings: Includes host
names, IP addresses, default route information, DNS settings,
administrator accounts, and cluster settings.
To import a full or partial configuration
1
From the main navigation menu, click Maintenance.
2
In the System configuration area, click Import/Export.
3
In the File name box, type the path of the appropriate file (DellSMAApplianceVPN-<date>-<nnn>.aea),
or click Browse to locate it.
4
Click Partial configuration if you want to import just the items listed in the table above.
5
Click Import. To activate the imported configuration, you must apply changes. See Applying
Configuration Changes on page 134 for more information.
NOTE:
•
f an import fails, you can view details in the Management message log file.
•
If you import a configuration while other configuration changes are pending in AMC, the pending
changes are overwritten.
•
You can import the policy from an older Dell Secure Mobile Access appliance, provided the older
appliance predates the newer one by no more than three versions. For example, you cannot import
the policy configuration from versions earlier than 10.0.0 to your 10.6.x appliance.
•
You cannot import a configuration from a single node onto a high-availability cluster, or from a
cluster configuration onto a single node.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
320
Restoring or Exporting Configuration Data Stored on
the Appliance
Follow these steps to restore a configuration file that is stored on the appliance. (To specify configuration data
that is stored on a local machine instead of the appliance, use the import feature. See Importing Configuration
Data on page 320 for more information.) Only a full configuration data file can be restored: you cannot restore
a partial configuration.
To restore or export configuration data stored on the appliance
1
From the main navigation menu, click Maintenance.
2
In the System configuration area, click Import/Export.
3
Select a configuration from the Saved Configurations list.
4
Restore the configuration or export it to a local machine:
•
Click Restore. Restoration of the selected configuration begins immediately. After the restore is
complete, click Pending changes to apply the new configuration. The restored configuration
remains in the list.
•
Click Export to save a copy of the configuration to a local machine.
Replicating Configuration Data
Replication is the process of distributing configuration data to a group of appliances in order to keep their
settings matched up. When replication occurs, the sending appliance distributes configuration data to the
members of a “collection.” For example, you might have appliances behind an external load-balancer
supporting thousands of users, or appliances in different locations that must share configurations. This is not a
merging of data: some of the settings on the receiving appliances are overwritten (security policy and CA
certificates, for example), and others are not (network settings). See What Settings Are Replicated? on page 322
for a list of what’s included in replicated configuration data.
When you define a collection of appliances that will share settings, the nodes in the collection communicate
over the internal interface using SSL. Replication can be initiated from any system that knows the shared secret
for a collection—there is always one sending appliance and one or more recipients, but any receiving appliance
that knows the shared secret can become a sender. This is in contrast to the synchronization that occurs in a
high-availability cluster of Dell SMA appliances, in which one node is designated the master; for more
information, see Overview: High-Availability Cluster on page 559.
•
Requirements for Replication
•
Getting Started
•
Defining a Collection of Appliances to Receive Configuration Data
•
Beginning Replication
•
Viewing Configuration Data Recipients
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
321
Requirements for Replication
NOTE: Replication will be deprecated in favor of Central Management Server (CMS) after SMA 11.4.
Replication is still available in SMA 11.4, but it will not be available in the next SMA release.
In order for the nodes in a collection of Dell SMA appliances to share configuration data, certain requirements
must be met, and some configuration elements have to match. The sending node, for example, must have the
same number of WorkPlace sites as the receiving nodes, and the same WorkPlace site names must be used on all
appliances.
Table 108. Requirements for replication
Configuration element
Description
System software version
All nodes in the collection must be running the same version of the system
software: the major and minor release numbers (the first two numbers) must
match. The version number is displayed in the bottom-left of the AMC
screen.
Administrator role
Only a primary administrator can initiate replication and distribute
configuration data to other appliances. See Managing Administrator Accounts
and Roles on page 118 for a description of administrator roles.
WorkPlace sites
The sending node must have the same number of WorkPlace sites as the
receiving nodes, and the appliances must share the same WorkPlace site
names. Most of the WorkPlace settings on the receiving appliances are
overwritten (for example, the realm and description), but the fully qualified
domain name settings, SSL certificate, and any customized templates you’ve
created are preserved. To view site settings, click WorkPlace in the main
navigation menu.
Authentication server settings
On the sending node, you can choose whether to overwrite or retain the
authentication server settings on the receiving nodes:
•
Choose to overwrite if a single directory server is used for all
appliance users. This forces all nodes in the collection to share the
same settings.
•
Choose to preserve the authentication settings on each receiving node
if you want to ensure that its authentication server settings are not
overwritten.
NOTE: Authentication using a digital certificate is the exception—if the
sending node has a PKI authentication server configured, trusted CA
certificates cannot be retained on the other nodes in the collection.
IP address pools
The sending node must have the same number of IP address pools as the
receiving nodes, and each pool on the sending node must have a pool with a
matching Name on the receiving nodes. The data within those pools,
however, is preserved during replication: the sending node does not
overwrite IP address pool data on the receiving nodes. Address pools are
configured on the Configure Network Tunnel Service page in AMC (click
Services in the main navigation menu).
Collection size
There can be no more than ten nodes in a group of Dell SMA appliances that
share configuration data through replication. (A pair of appliances in a highavailability cluster is treated as one node.)
What Settings Are Replicated?
Most configuration data on the destination (“receiving”) nodes is overwritten by the settings on the sending
node during replication. Here’s a summary of the items that are included and excluded when configuration data
is replicated. For the receiving appliance, replication is very similar to doing a partial import of another
appliance’s configuration; see Importing Configuration Data on page 320 for more information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
322
Included in Replicated Configuration Data
•
Security policy, including access control rules and EPC configuration
•
Network resources
•
Users and groups
•
Realms
•
Authentication servers (the authentication server names should match those on the sending node, even
if the IP addresses do not).
When you define a collection of appliances, you have the option of either overwriting authentication
server settings (which would be typical in a deployment where there is a shared, central server), or
excluding server settings from being overwritten during replication. See Defining a Collection—Advanced
Settings on page 325 for more information.
•
WorkPlace shortcuts
•
CA certificates
•
Certificate revocation lists downloaded from a remote CDP (CRL distribution point)
•
Agent configuration, including graphical terminal agents (Citrix and Windows Terminal Server) and Web
browser profiles
•
Local user accounts
•
Single sign-on profiles
Not Included in Replicated Configuration Data
•
Network settings, including IP addresses, routing information, name resolution settings (DNS and WINS),
and the settings for the network services (NTP, SSH and SNMP)
•
If you have configured fallback servers for your Connect Tunnel users, each appliance has a unique list
that is not replicated on the other servers
•
License files
•
SSL certificates
•
WorkPlace configuration data (customized templates)
•
Administrator user accounts and role definitions
•
(Optional) You can exclude authentication server settings from being overwritten during replication,
which is typical for a deployment where each appliance has its own authentication server. See Defining a
Collection—Advanced Settings on page 325 for more information.
Getting Started
Before configuration data can be sent to other appliances, you must ensure that the receiving appliances have
certain settings in common with the sender. Some of the settings on the receiving appliances will be overwritten
during replication (security policy and CA certificates, for example), and others will not (such as network
settings). One way to ensure that replication will be successful is to take the configuration data from the
sending appliance and do a partial import of it to each of the receiving appliances. This may be unnecessary in
cases where appliances are already sharing enough configuration data, but it’s an easy way to ensure that the
receiver's configuration is compatible with the sender's.
Once you have ensured that the appliances share certain settings, define the members of the collection and
make sure that replication is enabled on each one.
Preparing a group of appliances to share configuration data
1
Identify the sending appliance and up to ten receiving appliances. A pair of appliances in a highavailability cluster is treated as one node.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
323
2
On the sending appliance, apply any pending changes and then export a copy of the appliance’s
configuration data (.aea) and save it locally (for instructions on doing this, see Exporting the Current
Configuration to a Local Machine on page 319).
3
On each appliance that will receive configuration data, export a copy of the appliance’s configuration
data and save it locally as a backup.
4
On each receiving appliance, do a partial import of the sender's configuration data (for instructions on
how to do this, see Importing Configuration Data on page 320).
5
Save and apply the changes on the receiving appliances. All of your appliances now share enough
configuration data for replication to succeed.
Enable replication on all appliances
1
Enable replication on each of the receiving appliances using a shared secret:
a
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Maintenance, and then click the Configure button
under Replicate.
b
Select Enable replication, and then click Receive configuration data.
c
Enter and confirm the Shared secret. The secret must be known by each member of the
collection that will send or receive configuration data.
d
Click Save, and then apply your changes.
2
Enable replication on the sender.
3
On the sending appliance, define the members of the collection and test your connections to them
(connect to the AMC of each of the destination nodes by clicking its name on the Configure Replication
page). See Defining a Collection of Appliances to Receive Configuration Data on page 324 for step-bystep instructions.
4
Click Save, and then apply your changes.
Defining a Collection of Appliances to Receive
Configuration Data
To define a collection of appliances that will have configuration data in common, the primary administrator logs
into the node that will “push” configuration data to other appliances and specifies a name and the IP address
for each receiving node in the collection. If you have a pair of appliances in a high-availability cluster that will
be configured to receive configuration data, it is treated as one node.
To define a collection of nodes to share configuration
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Maintenance, and then click the Configure button under
Replicate.
2
Select Enable replication, and then click Send configuration data.
3
Enter and confirm a Shared secret. In order to send or receive configuration data, each member of the
collection must know the shared secret.
4
To define each member of the collection, click New and enter a Name and Host or IP address. For a
high-availability pair of appliances, use the Host or IP address of the master node.
5
Use the Test connection link to verify that each member is properly configured. In order for policy
replication to succeed, the following must be true:
•
The destination (receiving) node must be accessible from the source node.
•
The shared secret must be entered correctly.
•
Every node must be running the same version of the Secure Mobile Access software.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
324
To cancel the connection test (for example, if you realize that you entered the wrong IP address for an
appliance you want to update with settings), click Cancel or click the Test connection link again.
6
Click Save, and then apply your changes.
Defining a Collection—Advanced Settings
By default, most of the configuration data on the destination nodes is overwritten during replication (see What
Settings Are Replicated? on page 322 for a list of the settings that are excluded). But in the case of
authentication settings you have a choice: you can overwrite or retain the authentication server settings on the
destination nodes.
To configure authentication server settings for replication
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Maintenance, and then click the Configure button under
Replicate.
2
Make sure Enable replication and Send configuration data are selected.
3
In the Advanced area, specify whether authentication server settings on the destination nodes should be
overwritten or retained.
•
Click Nodes in the collection share centralized authentication servers to force all nodes in the
collection to share the same settings. You would use this setting if, for example, you maintain a
single Active Directory server for all employees, regardless of branch office location.
•
Click Each node has its own authentication server to preserve the authentication settings on
each destination node. The Chicago and London offices for a company, for example, might
maintain their own directory servers; select this option so that the sending node does not
overwrite authentication server settings on the receiving nodes.
CAUTION: For replication to succeed, deployments that have separate authentication servers
must still have authentication servers of the same name on both appliances. In order to
replicate the usage of authentication servers without replicating their actual authentication
information, for every authentication server on the sender there must be a same-named
authentication server counterpart on the recipient.
4
Click Save.
NOTE: You can specify (in the Advanced area) whether authentication server settings on the destination
nodes should be overwritten or retained, except in the case of authentication using a digital certificate. If
the sending node has a PKI authentication server configured, trusted CA certificates cannot be retained
on the other nodes in the collection.
Beginning Replication
Replication can be performed manually or automatically at a scheduled time.
Immediate Replication
To distribute configuration data to other appliances immediately, the primary administrator logs into the node
that will “push” configuration data. Configuration changes on the sending appliance must be applied before
replication can begin.
To begin replication
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Maintenance, and then click Replicate.
2
The Replicate Configuration page lists the appliances configured to receive configuration data from this
appliance, along with an indication (in the Status column) of when the last replication occurred. Select
the check box next to each appliance that should receive settings (the pair of appliances in a highavailability cluster is treated as one node).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
325
3
Click Replicate.
•
To stop replication, click Cancel before the status message indicates that the configuration is
being applied.
•
If replication fails, you can open the management log for the appliance in question by clicking its
View log link.
•
There is no need to apply changes on the destination nodes after replication is done—it is done
automatically, as part of the replication process.
NOTE: On the appliances receiving configuration data, a backup of the appliance’s configuration data
(prior to replication) is automatically created. On the receiving node, you can go to the Import/Export
page in AMC and see the date and time of the replication, along with the name of the sending appliance.
If you need to restore saved configuration data, follow the steps described in Restoring or Exporting
Configuration Data Stored on the Appliance on page 321.
Scheduled Replication
The schedule used to push configuration data to other appliances allows you to select the time when data is
sent to the appliances and when each appliance applies the changes. You may also choose to replicate
configuration data immediately.
To schedule replication:
1
Under the main navigation menu, click Maintenance and then click the Replicate... button in the
Replicate section of the Maintenance tab, which displays the Replicate Configuration window.
NOTE: The Replicate... button is only shown when the appliance is configured to send
configuration data. For instructions on configuring replication, see the Secure Mobile
Access Administrator Guide.
NOTE: This page may take a long time to display if a configured replicate receiver is
unreachable. Because the current time and time zone is retrieved from the receiver, the
current time is incorrect and the time zone is not shown.
2
Expand the Advanced section by clicking the
down arrow icon to the right of the Advanced heading.
3
To immediately replicate data to the appliances, select Now in the Advanced section.
4
To replicate data to the appliances at a later time, select the time and date from the drop-down lists in
the Advanced section.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
326
5
In the list of receiving appliances, select when the replicated data will be applied on each appliance by
checking the check box next to an appliance and then selecting the time and date from the drop-down
lists in
6
the Delay apply changes on receiver column. The time is based on the local time where the receiving
appliance is located.
Each appliance can apply replicated data at a different time, but the time must be later than the
replication time specified in the Advanced section.
7
Click Replicate.
Replication Status Messages
During replication the changing status of each node in the collection is displayed on the Replicate
Configuration page. The rate at which replication progresses will differ among the appliances, depending on
factors such as network latency. The sending appliance might, for example, be starting replication on one
appliance, and already validating it on another.
The following table shows the status messages in roughly the same order they appear during replication.
Table 109. Replication status messages
Status message
Description
Contacting appliance
The sending appliances contacts each node in the collection to determine
whether it is accessible.
Starting replication
The sending appliance verifies the shared secret and whether its system
software version is compatible with that of the receiving appliances: the
major and minor release numbers—the first two numbers—must match.
Comparing configurations
The configuration changes being sent are compared with the settings on
each destination node.
Validating configuration
The appliance determines that each destination node is able to apply the
changes. Some configuration elements (for example, the number of
WorkPlace sites and their names) must match in order for replication to
proceed. See Requirements for Replication on page 322 for a complete list.
Applying configuration
The configuration data on each receiving appliance is automatically backed
up and stored on the destination node, and then the new configuration is
applied.
Canceling replication
Replication can be canceled at any time before the new configuration data
is applied.
Replication finished
Indicates the replication was successful.
Replication failed
Indicates the replication failed.
Replication canceled
The replication was successfully canceled.
NOTE:
•
Replication can fail on one node but continue on all others; in other words, the nodes in the
collection are validated and changes are applied independent of what happens on the other
destination nodes.
•
The replication process can be canceled up until the configuration data is applied (before the
message in the Status column reads “Applying configuration...”).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
327
Viewing Configuration Data Recipients
In order to receive configuration data, an appliance must first be added as a member of a collection by the
“sending” appliance, as described in Defining a Collection of Appliances to Receive Configuration Data on page
324. Regardless of whether the appliance is configured to send or receive configuration data, you can always
see a list of the other collection members.
To view collection members on an appliance set up to receive configuration data
On any page in AMC, click the Configuration recipient link in the top, right-hand corner. The appliances
in the collection are listed on the Configure Replication page.
To view collection members on an appliance set up to send configuration data
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Maintenance, and then click the Configure button in the
Replicate area.
NOTE: If there is a high-availability cluster of appliances in the collection, it is treated as one node and
referred to by a single name.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
328
Upgrading, Rolling Back, or Resetting the
System
Dell periodically offers software updates that add new functionality or address existing issues. An update is
delivered as a compressed .bin file and can be in the form of a hotfix or an upgrade:
•
A hotfix addresses issues with a particular version of the appliance software and typically contains only
the files that have changed from the original version.
•
An upgrade is a new version of the software (the version number on the appliance is incremented).
Installing either kind of update, or rolling back to a previous version, can be done using AMC.
To view the current version of the system, click System Status or Maintenance from the main navigation menu.
If any hotfixes have been applied, you can view the list by clicking the hotfixes link.
•
Updating the System
•
Rolling Back to a Previous Version
•
Resetting the Appliance
•
Validating Hosts
Updating the System
You can find system updates (hotfixes and upgrades) on the MySonicWALL Web site. To access
www.mysonicwall.com, you must first create an account, which is described in Creating a MySonicWALL Account
on page 345. Once you have an account, new system updates and documentation are available in the Download
Center on the Web site.
•
Naming Conventions for Upgrades
•
Naming Conventions for Hotfixes
•
Installing System Updates
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
329
Naming Conventions for Upgrades
Dell uses the following syntax to describe version numbers for upgrade files:
upgrade-<major>.<minor>.<micro>-<build>.bin
The version number for AMC (displayed in the bottom-left corner of every AMC page) and client software follows
a similar pattern:
<major>.<minor>-<micro>-<build>
Table 110. Naming conventions for upgrades
Name
Description
major
The major release number. If this is the only number that is present, it indicates that this
release contains significant new features plus fixes. It also indicates that it contains a full
image of the entire system.
minor
The minor release number. If the version number contains only the major and minor numbers,
it indicates that this release contains incremental features plus fixes. It also indicates that it
contains a full image of the entire system.
micro
The micro release number. If the version number contains only the major, minor, and micro
numbers, it indicates that this release contains a small number of features plus fixes. It also
indicates that it contains a full image of the entire system.
build
An internal build number used by Dell. All releases contain a build number.
NOTE: To find out if any hotfixes have been applied, click System Status or Maintenance from the main
navigation menu.
Naming Conventions for Hotfixes
Between releases Dell may issue a hotfix that replaces a subset of the software files on your Dell SMA appliance.
Hotfix filenames use the following naming convention:
<component>-hotfix-<version>-<hotfix number>
For example, Pform-hotfix-10.7.1,1-279 is hotfix 001 for version 10.7.1 that fixes a problem in Appliance
Management Console. The <component> is one of the following:
Table 111. Naming conventions for hotfixes
Component
Description
Pform
Appliance Management Console
clt
Client software
NOTE: To check whether any hotfixes have been applied, click System Status or Maintenance from the
main navigation menu. If any hotfixes have been incorporated, you’ll see a hotfixes link next to the
version number. Click the link for more information about which ones have been applied.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
330
Installing System Updates
You can use AMC to install version upgrades and hotfixes manually or automatically at a scheduled time. For
information on updating the software on a cluster, see Upgrading a Cluster on page 568.
Manual System Update
To download and install a system upgrade or hotfix
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Maintenance.
2
In the System software updates area, click Update.
3
If you have not already downloaded the upgrade or hotfix file, click the Web site link (login required)
and download the appropriate file from www.mysonicwall.com to your local file system.
4
Type the path of the file, or click Browse to locate it.
5
Click Install Update. A file upload status indicator appears. If necessary, you can click Cancel to stop the
upload process.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
331
After the file upload process is complete, the update is automatically installed on the appliance. You
cannot cancel the installation process. After the installation process is complete, the appliance
automatically restarts.
6
After the appliance restarts, log in to AMC and verify the new version number in the bottom-left corner
of the AMC home page.
NOTE: If you see an error message indicating that a upgrade file is invalid or corrupt, follow the steps in
Verify a Downloaded Upgrade File on page 585 to see if the checksum for the file is correct.
Scheduled System Update
To schedule software replication:
1
Download the software file from MySonicWALL.com.
2
Under the main navigation menu, click Maintenance and then click the Update... button in the Update
section of the Maintenance tab.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
332
3
a
In the Update page, click the Browse button and select the software to be installed.
b
Expand the Advanced section by clicking the
heading.
down arrow icon to the right of the Advanced
To replicate the software file at a later time, click the At radio button and select the desired time and
date.
You also may apply the pending changes immediately by selecting the Now radio button.
4
Click Install Update to replicate the software update at the selected time.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
333
Rolling Back to a Previous Version
From AMC, you can undo the most recent update installed on the system. If you experience problems after
installing an upgrade or hotfix, you may want to use this feature to roll back to a known state. Each time you
roll back, the most recent update is removed.
CAUTION: If you have made any configuration changes since you updated the appliance they will be
lost if you restore a previous version of the system software. When you remove a hotfix, on the other
hand, your configuration changes are preserved.
To roll back to a previous version
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Maintenance.
2
In the System configuration area, click Rollback.
3
To roll back to the version displayed on the Rollback page, click OK. After the rollback process is
complete, the appliance automatically restarts and applies the changes.
4
After the appliance restarts, verify the new version number in the bottom-left corner of the AMC home
page.
Resetting the Appliance
From AMC, you can reset your appliance using one of three reset levels. The mildest level erases your
configuration information, log files, and the current firmware, but leaves you the option to roll back to a
previous version, if one is loaded.
The second level removes all configuration, log files, and firmware from the appliance. With this option, you
cannot roll back to a previous version.
The third level also removes all configuration, log files, and firmware from the appliance, and then securely
erases the hard drive, which can take up to 45 minutes. If you select this option, you cannot roll back to a
previous version.
There are a couple of scenarios in which a reset may be appropriate:
•
You want to completely clean the machine and reuse it elsewhere.
•
The appliance is in an unrecoverable state. In this case, you should contact Dell Technical Support and
confirm that there is no other solution to your problem. A reset should be used only as a last resort to
restore the appliance to a working condition.
To configure the appliance after it has been reset, you will need to use the LCD panel or serial console.
To reset the appliance
1
Back up the configuration data on the appliance. You can do this in AMC (see Exporting the Current
Configuration to a Local Machine on page 319), or by using Backup Tool (see Saving Configuration Data on
page 581).
2
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Maintenance.
3
Near the top of the page, click Reset.
4
On the Maintenance > Reset page, select one of the following three radio buttons under Reset Options:
•
Reset the current configuration – This option erases your current configuration. If you upgraded
from a previous version, selecting this option retains the ability to roll back.
•
Reset the entire appliance – This option erases your configuration and deletes all firmware
versions on the appliance. If you select this option, you cannot roll back to a previous version.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
334
•
Securely erase the hard drive and reset the entire appliance – This option erases your
configuration, deletes all firmware versions, and securely erases the hard drive. If you select this
option, you cannot roll back to a previous version.
NOTE: Securely erasing the hard drive can take up to 45 minutes.
At the bottom of the page, click Reset to proceed with the reset. To cancel the reset, click Cancel.
Related Topics
•
Validating Hosts
5
Exporting the Current Configuration to a Local Machine
Managing Schedules
The Scheduler tab on the Maintenance page, which lists all scheduled activities, can be used to delete,
reschedule, or immediately execute scheduled tasks:
•
Apply Pending Changes
•
Replication
•
Install Updates and Hotfixes
NOTE: Scheduled activities are also displayed in the audit and management logs.
Use the Start Date and End Date fields to display only activities created or modified with a specific date range.
Activities can also be sorted in ascending or descending order based on the content of any column.
To delete an activity, select the activity and click the Delete button.
To execute an activity immediately, select the activity and click the Execute Now button.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
335
To reschedule an activity, select the activity and click the Reschedule button. When the calendar appears,
select the date when data will be replicated, use the Hour and Minute sliders to select the time in 5-minute
increments, and then click Done.
SSL Encryption
Encryption is used to ensure data security for all traffic on the appliance. The appliance encrypts all data using
SSL. You must configure at least one cipher to be used with SSL to secure your network traffic. Select the “best”
cipher from the available set, balancing security and performance trade-offs (security is weighted much more
heavily than performance).
SSL provides some degree of protection from downgrade attacks, but in general you should configure your
servers to permit only those ciphers that you consider strong enough for your needs. The cipher order, from
most to least preferred, is:
•
AES 256-bit, with SHA-256
•
AES 128-bit, with SHA-256
•
AES 256-bit, with SHA-1
•
AES 128-bit, with SHA-1
•
Triple DES, with SHA-1
•
RC4 128-bit, with SHA-1
•
RC4 128-bit, with MD5
NOTE: It may appear that the AMC always uses the AES 256-bit with SHA256 cipher for SSL handshaking
irrespective of the cipher that is selected. However, the AMC actually uses the highest secure cipher for
SSL handshaking, no matter which ciper is selected.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
336
Configuring SSL Encryption
The appliance uses SSL encryption and other cryptographic algorithms—or ciphers—to secure data transfer.
When configuring the encryption settings for the appliance, you must enable at least one cipher to be used in
conjunction with SSL to secure your network traffic. The default settings are typically sufficient for most
deployments.
To configure SSL encryption settings
1
From the main navigation menu, click SSL Settings, and then click the Edit link in the SSL Encryption
area. The Configure SSL Encryption page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
337
2
Check the Use only government-recommended encryption check box to enable FIPS 140-2 compliant
encryption settings. This configures the appliance to use only the TLS protocol and enables only FIPScompliant ciphers.
This option is often used to disable TLS 1.1 and 1.2 and the corresponding certificate notifications when
SSL and CA certificates haven’t been upgraded from TLS 1.0.
3
To enable FIPS 140-2 compliant encryption, check the transport protocols used to encrypt traffic. This
configures the appliance to use only the TLS protocol and enables only FIPS-compliant ciphers.
4
Select the version of TLS transport protocol that the appliance will use.
5
Select the ciphers that the access services (Web proxy, network proxy, and network tunnel) on the
appliance will accept for SSL connections.
6
To compress encrypted SSL data using LXS compression, check the Enable cipher compression check
box.
7
In the SSL handshake timeout box, type the number of seconds that an SSL handshake can last before
timing out. The default is 300.
8
Click Save.
FIPS Certification
This section describes configuring your Dell SMA appliance to use FIPS mode.
FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) 140-2 Level 2 is a validation standard for evaluating
cryptographic modules, and includes stringent reviews of source code, algorithms, physical security, and
operational testing on cryptographic security products. The United States Federal Government is required to
purchase cryptographic products validated to the FIPS 140-2 standard. In the international marketplace,
ISO19790 is being adopted as a standard and is a direct adaptation of FIPS 140-2.
The Dell SonicWALL E-Class SMA EX9000, EX7000, EX6000, SMA 7200, and SMA 6200 appliances have FIPS 140-2
Level 2 certification from NIST (the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the United States FIPS 140-2
Cryptographic Module Validation Authority) and CSE (the Communications Security Establishment, the Canadian
FIPS 140-2 Cryptographic Module Authority).
NOTE: FIPS is supported from 10.7.1 onwards but is not FIPS certified. Version 10.7.0 is not FIPS certified.
FIPS mode is transparent to end users. Internally, FIPS mode enforces secure communication and system
integrity.
•
Requirements for FIPS
•
Enabling FIPS
•
FIPS Violations
•
Disabling FIPS
Requirements for FIPS
The following items are required to properly configure FIPS for full compliance:
•
An EX9000, EX7000, EX6000, SMA 7200, or SMA 6200 appliance. No other appliances are FIPS-certified.
CAUTION: If you have purchased an EX9000, EX7000, EX6000, SMA 7200, or SMA 6200
appliance with 140-2 Level 2 FIPS certification, the tamper-evident sticker affixed to it must
remain in place.
•
A license to run FIPS
•
A secure connection to your authentication server
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
338
•
A strong administrator password, which should be at least 14 characters long and contain punctuation
characters, numbers, and a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. In addition, you must
specify an authentication server when you set up a realm; "null auth" is not allowed.
•
When in FIPS mode, the Grub shell MUST be disabled in order to prevent a user from gaining
unauthorized access to its shell.
CAUTION: Modification of any Grub configuration files IS NOT allowed. Modification makes the
device Non-FIPS compliant and causes the device to become inoperable.
The following states prevent FIPS from being activated, or from reaching full compliance:
•
Unsecured connections with authentication servers
•
Use of RADIUS authentication servers
•
Use of LDAP authentication servers without using SSL connections employing only FIPS approved ciphers
•
Use of Active Directory single domain authentication servers without using SSL connections employing
only FIPS approved ciphers
•
Use of RSA ClearTrust authentication servers without using SSL connections employing only FIPS approved
ciphers
•
Use of RSA Authentication Manager authentication servers without strong passwords as shared secrets
•
Use of USB devices for any purpose
•
Use of clustering (High Availability)
•
Clustering (HA) is not supported in FIPS mode.
•
Loading or unloading of any kernel modules via the shell command line
•
Installation of third party software via the shell command line
•
Firmware upgrades via the shell command line
•
Use of Debug 1, Debug 2, Debug 3 or plaintext logging
•
Use of certificates with private/public key-pairs generated by a non-FIPS-compliant system
•
Use of the zeroization procedure without the primary administrator being physically present until the
procedure completes
FIPS mode is not automatically enabled after you import your license. You must set it up as described in
Enabling FIPS on page 340.
Managing FIPS-Compliant Certificates
Any keys generated on an EX9000, EX7000, EX6000, SMA 7200, or SMA 6200 appliance running in FIPS mode will
be FIPS compliant. If you import certificates (and their associated public and private keys) to the appliance, it
is your responsibility to make sure that they are also FIPS compliant. Certificates must be exported and then
reimported when you switch FIPS mode on or off. For the export and import procedure, see Exporting and
Importing FIPS-Compliant Certificates on page 341.
The best way to ensure that the certificates you’re using are FIPS compliant is to generate all CSRs (certificate
signing requests) on a FIPS-enabled appliance.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
339
FIPS Violations
Your appliance validates its integrity several ways:
•
A self test is performed at each power-on cycle to verify all FIPS approved cryptographic algorithms are
functioning properly. If any of the self tests fail, the Alarm LED on the front panel will remain lit, a
message detailing the specific failure will be displayed on the serial console and logged in
/var/log/aventail/fips.log, and the appliance will be halted. You should power-cycle the appliance once
to see if it recovers. If it does not, you will need to contact Dell Customer Support for further
instructions.
•
A continuous self test is performed on the random number generator and on the generation of new
Certificate keys to verify the integrity of cryptographic operations. If any of these self tests fail, a
message detailing the specific failure will be displayed on the serial console and logged in
/var/log/aventail/fips.log, and the appliance will be immediately power-cycled via a reboot in order to
perform the rigorous self-tests for system integrity.
•
All critical security binaries are signed and hashed. Alterations to any of these binaries will be detected
at each reboot and immediately on a running system. If this occurs during the power-cycle self tests, the
Alarm LED on the front panel will remain lit, a message detailing the specific tampering will be
displayed on the serial console and logged in /var/log/aventail/fips.log, the system will be halted and
you will need to contact Dell Customer Support for further instructions. If this tampering is detected on
a running system, the appliance will be immediately power-cycled via a reboot in order to perform the
rigorous self-tests for system integrity.
•
All critical security configuration files are signed and hashed. Manual alterations (as opposed to
alterations made using the AMC) to any of the configuration files will cause the appliance to immediately
transition into an error state. If this tampering is detected on a running system, the appliance will be
immediately power-cycled via a reboot in order to perform the rigorous self-tests for system integrity.
Otherwise, if it is detected during power-cycle self-tests, a message detailing the specific tampering will
be displayed on the serial console and logged in /var/log/aventail/fips.log, the Test LED on the front
panel remain lit and the system will be placed in single user mode with networking disabled. The
primary administrator will need to log in via the serial console and restore tampered configuration files
with valid backup copies or perform a configuration reset prior to power-cycling the appliance.
•
Firmware upgrade files are signed and hashed. If an upgrade file fails its integrity check, the upgrade
process is aborted without making any state changes to the appliance, a message detailing the failure is
displayed on the AMC Web page, and the appliance remains fully functional.
Enabling FIPS
Before you enable FIPS mode, you must have a strong password, a secure connection to your authentication
server, and a valid license.
Obtain your FIPS license as described in Software Licenses on page 342.
To be FIPS-compliant, your password must be at least 8 characters long, but it is recommended that you use at
least 14 characters. Although this requirement is not enforced by the software, having a weak administrator
password leaves you vulnerable. A strong password includes a mix of letters, numbers and symbols. Think of this
as a phrase, not just a password. For instance, “I never saw @ purple cow, I never hope 2C1.” has a combination
of all three types of characters.
Only administrators with System rights can change the FIPS mode. When in FIPS mode, you will not be able to
select non-compliant SSL algorithms.
To use your existing, FIPS-compliant certificates while in FIPS mode, export the certificates before enabling FIPS
and then import them again after FIPS is enabled. See Exporting and Importing FIPS-Compliant Certificates on
page 341.
To enable FIPS
1
In the main navigation menu, click General Settings, then click FIPS Security.
2
Click Edit.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
340
3
If you have imported your license, select the Enable FIPS mode check box.
NOTE: Existing certificates will be deleted from the system in the next step. To preserve
your FIPS-compliant certificates, ensure that you have exported them.
4
Click Save and then apply your Pending changes.
CAUTION: Once in FIPS mode, you cannot edit system configuration files.
If your appliance configuration is not FIPS-compliant, in the upper-right corner you will see an alert link that
says FIPS-compliance warning. Click on the link for more information on how to bring your appliance
configuration into FIPS-compliance.
CAUTION: The lack of this alert does not mean your environment is FIPS compliant. It is your
responsibility to ensure all FIPS prerequisites are met in order to be FIPS compliant.
Exporting and Importing FIPS-Compliant Certificates
If you know your existing Certificate keys were generated on a FIPS-compliant system and you want to use them
after FIPS is enabled, you must export them before enabling FIPS and then import them after FIPS is enabled.
Similarly, if you plan to disable FIPS mode on your system and you want to use your FIPS-compliant certificates
after disabling FIPS, you must export them before disabling FIPS and then import them after FIPS is disabled.
To export Certificates before the FIPS-mode transition:
1
In AMC, navigate to SSL Setting > SSL Certificates.
2
For each certificate to export, do the following:
a
On the Certificates table, select a certificate and click the Export button.
b
Enter a password for encrypting the exported .p12 file.
c
Click the Save button
To import certificates after the FIPS-mode transition:
1
In AMC, navigate to SSL Settings > SSL Certificates.
2
For each certificate to import, do the following:
a
On the Certificates table, select New > Import certificate....
b
Select the certificate file to import.
c
Enter the password with which the .p12 file was encrypted.
d
Click the Import button
Disabling FIPS
Turning off FIPS disables the FIPS feature and removes all constraints imposed by the FIPS mode prerequisites.
CAUTION: Warning: To be fully FIPS compliant, no FIPS critical security parameters can be used
outside of the FIPS approved mode of operation. A few of these parameters are burned into the
firmware itself and thus to be fully compliant, zeroization must be performed. If you wish to continue
using your system rather than returning the hardware to Dell for zeroization, and you are willing to
knowingly skip zeroization, you can disable FIPS mode in the AMC. This will logically destroy all
configurable parameters.
To use your existing, FIPS-compliant certificates after disabling FIPS mode, export the certificates before
disabling FIPS and then import them again after FIPS is disabled. See Exporting and Importing FIPS-Compliant
Certificates on page 341.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
341
To disable FIPS
1
From the main navigation menu, click General Settings, then click FIPS Security.
2
Click Edit.
3
Clear the box next to Enable FIPS mode.
NOTE: Existing certificates will be deleted from the system in the next step. To preserve
your FIPS-compliant certificates, ensure that you have exported them.
4
Click Save and then apply your Pending changes.
CAUTION: Your appliance will be rebooted to apply these changes. Any connections will be
terminated.
Zeroization
Zeroization is the practice of permanently destroying all critical security parameters. This is accomplished by
overwriting the entire disk with zeros. Zeroization makes it very hard to retrieve sensitive data from the
appliance. It is used before recycling hardware, or in other cases where data security is more important than
retaining the data. Once this operation is completed, the appliance can no longer be used at your site and must
be returned to Dell for replacement hardware to restore service.
To Zeroize the appliance:
1
Select Maintenance from the main navigation pane of the management console.
2
Select Reset.
3
On the Reset page, select the type of reset you want to perform as explained in To reset the appliance
on page 334.
4
Once the reset begins, stay physically present with the appliance until the appliance halts.
CAUTION: Your appliance can take up to 45 minutes to complete the zeroization process.
Software Licenses
This section describes how to manage software licenses for appliance components. The Dell SMA appliance uses
different types of licenses:
•
Administration test license: When you receive your Dell SMA appliance, you must log in to MySonicWALL
to retrieve your initial user license, which is valid for one user (the administrator plus one end user) for
an unlimited number of days. This allows you to become familiar with the AMC, which you will use to
upload an appliance license file for additional users or other components.
•
Appliance licenses: This license is used to monitor and enforce concurrent user counts. If you exceed
your concurrent active user limit, user access is restricted until the active user count drops below the
licensed user limit.
The Dell SMA appliance supports the following:
•
Up to 20,000 concurrent users on an EX9000 appliance
•
Up to 5,000 concurrent users on an EX7000
Depending on your licensing arrangements, however, you may be allowed to exceed the limit by a certain
number of user sessions. In this case, user access is still allowed but the excess usage is logged. If the
active user count exceeds the grace count, however, user access is restricted until the active user count
drops below the grace count.
If user access is restricted, users attempting to log in to your VPN see an error message indicating that
the license count may have been exceeded, and they are denied access to your network.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
342
•
Component licenses: If the license for an appliance component (such as OnDemand) has expired, users
attempting to use that component see an error message in WorkPlace. In the case of a Spike License, the
number of days remaining on it and how many users are covered by it are displayed in AMC.
All license files must be retrieved from www.mysonicwall.com and imported to the appliance, as described in
Managing Licenses on page 345.
•
How Licenses Are Calculated
•
Viewing License Details
•
Managing Licenses
How Licenses Are Calculated
A user license for the appliance does not represent a person, but rather a user authentication. If a user logs in
to WorkPlace on a desktop computer, for example, and is also logged in on a mobile device, two licenses are
consumed as soon as the user accesses a resource that’s protected by the appliance.
A license is released when a connection has been inactive for 15 minutes. How this inactivity is measured
depends on the user’s access method:
•
With translated, custom port mapped, or custom FQDN mapped Web access, the license is released after
15 minutes during which no resources are accessed.
•
When Connect Tunnel is running, the connection to the appliance is kept open, which means that the
license is in use as long as the tunnel is up. Once the tunnel is disconnected, the license is released after
15 minutes.
There are a few ways to restrict or end sessions:
•
Restrict the number of licenses that a person can have on a per-community basis. When the limit is
reached, no further appliance sessions (and no access to resources) are allowed. The user can start a
new session only by terminating all existing sessions. For a description of the Maximum active sessions
setting, see Assigning Members to a Community on page 66.
•
Have tunnel client sessions terminate—on a per-community basis—when the time period set for
Credential lifetime (on the Configure General Appliance Options page) is reached. For a description of
the Limit session length to credential lifetime setting, see Ending User Sessions on page 304.
•
Terminate a user session manually. See Viewing User Sessions on page 302 for information on how to end
user sessions in AMC. Also see Open vs. Licensed Sessions on page 303 for more on the distinction
between different types of sessions.
NOTE: Users who reach the limit of their appliance licenses and then attempt to authenticate with just a
client certificate are not prompted to terminate all existing sessions. These users must terminate an
existing session in order to free up a license and start a new one. The best method for terminating a
session is for the user to log out, otherwise he or she must wait 15 minutes for the session to time out and
a license to be released.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
343
Viewing License Details
In AMC, you can view the status of your base appliance license and the licenses for any other appliance
components you may have purchased, such as OnDemand or Spike License. This section describes how to view
details about the status of your licenses.
To view license details
1
From the main navigation menu, click General Settings, and then click the Edit link in the Licensing
area. The Manage Licenses page appears.
2
Review the information provided:
Table 112. Licence information
License information
Description
Product
The type of Dell Secure Mobile Access appliance to which the license
applies.
License holder
The name of the entity to whom the appliance is licensed.
Maximum concurrent users The maximum number of concurrent user sessions allowed by the base
appliance license. A concurrent user is a single login from a single IP
address. Users are not counted once they log off, or when their
credentials expire.
If a Spike License is in effect, you’ll see the total number of allowed
users, the number of days remaining for the license, and at what time
the next day begins. For example:
Spike license: 100 users, 60 days Active: Currently on day 2 of 60. Day 3
will begin at 10:15 PM on 9/23/09.
You can pause the Spike License as needed; see Managing a Spike License
on page 347 for more information.
Appliance serial number
The serial number derived from the license file imported onto the
appliance. This number is displayed at the bottom of the main
navigation menu in AMC; you will need it if you contact Technical
Support.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
344
Table 112. Licence information
License information
Description
Authentication code
This is the appliance hardware identifier. The license you obtain from
www.mysonicwall.com will be valid only for the appliance with this
authentication code. See Managing Licenses on page 345 for information
on obtaining your license file.
Component and license
type
Details about any individual software component licenses. If the license
is a temporary or evaluation license, the expiration date is displayed. If
a license expiration date is approaching, or if a license has expired, a
warning message is displayed in this area and in the AMC status area.
Managing Licenses
This section describes how to obtain your appliance licenses from www.mysonicwall.com. You must have a base
appliance license file if, for example, you want to replace an evaluation license with a permanent license after
deciding to purchase an appliance. There are also some components—such as Connect and Spike License—that
require a separate purchase and license.
Before you can enable your appliance or a component that requires a separate purchase and license, you must
follow these steps:
1
Create a MySonicWALL account, if you don't already have one. You need an account in order to register
your appliance. (MySonicWALL registration information is not sold or shared with any other company.)
See Creating a MySonicWALL Account on page 345 for more information.
2
Register your device on MySonicWALL. Registration provides access to essential resources, such as your
license file, firmware updates, and technical support information. See Registering Your Dell SMA
Appliance on page 346 for more information.
3
Use your mySonicWALL account to apply the license for your appliance. If you have a high-availability
cluster, you must apply a separate license to each appliance. See Retrieving Your Secure Mobile Access
License on page 346 for more information.
4
Apply your license file in AMC; see Applying Your Dell SMA License on page 346 for more information.
CAUTION: You should ensure that the appliance’s date and time settings are configured correctly for
your time zone before importing a license file. For information about configuring the system clock
settings, see Configuring Time Settings on page 288.
•
Creating a MySonicWALL Account
•
Registering Your Dell SMA Appliance
•
Retrieving Your Secure Mobile Access License
•
Applying Your Dell SMA License
•
Managing a Spike License
Creating a MySonicWALL Account
To create a MySonicWALL account, complete the short online registration form. Registration information is not
sold or shared with any other company.
To create a mySonicWALL account
1
In your Web browser, go to the following Web site:
https://www.mysonicwall.com/
2
In the User Login section, follow the link for unregistered users.
3
Enter your account information, personal information, and preferences, and then click Submit. Be sure
to use a valid email address.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
345
4
Follow the prompts to finish creating your account. Dell will send a subscription code to the email
address you entered in step 3.
5
When you return to the login screen, log in with your new username and password.
6
Confirm your account by entering the subscription code you received in email.
Registering Your Dell SMA Appliance
Registration provides access to essential resources, such as your license file, firmware updates, documentation,
and technical support information.
To log in to your MySonicWALL account and register your appliance
1
In your Web browser, go to the following Web site and log in with your username and password:
https://www.mysonicwall.com/
2
Locate your software Serial Number, which is printed on the back of your Dell SMA appliance.
3
Enter your serial number, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4
Confirm your Serial Number.
5
Enter a name for this appliance.
6
Enter the authentication code for this appliance, which is the hardware identifier for the appliance you
purchased. The authentication code is displayed in AMC: click General Settings from the main navigation
menu, and then look in the Licensing area.
7
Click Register to continue.
Follow the online prompts to fill out the survey and complete the registration process.
Retrieving Your Secure Mobile Access License
To retrieve the license file for your appliance, log in to your MySonicWALL account. If you have a highavailability cluster, you must download a separate license for each appliance.
To retrieve the license file for your appliance
1
In your Web browser, go to the following Web site and log in with your username and password:
https://www.mysonicwall.com/
2
Click the link for the appliance that requires a license.
3
On the Service Management page, select the appliance software version from the drop-down list for the
license you are retrieving.
4
Click the link for the license file (.xml) and save it to your computer. After you get your appliance up and
running you must import this license file using AMC.
Applying Your Dell SMA License
The Dell SMA appliance ships with a single administration test license that supports 1 user indefinitely; to test
or deploy the appliance with additional users, or to enable separate components, such as a Spike License, you
must apply a valid license file. Log in to your MySonicWALL account, retrieve the license file, and import it in
AMC.
To retrieve the license file from MySonicWALL and import it
1
In your Web browser, go to the following Web site and log in with your username and password:
https://www.mysonicwall.com/
2
Click the link for the appliance that requires a license.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
346
3
On the Service Management page, select the appliance software version from the drop-down list for the
license you are retrieving.
4
Click the link for the license file (.xml) and save it to your computer.
5
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click General Settings, and then click the Edit link in the
Licensing area. The Manage Licenses page appears.
6
Click Import License.
7
In the License file box, type the path for the license file, or click Browse to locate it.
8
Click Upload, and then apply the change by clicking the Pending changes link in the upper-right corner.
Managing a Spike License
A Spike License enables you to temporarily increase the number of remote users you can support in the event of
a disaster or other business disruption. Licensed separately, this feature helps you accommodate spikes in
remote access traffic during planned or unplanned events.
When you buy a Spike License it is valid for a given number of users and days (this is the total number of users
who are supported when the Spike License is activated, not in addition to your base license number). You can
suspend and resume the use of the license as needed.
Activating, pausing, and resuming a Spike License
1
Retrieve your Spike License from mySonicWALL and import it to the appliance, as described in Applying
Your Dell SMA License on page 346.
2
The Spike License is listed as Available on the Manage Licenses page in AMC. When you need to
accommodate more users, click Activate. The maximum number of possible users is updated, and the
timeline for your Spike License is displayed.
3
Click Pause to suspend use of the Spike License, and click Resume to continue using it.
NOTE:
•
You can upload more than one Spike License to your appliance, but you cannot have more than one
active at a time.
•
Whenever you activate or pause a Spike License, the number of days for which it is valid decreases
by one, even if fewer than 24 hours have elapsed.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
347
Part 6
Access Control
•
End Point Control
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
348
8
End Point Control
The Dell SMA appliance includes support for End Point Control, which you can use to protect sensitive data and
ensure that your network is not compromised when accessed from devices in untrusted environments. End Point
Control works by:
•
Verifying that the user’s environment is secure
•
Removing user data from a personal computer after a session
•
Controlling access to sensitive resources
Topics:
•
Overview: End Point Control
•
Managing EPC with Zones and Device Profiles
•
Application Access Control
Overview: End Point Control
Traditional VPN solutions typically provide access only from the relative safety of a corporate laptop. In that
environment, one of the biggest security concerns is unauthorized network access. An SSL VPN, on the other
hand, enables access from any Web-enabled system, including devices in untrusted environments. A kiosk at an
airport or hotel, or an employee-owned computer, increases the risk to your network resources.
End Point Control reduces your exposure from untrusted environments in three ways:
Verifying that the user’s environment is secure
Corporate IT departments configure computers under their control with antivirus software, firewalls, and other
safeguards designed to protect them from malicious software (malware). In contrast, unmanaged computers
can easily contain keystroke recorders, viruses, Trojan horses, and other hazards that can compromise your
network.
Secure Mobile Access lets you define “zones of trust” that provide different levels of access depending on the
level of trust at the user’s end point. Connection requests are compared against device profiles you set up in
AMC and then assigned to the appropriate zone.
Removing user data from a PC after a session
It’s easy to inadvertently leave sensitive data on an untrusted PC. For example, a user logged in to a public
kiosk leaves a variety of data in the PC’s cache after logging out, including passwords, browser cookies, and
bookmarked URLs. Users may also accidentally leave files or email attachments on the hard disk. Secure Mobile
Access’s data protection agents automatically remove session data from the PC.
Controlling access to sensitive resources
You can reference End Point Control zones in access control rules. For example, a connection originating from a
less trusted EPC zone can be denied access to sensitive resources.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
349
How the Appliance Uses Zones and Device Profiles for
End Point Control
End Point Control is managed and deployed at the community level on the appliance. An authentication realm—
the entry point to the appliance for users—references one or more communities, which are collections of users
or groups with similar access needs. A community in turn references one or more EPC zones. EPC zones can
reference one or more device profiles, which define the attributes that must be present on a client computer.
The EPC process works this way:
1
A user connects to the appliance:
a
The user logs in to an authentication realm.
b
The appliance assigns the user to a community that belongs to that realm.
2
The appliance interrogates the user’s computer to determine if it has attributes (contained in a device
profile) that match those defined in one of the community’s EPC zones.
3
If the device matches a profile, the appliance classifies the computer into a particular EPC zone and
deploys the EPC tools configured for that zone.
4
If the user is connecting with a personal device, they may optionally be prompted to authorize the VPN
connection.
In this case, the user’s device profile matches an End Point Control zone named IT-managed. For a more
detailed description of this process, see the first scenario in End Point Control Scenarios on page 352.
Figure 19. End Point Control for zone IT-Managed
NOTE:
•
End Point Control has some specific Web browser requirements (for example, Safari is
recommended over Mozilla Firefox on Apple Macintosh systems); see Client Components on page 21
for detailed requirements.
•
During client interrogation, the device profile attributes that the appliance is checking for and
whether they were found is recorded in the system message log, provided the log level is set to
verbose. See End Point Control Interrogation on page 630 for more information.
Defining Zones
There are three categories of zones that you can customize, plus a built-in zone (Default). A community can
include Deny, Standard, and Quarantine zones; the Default zone, on the other hand, is global. See Adding
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
350
Communities to a Realm on page 65 for more information about communities.
Table 113. Types of zones
Zone type
Description
Deny
Deny zones are evaluated first. The appliance tries to find a match in the list of Deny
zones, starting with the one at the top. If there is a device profile match (for example, a
certain file is found on the device), the user is denied access to the network. See
Creating a Deny Zone on page 368 for more information.
Device
If the device does not match the criteria for a Deny zone, the appliance tries to find a
match in the list of Standard zones, starting with the one at the top. The Standard zone
category contains the Device zone. If the device matches the criteria, it is placed in a
“zone of trust”.
If no match is found, the device is placed in the Default zone, or in a Quarantine zone (if
one is defined). See Creating a Device Zone on page 360 for more information.
Application
If the application does not match the criteria for a Deny zone, the appliance tries to find
a match in the list of Standard zones, starting with the one at the top. The Standard zone
category contains the Application zone. If the Application matches the criteria, it is
placed in a “zone of trust”.
If no match is found, the device is placed in the Default zone, or in a Quarantine zone (if
one is defined). See Creating an Application Zone on page 363 for more information.
Quarantine
A device for which there is no profile match is placed in either the Default zone or in a
Quarantine zone. You can customize the message users see; for example, you may want
to explain what is required to bring the user’s system into compliance with your security
policies. There can be only one Quarantine zone in a community. See Creating a
Quarantine Zone on page 369 for more information.
Default
This zone is global and implicitly present in every community configured in AMC. If a
device does not match any other profile, you choose whether it should “fall through” to
the Default zone, or to a Quarantine zone. You can customize the Default zone to some
extent, but you cannot delete it. See Configuring the Default Zone on page 370 for more
information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
351
The following diagram illustrates the order in which zones are evaluated. Only the Default zone is required:
Figure 20. Zone evaluation order
End Point Control Scenarios
This section describes some typical End Point Control scenarios that use zones and device profiles to classify
connection requests and deploy End Point Control tools to clients.
•
Scenario 1: Employees Connecting from IT-Managed Laptops
•
Scenario 2: Employees Connecting from a Home PC
•
Scenario 3: Employees Connecting from a Public Kiosk
•
Scenario 4: Employee Connects from a PC with Google Desktop
•
Scenario 5: Employee Connects from a Mobile Device
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
352
Scenario 1: Employees Connecting from IT-Managed Laptops
This scenario begins with an employee connecting to the appliance using an IT-managed laptop.
Figure 21. Employees Connecting from IT-Managed Laptops
Here’s the sequence of events when a user logs in:
1
The user connects to the appliance, logs in to the realm Employees, and is assigned to the Full-time
employees community.
2
After the user authenticates, the client device is interrogated to determine if it matches any device
profiles belonging to the zones referenced by the Full-time employees community. Device profiles are
evaluated by zone, starting with any Deny zones and then proceeding through the zones listed for the
community.
3
The appliance finds that the client doesn’t match the device profile for the Deny zone (Block-access), so
it proceeds to check the profile for the IT-managed zone. The IT-managed zone references a device
profile named Trusted laptop. The appliance determines that the user’s device attributes match that
particular device profile (a registry key entry, antivirus software, and an application).
4
Based on that match, the appliance classifies the device into the IT-managed zone and doesn’t evaluate
the subsequent zones in the list for that community.
5
The IT-managed zone is not configured to require a data protection tool on the client. The appliance
then provisions the access agent configured for the Full-time employees community, and the user is able
to access the appropriate network resources.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
353
Scenario 2: Employees Connecting from a Home PC
This scenario begins with an employee connecting to the appliance from a home PC.
Figure 22. Employees Connecting from a Home PC
Here’s the sequence of events when a user logs in:
1
The user connects to the appliance, logs in to the realm Employees, and is assigned to the Full-time
employees community.
2
Once the user is authenticated, the client device is interrogated to determine if it matches any device
profiles belonging to the zones referenced by the Full-time employees community. Device profiles are
evaluated by zone, starting with any Deny zones and then proceeding through the others listed for the
community.
3
In this scenario, the appliance finds that the client doesn’t match the device profile for the Deny zone
(Block-access) or the Standard zone named IT-managed, so it continues to the next one in the list: SemiTrusted.
4
The Semi-trusted zone references a device profile named Home device. The appliance determines that
the user’s device attributes (a registry key entry, antivirus software, an application, and a personal
firewall) match that device profile.
5
Based on that match, the appliance classifies the device into the Semi-trusted zone and doesn’t
evaluate the subsequent zones in the community.
6
Because the Semi-trusted zone is configured to require a data protection tool on the client, the
appliance deploys Cache Cleaner to the client. The appliance then provisions the access agent
configured for the Full-time employees community, and the user is able to access the appropriate
network resources.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
354
Scenario 3: Employees Connecting from a Public Kiosk
This scenario begins with an employee connecting to the appliance from a public kiosk.
Figure 23. Employees Connecting from a Public Kiosk
User authenticates
Employee on
public kiosk
Realm
Employees
Client is interrogated
(does it fit a device profile?)
Found:
Nothing
Device profiles
Community
Full-time
employees
Authentication
server
Zones
Block-access
IT-managed
Client does not match
any device profile
Semi-trusted
Untrusted
Client is classified into a
Quarantine zone named
Untrusted
(Another option is to use
the Default zone as the
“fall-through” case)
Here’s the sequence of events when a user logs in:
1
The user connects to the appliance, logs in to the realm Employees, and is assigned to the Full-time
employees community.
2
After the user authenticates, the client device is interrogated to determine if it matches any device
profiles belonging to zones referenced by the Full-time employees community, starting with any Deny
zones and proceeding through the others listed for the community.
3
In this scenario, the appliance finds that the client doesn’t match any of the configured device profiles.
There are a couple of ways to handle this sort situation: classify the client into a Quarantine zone, or
into the Default zone. In this example, the Quarantine zone Untrusted is used. The only resources a user
has access to are those that you have set up: you might, for example, display a customized page with
links to Web resources for bringing a system into compliance with your security policies.
a
If the untrusted device (for example, a PC in a public kiosk) is running Windows 7, Windows Vista,
or Windows 2008 Server, and a supported browser, the user is required to download and install the
client component manager, Secure Endpoint Manager. The client component manager
automatically deploys Cache Cleaner for the user. The appliance then provisions the access agent
configured for the Full-time employees community, and the user can access the appropriate
network resources.
b
If the device’s operating system and browser are not compatible with Cache Cleaner, a message is
displayed.
c
If Cache Cleaner cannot be deployed on the client, the user’s connection request is denied.
See Configuring the Default Zone on page 370 for information on the setup options for this zone.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
355
Scenario 4: Employee Connects from a PC with Google
Desktop
An employee connects to the appliance from a PC outside of the corporate office.
Figure 24. Employee Connecting from a PC with Google Desktop
Here’s the sequence of events when a user logs in:
1
The user connects to the appliance, logs in to the realm Employees, and is assigned to the Full-time
employees community.
2
After the user authenticates, the client device is interrogated to determine if it matches any device
profiles belonging to the zones referenced by the Full-time employees community, starting with any
Deny zones.
3
In this case the appliance determines that the PC is running Google Desktop, which makes it a match for
the Google Desktop present device profile. The device is classified into the Deny zone named Blockaccess.
4
No other zones are evaluated and the user’s access request is denied.
5
The user is logged out.
Scenario 5: Employee Connects from a Mobile Device
In this scenario an employee connects to the appliance from a mobile device outside of the corporate office. To
establish an association between a particular user and his or her device (in case the device is misplaced or lost),
the administrator has collected the user name and IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number for
each device, and has added the IMEI number for user accounts on the Active Directory server. The administrator
has also created a device profile named Mobile resources that verifies that user/IMEI association.
Here’s the sequence of events when a user logs in:
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
356
1
The user connects to the appliance, logs in to the realm Employees by entering a user name and
password, and is then assigned to the Mobile employees community.
2
After the user authenticates, the client device is interrogated (using a device profile for the zone
referenced by the Mobile employees community) and its IMEI number is determined.
3
The IMEI number is compared against the one that is associated with the user in the AD directory. If
there’s a match, the user is allowed access to mobile device-specific links; otherwise he or she is denied
access.
4
Optionally, the user may be prompted to authorize the VPN connection from the personal device.
NOTE: Checking for an IMEI number works only on wide area networks (WAN), not WiFi, and the WAN
service must be on in order for the post-authentication process to determine the IMEI number on the
mobile device.
In order to track service by mobile device and user you can process audit log files for network proxy, Web proxy,
or tunnel clients.
Managing EPC with Zones and Device
Profiles
Device profiles can include any combination of the following attributes to identify a client and assign it to a
“zone of trust,” quarantine it, or deny it access altogether:
•
Application
•
Client certificate
•
Directory name
•
Equipment ID (the identifier for a device; for example, the IMEI number of a mobile device)
•
File name, size, or timestamp
•
Windows domain
•
Windows registry entry
•
Windows version
If you have Advanced EPC, you have additional attributes for identifying security programs on client devices:
•
Antivirus program
•
Antispyware program
•
Personal firewall program
And, you can define fallback detection for these types of security programs using the EPC library. See Advanced
EPC: Using Fallback Detection on page 386 for configuration instructions.
An EPC zone can reference one or more device profiles. Multiple device profiles are useful if there are users
with similar VPN access needs who use different computer platforms. For example, you could configure an EPC
zone that references a device profile for Windows computers, and another zone for Macintosh computers. AMC
supports device profiles for Windows, Macintosh, Linux, Windows Mobile-powered devices, and other mobile
devices (such as PDAs and smartphones). You can create as many additional zones and device profiles as needed
to accommodate different access scenarios and levels of trust, such as separate zones for employees and
business partners or contractors.
AMC includes a predefined zone and some device profiles:
•
You can configure the Default zone to some extent, but you cannot delete it. A device that cannot be
classified into any of the zones you have configured is placed in either the Default zone, or a Quarantine
zone. (When you configure a community, you choose which of these will be the “fallback” zone; see
Using End Point Control Restrictions in a Community on page 69 for how to do this.) See Configuring the
Default Zone on page 370 for more information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
357
•
To help you get started with Advanced EPC, the appliance includes some preconfigured device profiles
designed for common access scenarios. You can use these as is, or customize them to meet your needs;
see Advanced EPC: Using Preconfigured Device Profiles on page 387 for more information.
Communities are used to specify which zones are available to users after they authenticate. For information on
linking zones to communities, see Using End Point Control Restrictions in a Community on page 69. In addition,
you can tie zones to your access policy in much the same way as users, groups, and resources.
•
Enabling and Disabling End Point Control
•
Zones and Device Profiles
•
Creating Zones for Special Situations
•
Using the Virtual Keyboard to Enter Credentials
Enabling and Disabling End Point Control
You can globally enable or disable End Point Control in AMC. Here are two examples of situations where you
might want to temporarily disable EPC:
•
You have upgraded your version of antivirus software company-wide from version 2.x to 3.x. You could
temporarily disable EPC in order to change the device profile that specifies the antivirus software.
•
You can create new device profiles and zones on a production appliance without disrupting users.
When End Point Control is disabled (which is the default setting), the appliance does not perform the following
EPC actions:
•
Evaluate the attributes of client devices
•
Classify connection requests into zones
•
Enforce zone restrictions in access control rules
To enable End Point Control
1
From the main navigation menu, click End Point Control.
2
Click the Edit link in the General section. The Configure End Point Control page appears.
3
Check the Enable End Point Control check box.
4
Click Save.
NOTE: When EPC is enabled, you can specify (on a per-zone basis) how often EPC checks are done: only
once (at login), or at login and then every <n> minutes for the duration of the session. See Creating a
Device Zone on page 360 or Configuring the Default Zone on page 370 for more information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
358
Zones and Device Profiles
This section describes how to configure and use zones and devices profiles.
•
Viewing Zones and Device Profiles
•
Creating a Device Zone
•
Creating an Application Zone
•
Creating a Deny Zone
•
Creating a Quarantine Zone
•
Configuring the Default Zone
•
Defining Device Profiles for a Zone
•
Device Profile Attributes
•
Advanced EPC: Extended Lists of Security Programs
•
Advanced EPC: Using Fallback Detection
•
Advanced EPC: Using Preconfigured Device Profiles
•
Using Comparison Operators with Device Profile Attributes
•
Using End Point Control with the Connect Tunnel Client
•
Performing Recurring EPC Checks: Example
Viewing Zones and Device Profiles
You can see the list of End Point Control zones in AMC and quickly determine what types they are and whether
there are any communities associated with them.
To view configured zones
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control.
2
Click Edit in the Zones and Device Profiles section. The Configure Zones and Devices page appears.
3
The Configure Zones and Devices page provides a summary of the zones configured in AMC, and a
summary of the EPC agent status. The Dell SMA appliance comes with a preconfigured zone named
Default. Click the name of a zone to view or edit its settings.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
359
4
You can see information about each zone in the list:
•
The plus sign (+) column expands a selected zone to display the device profiles and communities
the zone is associated with.
•
The Type column identifies whether a given zone is a Default, Standard, Deny, or Quarantine one
(these zone types are described in detail in Defining Zones on page 350).
•
The Name column displays the name you assigned when creating a zone; edit a zone by clicking
its name.
•
The Description column lists any descriptive text for the zone.
•
The Used column indicates whether the zone is referenced by any communities. A blue dot
indicates it is being used by one or more communities. If a zone is not referenced, this field is
blank.
Device profiles specify the attributes used to identify a client, such as the presence of a registry key or software
program. They are referenced by End Point Control zones.
To view configured device profiles
1
In the Device Profiles section, review the list of configured profiles. If you have Advanced EPC, this list
includes several preconfigured device profiles.
2
You can see information about each profile:
•
The Type column displays an icon representing the platform the device profile supports:
Microsoft Windows, Mac OS X, Linux, Windows Mobile, and Other mobile device.
•
The Name column displays the name you assigned when creating the device profile; edit a device
profile by clicking its name.
•
The Description column lists any descriptive text for the device profile.
•
The Used column indicates whether the profile is referenced by any clients. A blue dot indicates
it is being used by one or more clients. If a zone is not referenced, this field is blank.
Creating a Device Zone
Device zones are evaluated after Deny zones. You could create a device profile, for example, named Windows
firewall that would require that a personal firewall be running. When this End Point Control policy is in place,
any device that is a match is placed in a “zone of trust.”
To define a Device zone
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control. The End Point Control Settings page
appears.
2
Click Edit in the Zones and Device Profiles section, which displays the Configure Zones and Devices page.
3
Click New and select Device zone from the menu. The Zone Definition - Device Zone page appears.
4
In the Name box, type a meaningful name for the zone (for example, Windows firewall required). If a
zone will be referenced by mobile device users, keep the name short so that all of it is visible on the
mobile device.
5
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the zone.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
360
6
In the All Device Zone Profiles list, select the check box for any device profiles that you want to require
in the zone, and then click the right arrow (>>) button. Only one of the profiles in the In Use list needs
to match for the device to be placed in the zone you are creating.
7
If there are no device profiles for this zone, click New to add one. See Defining Device Profiles for a Zone
on page 372 for more information on creating profiles.
8
In the Access method restrictions area, specify which access methods, if any, will not be allowed for
clients that are classified into this zone.
9
Specify whether a Data protection agent is required. Cache Cleaner provides enhanced protection on all
platforms except Linux platforms.
10 Check the top check box in the Device Authorization area to require users to authorize their personal
device before a VPN connection is established. By default, this check box is checked when EPC is enabled
for device zones.
11 To change the authorization terms that users must agree to, type the desired authorization terms in the
Terms section of the Device Authorization area. The Device Authorization check box must be checked
to edit the terms.
12 By default, a user authorization expires 180 days after the device was last used. When device
authorization is enabled, you can disable zone authorization expiration by unchecking the expiration
check box or change the number of days before expiration by typing the desired number of days.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
361
13 By default, user connections to a device zone are not dropped when the connection is inactive. However,
a inactivity timer can be set In the Inactivity timer area to end the connection after a set period of
inactivity. The inactivity timer interval can be set from 3 minutes to 10 hours (default is never).
NOTE: In earlier releases, the Inactivity Timer was part of Community attributes.
14 In the Recurring EPC area, you can specify how often EPC checks are done: only once (at login), or at
login and then every <n> minutes for the duration of the session. See Performing Recurring EPC Checks:
Example on page 389 for a description of a scenario where the appliance repeatedly checks for the
presence of a USB device: when the check fails, the session ends. By default, the end point is checked at
login.
15 The connection between devices and the appliance can handle interruptions—such as suspending a
session and later resuming it, or temporarily losing connectivity—without requiring that users
reauthenticate, as long as the device is using the same IPv4 or IPv6 IP address.
To allow users to resume sessions from a different IP address—for example, when roaming from one IP
subnet to another by plugging into another part of your network—select the Allow user to resume
session from multiple IP addresses check box in the Advanced area.
16 When you are finished configuring the zone, click Save.
NOTE: For information on how to copy or delete an EPC zone, see Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting
Objects in AMC on page 116.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
362
Creating an Application Zone
Application zones are evaluated after Deny and Device zones. You could create an application zone that allows
only specific users to access the corporate network while running a specific application. When this End Point
Control policy is in place, any device that is a match is placed in a “zone of trust.”
To define an Application zone profile
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control.
2
Click Edit in the Zones and Device Profiles section, which displays the Configure Zones and Devices page.
3
In the Device Profiles section click New application zone profile and then select Android from the
drop-down list, which displays the Device Profile Definition page.
4
In the Name field, type a meaningful name for the profile (for example, Unmanaged Android Devices).
5
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the zone.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
363
6
If the desired attributes are not listed in the Current attributes section, select the type of application
from the Type drop-down list. Any number and combination of attributes can be associated with the
definition. The remainder of the Add attributes section varies, depending on the type selected:
Table 114. Application zone attributes
Type
Attributes
Antivirus app
•
Select the app from the Product Name drop-down list
OR
Check Any product from this vendor check box to add all products from
the identified vendor.
Personal Firewall App
•
In the Product version fields select the version number to allow and
the qualifier (>, >=, =, <, <=) from the drop-down lists.
•
To only use the app as a filter when the app is running, check the App
must be running check box
•
Select the app from the Product Name drop-down list
OR
Check Any product from this vendor check box to add all products from
the identified vendor.
Application
•
Select the device profile definition from the Application drop-down
list.
Client certificate
•
Select the CA certificate drop-down list. You may need to import a
new certificate or modify an existing certificate if the desired
certificate is not displayed.
Directory name
•
Type the directory name in the Directory Name field.
Equipment ID
•
Select whether to match the device identifier (either literal value of
variable evaluated at runtime) to the profile if the user is not using a
registered device. For example, if the equipment ID is used, the device
profile will be used to control access to applications by all devices
matching the equipment ID.
File name
•
Type the file name in the File name field.
Android version
•
In the Operator field, select the qualifier (>, >=, =, <, <=) from the
drop-down list.
•
In the Major field, type the major version number to use as a filter.
•
Optionally, in the Minor field, type the minor version number to use as
a filter.
•
Optionally, in the Build field, type the build number to use as a filter.
7
Click the Add to Current Attributes button, which transfers the attribute to the Current attributes
section of the page.
8
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
364
To create an Application zone
NOTE: Every Application zone must have at least one Application Zone Profile assigned to it. The profile is
used to determine if a connecting device is application control aware and whether to enforce policy at
the Device or Application level.
1
In the Zones section select Application zone from the drop-down list. The Zone Definition Application Zone page appears.
Only those profiles that are Application Access Control aware are included in the profiles.
2
In the Name box, type a meaningful name for the zone. If a zone will be referenced by mobile device
users, keep the name short so that all of it is visible on the mobile device.
3
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the zone.
4
In the All Application Zone Profiles list, select the check box for any profiles that you want to require in
the zone, and then click the right arrow (>>) button. Only one of the profiles in the In Use list needs to
match for the application to be placed in the zone you are creating.
5
If there are no device profiles for this zone, click New to add one. See Defining Device Profiles for a Zone
on page 372 for more information on creating profiles.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
365
6
Check the top check box in the Device Authorization area to require users to authorize their personal
device before a VPN connection is established. By default, this check box is checked when EPC is enabled
for application zones.
7
To change the authorization terms that users must agree to, type the desired authorization terms in the
Terms section of the Device Authorization area. The Device Authorization check box must be checked
to edit the terms.
8
By default, a user authorization expires 180 days after the device was last used. When device
authorization is enabled, you can disable zone authorization expiration by unchecking the expiration
check box or change the number of days before expiration by typing the desired number of days.
9
By default, user connections to a zone are not dropped when the connection is inactive. However, a
inactivity timer can be set In the Inactivity timer area to end the connection after a set period of
inactivity. The inactivity timer interval can be set from 3 minutes to 10 hours.
10 In the Recurring EPC area, you can specify how often EPC checks are done: only once (at login), or at
login and then every <n> minutes for the duration of the session. See Performing Recurring EPC Checks:
Example on page 389 for a description of a scenario where the appliance repeatedly checks for the
presence of a USB device: when the check fails, the session ends.
11 The connection between devices and the appliance can handle interruptions—such as suspending a
session and later resuming it, or temporarily losing connectivity—without requiring that users
reauthenticate, as long as the device is using the same IPv4 or IPv6 IP address.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
366
To allow users to resume sessions from a different IP address—for example, when roaming from one IP
subnet to another by plugging into another part of your network—select the Allow user to resume
session from multiple IP addresses check box in the Advanced area.
12 When you are finished configuring the zone, click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
367
Creating a Deny Zone
Deny zones are evaluated first. If there is a device profile match (for example, if a certain file or registry key is
found on the device), the user is denied access and logged out.
To define a Deny zone
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control. The End Point Control Zones page
appears.
2
Click New and then select Deny zone from the menu. The Zone Definition - Deny Zone page appears.
3
In the Name box, type a meaningful name for the zone (for example, Google Desktop present).
4
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the zone.
5
In the All Profiles list, select the check box for any device profiles that you want to require in the zone,
and then click the right arrow (>>) button. (Only one of the profiles in the In Use list needs to match in
order for the device to be placed in the Deny zone you are creating.)
For example, the device profile definition might require that the application GoogleDesktop.exe be
running. If GoogleDesktop.exe is found on the device, the device is a match for the Deny zone you
named Google Desktop present, and the user is denied access and logged off.
6
If there are no device profiles appropriate for this zone, click New to add one. See Defining Device
Profiles for a Zone on page 372 for more information on creating profiles.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
368
7
At the Customization section at the bottom of the Zone Definition page, you can customize the message
that denied users see when they are logged out (for example, “Your system is running Google Desktop,
which poses a security risk”).
8
When you are finished configuring the zone, click Save.
For information on how to copy or delete an EPC zone, see Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting Objects in
AMC on page 116.
Creating a Quarantine Zone
For devices that cannot be classified—that is, they do not match any of the Deny or Standard zone profiles—you
can create a Quarantine zone. You can offer a user whose device is classified into this zone Web links and an
explanation, for example, of how to bring his or her device into compliance with your security policies, or how
to configure a system for EPC interrogation.
Only one Quarantine zone per community can be defined (you can create multiple Deny and Standard zones).
When you configure a community, you choose the “fallback” zone for devices that cannot be classified: they can
either be placed in the Default zone or a Quarantine zone. For more information, see Using End Point Control
Restrictions in a Community on page 69
To define a Quarantine zone
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control. The End Point Control Settings page
appears.
2
Click Edit in the Zones and Device Profiles section, select New in the Configure Zones and Devices page,
and then select Quarantine zone from the menu. The Zone Definition - Quarantine Zone page appears.
3
In the Name box, type a meaningful name for the zone.
4
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the zone.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
369
5
In the Customization area, type the message you want quarantined users to see. You might offer an
explanation for why a device was placed in quarantine and what is required to make it comply with your
security policies.
Remediation steps for devices that are placed in a Quarantine zone should probably include information
on how to configure a system for EPC interrogation. For most users, this means enabling Java in the
browser, enabling ActiveX, or downloading the Java Runtime Environment (JRE). Your message for users
could include some or all of the following:
6
7
•
Verify that Java or JavaScript is enabled in the Web browser on the computer (in most browsers,
Java is enabled by default). End point interrogation can’t take place if ActiveX and Java are both
disabled in the user’s browser.
•
If you are using Microsoft Windows and Internet Explorer, verify that ActiveX is enabled: start
Internet Explorer, and then click Internet Options on the Tools menu. On the Security tab, click
the Internet logo at the top of the tab, and then click Custom Level to configure ActiveX controls
and plug-ins.
•
JRE allows Java applications or Java applets to run on personal computers. To see if it is running
on your machine, type java -server at the command prompt.
Add any Web links that can help users bring their devices into compliance. This can be a mixture of
public and private URLs:
•
A public address might reference an Internet URL from which the user can download a software
component, such as a Java Virtual Machine. Public resources are normally redirected through the
appliance;prevent this redirection by adding the resource in the exclusion list. See Using the
Resource Exclusion List on page 241 for instructions.
•
A private address might reference an intranet URL containing the latest virus definitions. In this
case, rules are automatically created to give users access to the URL you specify and to prevent
them from accessing any other resources.
Click Save, or Save and Add Another.
When you configure a community, you choose the “fallback” zone for devices that cannot be classified: they can
either be placed in the Default zone or a Quarantine zone. For more information, see Using End Point Control
Restrictions in a Community on page 69
Only one Quarantine zone per community can be defined (you can create multiple Deny and Standard zones).
Configuring the Default Zone
AMC provides a global Default zone that serves as a fail-safe to either allow or block VPN access for any
connection requests that don’t match the other zones you set up. When the appliance receives a connection
request that it can’t classify into a zone—meaning it can’t identify the client device’s operating system,
browser, or other attributes—that device is automatically placed in the Default zone. You can choose whether to
grant or deny VPN access to users whose devices are assigned to the Default zone.
Unlike other zones, the Default zone does not include device profiles, but it can be configured to require the
presence of a data protection agent. The Default zone is implicitly present in every community configured in
AMC.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
370
To configure the Default zone
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control.
2
Click the Edit link in the Zones section of the Configure Zones and Devices page. The Zone Definition Default Zone page appears with Default zone automatically entered in the Name box. (The name for
this zone cannot be changed.)
3
In the Access restrictions section, select whether the appliance will Allow VPN access or Block VPN
access for devices that are placed in the Default zone. If you select Block VPN access, users who are
assigned to the Default zone are logged off of the appliance.
4
In the Access method restrictions section, specify which access methods, if any, will not be allowed for
clients that are classified into this zone.
5
In the Data protection section, specify whether client devices placed in the Default zone are required to
have Cache Cleaner to connect. Cache Cleaner provides enhanced data protection on all platforms
except Linux platforms,
6
In the Recurring EPC section, you can specify how often EPC checks are done. Select Check endpoint at
login to perform an EPC check only once (at login), or select Check endpoint at login and every <n>
minutes thereafter at login and then every <n> minutes for the duration of the session.
7
The connection between devices and the appliance can handle interruptions—such as suspending a
session and later resuming it, or temporarily losing connectivity—without requiring that users
reauthenticate, as long as the device is using the same IPv4 or IPv6 IP address.
To allow users to resume sessions from a different IP address—for example, when roaming from one IP
subnet to another by plugging into another part of your network—select the Allow user to resume
session from multiple IP addresses check box in the Advanced area.
NOTE: For Secure Network Detection to work, this check box must be checked to allow user
to resume sessions from multiple IP addresses.
8
Click Save.
Examples
To provide a limited degree of access to users whose connection requests don’t meet your criteria for a trusted
relationship, you can include the Default zone in a restrictive access control rule. For example, you could let
users access their email by including the Default zone in a “permit” access control rule limited to Web browsers
connecting to Outlook Web Access.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
371
If a restrictive access policy that requires a high degree of trustworthiness and does not allow connection
requests unless they are explicitly defined, setting the Default zone to Block VPN access is the best strategy.
Keep in mind that if your other zones and access control rules inadvertently omit legitimate users, the Default
zone will block them without exception.
Defining Device Profiles for a Zone
A device profile establishes a trust relationship with a client device by looking for one or more attributes, such
as an antivirus program, application, or Windows registry entry. Device profiles can be referenced by one or
more zones.
A device profile can be defined to detect only one attribute on a client computer, or it can require multiple
attributes. When a device profile references multiple attributes, each of those attributes must be present on a
client computer for there to be a match.
To define a device profile for a zone
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
372
2
Under Zones and Profiles, click the Edit link in Profiles.
3
Click the New device profile
button.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
373
4
From the New device profiles menu, select one of the device profiles.
SMA End Point Control (EPC) supports the following device profiles:
•
Microsoft Windows
•
Apple Mac OS
•
Linux operating systems
•
Apple iOS mobile operating system
•
Android mobile operating system
•
Google ChromeOS
•
Exchange ActiveSync
•
Other mobile devices
The Device Profile Definition dialog for that device appears:
Figure 25. Device Profile Definition dialog for Microsoft Windows
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
374
Figure 26. Device Profile Definition dialog for ChromeOS.
5
In the Name box, enter a name for the device profile.
6
(Optional) In the Description box, enter a descriptive comment about the device profile.
7
From the Value section, select the attributes that you want for the device profile.
8
After selecting each attribute, click Add to Current Attributes.
The attribute is added to the Current attributes list at the bottom of the page.
•
The available attributes depend on the device profile you selected; Client certificate, for
example, is not available as an attribute in a Linux profile, and Antispyware program is available
only for users who have Advanced EPC.
•
Where multiple entries are allowed for an attribute, note whether a device profile must match
all (and) or match any (or) items on the device.
Detailed descriptions of the attributes and the platforms on which they are available are in Device
Profile Attributes on page 379.
9
Click Save.
For information on how to copy or delete a device profile, see Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting Objects in
AMC on page 116.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
375
You can also match a policy for ChromeOS as a Platform inan Access Control Rule, which does not require End
Point Control.
To define ChromeOS as a Platform in Access Control Rules
1
Browse to the Access Control page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
376
2
Click on the Access Control Rule you want to edit.
The Edit Access Rule > General page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
377
3
Click the Advanced tab.
The Edit Access Rule > Advanced page appears.
4
Under Client platforms, select Selected, then select ChomeOS.
5
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
378
Device Profile Attributes
A device profile can have several attributes, all of which are detailed in this section. There are a few things to
note about this list:
•
The attributes from which you can choose differ, depending on the platform you selected for your device
profile.
•
Users who have Advanced EPC can pick from a wide range of security programs. Advanced EPC is
included with the SMA 6200, SMA 7200, EX9000, and EX7000 appliances and licensed separately for the
other appliances in the EX Series.
•
Where multiple entries are allowed for an attribute, a device profile must either match all (and) or any
(or) items on the device. In the following example, only one of the two antivirus programs is required in
order for there to be a match, but both of the Windows registry keys are required:
•
To delete an item in the list, select the check box in the left column and click Delete. To delete a single
(or) item, for example, Norton AntiVirus but not eTrust EZ Antivirus, move your pointer to the left of
the item you want to delete and click the red “X” that appears (in the Value column) for the item you
want to delete.
Device Profile Attribute Tables
The following tables describe each attribute, the platforms on which it can be used, and whether multiple
attributes of the same type (where allowed) are ORed or ANDed.
Table 115. Device Profile Attributes: ChomeOS version
ChromeOS version
Platform
Type the major and minor versions, and the build number for the operating system.
ChromeOS
The comparison Operator applies to all three values. To specify all versions, enter “greater
than or equal to” (>=) as the Operator, and then type the major version number in the Major
text box and the minor version number in the Minor text box. You can also specify the Build
and the Patch numbers. For more information, see Using Comparison Operators with Device
Profile Attributes on page 388.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
379
Table 116. Device Profile Attributes: Android application
Android Application
Platform
Select one or more Android applications that EPC should check for in this
profile. To do so, select the vendor from the Vendor list, which displays the
vendor’s mobile security product and current version number. If the vendor
has more than one mobile security product, all mobile security products are
listed in the Product name list. Select the mobile security product that EPC
should check for in this application. Next, The most current version of the
selected product is displayed. Select the Operator used to compare the
product version number.
Android
Match
(Match any)
(Match all)
The default is all versions greater than the most current version. To specify
the current version and all future versions, select >= (greater than or equal
to) from the Operator drop-down list. For more information, see Using
Comparison Operators with Device Profile Attributes on page 388.
Table 117. Device Profile Attributes: Android version
Android version
Platform
Type the major and minor versions, and the build number for the operating system.
Android
The comparison Operator applies to all three values. To specify all versions, enter “greater
than or equal to” (>=) as the Operator, and then type the major version number in the Major
text box and the minor version number in the Minor text box. For more information, see Using
Comparison Operators with Device Profile Attributes on page 388.
Table 118. Device Profile Attributes: Antivirus program
Antivirus program
Platform
(This attribute is available only if you have Advanced EPC.) Select the
antivirus programs that EPC should check for in this profile. See Advanced
EPC: Extended Lists of Security Programs on page 384 for more information.
Windows
If you don’t have Advanced EPC, or if you don’t see the security programs that
your users require, you can still specify programs by adding them to a device
profile using another attribute, such as Application or Windows registry entry.
Mac OS
Linux
Match
(Match any)
Table 119. Device Profile Attributes: Antispyware program
Antispyware program
Platform
(This attribute is available only if you have Advanced EPC.) Select an Windows
antispyware vendor on the left, and the name and parameters for
Mac OS X
the program on the right.
If you don’t have Advanced EPC, or if you don’t see the security
programs that your users require, you can still specify programs by
adding them to a device profile using another attribute, such as
Application or Windows registry entry.
Match
If you add more than
one antispyware
program, specify
whether it should
match any item in
your list (or), or all of
them (and).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
380
Table 120. Device Profile Attributes: client certificate
Client certificate
Platform
Select a Certificate Authority from the drop-down list in the CA
certificate area. (See Importing CA Certificates on page 162 if the CA you
want to use is not listed). A client device will match this profile as long as
the appliance is configured with the root certificate for the CA that issued
the client certificate to your users (an intermediate certificate will not
work).
Windows
Mac OS X
Windows Mobile
Match
(Match any)
Apple iOS
Android
Select the certificate store(s) you want searched:
•
System store only specifies that only the system store
(HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\SystemCertificates) is searched
•
System store and user store specifies that the system store is
searched first, followed by the user store
(HKCU\Software\Microsoft\SystemCertificates)
NOTE:
•
A device profile can contain only one client certificate attribute.
•
A Windows Mobile-powered device has only one user, which means
that any client certificates in the local user store are always the
same. (On a desktop or laptop device, there can be multiple
users.)
•
The system store cannot be searched unless the user has
administration privileges on the client device.
Table 121. Device Profile Attributes: directory name
Directory name
Platform
Type the name of a directory that must be present on the hard disk of the Windows
device. Directory names are not case-sensitive.
Mac OS X
• For jailbroken Apple iOS devices, the directory name is
Linux
“/Applications/Cydia.app”.
Windows Mobile
NOTE: If creating a device profile for jailbroken iOS devices, be sure to
Apple iOS
configure a denied EPC zone for the profile and bind this zone to at least
Android
one community.
Match
(Match all)
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
381
Device Profile Attributes: file name
File name
Platform
Match
Type the name of a file (including its extension and full path) that must be Windows
present on the hard disk of the device. File names are not case-sensitive. Mac OS X
You can use environment variables (such as %windir% or
Linux
%userprofile%), or wildcard characters (* and ?).
Windows Mobile
You can optionally specify a File size or the date and time (GMT) the file
was Last modified. Both of these options use a comparison Operator; for Apple iOS
more information and examples, see Using Comparison Operators with
Android
Device Profile Attributes on page 388. The file’s modification date and
time can be specified as an Absolute or Relative value.
(Match all)
The device profile can be configured to validate file integrity using an
MD5 or SHA-1 hash (valid on all platforms), or use a Windows catalog file
to validate Windows system files.
Device profiles that check for the name of the file(s) used by jailbroken or
rooted devices include:
•
For jailbroken Apple iOS devices, the file name is “cydia”.
•
For rooted Android devices, the file names are “/system/bin/su”
and “/system/xbin/su”.
NOTE: If creating a device profile for jailbroken iOS devices or rooted
Android devices, be sure to configure a denied EPC zone for each profile
and bind each of these zones to at least one community.
Table 122. Device Profile Attributes: iOS version
iOS version
Platform
Type the major and minor versions, and the build number for the operating system. For Apple iOS
example, enter Major 5, Minor 0, and Build 9A405 for the iOS 5.0.1 build 9A405 version.
The comparison Operator applies to all three values. To specify all versions of 5.0, for
example, enter “greater than or equal to” (>=) as the Operator, and then type 5in the
Major and 0 in the Minor text boxes. For more information, see Using Comparison
Operators with Device Profile Attributes on page 388.
Table 123. Device Profile Attributes: Mac OS X version
Mac OS X version
Platform
Type the major and minor versions, and the build number for the operating system.
Examples of versions for the Mac OS are:
Mac OS X
•
v10.2 (Jaguar)
•
v10.3 (Panther)
•
v10.4.4 (Tiger)
•
v10.5.6 (Leopard)
The comparison Operator applies to all three values. To specify all versions of Leopard,
for example, enter “greater than or equal to” (>=) as the Operator, and then type 10 in
the Major and 5 in the Minor text boxes. For more information, see Using Comparison
Operators with Device Profile Attributes on page 388.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
382
Table 124. Device Profile Attributes: Personal firewall program
Personal firewall program
Platform
(This attribute is available only if you have Advanced EPC.) Select the
firewall programs that EPC should check for in this profile. See Advanced
EPC: Extended Lists of Security Programs for more information.
Windows
Match
Mac OS X
Linux
(Match any)
Windows domain
Platform
Match
Type the domain name the computer belongs to in NetBIOS syntax (for
example, mycompany), without a DNS suffix. Separate multiple entries
with a semicolon. The domain can contain wildcard characters (* and ?).
Windows
If you don’t have Advanced EPC, or if you don’t see the security programs
that your users require, you can still specify programs by adding them to a
device profile using another attribute, such as Application or File name.
Table 125. Device Profile Attributes: Windows domain
(Match any)
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot
convert host name, URL, or domain type resources containing wildcards to
an IP address and, therefore, cannot redirect them to the appliance.
Table 126. Device Profile Attributes: Windows registry entry
Windows registry entry
Platform
Match
Type the Key name, and optionally enter a Value name and Data, and
Windows
then select a comparison Operator for the Data field. See Using
Windows Mobile
Comparison Operators with Device Profile Attributes on page 388 for more
information.
(Match all)
Wildcards can be used for the value and data, but not for the key. To enter
a special character (such as a wildcard or back slash), you must precede it
with a back slash.
Table 127. Device Profile Attributes: Windows version
Windows version
Platform
Type the major version, minor version, and build number for the operating system.
Example major/minor versions for Windows are:
Windows
•
Windows Vista: 6/0
•
Windows 2000: 5/0
Windows Mobile
The comparison Operator applies to all three values. For more information, see Using
Comparison Operators with Device Profile Attributes on page 388.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
383
Advanced EPC: Extended Lists of Security Programs
Advanced EPC is an optional component—licensed separately—that provides an extended and detailed list of
security programs. You can configure EPC device profiles to check for personal firewall, antivirus, and spyware
programs on clients running Microsoft Windows or Mac OS X, and to check for personal firewall and antivirus
programs on clients running Linux.
Advanced EPC includes a built-in list of device profiles you can use as is or modify; see Advanced EPC: Using
Preconfigured Device Profiles on page 387 for more information.
NOTE: The version of OESIS libraries on the client will always be the same as that of OESIS libraries
configured on the connecting appliance. If there is any version mismatch, the client provisions the OESIS
libraries from the appliance.
To add attributes using Advanced EPC
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control.
2
Click the Edit link in the Zones and Device Profiles section. The Configure Zones and Devices page
appears.
3
In the Device Profiles section, click New, then select an operating system from the list.
4
After giving the profile a Name (a Description is optional), select the Type of program that EPC should
check for (for example, Antivirus program). (On the Linux platform, Antispyware program is not
available.)
5
Select a Vendor and Product name. In Windows device profiles, select the Any product from this
vendor check box, available for antivirus, antispyware, and personal firewall program vendors, to select
all product names and create a profile that does not require updating every time the vendor releases a
new version. When this option is selected, you can still specify additional criteria, such as signatures
updated, file system scanned, and real-time protection enabled, as long as all the versions of all the
products in the list support that functionality.
6
Specify an absolute or relative Product version.
Some products are known by several different names. For example, McAfee Inc. offers a core product
nam ed McAfee VirusScan that is also known as McAfee VirusScan 2004 and McAfee VirusScan 2005.
(When you select a product name that has an asterisk, you’ll see a footnote indicating its “core” product
name.) Using the name indicated in the footnote is recommended so that you don’t have to update your
device profile every time a core product is marketed under a new name.
7
8
There are optional parameters you can use to more narrowly define the security program settings that
the device profile requires (not all parameters are available for each program choice—any that are not
available are dimmed):
•
Signatures updated: Defines how recently the list of antispyware or antivirus signatures was
updated on the client device.
•
File system scanned: Defines how recently the client device’s disk was scanned using this
antispyware or antivirus program.
•
Realtime protection required: If the device profile requires that realtime scanning for viruses
and spyware is enabled, select this check box.
Click the Add to Current Attributes button to add an entry to the list at the bottom of the page. When
you add additional programs (for example, if you want the device profile to check for any of several
programs), the device profile must match all (and) or any (or) items on the device:
•
Additional antivirus programs are grouped together, but the device profile requires just one of
the programs for a match.
•
When you specify more than one antispyware program, you can specify whether all of them are
required (and), or just a single one (or).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
384
For example, this device profile is matched if one of two antivirus programs is present, along with one of
two antispyware programs:
9
Click Save.
NOTE: The product names you can choose from include some that use Far Eastern language characters. If
you do not have international support enabled on your operating system, these characters may be
displayed as boxes or question marks. The name of one of the Symantec products you can choose, for
example, may look like this if the appropriate font support is missing:
With international support enabled, it looks like this:
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
385
Advanced EPC: Using Fallback Detection
Fallback detection uses advanced EPC to detect newer vendor software versions than are recognized by OESIS,
which allows zone classification to succeed. Fallback detection supplements your fully trusted profiles with EPC
definitions for the versions you want to determine fully (for example, Microsoft Security Essentials version 4.x
or higher).Fallback detection, which uses the Windows Security Center (WSC), can be configured for Windowsbased Antivirus, Antispyware and Personal Firewall products.
For example, users are put in the Trusted zone when they log in with McAfee Antivirus. When they update to a
newer version of McAfee and log in, the WSC fallback will match for the Trusted Fallback zone, and they will be
allowed access.
Once Dell Secure Mobile Access supports the new McAfee version, administrators can simply update the policy
for the Trusted zone to include the new version. This allows the admin to easily distinguish between devices
that match a specific antivirus version and those that do not, but do match the Fallback logic.
NOTE: To use Fall back Detection, device profiles for the Primary EPC zone must be configured with
specific versions of antivirus, antispyware, and firewall products and NOT with the Any product from this
vendor option.
To configure Fallback Detection
1
Create a new device profile for trusted fallbacks with the following values.
a
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control.
b
Click the Edit link in the Zones and Device Profiles section. The Configure Zones and Devices page
appears.
c
In the Device Profiles section, click New and select Microsoft Windows.
d
Type the Name of the new device profile.
e
From the Type drop-down list, select Antivirus program, Antispyware program, or Personal
firewall program.
f
From the Vendor drop-down list, select the vendor that provides the product.
g
From the Product drop-down list, select Other <vendor> <type> (for example, Other Aliant
Firewall).
Do NOT use the Any product from this vendor check box.
2
h
Set the Product version to >= x.
i
If applicable, enable Signatures updated and Realtime protection required.
j
Click Save.
Create a new Trusted Fallback zone and add the Trusted Fallback profile to this zone.
Optionally, Trusted and Trusted Fallback profiles can be combined into one zone, depending on your
security requirements. However, using a separate Trusted Fallback zone allows you to easily determine
when users update software that is not matched by the Trusted zone, so you will know when to add new
versions to the Trusted zone.
3
In your community, add the Trusted Fallback zone to the Realms list directly below the Trusted zone.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
386
Advanced EPC: Using Preconfigured Device Profiles
To help you get started with End Point Control, there are several preconfigured device profiles, grouped by
operating system, that you can use as is or copy and modify to suit your access policy and resource
requirements. Click End Point Control in the main navigation menu in AMC, and then click the Edit link in the
Zones and Device Profiles section to see the list:
•
Home Users
•
McAfee Corporate
•
Norton Corporate
•
Sophos Corporate
•
Trend Micro Corporate
The device profile named Windows - McAfee Corporate, for example, is a Windows device profile
preconfigured to require McAfee VirusScan Enterprise (version 7.50.0 or later), and either one of the specified
personal firewall products:
Table 128. Preconfigured McAfee Corporate profile
Attribute type
Product name
Antivirus program
McAfee VirusScan Enterprise, version >= 7.5.0.x
AND
Personal firewall
McAfee Personal Firewall Express, version >= 5.x
OR
McAfee Personal Firewall Plus, version >= 5.x
You can use these predefined profiles as a starting point for your own. Copy one that matches your environment
the closest, and then modify it, changing (for example), the acceptable product versions and the requirement
for how recently the list of antispyware or antivirus signatures was updated on the client device. To delete an
entire row in the list of current attributes, select the check box for that row and click Delete. To delete an item
in an ORed list (one of the personal firewall products in the McAfee Corporate profile, for example), move your
mouse cursor over the “or” and then click the red “X” that appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
387
Using Comparison Operators with Device Profile Attributes
Some device profile attributes can be modified using comparison operators, which is useful in situations such as
these:
•
Keeping a device profile current with software that is automatically updated on client devices—you don’t
need to manually change the profile each time the software is updated
•
Specifying that a specific file detected on client machines has a timestamp greater than a certain date
and time
•
Specifying that the Windows operating system detected on the client device be greater than or equal to
a certain version
The available comparison operators are:
Table 129. Available comparison operators
Operator
Description
<
Less than
<=
Less than or equal to
=
Equal to
>=
Greater than or equal to
>
Greater than
!=
Not
Comparison operators can be used in conjunction with the following device profile attributes:
•
File date or time stamp for a specific file
•
File size for a specific file
•
Registry entry (when value data is selected for a registry key)
•
Windows version
Example
Use these steps to find a file on a PC running Microsoft Windows that has recently been updated.
To specify a relative or absolute file date
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control.
2
Click the Edit link in the Zones and Device Profiles section, and then click New in the Device Profiles
section.
3
Select Microsoft Windows on the menu.
4
Type a meaningful name for the device profile in the Name text box.
5
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the device profile.
6
In the Add attribute(s) area, select File name in the Type list.
7
In the File name field, type weekly_timesheet.xls. The following are two examples of how to
specify a time stamp for the file:
8
•
To specify that weekly_timesheet.xls has been updated within the last five days, select <= in the
Last modified list, click Relative, and then type 5 in the text box.
•
To specify that the file was updated after June 1, 2006, select >= in the Last modified list, click
Absolute, and then type 06/01/2006 in the text boxes.
Click Add to Current Attributes, and then click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
388
Using End Point Control with the Connect Tunnel Client
You can use End Point Control on devices that connect to the appliance using the Connect Tunnel client. As with
other access methods, EPC for the Connect Tunnel client supports the use of device profiles and EPC zones.
However, the Connect Tunnel client does not support Cache Cleaner; This data protection option is ignored by
the Connect Tunnel client.
Performing Recurring EPC Checks: Example
A connection request is classified into an EPC zone based on attributes defined in a device profile. This check is
always performed when the user logs in; in addition, you have the option of checking at regular intervals
whether a device continues to match the profile for a particular zone.
An example illustrates how this setting might be used. In this scenario the system administrator has given each
systems engineer in the organization a USB device that provides access to resources protected by the Dell SMA
appliance. This provides two-factor authentication: During a user’s session, the appliance repeatedly checks for
the presence of a client certificate associated with a USB device: if the check fails, the session ends. Since an
essential part of the user’s authentication (the client certificate) is on the USB device, authentication data does
not remain on the system when the systems engineer removes the key.
Here’s how it looks from the systems engineer’s perspective:
1
Insert your personal USB device into any desktop or laptop device (trusted or untrusted). If the device is
running Windows Vista and Internet Explorer 7, Protected Mode must be off.
2
Enter your PIN number.
3
Log in for access to the VPN and authenticate. The Dell SMA appliance checks for your client certificate
when you log in and at regular intervals thereafter (the interval is set by the Dell SMA appliance
administrator). When the USB device is removed, the check fails and the connection is ended.
Here’s an overview of the configuration steps the administrator must take:
1
To establish a trust relationship between the USB device and the appliance, you must reference a root CA
certificate in the EPC device profile. If it’s not already present, import the certificate to the appliance
(click SSL Settings in the main navigation menu, and then click Edit in the CA Certificates area).
2
Using Appliance Management Console, create a device profile for Windows, Mac, or Linux devices to
check for the presence of a client certificate on the USB devices you plan to distribute. The certificate
must descend from the root certificate from step 1. When creating a device profile for Windows, ensure
both system and user certificate stores are searched.
3
Create an EPC Standard zone that requires the device profile from the preceding step.
4
When you are defining the zone, specify in the Recurring EPC area at what intervals EPC will check the
client systems that are classified into this zone. In this case, you might want to perform frequent checks
(for example, every minute).
NOTE: Recurring EPC intervals of less than 10 minutes may produce unexpected results.
5
A device for which there is no profile match—the client certificate does not descend from the root CA
certificate identified in the first step, or the USB device has no certificate—will “fall through” to either
the Default zone or a Quarantine zone:
•
To deny access to any connection requests that don’t meet your criteria, configure the Default
zone to simply deny access. In the Access restrictions area on the Zone Definition page, select
Block VPN access.
•
If you prefer, you can create a Quarantine zone and customize the message users see; for
example, you may want to explain what is required to bring the user’s system into compliance
with your security policies.
NOTE: It’s important for users to understand that their connectivity depends on the presence of the USB
device. For this reason they should also not leave the USB device plugged in and unattended.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
389
Creating Zones for Special Situations
While the majority of connection requests—those involving Microsoft Windows and Internet Explorer, Google
Chrome, or Mozilla Firefox—can be accommodated by Standard zone configurations, you may need to address
special situations involving other operating systems and browsers, or connection requests that don’t match any
of the zones you’ve defined. You can use zones and device profiles to address the following types of situations:
•
Clients that don’t match the criteria for any defined zones and device profiles.
•
Clients that don’t support the EPC interrogation necessary for classifying a client into an EPC zone.
•
Clients running certain Web browsers (anything other than Internet Explorer, Google Chrome, and
Firefox) on Windows, or users running earlier Windows versions.
•
Special classes of users who require access regardless of the client device they’re running.
Be sure to configure the global Default zone, which is implicitly present in every community configured in AMC.
•
Defining Zones for Certain Browsers or Earlier Versions of Windows
•
Collecting Equipment IDs from Unregistered Devices
•
Defining Zones for Special Classes of Users
Defining Zones for Certain Browsers or Earlier Versions of
Windows
When a user connects to the Dell SMA appliance, the appliance interrogates the user’s computer and determines
(among other things) what operating system it’s running and what Web browser is in use. EPC requires Windows
7 or later, and either Internet Explorer, Google Chrome, or Firefox, but you can define a special zone for users
who don’t meet those requirements. This prevents them from being placed in the Default zone, which might
block their access. The only attribute used to distinguish this type of zone is the presence of the Windows
system.
This configuration can also be used to define a zone for users who are running a version of Microsoft Windows
that was released before Windows 7.
To define a zone for clients with non-standard browsers
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control.
2
In the Zones and Device Profiles section of the End Point Control Settings page, click the Edit link. The
Configure Zones and Devices page appears.
3
Click New in the Zones section, and select Standard zone from the menu. The Zone Definition page
appears.
4
In the Name box, type a meaningful name for the zone.
5
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the special browser zone.
6
Click New in the Device Profiles section, and then select Microsoft Windows from the menu. The Device
Profile Definition page appears.
7
In the Name box, type a meaningful name for the device profile.
8
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the device profile.
9
In the Add attribute area, select Windows version from the Type list and then click Add to current
attributes. Do not specify any other attribute settings.
10 Click Save.
11 Select the check box for the browser Device profile that you want to include in the zone.
12 Use the >> button to move the items to the In use list.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
390
13 If you want the device profile to require the presence of a data protection component, select Cache
Cleaner from the Required data protection tool list.
Cache Cleaner is not supported on Linux platforms.
14 When you are finished configuring the zone, click Save.
Collecting Equipment IDs from Unregistered Devices
Every Windows desktop and mobile device has a unique identifier, and you can use this identity in a device
profile to ensure that only certain devices have access to protected resources. But before you can add
equipment ID data to your directory server as a user attribute, you must first collect the data. You can do this in
several ways:
•
By creating device profiles for unregistered devices and having users log in: the device ID is collected in
the Unregistered device log. See Creating Device Profiles that Allow Unregistered Devices on page 392.
•
By creating a device profile that uses a device identity, but does not have the Match Profile if user has
no registered devices option enabled. See Disabling Match Profile if user has no registered devices in
the Device Profile on page 394.
•
By creating a quarantine zone associated with a device profile that matches users who log in using an
unregistered device. See Quarantining Unregistered Devices on page 394.
•
By creating a deny zone associated with a device profile that matches users who log in using an
unregistered device. See Locking Out Unregistered Devices on page 394.
•
By exporting the log messages for login attempts by unregistered devices to an external machine, where
an IT administrator can view the list and register the devices or they can be automatically registered.
See Exporting the Unregistered Device Log for External Processing on page 395.
NOTE: When selected, the Match profile if user has no registered devices check box is applicable when
the user has no devices registered in the back end AD or LDAP server and there are no hard coded devices
in the device profile.
For example, consider the case where two attributes have been created for user 'test' in the AD/LDAP server,
and these attributes are mapped to two policy variables. A device profile is created containing these two
variables and the equipment ID "4JV5DQH1". The check box is selected. This device profile is a part of a zone
called 'std_desc'. Unlike user 'test', user 'test1' has no representation in the backend LDAP/AD server.
User 'test' logs in with a device that is registered in the backend server. The zone classification is std_desc.
However, user 'test1' logs in with the same device and is classified into the default zone. Note that the check
box does not apply to user 'test1' in this case.
However, if you remove the device ID '4JV5DQH1' from the device profile, leaving just the two policy variables,
you will see a different zone classification for user 'test1'. In this case, user 'test' logs in with a registered device
and is classified into the std_desc zone. User 'test1' logs in and is also classified into the std_desc zone. Note
that the check box applies in this case because user 'test1' has no devices registered, the two policy variables in
the device profile of the zone return with NULL values, and there isn't the third hard coded device in the device
profile.
If you are using mobile devices, you may already have the device identities entered into your database. In this
case, you could simply refer to them in a profile. Users logging in from one of these devices will match this
profile and qualify for the associated zone.
The device identifier is usually an attribute in the authentication directory represented by a variable; for
example, {device_identity}. The format of the identifier differs, depending on the kind of device used:
•
For a Microsoft Windows device, the identifier is a unique hard drive serial number; for example, WDWMAM9SK79685.
•
For a Mac OS X device, the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) is used. A UUID is a 128-bit number that
combines references to the network address of the host that generated the UUID, the timestamp, and a
random number. An example of a UUID is: 951A240E-F502-5632-BDAB-D1ECA43FA371.
•
For a Linux device, the UUID is the device identifier.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
391
•
For a Virtual Machine, the UUID is the device identifier.
•
For a Windows Mobile 6 device, the identifier is the unique 15-digit IMEI (International Mobile Equipment
Identity) code for the device; for example, 350077-52-323751-3.
•
For a Nokia Symbian device, the identifier is the unique 15-digit IMEI.
•
For a Google Android device, the device serial number is the identifier.
•
For an Apple iPhone/iPad, the device serial number is the identifier.
•
In the case of the Apple iPhone, the device prepends “Appl” to its device ID/serial number when it
communicates with Exchange servers. For example: Appl828315FLY7H.
You can use the procedure in Knowledge Base article #8901 to determine the unique ID of your Windows, Mac,
or Linux device. The Knowledge Base is available at:
https://support.software.dell.com/kb-product-select
Another method to get the correct device ID for a smartphone is to view the POST message in the AMC log after
the phone attempts to connect to the appliance. Navigate to the Logging page, and select Web proxy audit log
in the Log file drop-down list on the View Logs tab. The POST message looks like this:
http://10.10.11.12/Microsoft-ServerActiveSync?User=jt&DeviceId=Appl828315FLY7H&DeviceType=iPhone&Cmd=Sync
Use the DeviceId value in your database for profiles to refer to.
Your directory server may be set up with a different attribute for each of these types of identifiers, or you can
store the data in a single attribute. In this example, a single attribute and variable is used.
Creating Device Profiles that Allow Unregistered Devices
To collect equipment IDs from unregistered devices by using a device identity variable with
device profiles
1
Identify or set up the AD or LDAP authentication server and realm you want users with unregistered
devices to log in to. If you’re starting from scratch, see Creating Realms on page 62 for more
information. In this example, the realm is named Employees.
2
Create a variable named device_identity that points to an attribute in the directory server specified in
step 1 (you can create the variable and capture data even if the attribute it points to doesn’t exist yet):
3
a
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click Resources.
b
On the Variables tab, click New, and then type the name for the variable; for example,
device_identity.
c
Select User attribute from the Type list, and then make sure Employees is selected in the Realm
list.
d
If the user attribute that holds device ID data already exists, enter a valid user name in the User
text box, and then select the attribute from the Attribute list. If it doesn’t exist yet, just enter
its name in the Attribute text box.
e
If it’s possible that some users will be associated with more than one device (for example, a
desktop computer and a laptop), select Multiple results in the Output list.
Now create device profiles and a zone for unregistered devices. If you are collecting data from all three
types of devices, you’ll need one device profile for each one:
a
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control; make sure that EPC is enabled.
b
Click the Edit link in the Zones and Device Profiles section of the Device Profiles page, click New
in the Device Profiles section, and then select Microsoft Windows, Windows Mobile, or
ActiveSync.
c
Give the device profile a name (for example, Unregistered - Windows), and then select
Equipment ID in the attribute Type list.
d
Select Matches as the Value. You’ll create a Standard zone later in this procedure.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
392
e
Click the {variable} button next to the Device identifier text box, select the variable you
created in step 2, and then click Insert. Click {variable} again to close the list.
f
In the Unregistered devices area, select the Match profile if user has no registered devices
check box. Devices that are not already registered on the external AD/LDAP server will be a
match for this profile and their identifiers will be recorded in the Unregistered device log. If you
haven't already defined the variable, you'll see a warning (Undefined: {device_identity}), which
can be ignored for now.
g
Click the Add to Current Attributes button, and then click Save.
h
Add a device profile for each of the other types of devices you want to accommodate. For
example, Unregistered - WinMobile, or Unregistered - ActiveSync.
4
Create a Standard zone named Data collection that uses the device profiles that you created. See
Creating a Device Zone on page 360 for more information.
5
Now create a community named New devices in the Employees realm. On the End Point Control
Restrictions page for that community, move the Data collection zone to the In use list. See Creating and
Configuring Communities on page 66 if you need help setting up a community.
6
When you apply and save your changes, click End Point Control in the main navigation menu; the Data
collection zone should look like this:
7
When an unregistered device is detected during login, the user is placed in the Data collection zone
because the device matches the Unregistered profile. To see device identity details, select Unregistered
device log on the Logging page in AMC.
8
Select No devices in the Device count list, and then click Refresh, so that you're sure to capture all new
users. An expanded entry might look like this:
9
If you need to do any additional analysis of the logged data, export it to an XML file. You can reduce the
size of the exported file by first applying filter or search criteria. The Show last <n> messages setting
determines the maximum number of messages included in the exported log file.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
393
Disabling Match Profile if user has no registered devices in the Device Profile
If you create a device profile that uses a device identity and disable the Match Profile if user has no registered
devices option, a user with a new device (even if some devices are registered to that user) will not match this
profile and will not be qualified into this zone. The unregistered device ID will be collected and placed into the
unregistered devices list, provided that the user met all other (non-device) criteria to match the profile. The
administrator can collect the device information from the unregistered device list and then register the device
semi-automatically. Thus, with no user interaction, the next time the user attempts to log in using the device
they may be able to classify into the zone.
Quarantining Unregistered Devices
You can create a device profile that specifies that the user does not match any of the device IDs currently
registered for this user. This profile can be associated with a quarantine zone. A user with a new device will
match this profile and be placed into the quarantine zone. You can configure a message to the user that the
current device is unregistered, but that the device information was collected from their login attempt and their
device will be registered for them, allowing their next login to qualify for the usual (non-quarantine) zone.
Locking Out Unregistered Devices
You can use a deny zone to lock out a particular device. To do this, create a device profile that contains an
Equipment ID attribute and select the Does not match check box when adding the Device Identifier. This
feature allows you to lock out, for example, a device that you suspect has been compromised, while not
completely locking out the user who owns that device. The device information is collected from the login
attempt.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
394
Exporting the Unregistered Device Log for External Processing
There are unregistered device log messages for every new unregistered device that is used in a login attempt.
These messages can be exported in XML format to an external machine either from the Logging page in the AMC
or by using a curl or wget command from an external machine. See Unregistered Device Log Messages on page
630 for more information. This export feature allows you to collect these messages and then either
automatically register each device, or inform a help desk of each new unregistered device that was used by
each user.
Advanced: If you need be notified immediately when a user attempts to log in using an unregistered device, you
can configure a Syslog server on the Configure Logging page in AMC. The appliance will generate a log message
with the following format when a login or login attempt occurs:
New Equipment: user '#1', platform '#2', device '#3', existing Devices '#4'
Where:
#1 is the name of the user
#2 is the name of the platform
#3 is the ID of this device or piece of user equipment
#4 is the number of devices already registered for this user
Defining Zones for Special Classes of Users
Another method for preventing special classes of trusted users from being assigned to the Default zone (and
potentially being denied access) involves creating a zone that contains no device profiles, and then assigning
that zone to a community to which only those trusted users belong.
For example, if you want system administrators to be able to access network resources regardless of the client
device they’re using, you could assign them to a community that contains a no-profile zone. Then when system
administrators select a realm that references that community and log in, they are placed in the no-profile zone,
instead of the global Default zone, which may be set up to block unrecognized clients.
To create a no-profile zone
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control. The End Point Control Settings page
appears.
2
In the Zones and Device Profiles section, click Edit.
3
Click New in the Zones section and select Standard zone to create. The Zone Definition page appears.
4
In the Name box, type a meaningful name for the zone.
5
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the zone.
6
You can optionally select a Required data protection tool for the zone. However, if you want this special
class of trusted users to have flexibility regarding the types of devices they’re connecting with, leave
this field set to None.
7
Click Save.
After you’ve defined the no-profile zone, you must create a realm specifically for this special class of trusted
users. Configure the realm with a dedicated community so that only this special class can log in to it. For more
information, see Assigning Members to a Community on page 66.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
395
Using End Point Control Agents
Use End Point Control Agents to perform common EPC tasks such as enabling or disabling the virtual keyboard
and clearing remote data from the client system after each user session.
Table 130. End Point Control tasks
Item
Description
Enable virtual keyboard
Require use of keyboard box
End inactive user connections
Select the length of time a connection is inactive before disconnecting
it. Options range from 3 minutes to Never, with 10 minutes being the
default inactivity time.
Enable Cache Cleaner
Check this check box to enable Cache Cleaner, which clears the browser
cache after each user session. Cache Cleaner is available for Windows
and Mac platforms only and only when End Point Control is enabled.
Allow user to disable Cache Cleaner Check this check box to allow the user to close Cache Cleaner and bypass
the cache-cleaning function
Clean session items only
Clean all items
Specify whether all browser items should be cleared, or just those
related to the current session
Using the Virtual Keyboard to Enter Credentials
If there is a concern that credentials may be stolen, you can offer (or require) that users logging in to WorkPlace
provide their credentials by pointing to characters on a keyboard display instead of typing them.
Because the virtual keyboard is used before a user is authenticated (and before a realm is chosen), the way in
which it’s configured applies to all realms: you can’t offer the virtual keyboard to just certain groups of users,
or require it only in certain cases. End Point Control does not have to be enabled in order for the virtual
keyboard to be used.
The virtual keyboard settings do not apply to small form factor devices, such as smart phones; for information
about optimizing WorkPlace for these devices, see Optimizing WorkPlace for Display on Small Form Factor
Devices on page 444.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
396
To configure the virtual keyboard in WorkPlace
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control. The End Point Control Settings page
appears.
2
In the End Point Control agents section, click Edit. The Configure End Point Control Agents page appears.
3
Check Enable virtual keyboard check box to let users enter WorkPlace login credentials using a virtual
keyboard, which reduces the risk of credentials being stolen. When this setting is enabled, all WorkPlace
users, regardless of login realm, have this option.
4
If the virtual keyboard is enabled, check the Require use of keyboard check box to require users to use
a virtual keyboard to enter their WorkPlace login credentials.
5
Click Save.
Configuring Data Protection
Cache Cleaner is included with your appliance license.
About Cache Cleaner
When Cache Cleaner is enabled and the user logs into WorkPlace, the Cache Cleaner icon appears in the taskbar
notification area. Users can access network resources as needed.
When the user ends the Cache Cleaner session, Cache Cleaner deletes all data associated with the session. All
browser windows are closed by Cache Cleaner upon logout. A dialog box warns users that all browser windows
will be closed on logout.
NOTE: Because Cache Cleaner closes all browser windows on logout, make sure your users are aware: if
someone is filling out a form, for example, anything that isn’t submitted when the browser window closes
will be lost.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
397
Configuring Data Protection Settings
To configure data protection in WorkPlace
1
From the main navigation menu in AMC, click End Point Control. The End Point Control Settings page
appears.
2
In the End Point Control agents section, click Edit. The Configure End Point Control Agents page appears.
3
In the End inactive user connections drop-down list, select a timeout to automatically end inactive
user connections and remove data from the client. This minimizes your exposure in case a user forgets to
log out from a kiosk or other shared computer.
4
Select the Enable Cache Cleaner check box to clean the user’s browser cache after each session. Cache
Cleaner is not supported on Linux platforms.
5
To allow the user to close Cache Cleaner and bypass the cache-cleaning function, select the Allow user
to disable Cache Cleaner check box.
6
Specify whether all browser items should be cleared, or just those related to the current session: Clean
session items only or Clean all items.
7
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
398
Application Access Control
Companies want to empower their employees to be productive and responsive from anywhere at anytime using
their own personal devices. However, companies must balance this openness with the need to ensure that
corporate data and networks are not compromised and that corporate compliance and legal requirements are
met. As companies open up to BYOD devices, they must make sure that:
•
Corporate data and network resources are secure
•
Users are made aware of and agree with corporate policies and privacy ramifications associated with
personal device accessing corporate networks
•
Admins can keep track of and monitor the use of personal devices by employees
Application Access Control addresses all these concerns. It allows administrators to control which applications
can access enterprise data resources from a personal device by combining the power of SonicWALL Mobile
Connect on the client and Dell Secure Mobile Access on the appliance.
Client (SonicWALL Mobile Connect)
Application Access Control uses SonicWALL Mobile Connect on supported client devices (iOS/Mac OS/Android) to
handle applications as follows:
•
Applications selected from an application list - traffic destined for the corporate network from those
applications is allowed to enter the tunnel. Information is provided to the server to identify the
application.
•
Applications on the list that are unchecked (or any other application on the device) - traffic destined for
the corporate network is blocked and dropped by Mobile Connect and will NOT enter the tunnel.
•
All applications (whether they are on the application list or not) - if the traffic is NOT destined for the
corporate network the traffic is sent using the device’s default interface.
Appliance (Dell Secure Mobile Access)
After an application zone has been created and users with the proper devices can classify into the zone,
configure the following:
•
Applications that should be granted access to the corporate network,
•
Users who can use each allowed application
•
Destinations on the corporate network that each application can access.
Application Access Control is available for iOS 7+, Mac OS Mavericks 10.9+, and Android 4.0+ devices.
Topics:
•
How Application Access Control Works
•
Configuring Application Access Control
•
Creating a Client Application List
•
Learning an App
•
Approving a Learned App
•
Viewing User Sessions
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
399
How Application Access Control Works
Secure Mobile Access and Mobile Connect work together as follows to provide a secure and manageable
environment where personal devices can be used to easily access corporate resources:
1
The Administrator creates an application zone that enables the appliance to allow personal devices to
access the corporate network and resources.
2
The user connects using a personal device that is not registered with the appliance. The user is prompted
to register the device and agree to the personal device corporate policies and privacy policies to access
corporate resources.
Once the user consents to the corporate policies for a device, the device’s unique Device ID is
determined and the appliance registers the device to the user. Subsequent connections from this device
do not require device authorization.
3
The user accesses network resources allowed by the application zone used to grant access.
4
The Administrator monitors usage of personal devices that have accessed the appliance.
Configuring Application Access Control
To configure Application Access Control perform the following steps in the order listed:
1
Create an Application Zone Profile, as explained in To define an Application zone profile on page 363
2
Configure an Application Zone, as explained in To create an Application zone on page 365.
3
Add the Application Zone to a Community. To do so, on the End Point Control Restrictions page for the
community, move the Application zone to the In use list. See Creating and Configuring Communities on
page 66 if you need help setting up a community.
4
Create a Client Application List, as explained in Creating a Client Application List on page 400
5
Create or modify an Access Control Rule for the Application zone, as explained in Adding Access Control
Rules for Application Access Control on page 277. Access Control rules control which applications can
send data through the tunnel and the destinations on the corporate network those applications are
allowed to access.
6
Identify a trusted learning device, as explained in Identifying a Trusted Learning Device on page 403. A
trusted learning device is bestowed special rights to perform signature lookups as a part of learning
application version information.
7
Learn the apps, as explained in Learning an App on page 404.
8
Approve adding learned apps to the Client Application List, as explained in Approving a Learned App on
page 404.
9
View user access, as explained in Viewing User Sessions on page 302.
Creating a Client Application List
A Client Application List contains a list of applications and their version and signatures used by platforms to
identify them. Applications in this list are referenced in Access Control rules and are enforced by Mobile
Connect when a user attempts to access the remote network using an application defined in the list and
referenced in the Access Control rule.
Some common apps like Safari and Email are preconfigured in every list. To find and add additional apps to the
Client Application List used by a zone, you must first identify the App ID of the apps you want to add:
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
400
From an iOS or Mac OS device:
1
Use the Search link on the Resources > Add Client Application page to search for an app from within AMC.
2
Alternatively, search the iTunes Store for an app, at: https://itunes.apple.com.
SMA uses the bundleid field received from the iTunes store as the App ID value.
3
Download the app to an iOS or Mac OS device.
From an Android device:
To add an Android app:
1
On an Android device, download and install an app like APK Extractor that will extract and read Apk files
from apps. Apk Extractor is a free app that can be downloaded from the Google Play store.
2
Launch the extractor app, and scroll down until you find the application you want to add to the zone.
Using Chrome as an example, the App ID is com.android.chrome.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
401
Create the Client Application List
Once you identify the App ID of each app you want to add to the Client Application List, create the list.
1
In AMC, navigate to User Access > End Point Control > Client Applications tab and click New to display
the Add Client Application page.
2
In the Name field, type a friendly name for the app that will be used to identify the app to users.
3
(Optional) In the Description field, type a brief description to further identify the app.
4
In the Application attributes section of the Add Client Application page, click New and select the
required platform the signature applies to (iOS, Mac OS, or Android) from the drop-down list.
5
In the Application ID field, type the App ID of an app you want to add to the list. The remaining
attributes will be detected when the app is learned.
NOTE: All versions of an app must share the same signature.
6
Click OK.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
402
Identifying a Trusted Learning Device
A trusted learning device is assigned special privileges to perform signature lookups as a part of learning
application version information. A trusted device is also used by End Point Control to check attributes on an
endpoint device to discover its security state. Once a device is added to the Application Learning tab the device
can learn application versions.
To identify a trusted learning device:
1
From the main navigation menu, click End Point Control.
2
Click Edit in the Device Profiles section and then click the Application Learning tab.
3
Click New to display the entry fields.
4
In the Description field, type a brief description to identify the device.
5
In the Device Identifier field, type the device ID of the device you want to make a trusted learning
device.
6
Check the Enable application learning mode for the following devices check box to enable the
appliance to recognize the device as a trusted learning device.
7
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
403
Learning an App
Once you have configured Application Access Control, added any additional apps, and identified the learning
device, learn each app configured for Application Access Control:
NOTE: Due to Apple limitations, the version for iOS apps cannot be learned with a trusted learning device
and must be configured manually. The version is shown as Unknown on all AMC pages.
1
Launch Mobile Connect on a trusted device and connect to the SMA appliance.
After the device is successfully authenticated, applications that need versions to be learned are
displayed.
2
Launch an application in the list.
3
Access a corporate network resource.
4
Verify that the application has a version pending approval by refreshing the display and confirming that a
Pending icon is displayed next to the application.
Pull down the main screen to refresh the Mobile Connect display.
5
Repeat the preceding steps for each listed application.
6
Once a version number is displayed in the Pending Versions list, login to AMC and approve the
application:
7
•
Navigate to User Access > End Point Control > Client Applications.
•
Select your application.
•
Select the item from the Learned Versions list and click Approve.
•
Click Save to save the client application.
•
Approve each application awaiting approval.
•
Apply the changes.
When the client application version(s) is approved, return to the trusted device and refresh the Mobile
Connect display. The Pending icon should change to an
application is ready for general use.
Approved icon, which indicates the
Approving a Learned App
Apps are added to the Learned Versions section of the Client Application page when they are learned. You must
approve a learned app before it can be added to the list.
1
In AMC, navigate to User Access > End Point Control > Client Applications tab and select the Client
Application List where the app will be used, which displays the Edit Client Application page.
2
Expand the Learned.Versions section, select a learned app, and click the Approve button to add it to the
application list. Only the most recent entry for each version is displayed.
3
(Optional) To remove an app from the list, select an app and click Discard.
4
Click Save.
Viewing User Sessions
User Sessions page provides an aggregate view of all users logged in to the appliance along with information
about each users Realm, Community, EPC, Access Agent, and License status. This page also shows the connected
duration, average speed, and total bytes transferred.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
404
Part 7
Components
•
The WorkPlace Portal
•
User Access Components and Services
•
Virtual Assist
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
405
9
The WorkPlace Portal
The WorkPlace portal provides your users with dynamically personalized access to Web-based (HTTP) resources.
It also gives users access from their Web browsers to files and folders on Windows file servers, and to TCP/IP
resources through Secure Mobile Access agents that can be provisioned from WorkPlace.
The Dell SMA appliance includes a default WorkPlace portal that you can modify. Additional sites can be set up
for different user populations, each with its own appearance; see WorkPlace Sites on page 439 for more
information. For details on client system requirements for WorkPlace, see System Requirements on page 21.
Topics:
•
A Quick Tour of WorkPlace
•
Web Shortcut Access
•
Configuring WorkPlace General Settings
•
WorkPlace Sites
•
Fully Customizing WorkPlace Pages
•
Giving Users Access to WorkPlace
•
End Point Control and the User Experience
A Quick Tour of WorkPlace
The following section gives a general overview of WorkPlace from the customer perspective.
When the user logs into the browser address for WorkPlace, they will be presented with an Authentication Page.
Users then log in to the Authentication Page, using their Username and Password. This page also allows users the
option of changing their password, if
Users authenticating with a client certificate do not see this page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
406
In lieu of the Authentication Page, a one-time password may be required. The administrator sends an email
containing the password, which is requested through this screen:
NOTE: If you’ve configured the system to use End Point Control, see End Point Control and the User
Experience on page 452 for information on how it affects the way users access the system.
After supplying their authentication credentials, WorkPlace checks for a current licensing agreement. If there is
a problem with licensing, a message appears, indicating this is a licensing failure and not some other kind of
authentication failure, such as a mis-typed password. Users should contact their administrator.
Depending on how the system is configured, users may be required to agree to an Acceptable Use Policy or other
licensing agreement.
The AUP may display specific messages or instructions the user needs to agree to. Users who do not accept the
license agreement will not be able to access WorkPlace.
NOTE: If a realm is configured with an AUP, login attempts from tunnel clients older than version 10.6.0
will fail. Users must upgrade their client to version 10.6.0 or better to connect. If tunnel client autoupgrades are enabled in the AUP realm users will be unable to connect to upgrade. In this case, the
Administrator must configure a separate realm without an AUP (to allow for automated client upgrades)
or upgrade the clients via other means.
This section contains the following subsections:
•
Home Page
•
Intranet Address Box
•
Bookmarks
•
Custom RDP Bookmarks
•
Network Explorer Page
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
407
Home Page
After a user has provided authentication, providing licensing is up-to-date, the WorkPlace home page appears.
WorkPlace could include a personal bookmarks area, with relevant links to other resources.This area may
contain pre-configured bookmarks from the administrator, or users can add their own links to resources or web
sites.
NOTE: If you are using Firefox on a Linux system with Java 1.7u71 installed, you will not be able to launch
Workplace. You will get an error message, "Unable to authorize request. Zone classification process has
not completed."
Configurable WorkPlace Elements
Most of the features on the home page are configurable:
Table 131. Configurable WorkPlace elements
WorkPlace element
Description
Layout
WorkPlace page content and layout can be customized on a per-community basis.
These layout elements include:
•
Content (what shortcuts and shortcut groups are displayed)
•
Pages (single vs. multiple)
•
Columns (single vs. multiple)
•
Navigation (on the left or along the top)
See Modifying the Appearance of WorkPlace on page 442 for details.
Shortcuts
Shortcut groups
These are administrator-defined shortcuts to the Web, file system, and terminal
server resources that the user is allowed to access. Shortcuts are dynamically
displayed based on your access policy: each user sees only those resources he or she
has privileges to use.
Each type of shortcut behaves differently:
•
Web resource: Opens in a new browser window.
•
Terminal server resource: Opens in a new browser window and the
appropriate graphical terminal agent is automatically started or, if
necessary, provisioned.
•
Shared folder or file: Opens the WorkPlace Network Explorer page, which
appears in a new browser window. Network shortcuts, which point to file
system resources, do not appear if you have disabled all access to file
system resources (disabling access to file system resources is described in
Configuring WorkPlace General Settings on page 413).
•
Bookmarks: Provides all basic bookmark functionality (RDP, Citrix, VNC,
Telnet, and SSHv2) of Workplace User defined bookmarks.
•
Custom Shortcuts: Behaves according to the custom configuration.
For information about creating shortcuts, see Working with WorkPlace Shortcuts on
page 414.
Connect Tunnel
You can define custom connections for the Connect Tunnel client from the
WorkPlace portal.
Help button
The Help system included with WorkPlace contains all the basic information that a
user will need. If you would like to make a custom HTML help file available to users
instead, you can specify it when you confiigure your WorkPlace style. This is a
convenient way to add information that is unique to your environment (for
example, information about the resources available on your VPN, and technical
support details). This file must be a well-formed, single HTML file.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
408
Built-In WorkPlace Elements
When you set up a WorkPlace portal for users, you can choose from among several built-in resources and
WorkPlace elements. Whether you offer these resources can be configured on a per-community basis.
Table 132. Built-in WorkPlace elements
WorkPlace element
Description
Intranet Address
You can specify whether you want this box to appear and configure whether it can
be used to access Web resources (by typing a URL), file system resources (by typing
a UNC path name), or both.
See Intranet Address Box on page 410 for details.
Personal Bookmarks
You can allow users to create and manage personal links (similar to bookmarks) that
point to URLs and other resources, such as SMB hosts, protected by the Dell SMA
appliance. Personal links are stored on the appliance; users have access to them
whenever they are logged in to WorkPlace, regardless of the computer they are
using.
See Bookmarks on page 411 for more information.
Connect Tunnel
You can make the built-in Install Connect Tunnel shortcut available to enable
users to download and install the Connect Tunnel client from the WorkPlace portal.
Network Explorer
You can offer users the ability to browse a Windows network containing shared
folders and files.
See Network Explorer Page on page 411 for more information.
WorkPlace Status Bar
The WorkPlace pages have a status bar indicating the following:
Table 133. WorkPlace status bar elements
WorkPlace element
Description
Access
Indicates which user access methods are currently running.
For more information about user access agents, see User Access Components and
Services on page 453.
User
The username used during login.
Session start
The time at which the current session began, in 24-hour format.
Log out button
Users can log out of WorkPlace using this button, but this does not necessarily log
them out of any applications that are running (depending on which user access
agent is being used). To increase security, users should log out of or quit
applications when they finish working with them, particularly when working on
computers that are shared with other users.
Details
Users can click this button for system status information (not items appear for all
users):
•
Zone: Security zones are used to allow or deny access to members of each
community.
•
Realm: A realm allows users to authenticate using credentials stored on an
external authentication server.
•
Community: Communities allow you to group realm members based on
different security needs.
•
Data protection: Cache Cleaner.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
409
NOTE:
•
For users accessing WorkPlace on small form factor devices, the WorkPlace appearance varies
depending on the capabilities of the device. For more information, see End Point Control and the
User Experience on page 452.
•
On Windows systems, using browser toolbars with popup blocking enabled may prevent WorkPlace
from closing any open Network Explorer and graphical terminal session windows when the main
WorkPlace window is closed.
•
Logging out of Outlook Web Access (OWA) during a WorkPlace session also logs the user out of
WorkPlace. This is because the OWA logoff script clears all browser cookies, including the one used
by WorkPlace. Users can simply close the browser window instead of logging out of OWA to work
around this issue.
Intranet Address Box
If enabled, the Intranet Address box appears along the bottom of the WorkPlace page, except on small form
factor devices, and gives users an alternate method to access Web resources, Windows network resources, and
terminal servers.
When you set up communities within a realm (for example, a community of employees and one of partners), you
can give each one a unique appearance, using WorkPlace styles and layouts. The WorkPlace layout determines
whether the Intranet Address box is displayed for a particular community. See Creating or Editing a WorkPlace
Layout on page 443 for more information.
Configuring the functionality of the Intranet Address box is a global configuration setting. Depending on the
configuration, users can type URLs to reach Web resources if WorkPlace is running in translated mode, or they
can type UNC paths to reach file system resources. (If WorkPlace is running in non-translated mode, users can
type URLs directly in the Internet Explorer Address box.) This is especially useful if you have defined an entire
DNS or Windows domain as a resource and want to give a group of users direct access to all the resources in that
domain.
To access a Web resource or terminal server when WorkPlace is running in translated mode, the user types the
URL in the Intranet Address box and then clicks Go. If the user has appropriate access privileges, the resource
then opens in a new browser window.
The Intranet Address box accepts a variety of user input for accessing Web resources and terminal servers.
Here are some guidelines:
Table 134. Intranet address input guidelines
Element
Description
Resource address
A user can access a resource by typing a complete URL (domain and host name) or just
a host name. For example, a user could access a resource named “CRM” on a host
named “fred” using a full URL (such as http://fred.example.com/CRM/) or a
host name (such as http://fred/CRM/ or fred/CRM /).
UNC path
To access a file system resource, the user types the UNC path (for example,
\\jax\software\download) in the Intranet Address box and then clicks Go. If the
user has appropriate access privileges, the Network Explorer page appears, displaying
the contents of the requested file system resource.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
410
Table 134. Intranet address input guidelines
Element
Description
Protocol
The user does not need to include the http:// protocol identifier to access a
standard Web resource. To access a secure Web site, however, the user must include
the https:// protocol identifier.
When specifying a terminal server resource name, users must include the appropriate
protocol identifier in the URL. Supported terminal server types are Windows Terminal
Services, which uses the rdp:// identifier, and Citrix, which uses citrix://.
Port number
To access a Web resource on a non-standard port (that is, other than 80), the user
must type the port number after the host name. For example, fred:8080/SAP and
https://fred:443/SAP are both valid entries.
For information about configuring the Intranet Address box to allow access to UNC pathnames, URLs, or both,
see Configuring WorkPlace General Settings on page 413.
Bookmarks
Users can create personal links in WorkPlace for quick access to any resources that they have privileges to use.
This can include Workplace user-defined Web URL, RDP, VNC, Citrix, FTP, SSH, and Telnet bookmarks. Users can
also minimize their bookmark list, edit the bookmark list, and edit individual RDP bookmarks
WorkPlace personal links are similar to Web browser bookmarks or favorites lists except that they are stored on
the Dell SMA -appliance, while standard browser bookmarks are stored on a specific computer. Users can access
and manage their WorkPlace personal links whenever they are logged in to WorkPlace, regardless of the
computer they are using.
When you set up communities within a realm (for example, a community of employees and one of partners), you
can give each one a unique appearance, using WorkPlace styles and layouts. The WorkPlace layout determines
whether the Personal Bookmarks group is displayed for a particular community. See Creating or Editing a
WorkPlace Layout on page 443 for more information.
NOTE: To access non-HTTP resources (for example, an SMB host) through WorkPlace bookmarks, users
must be running an access agent, such as one of the tunnel clients. For more information, see User Access
Agents on page 453.
Custom RDP Bookmarks
Custom settings for user remote desktop links are managed through the Custom RDP Link window. Screen
resolution and color depth can be controlled by either the user or administrator. Single sign-on allows the
administrator to customize the user sign on to request specific credentials or enable specific domains.
Network Explorer Page
When a user accesses a file system resource (by clicking a network shortcut, typing a UNC path in the Intranet
Address box, or clicking the Network Explorer link on the WorkPlace home page), the Network Explorer page
appears. The capabilities of the Network Explorer depend on whether the user has Sun JRE Version 1.6 update
34 or newer installed. If this Java version is present, the enhanced form appears. If these updates are not
installed, the html version of Network Explorer appears. This html version is limited in capability. To take full
advantage of the enhanced Network Explorer, download the latest Java updates. The Network Explorer page is
not available on small form factor devices.
NOTE: The latest Java and JRE versions can be downloaded from http://www.java.com.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
411
The Enhanced Network Explorer
The latest WorkPlace Explorer allows users to browse domains, servers, shares, folders, and files by clicking
links or using drag-and-drop and multiple file selection capabilities. Bookmarks can be used to quickly navigate
through networks from the portal level. This feature saves time in moving through network and server paths.
The Network Explorer window has a right and left pane, allowing resources to be moved between the user’s
computer and the local network.
If directories are drag-and-dropped between resources, all resources under that directory will be recursively
moved. A status bar appears to show the progress of the operation.
The window on the left shows the file system on the local machine. The window on the right, allows you to
browse network domains and computers, and their associated file shares. Using these windows, you can
manipulate files and copy between the remote and local file systems. Both windows have a tool bar at the top,
which allows you to easily navigate through the items in the window.
Moving resources will cause all resources under them to be transferred recursively.
The HTML Network Explorer
This version of Network Explorer is the default if the user does not have the necessary Java installed. In the
html version, the page displays the contents of the requested file system resource and, depending on the user’s
access privileges, allows the user to perform the following actions on a file:
•
View contents and properties, rename, copy, move, download, and delete.
•
Create new folders.
•
If the administrator has enabled upload functionality, and the user has write privileges, the user can
upload files. See Configuring WorkPlace General Settings on page 413 for more information.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
412
Web Shortcut Access
The Dell SMA appliance offers two options for providing access to basic Web (HTTP) resources through
WorkPlace shortcuts for users who are running the OnDemand Tunnel agent:
•
Redirect through network agent: When this method is enabled, Web content is proxied through the
appliance for users running the OnDemand Tunnel agent, provided that the agent is loaded. In this
method, Web traffic from Workplace links does not use translation, does not support single sign-on, and
does not use URL-based rules to control access. However, this method generally provides better
application compatibility than the Web content translation option does.
If you enable this setting, you can optionally configure selected WorkPlace resources to be translated by
defining aliases for those specified resources. You can also enforce policy at the URL level and support
single sign-on using this approach. For more information, see Adding Web Application Profiles on page
253.
•
Web content translation: Web content is translated using the Secure Mobile Access Web translation
engine, a reverse proxy that provides single sign-on and fine-grained access control. When this method is
enabled, you can provide single sign-on and use URL-based rules to control access; however, this method
provides more limited application compatibility than the Redirect through network agent option does.
To provide single sign-on, you must specify an alias to the resource; for more information, see Adding
Resources on page 229.
The Web shortcut access method you choose will depend on several factors, including the network protocols
used by your applications, your security requirements, convenience for end users, and the target platforms.
This option is configured on the WorkPlace Settings page.
Configuring WorkPlace General Settings
This section describes how to configure the WorkPlace general settings that apply to any WorkPlace site that
you create. You decide here whether to enable access to UNC pathnames, URLs, or both in the Intranet Address
box, but your WorkPlace layout determines whether the Intranet Address box is displayed for a particular
community.
You can customize WorkPlace to varying degrees:
•
You can modify the appearance of WorkPlace by setting up a style that uses a particular logo, color
scheme, and greeting text. For a consistent look, this same style can be specified for the site’s login,
error, and notification pages. See WorkPlace Sites on page 439 for more information.
•
For sites that require even more control over the look and feel of WorkPlace, see Fully Customizing
WorkPlace Pages on page 447.
To configure WorkPlace general settings
1
From the main navigation menu, click Services and then, in the Access services section, under
WorkPlace, click Configure. The Settings tab for WorkPlace appears.
2
Select one of the Web shortcut access options. This setting determines how URL resources are accessed
if WorkPlace activates the tunnel agent. For information about these options, see Web Shortcut Access
on page 413.
3
•
Redirect through network agent: Web content is proxied through the appliance for users running
the OnDemand Tunnel agent.
•
Use Web content translation: Web content is translated using the Secure Mobile Access Web
translation engine.
If the layout specified for your WorkPlace site includes the Network Explorer resource, users will have
access to file system resources from the Network Explorer page in WorkPlace. Select Enable file uploads
to < > megabytes to enable users to upload files to a Windows file system resource. This setting takes
precedence over any permissions you set in a file system access control rule. If an access rule grants a
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
413
user write access to a file system but file uploads are disabled for the WorkPlace service, the user can
only move and delete files, not write to them.
A single file upload cannot exceed the number of megabytes you specify. Enabling users to upload large
files may have a negative effect on the performance of the appliance.
4
In the Intranet Address box area, specify settings that control the functionality of the Intranet Address
box in WorkPlace. (Whether the Intranet Address box is available is specified in your WorkPlace layout
and also depends on your device: it cannot be displayed on mobile devices.)
Select Enable access to UNC pathnames and Enable access to URLs if you want to enable users to reach a Web
resource by typing its UNC pathname or URL in the Intranet Address box on WorkPlace. This can be useful if, for
example, you have defined an entire DNS domain as a resource and want to provide access to all Web servers
within the domain without needing to define each individual Web resource in the domain. This setting applies
only when WorkPlace is running in translated mode.
For information about defining Web resources, see Adding Resources on page 229.
NOTE:
•
The settings that you specify in the Intranet Address box have no effect on your access control
policy. For a detailed discussion of this feature, see Intranet Address Box on page 410.
•
If you are concerned that user credentials may be stolen, you can offer (or require) that users
logging in to WorkPlace provide their credentials by pointing to characters on a keyboard display
instead of typing them. See Using the Virtual Keyboard to Enter Credentials on page 396 for more
information.
Working with WorkPlace Shortcuts
WorkPlace enables users with appropriate access privileges to use a Web browser to access Web resources,
terminal servers, and files and folders on a Windows file server. Even though you may have defined your
resources in AMC, none of them appear in WorkPlace until you create corresponding shortcuts. This section
explains how to create and manage the shortcuts and shortcut groups in WorkPlace.
For information about enabling access to file system resources, file uploads, and the Intranet Address box, see
Configuring WorkPlace General Settings on page 413.
Viewing Shortcuts
As the administrator, you see the entire list of shortcuts you have configured in AMC; however, when a user logs
into WorkPlace, the list is filtered to display only the resources that he or she has permission to use, based on
your policy and the type of device for which the shortcut is enabled. All types of shortcuts (Web, network, and
graphical terminal) and groups of shortcuts are displayed in AMC and WorkPlace. How they are laid out is
determined by the WorkPlace layout in use for a given community.
To view shortcuts in AMC
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
Optionally use the Filters settings to display only the objects you are interested in. For information
about using filters, see the “Filters” section under A Quick Tour of the AMC Interface on page 111.
3
Review the data in the Shortcuts list:
4
Use the check boxes to select the shortcuts you want to move or delete.
•
To display configuration details about a shortcut, click the plus sign (+) next to it. You’ll see the
description, what shortcut group it belongs to, if any, whether it is restricted by device type, and
the names of any WorkPlace layouts to which it belongs.
•
The number indicates the order in which the shortcut is listed in WorkPlace; you can change this
order here, or edit the list of shortcuts associated with a layout on the Configure WorkPlace
Layout page. For more information about changing a layout, see Creating or Editing a WorkPlace
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
414
Layout on page 443.
•
The Link text column displays the hyperlink text that users see.
•
The Resource column displays the name of the resource as defined on the Resources page in
AMC. For more information about configuring resources, see Creating and Managing Resources on
page 224.
•
The Type column indicates the type of shortcut. The supported shortcut types are Web, network,
and graphical terminal.
•
The Used column indicates whether the shortcut is included in a group or WorkPlace layout.
To view shortcut groups in AMC
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
Click the Shortcut Groups tab.
3
Optionally use the Filters settings to display only the objects you are interested in. For information
about using filters, see the “Filters” section under A Quick Tour of the AMC Interface on page 111.
4
Review the data in the list of groups:
5
Use the check boxes to select the groups you want to move or delete.
•
To display configuration details about a shortcut group, click the plus sign (+) next to it. You’ll see
what shortcuts it includes, and the names of any WorkPlace layouts to which it belongs.
•
The number indicates the order in which the shortcut group is listed in WorkPlace; you can
change this order here, or edit the list of groups associated with a layout on the Configure
WorkPlace Layout page.
•
The Name column displays the group heading that users see.
•
The Description column contains the description, if any, that you gave this group.
•
The Used column indicates whether the shortcut group is used by a WorkPlace layout.
Adding Web Shortcuts
Web shortcuts give your users quick access to Web resources. Before you can create a shortcut to a Web
resource, you must first define the resource; for more information, see Adding Resources on page 229.
To add a Web shortcut
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
On the Shortcuts page, click New. A drop-down list appears.
3
Then select Web shortcut from the list. The Add Web Shortcut page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
415
4
In the Position box, type a number that specifies the shortcut’s position in the list.
5
In the Resource drop-down list, select the resource to which this shortcut will be linked. This list
contains the available URL resources that are defined on the Resources page in AMC. For example, when
adding a shortcut to SharePoint, you could define a URL resource specifying the resource Name as
SharePoint and the resource URL as http://intranet.sharepoint.com. Then, you would select SharePoint
in the Resource drop-down list.
For more information about defining resources, see Creating and Managing Resources on page 224.
6
Specify the link and descriptive text that users will see in WorkPlace. The entries can include variables
to make them even more user- or session-specific; see Using Variables in Resource and WorkPlace
Shortcut Definitions on page 243 for more information.
•
In the Link text box, type the hyperlink text that users will click to access the Web resource. The
Link text should be no longer than 25 characters.
•
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the shortcut. Although optional, a
description helps users identify the Web resource. The comment appears next to the link.
7
Use the Shortcut group area to either add this shortcut to an existing group, or put it in a new one.
Groups are one of the organizational elements in a WorkPlace layout. You could, for example, put all
client downloads for users in a group, and then (on the Configure WorkPlace Layout page) put the group
in a column or on its own WorkPlace page.
8
To specify additional options, click Next. The Advanced tab of the Add Web Shortcut page appears.
9
Under Make link available to these devices, associate the WorkPlace shortcut with the device types
that can be used to access it:
•
If you select All devices, the shortcut will appear on all devices types, regardless of whether the
Web resource itself is supported on all device types.
•
To restrict display of the shortcut to only certain types of devices, clear the All devices check
box, and then select just the device types that are supported.
For example, WorkPlace supports a variety of small form factor devices, but not all Web resources are
compatible with all devices. Outlook Web Access is available only on standard browsers, while Outlook
Mobile is available only on small form factor devices. So if you have Outlook Mobile set up as a resource,
you should select both the basic and advanced mobile devices.
10 Use the Start page box, if necessary, to append more specific information to the selected URL. For
example, if you want the link to point to a directory or file other than the root, type a relative path in
the Start page box.
This is useful for Web applications that store their content in a location other than the root. For
example, if the selected URL is for Outlook Web Access and it points to mail.example.com, you could set
the start page to /exchange/root.asp. The resulting URL would be
https://mail.example.com/exchange/root.asp.
For SharePoint, set the start page to the extended path, such as Pages/Default.aspx or
SitePages/Home.aspx. For SharePoint shortcuts, the basic hostname/<IP address> of the SharePoint
server is defined on the Resources page in AMC. The extended path is configured here as the Start Page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
416
Creating a Group of Shortcuts
You can group Web and network shortcuts together for better WorkPlace organization and a more streamlined
look. The WorkPlace user has the option of collapsing a group of file shares. Here is a collapsed group for
example:
The expanded group might look like this:
Users see only the groups to which they are permitted access. To create a group, you select from among existing
WorkPlace shortcuts (not resources). Shortcuts can be members of more than one group.
To create a group of shortcuts
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
On the Shortcut Groups tab, click New.
3
Enter a name and (optionally) a description for the group. The description appears below the group’s
name in WorkPlace. In the example above, Domain and stand-alone shares is the description.
4
In the Position box, type a number that specifies the shortcut group’s position in the list. The order of
shortcuts and groups can be changed later in the layout you choose for this WorkPlace site, on the
Configure WorkPlace Layout page.
5
Existing shortcuts are listed: select the ones that you want to add to this group and click Save. An
individual shortcut can be a member of more than one group. You can also opt to save an empty group
(without any shortcuts selected), and then edit it later.
Adding Network Shortcuts
Network shortcuts provide your users with quick access to file system resources. Before you can create a
shortcut to a file system resource, you must first define the resource (see Adding Resources on page 229 for
more information).
To add a network shortcut
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
On the Shortcuts page, click New. A drop-down list appears.
3
Select Network shortcut from the list. The Add Network Shortcut page displays.
4
In the Position box, type a number that specifies the shortcut’s position in the list.
5
In the Resource list, select the file system resource to which this shortcut should be linked. This list
contains the file system resources that are defined on the Resources page in AMC; Network Explorer, for
example, is a built-in resource for which you can configure a shortcut here. For more information about
defining resources, see Creating and Managing Resources on page 224.
6
Specify the link and descriptive text that users will see in WorkPlace. The entries can include variables
to make them even more user- or session-specific.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
417
7
•
In the Link text box, type the hyperlink text that users will click to access the file system
resource. The Link text should be no longer than 25 characters.
•
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the shortcut. Although optional, a
description helps users identify the file system resource. This comment appears beside the link in
WorkPlace.
Groups are one of the organizational elements in a WorkPlace layout. Use the Shortcut group area to
either add this shortcut to an existing group, or put it in a new one. You could, for example, put all file
system-related shortcuts in a group, and then (on the Configure WorkPlace Layout page) put the group
in a column or on its own WorkPlace page.
Web Only Access
The Web Only Access feature for Dell SMA supports HTML5 and enables users to access HTML5 Web sites.
Web Only Access for SMA also enables users to access on-demand computing services using only a web browser.
Users can use Connect Tunnel (CT) and Native Access Methods (NAMs) to access back-end applications.
Web Only Access for SMA supports the following clientless NAM applications:
•
Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP)
•
Secure Shell (SSH)
•
Telnet
•
Virtual Network Computing (VNC)
•
Citrix
NOTE: SMA does not support Java clients in 11.3 and higher, and Java deprecation warnings are shown on
AMC screens.
NOTE: On Terminal Server connections, HTML5 RDP bookmarks are not supported for per-device licensing.
HTML5 RDP bookmarks are only supported for per-user licensing. ActiveX and Java RDP bookmarks are
supported for both per-user and per-device licensing on Terminal Server connections.
WorkPlace Lite is an access mode for the Dell Secure Mobile Access (SMA) appliance that bypasses all Access and
EPC Agents and logs the user in to WorkPlace. The only prerequisite for logging in to a WorkPlace Lite enabled
WorkPlace site is that you must use a modern web browser that supports HTML5. Web only access is more
commonly referred to as Reverse Proxy access.
The AMC administrator can:
•
Grant the user access to WorkPlace Lite.
•
Force the user to use WorkPlace Lite only.
•
Disable the user from accessing WorkPlace Lite.
Users can select a checkbox or go to a specific WorkPlace site for Lite access. If the user checks WorkPlace Lite
mode, then the system allows access to browser based graphical and text-terminal shortcuts as well as Web URL
and HTML file share shortcuts.
This section contains the following subsections:
•
Adding a Text Terminal Shortcut using SSH or Telnet. on page 419
•
Adding a Graphical Terminal Shortcut for a VNC on page 421
•
Configuring Windows Terminal Services on page 424
•
Configuring WorkPlace Lite on page 430
•
TLS and NLA support for HTML5 RDP on page 431
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
418
Adding a Text Terminal Shortcut using SSH or Telnet.
To add a Text Terminal Shortcut that uses SSH or Telnet.
1
Go to the User Access > WorkPlace > Shortcuts page.
2
Click the New
button.
The shortcut drop-down menu appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
419
3
From the shortcut drop-down menu, select Text terminal shortcut.
The Add Text Terminal Shortcut > General page appears.
4
From the Resources menu, select the resource you want for this shortcut.
5
In the Link text field, enter the text you want to display for this shorcut.
6
(Optional) In the Description field, enter a description of this shortcut.
7
In the Add this shortcut to group list, select one of the following options:
a
If you do not want to make this shortcut part of a group, select Standalone shortcuts.
b
If you want to make this shortcut part of an existing group, select one of the existing groups from
the list.
c
If you want to create a new group, enter a name for the new group in the New group name field.
8
Click Next.
The Add Text Terminal Shortcut > Advanced page appears.
9
Select the Session type that you want, Secure Shell (SSHv2) or Telnet.
10 In the Port field, enter the port number.
11 Click Finish.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
420
The Shortcuts page appears with the new shortcut listed at the top.
Adding a Graphical Terminal Shortcut for a VNC
Graphical terminal shortcuts provide your users with quick access to gain easy access to backend servers
(Microsoft RDP, Citrix, VNC), regardless of the type of transport (proxy or tunnel). Most often, some type of
Single Sign-On (SSO) credentials will be enabled so that the user does not have to re-enter their username and
password after launching the GTS. Some Graphical Terminal Shortcuts have very basic features configured by
the AMC Administrator, such as IP/Hostname and Port. Others have very complex configurations (custom
configuration file uploads (.RDP/.ICA), multi-monitor support, high-resolution display support, etc.).
To add a Graphical Terminal Shortcut to a VNC.
1
Go to the User Access > WorkPlace > Shortcuts page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
421
2
Click the New
button.
The shortcut drop-down menu appears.
3
From the shortcut drop-down menu, select Graphical terminal shortcut.
The Add Graphical Terminal Shortcut > General page appears.
4
From the Position menu, select the position number for the link to appear in Workplace.
5
From the Resources menu, select the resource you want for this shortcut.
If necessary, configure the resource, as explained in Security Administration on page 224.
6
In the Link text field, enter the hyperlink text you want to display for this shorcut.
7
(Optional) In the Description field, enter a description of this shortcut.
8
In the Add this shortcut to group list, select one of the following options:
a
If you do not want to make this shortcut part of a group, select Standalone shortcuts.
b
If you want to make this shortcut part of an existing group, select one of the existing groups from
the list.
c
If you want to create a new group, enter a name for the new group in the New group name field.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
422
9
Click Next.
The Add Graphical Terminal Shortcut > Advanced page appears.
10 Under Session type, from the Type drop-down window, select VNC.
11 Click Finish.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
423
The Shortcuts page appears with the new shortcut listed at the top.
Configuring Windows Terminal Services
NOTE: On Terminal Server connections, HTML5 RDP bookmarks are not supported for per-device licensing.
HTML5 RDP bookmarks are only supported for per-user licensing. ActiveX and Java RDP bookmarks are
supported for both per-user and per-device licensing on Terminal Server connections.
To configure Windows Terminal Services.
1
Go to the User Access > WorkPlace > Shortcuts page.
2
Click the New
button.
The shortcut drop-down menu appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
424
3
From the shortcut drop-down menu, select Graphical terminal shortcut.
The Add Graphical Terminal Shortcut > General page appears.
4
From the Position menu, select the position number for the link to appear in Workplace.
5
From the Resources menu, select the resource you want for this shortcut.
If necessary, configure the resource, as explained in Security Administration on page 224.
6
In the Link text field, enter the hyperlink text you want to display for this shorcut.
7
(Optional) In the Description field, enter a description of this shortcut.
8
In the Add this shortcut to group list, select one of the following options:
a
If you do not want to make this shortcut part of a group, select Standalone shortcuts.
b
If you want to make this shortcut part of an existing group, select one of the existing groups from
the list.
c
If you want to create a new group, enter a name for the new group in the New group name field.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
425
9
Click Next.
The Add Graphical Terminal Shortcut > Advanced page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
426
Session type
1
From the Type menu, select Windows Terminal Services.
2
In the Port field, type the port number to use for RDP communication. The default is 3389.
3
Select the type of RDP client used by the shortcut:
•
Use Browser based client — All end point devices will use a browser-based RDP client. A browserbased RDP client does not support advanced session options such as Forms.
•
Use Native client on user’s PC (Windows/Mac/Linux) — (default) Makes the shortcut use
whatever is the native RDP client on the user's PC.
•
Upload RDP file — Browse to the location where the RDP file is located and upload the RDP file.
Single sign-on
4
Select one of the following options for how end users will sign on:
NOTE: If you are concerned that user credentials may be stolen, you can offer (or require)
that users logging in to WorkPlace provide their credentials by pointing to characters on a
keyboard display instead of typing them. See Using the Virtual Keyboard to Enter
Credentials on page 396 for more information.
•
None (prompt user) - Prompts the end-user for credentials.
•
Forward user's session credentials - Uses the user’s session credentials (username/password) to
login to the backend RDP machine. In the Domain field, specify the Windows domain that should
be forwarded to the backend RDP machine when attempting to log on.
•
Forward static credentials - Defines static credentials (either manually or via policy variables) to
be sent to the backend server during the logon request. To forward static credentials, specify the
static Username, Password, and Domain to be used.
Resource redirection
5
Select the Bring remote audio to local computer check box to enable users to access remote audio
during the session. Note that audio redirection is network intensive and can affect performance. The
default is off.
6
Select the Share clipboard between local and remote computers check box to enable clipboard
copy/paste in both directions for the user. The default is to allow this feature.
7
Under Allow access to local, select the checkboxes for the devices the user will be able to access during
the session. Possible devices are:
•
Drives
•
Printers
•
SmartCards (used for authentication)
•
Plug-and-play devices
•
Ports (port redirection from the local computer to the remote computer).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
427
Connection Properties
8
Check the Automatically reconnect if session is interrupted check box to have the RDP client
reconnect without prompting when the connection is dropped.
9
Check the Connect to admin/console session check box to allow the AMC Administrator to define
whether the AMC session should be used to establish a connection.
10 To send Wake-on-LAN packets to the corresponding MAC address and/or the resource’s hostname/IP
address, check the Enable Wake-on-LAN (WoL) check box and type the Mac/Ethernet address, which is
the corresponding hardware address that the WoL packet should be sent to. To change the Wait time for
boot-up, type the number of seconds (default 90) to wait to see if the client machine has woken up from
the WoL packet.
11 Check the Send WoL packet to hostname or IP address check box to also send the WoL packet to this
resource's associated hostname/IP address.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
428
Display properties
12 From the Screen resolution menu, select the desired screen resolution, or select Custom and enter the
custom resolution (default 1024 x 768). The administrator can also let the Workplace User choose.
13 From the Color Depth, Select the color depth for the display (default 16-bit).
14 Select any of the other display properties that you want:
•
Allow users to change shortcut settings - Lets the end-user adjust certain properties of the GTS.
Default: Unchecked
•
Show connection bar - Allows the AMC Administrator to define whether the connection bar at the
top of the screen is displayed, once the GTS session is successfully established. Default: Checked
•
Multiple monitor support - Controls whether RDP7 multi-monitor support is enabled. If RDP7 is
not available, and multi-monitor is enabled, the GTS falls back to RDP6 dual-monitor mode.
Default: Unchecked
•
Remote application - Allows the AMC Administrator to launch an application remotely, via the
GTS session (without actually launching the terminal). Note that if this is enabled, Start
application, Application Arguments, and Working directory in the “Startup Options” section must
be defined. Default: Unchecked
Third-party plugin DLLs
15 To load third-party plugin DLLs into WorkPlace when the RDP GTS session starts, check the Enable thirdparty plugin DLLs check box and type the DLLs to load, separating them with commas.
NOTE: DLLs must be pre-installed on the client machine. The terminal service does not do
any provisioning of DLLs.
Startup options
16 To start an application when the GTS RDP session is started, in the Start application field type the full
path to an application on the client machine.
17 To add any command line arguments that must be specified to start the application correctly, in the
Arguments field type the application arguments.
18 If you specified a start application, in the Working directory field, enter the directory from which to
start the application.
19 Click Finish to save the settings, Cancel to delete your entries, or Back to return to the General tab.
NOTE: The startup options are supported via HTML5 RDP.
NOTE: Java based RDP is not supported in SMA 11.3 and higher.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
429
Configuring WorkPlace Lite
WorkPlace Lite mode is configured on a per-WorkPlace site basis.
To configure WorkPlace Lite:
1
In AMC browse to WorkPlace > WorkPlace Sites > <Your WorkPlace Site> > Advanced.
2
Under WorkPlace Lite access, select one of the following options:
3
•
Automatic — The user-selection checkbox for WorkPlace Lite mode on WorkPlace is not visible
and WorkPlace Lite access will be enabled for mobile devices only. This is the default for
upgrades from previous firmware versions and new installations. Label and Help text controls are
disabled.
•
Always — The user-selection checkbox for WorkPlace Lite mode on WorkPlace is not visible, but
WorkPlace Lite access is always enabled when the user logs in to this WorkPlace site. Label and
Help text controls are disabled.
•
Let user choose — The checkbox on WorkPlace for enabling or disabling WorkPlace Lite access is
visible, along with the label text and help text. The AMC Administrator can modify or adjust the
label text and help text as needed.
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
430
TLS and NLA support for HTML5 RDP
Secure Mobile Access (SMA) 11.4 provides Transport Layer Security (TLS) and Network Level Authentication
(NLA) for HTML5 browser clients that want to connect to remote hosts via the Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP).
RDP negotiates the encryption level between a remote client and the RDP host server. You can enhance the
security of RDP sessions by configuring RDP to use TLS to identify the RDP host server and encrypt all
communication between the RDP host server and the client. You can also configure RDP to use NLA, which
forces the client to present user credentials for authentication before the RDP host server will create a session
for that user.
To enable TLS and NLA for HTML5 browser support for RDP, you must configure TLS and RDP on the RDP host
server and then set the keyboard language for the client’s browser locale on the Manage Bookmarks page in
WorkPlace.
TS-Farm servers enable RDP sessions to be load balanced. TS-Farm consists of numerous remote desktop servers
(farm servers) with additional licensing capabilities and a session broker. The session broker does the book
keeping and makes the load balancing decisions.
Topics
•
Configuring TLS and NLA support for HTML5 RDP
•
Configuring the keyboard language in WorkPlace
Configuring TLS and NLA support for HTML5 RDP
To configure TLS and NLA on an RDP host server:
1
On your RDP host server, open the RDP-Tcp Properties dialog.
2
In the Security layer drop-down menu, select SSL (TLS 1.0).
3
Select the checkbox for Allow connections only from computers running Remote Desktop with
Network Level Authentication.
4
Click Apply.
5
Click OK.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
431
Configuring the keyboard language in WorkPlace
To configure the keyboard language in WorkPlace:
1
In WorkPlace, go the Manage Bookmarks page.
2
In the Keyboard layout drop-down menu, select the language that you want for the browser locale.
3
Click Save.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
432
Citrix Configuration
Selecting Citrix from the drop-down list alters the Advanced options menu and pre-populates that section with
default settings.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
433
To configure a Citrix server farm:
1
In the Port field, type the port number that should be used for Citrix server farm (default 1494 for
Citrix).
2
In the Single Sign-on section, select how end users will sign on:
NOTE: Single sign-on fields on the Advanced page can be completed with absolute values or
by clicking the Variable button to the right of the field, selecting the desired variable from
the displayed list, and clicking Insert.
•
None (prompt user) - Prompts the end-user for credentials.
•
Forward user's session credentials - Uses the user’s session credentials (username/password) to
login to the backend RDP machine. In the Domain field, specify the Windows domain that should
be forwarded to the backend RDP machine when attempting to log on.
•
Forward static credentials - Defines static credentials (either manually or via policy variables) to
be sent to the backend server during the logon request. To forward static credentials, specify the
static Username, Password, and Domain to be used.
3
Select the Enable SSO to Citrix application check box to allow credentials to be submitted to the
published applications. The default is off.
4
Select the Bring remote audio to local computer check box to enable users to access remote audio
during the session. Note that audio redirection is network intensive and can affect performance. The
default is off.
5
Select the Share clipboard between local and remote computers check box to enable clipboard
copy/paste in both directions for the user. The default is to allow this feature.
6
To change the Screen resolution, select the desired screen resolution from the drop-down list or select
Custom and type the custom resolution (default 1024 x 768). The administrator can also let the
Workplace User choose.
7
To change the color depth for the display, select the desired color depth from the Color Depth dropdown list (default 16-bit).
8
Click Finish to save the settings, Cancel to delete your entries, or Back to return to the General tab.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
434
Adding a Virtual Desktop Shortcut
Use this page to create or edit the virtual desktop shortcuts appearing in WorkPlace. These shortcuts enable
users to easily connect to VMware View resources.
To add a virtual desktop shortcut
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
On the Shortcuts page, click New. A drop-down list appears.
3
Select Virtual Desktop Shortcut. The Add Virtual Desktop Shortcut page displays.
4
On the General tab, select the resource from the Resources list.
5
In the Link Text field, type in the hyperlink text that will appear as the shortcut for a VMware View host.
6
Type a description for the shortcut into the Description field.
7
In the Add this shortcut to group list, select Standalone shortcuts if you do not want to make this
shortcut part of a group, or select an existing group from the list. To create a new group, select New.
8
If you selected New, type a name for the new group in the New group name field.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
435
9
Click Next. The Advanced tab displays.
10 Select the session type, such as Citrix XenDesktop or VMware View.
11 In the Single sign-on area, specify how you want user credentials to forwarded to the host:
•
Click None to disable single sign-on and prompt the user for credentials.
•
Click Forward user’s session credentials to pass the username and password used to
authenticate to WorkPlace along to the host.
•
Click Forward static credentials to forward the same username and password for all users. Type
the static Username, Password, and Domain to be forwarded for all users.
•
Click the associated {variable} button to expose the variable list and insert a variable into the
above fields.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
436
12 In the Resource redirection area, specify how you want the Virtual Desktop to interface with the to the
host:
a
To play audio generated by the remote device on the local computer, check the Bring remote
audio to local computer check box.
b
To copy the clipboard contents between computers, check the Share clipboard between local
and remote computers check box.
c
To access drives and/or printers on the remote device, check the Drives and/or Printers check
box.
13 In the Display properties area, specify how you want the Virtual Desktop display to look:
a
Use the Screen resolution drop-down list to select the screen resolution for the Virtual Desktop
display.
b
Use the Color depth drop-down list to select the color depth for the Virtual Desktop display.
14 Click Finish.
Adding a Text Terminal Shortcut
Use this page to create or edit the text terminal shortcuts appearing in WorkPlace. These shortcuts enable users
to easily connect to SSH or Telnet resources.
To add a text terminal shortcut
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
On the Shortcuts page, click New. A drop-down list appears.
3
Select Text Terminal Shortcut. The Add Text Terminal Shortcut page displays.
4
On the General tab, select the resource from the Resource list.
5
In the Link Text field, type in the hyperlink text that will appear as the shortcut for a SSH or Telnet host.
6
Type a description for the shortcut into the Description field.
7
In the Add this shortcut to group list, select Standalone shortcuts if you do not want to make this
shortcut part of a group, or select an existing group from the list. To create a new group, select New.
8
If you selected New, type a name for the new group in the New group name field.
9
Click Next. The Advanced tab displays.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
437
SSHv2 Configuration
The Secure Shell (SSH) session type affects the Advanced tab options section, and pre-populates that section
with appropriate default settings.
The Port defines which port should be used for FTP communication. Default: 22
Advanced Session Options
Checking Automatically accept host key lets the administrator control whether or not a mis-matched host-key
displays an acceptance prompt to the Workplace user. Default: Checked
Checking Bypass username for SSHv2 only controls whether the username field should be ignored/empty
during login. Only valid for Secure Mobile Access firewalls. Default: Not selected
To return to the General Menu, click Back. To enable the new settings, click Finish.
Telnet Configuration
The Telnet session type affects the options section and pre-populates it with default settings.
The Port option defines which port should be used for Telnet communication. Default: 23
To return to the General Menu, click Back. To enable the new settings, click Finish.
Editing Shortcuts
You can create new WorkPlace shortcuts when defining resources, but to edit or delete them you must use the
Shortcuts page.
To edit a shortcut
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
Click the number or the link text of the shortcut that you want to edit.
3
Make edits as needed, and then click Save.
If you delete a shortcut, users will no longer see it in WorkPlace. To delete a shortcut, you must use the
Shortcuts page.
To delete a shortcut
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
Select the check box to the left of any shortcuts that you want to delete, and then click Delete. Deleting
a shortcut does not delete the resource to which it refers.
WorkPlace displays the list of shortcuts in the same order as they appear on the Shortcuts page. You can move
one or more shortcuts at the same time. The order of shortcuts (and groups of shortcuts) can be changed later
in the layout you choose for your WorkPlace site, on the Configure WorkPlace Layout page.
To move one or more shortcuts
1
From the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
Select the check box to the left of any shortcuts that you want to move.
3
Click Move Up or Move Down as appropriate. Each click of the button moves the selected shortcuts up or
down one row.
To reorder an individual WorkPlace shortcut, an alternative method is to click its number or link text and then
type its new list position in the Position box.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
438
WorkPlace Sites
You can create multiple WorkPlace sites for different user segments, such as employees, business partners, and
suppliers. Each site can have a unique external URL and a unique appearance, or bypass the WorkPlace portal
and redirect the user to a different start page.
For example, you could create a WorkPlace site for your employees with a customized title and logo, and a URL
of http://employees.headquarters.com, and create a different site for your partners at
http://partners.subsidiary.com. If you create multiple WorkPlace sites with unique external URLs, you can
import a wildcard certificate to the appliance and designate it as the server certificate for multiple WorkPlace
sites, or procure a separate SSL certificate for each site whose FQDN is different from the appliance’s domain
name. For more information, see Certificates on page 152.
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot convert host name, URL, or
domain type resources containing wildcards to an IP address and, therefore, cannot redirect them to the
appliance.
Optionally, if you have configured multiple realms, you can associate a WorkPlace site with a realm; this
enables users to bypass the portion of the authentication process in which they would normally specify a realm
to log in to. If you associate a WorkPlace site with a realm, users cannot select a different realm to log in to; a
user who does not belong to the specified realm cannot log in to the specified WorkPlace site.
You can customize the following components of WorkPlace:
•
Company logo
•
WorkPlace title
•
Greeting at top of page
•
Color scheme
•
Help file
•
Font family
You can have users bypass the WorkPlace portal and go directly to a different start page, provided that the
realm they log in to allows translated, custom port mapped, or custom FQDN mapped Web access exclusively.
See Adding WorkPlace Sites on page 440 for more information.
You may also want to set up custom licensing agreements that they will have to accept before getting started.
The URL a user types to log in to WorkPlace is preceded by the http:// protocol identifier. The Web session is
then redirected to a site that uses secure HTTP (HTTPS) and uses the https:// protocol identifier.
NOTE:
•
If you do not specify a custom WorkPlace site, or if users access the appliance using its default
name, the default WorkPlace site is automatically used.
•
Rather than creating a new WorkPlace site from scratch, you can save time by making a copy of an
existing site and changing some parameters to fit the new site. For information about copying a
WorkPlace site, see Adding, Editing, Copying, and Deleting Objects in AMC on page 116.
•
You can delete a WorkPlace site if you no longer need it, but you cannot delete the default
WorkPlace site. For information about deleting WorkPlace sites, see Adding, Editing, Copying, and
Deleting Objects in AMC on page 116.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
439
Adding WorkPlace Sites
AMC includes a preconfigured default WorkPlace site. You can create additional WorkPlace sites as needed; this
section describes how to do so.
You can make WorkPlace look different, on a per-community basis, if you set up different styles and layouts. For
more information, see Modifying the Appearance of WorkPlace on page 442. For information about configuring
WorkPlace sites for small form factor devices, see WorkPlace and Small Form Factor Devices on page 443.
The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the WorkPlace site can include one of the following:
•
A host within the same domain name as the Dell SMA appliance. Optionally, you can configure a separate
SSL certificate for this type of site.
•
A custom FQDN. This option can use a wildcard SSL certificate when its IP address is the same as another
WorkPlace site that uses the wildcard certificate, or you can use a separate SSL certificate for the site.
Before creating the site, you must obtain the certificate. For more information, see Certificates on page
152.
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot convert host
name, URL, or domain type resources containing wildcards to an IP address and, therefore,
cannot redirect them to the appliance.
In either case, you must communicate the external FQDN to users so they know how to access WorkPlace. You
must also add this FQDN to your public DNS.
To add a WorkPlace site
1
On the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace, and then click the WorkPlace Sites tab.
2
Click New. The Configure WorkPlace Site page opens with the General settings displayed.
3
In the Name box, type a unique name for the WorkPlace site.
4
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the WorkPlace site.
5
Type the IPv4 or IPv6 Custom FQDN name. By default, AMC listens on all interfaces for all services and
connects the request to the correct service based on the FQDN being requested.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
440
6
(Migrated/imported configurations only) An additional listening address can be specified if AMC was
upgraded from a previous version where a virtual IP address is configured for the WorkPlace site or the
CEM is used. To listen on an additional address, check the Listen on an additional IP address check box
and type the IP address.
For new installations, the Listen on an additional IP address fields are hidden. On a partial import,
virtual IP address information is lost, and applying pending changes forces the Administrator to fix any
WorkPlace site or URL resource configured to use a different IP address. In this case, the Listen on an
additional IP address fields are visible, with the check box checked to enable listening on an additional
address. Either enter an IP address or uncheck the check box.
For migrated/imported configurations with existing virtual hosts, the UI section is visible, but the
Administrator cannot create new virtual addresses. If necessary, use CEM to create virtual host addresses
in a new or migrated/imported configuration.
On a partial import, virtual IP address information is lost, and applying pending changes will force the
Administrator to fix any WorkPlace site or URL resource configured to use a different IP address. In this
case, the UI should be visible, with the check box checked to enable listening on an additional address,
(New) selected as the IP address, and no IP address entered in the address box. The Administrator can
choose to either enter an IP address or uncheck the check box.
If the host name or IP address on the certificate does not match the Custom FQDN or IP address that you
specified for this site, a security warning is displayed when users access the site.
7
Select a style—which includes the logo, color scheme, and text—for the WorkPlace login page. The style
and layout for other WorkPlace portal pages is specified during community configuration; see Modifying
the Appearance of WorkPlace on page 442 for information on modifying or creating a style.
8
Click Next to open the Advanced page.
9
In the Realm area, select one of these options:
•
Log in using this realm: Users are not prompted to select a realm, and only members of the
specified realm can access the WorkPlace site.
•
Prompt user for realm: Offer users a list of realms from which to choose. You can offer them all
configured realms, or clear the All realms selection and choose the ones that should be in the
list. Any authorized user can access the WorkPlace site after selecting a realm during login.
10 In the Start page area, select Display this page after authentication if you want users to bypass the
default WorkPlace home page after authentication. For example, if you have someone who will submit
content using a Web-based content management system, this setting allows you to present the writer
with the CMS interface immediately after he or she logs in.
This setting is available only if the realm specified in the Realm area offers translated, custom port
mapped, or custom FQDN mapped Web access exclusively. The URL you enter in this text box will be
automatically prefixed with http://. If this is a URL for a secure site, you must include the https://
protocol identifier.
If you specify an alternate page for users and they bypass the default WorkPlace portal, the user's session
is valid as long as the browser window is open, or until the session times out. Unlike the WorkPlace
portal, the alternate page will not include a Log out option.
11 Click Finish to save your WorkPlace site settings.
NOTE: You can enter a URL alias in the Start page area (if you don’t want users to see the complete URL
in WorkPlace), provided that you create a URL resource for it. For example, if you define a URL resource
as http://intranet.mycompany.com with an alias of intranet, you can specify the start page for WorkPlace
here simply with intranet (or a more specific path, such as intranet/some/path). When users
authenticate, they are redirected to https://<appliance>/intranet or
https://<appliance>/intranet/some/path.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
441
Modifying the Appearance of WorkPlace
When you create a new WorkPlace site, you have control over the look-and-feel of the pages and the
organization of resource shortcuts and other elements, such as intranet browsing and Network Explorer. The
appearance of WorkPlace is controlled by the following design elements, which can be created and reused:
•
A WorkPlace style determines the color scheme, fonts, and images used in WorkPlace. A style can be
applied to two groups of pages: those that contain user resources, and the login, error, and notification
pages.
An important thing to remember is that WorkPlace login, error, and notification pages are assigned a
style when you configure a WorkPlace site (see Adding WorkPlace Sites on page 440 for more
information), and the portal pages are assigned a style when you configure a community (see Creating
and Configuring Communities on page 66 for more information).
•
A WorkPlace layout determines elements like WorkPlace navigation, the number of columns on a page,
whether users see the Intranet Address box, and which shortcuts appear and how they are arranged. A
layout applies only to WorkPlace resource pages.
If your site requires a complete overhaul of the way WorkPlace looks and you are familiar with creating
Web content and style sheets (.css), you can upload a complete style to the appliance and then select it
when you create your site and assign it a style. See Fully Customizing WorkPlace Pages on page 447 for
more information. To do further customization—for example, to insert a use agreement into the login
process—see Overview: Custom WorkPlace Templates on page 448.
NOTE: The Default Style and Default Layout for WorkPlace cannot be deleted.
Creating or Editing a WorkPlace Style
To create a new WorkPlace style
1
On the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace, and then click the Appearance tab.
2
In the Styles area, choose an existing style to base your new one on (select its check box, and then click
Copy), or click New.
3
In the Name box, type a unique name for the WorkPlace style.
4
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the style.
5
In the Font family list, select the type of font you want to use (Serif or Sans-serif).
6
In the Color scheme list, click the name of the color scheme you want to use. If you select Custom, you
can set custom colors for the WorkPlace Page background, Subheadings, and Main heading. Specify
color settings by typing the applicable hexadecimal RGB value, or by clicking a color swatch and then
selecting a color from the Please choose a color dialog box.
7
To replace the Secure Mobile Access logo that is displayed in WorkPlace with a different image, use the
Replace with box to enter or browse for the .gif or .jpg file you want to use. For best results, the image
should not exceed 200 pixels wide by 50 pixels high.
8
When Display gradient background behind logo is selected, the accent color of your Color scheme is
displayed at the top of each WorkPlace page, gradually going from dark (at the top of the page) to light.
Any heading that you have appears in white.
9
On small form factor devices, the logo specified in the Images area is resized by default, but for best
results you may want to specify an alternate image that does not exceed 40 pixels by 100 pixels. Type
the path of the image file, or click the Browse button to select the image file you want to use. The logo
is automatically omitted from WAP and i-mode devices, so this setting does not affect the display on
those devices.
10 In the Title box, type the text that will appear as the title on the page and in the browser’s title bar. The
title must be no longer than 25 characters.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
442
11 In the Greeting box, type the introductory text that should appear below the title. The greeting must
not exceed 250 characters, but you may want to use a shorter one, especially if you want it to appear on
small form factor devices.
12 To further assist the user, you could specify a custom Help file that provides more detailed information
about the resources available on your VPN, or describe how to get technical support. Click Browse to
specify a well-formed HTML file that contains custom Help information. Your custom Help content is
integrated with the default WorkPlace Help system. To make changes to your custom help content, edit
the file locally and upload it to the appliance again.
13 Click Save to save your WorkPlace site settings, or click Reset Defaults to restore the factory-default
settings.
Creating or Editing a WorkPlace Layout
To create a new WorkPlace layout
1
On the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace, and then click the Appearance tab.
2
In the Layouts area, click New.
3
In the Name box, type a unique name for the WorkPlace layout.
4
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the layout.
5
In the Initial content area, select a layout for your current WorkPlace content (any shortcuts and
shortcut groups that you’ve defined), or choose to set up an initial structure for your content and add
WorkPlace resources later. No matter how you decide to lay out your initial content, you can change it
later by adding, removing, or rearranging pages and page content.
6
In the Page navigation area, specify the kind of navigation controls that will be displayed if your content
requires more than one page.
7
Specify whether the Intranet Address box will be displayed when this layout is used. It gives users access
to resources by typing a resource name (a UNC path, URL, or both). Click Next.
8
Click the Edit page properties link to change the basic properties of this WorkPlace page: its name (for
example, Home) and a short description.
9
Use the page, column, and shortcut controls to add pages, content, and rearrange the elements on each
page. Rearranging items in a layout or deleting them from a layout does not affect the resource itself,
just its appearance in WorkPlace.
10 Click Next to move to the Device Preview page. This page allows you to see how your layout will appear
on different types of devices with different display capabilities. On a mobile device, for example, the
Intranet Address box cannot be displayed, even if it is configured to be part of a layout.
WorkPlace and Small Form Factor Devices
WorkPlace provides support for a variety of small form factor devices, including PDAs, Pocket PCs, smartphones,
WAP 2.0-compatible phones, and i-mode phones. This section explains how to configure the appliance to
support these devices.
Overview: WorkPlace and Small Form Factor Devices
When a user logs in to WorkPlace from a small form factor device, WorkPlace detects the device type and
automatically transforms to best match the capabilities of the client device. This transformation affects several
aspects of the user experience:
•
WorkPlace functionality: Some WorkPlace features available from a standard desktop browser are
omitted on small form factor devices:
•
The Network Explorer page is not available for accessing network shares.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
443
•
The Intranet Address box is not available for typing a URL or UNC path name.
•
WorkPlace http and https bookmarks are supported.
•
Dell access agents are not supported, including the OnDemand access agent, the EPC data protection
agents, and terminal server agents.
•
The custom online Help file is not available.
•
WorkPlace look and feel: The standard WorkPlace appearance (including any customizations you’ve
made) is automatically modified for optimal display on small form factor devices.
For information about configuring the appearance of WorkPlace on a small form device, see Optimizing
WorkPlace for Display on Small Form Factor Devices on page 444.
•
Resource availability: You can control which WorkPlace shortcuts will appear on a small form factor
device. This allows you to omit Web resources that are incompatible with a particular type of device.
For example, you might want to hide the link for Outlook Web Access and instead provide a link to
Outlook Mobile Access. This setting is controlled when creating a WorkPlace shortcut; for more
information, see Adding Web Shortcuts on page 415.
•
End Point Control classification: To restrict access based on device type, you can create an EPC zone for
a specific type of Windows mobile device and then reference that zone in an access control rule. For
more information, see Defining Zones on page 350.
The appliance is preconfigured to classify most common small form factor devices into one of several
categories. The default settings should be sufficient for most deployments, but you can modify the
configuration to change the classification or recognize other devices, as needed. For more information on how
devices are classified, see Overview: Browser Profiles on page 445.
NOTE:
•
Some small form factor devices do not display error pages, but instead return an error code (such
as a “500” error) from the Web server, without any descriptive error text.
•
Users attempting to log in to WorkPlace from an unsupported device will receive an error message.
•
For users who connect to the appliance from small form factor devices, you should configure the
appliance with a certificate from a leading CA (such as VeriSign), or else import the CA certificate
to your users’ small form factor devices—many devices will fail to connect when presented with a
certificate from an unknown CA and will not provide any error message. For more information, see
CA Certificates on page 162.
Optimizing WorkPlace for Display on Small Form Factor
Devices
The general WorkPlace appearance, including any customizations you’ve made, is automatically modified for
optimal display on small form factor devices. The results are sufficient for most deployments, but you may want
to manually configure a few settings to improve the display. Most of the settings are configured as part of a
WorkPlace style; when you configure a WorkPlace layout you’ll be able to see how page navigation and other
elements will work on different mobile devices.
To optimize a WorkPlace site for display on small form factor devices
1
On the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace, and then click the Appearance tab.
2
In the Styles list, select a style you want to modify, or click New to start from scratch.
3
In the Images area, specify a logo for WorkPlace. For optimum results on smaller devices, the image
should not exceed 100 pixels by 40 pixels. By default, the logo specified in the Standard logo image file
box is used. To specify an alternate image, type the path of the .gif, .jpg, or .png file in the Replace
with box, or click Browse to locate it. Graphics are automatically omitted from WAP and i-mode
devices: this setting does not affect the display on those devices.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
444
4
To reduce the amount of vertical scrolling required, clear the Display greeting on small form factor
devices check box in the Text and Files area.
5
Click Save or Finish to save your WorkPlace site settings, or click Reset Defaults to restore the factory
default WorkPlace site settings.
NOTE: If you are using a mobile device that doesn't support UTF-8, such as the Sanyo W32SA handset,
localized content is displayed using illegible characters. To log in, the user must enter his or her
credentials in ASCII format.
To preview a WorkPlace layout on a small form factor device
1
On the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace, and then click the Appearance tab.
2
In the Layouts list, select the layout you plan to use, or click New to configure one.
3
General settings: If your layout contains more than one page, you can specify the kind of navigation
controls that will be displayed. Only an advanced mobile device, which is defined as one that has a
browser that supports JavaScript, supports multiple pages. An example is a Pocket PC running Windows
Mobile Professional.
4
Device preview: There are two approaches to lay out a community on smaller devices.
•
You can have the appliance accommodate smaller devices automatically. For example, the
Intranet Address box (if it is part of the layout) is automatically not displayed on mobile devices,
and whatever logo you have specified is scaled down.
•
If the automatic results are not acceptable, you can create a different layout, intended only for
mobile devices, and then specify it when you configure the community. See Configuring the
Appearance of WorkPlace on page 71 for more information.
Overview: Browser Profiles
The appliance is preconfigured to recognize most popular desktop browsers and many common small form
factor devices. When a user connects to WorkPlace, it uses this profile information to classify the device into
one of several categories. This in turn determines how WorkPlace appears, which shortcuts are visible on the
device, and how the device is classified for use with EPC.
The browser profile is determined by examining a variety of information sent from the client, including the Web
browser’s user-agent string and HTTP headers. The classification details are as follows:
Table 135. Browser profile classification details
Client device examples
WorkPlace classifications
•
Windows, Mac, or Linux
Desktop (JavaScript enabled)
•
Apple iPhone
Desktop (JavaScript disabled)
Because JavaScript is disabled, the appliance
cannot interrogate the iPhone to determine which
EPC zone it belongs in.
Advanced mobile
(Touch screen and JavaScript enabled)
•
Windows Pocket PCs
•
Windows Smartphone Professional
•
Many Windows CE devices
•
Many Palm OS devices
•
Windows Smartphone Standard
Standard mobile (JavaScript enabled)
•
Any Smartphone without JavaScript
Standard mobile (No JavaScript)
•
Some Palm OS devices
•
Any WAP 2.0-compliant phone
(includes many Symbian-based phones)
WAP Phone v2.0
•
Mobile browser using cHTML
(no cookie support)
i-mode phone (cHTML)
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
445
The market for mobile phones and handheld devices is evolving rapidly, and you may need to modify the default
appliance settings. For example, you might need to configure the appliance to support a new type of
smartphone purchased by your sales organization. Or you might want to override the appliance’s default profile
to accommodate a PDA vendor whose user-agent string has changed. Any browser profiles you define will take
precedence over the built-in profiles configured on the appliance.
AMC’s browser profiles enable you to configure the appliance to support the latest small form factor devices. A
browser profile maps a particular user-agent string to a device type. As mentioned in Overview: WorkPlace and
Small Form Factor Devices on page 443, the profile is used to determine three things:
Table 136. Browser profile features
Feature specified in browser profile
For more information
How WorkPlace is rendered on the device
See Overview: WorkPlace and Small Form Factor
Devices on page 443.
Which links appear on WorkPlace
See Adding Web Shortcuts on page 415.
How the device is classified into an End Point Control
zone
See How the Appliance Uses Zones and Device Profiles
for End Point Control on page 350.
The appliance evaluates browser profiles in the order listed until it finds a match. If there is no match for a
defined user-agent string, the appliance checks its built-in list of profiles. If no match is found in either list, the
device is classified as Desktop (JavaScript enabled) and includes full browser capability.
Adding Browser Profiles
The appliance is preconfigured to recognize many popular small form factor devices. To override or supplement
this information, you can create a browser profile that determines how WorkPlace is transformed. A profile is a
mapping between the user-agent string sent by the browser and one of several device types defined in AMC. Any
profiles you define take precedence over the built-in profiles configured on the appliance.
To add a browser profile
1
On the main navigation menu, click Agent Configuration.
2
In the Other Agents area, under Web browser profiles, click Edit. The Browser Profiles page appears.
3
Click New and then, in the User-agent string box, type a distinguishing portion of the user-agent string
used by the device. You can use the standard “*” and “?” wildcard characters when defining a user-agent
string. For example, a user-agent string of do* would match DoCoMo, and a string of MSI? would match
any of the MSIE possibilities.
NOTE: Due to client operating system limitations, Mobile Connect cannot convert host
name, URL, or domain type resources containing wildcards to an IP address and, therefore,
cannot redirect them to the appliance.
4
In the Device type list, select the entry that most closely matches the client information of the device
identified by the user-agent string. For more information on classifying devices, see Overview: Browser
Profiles on page 445.
5
(Optional) In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the browser profile.
6
Click OK. The new profile is added to the bottom of the list.
7
Click Save.
NOTE: The appliance evaluates browser profiles in the order listed, until it finds a match. See Moving
Browser Profiles on page 446 for more information.
Moving Browser Profiles
Browser profiles are matched in the order listed. Once the appliance matches a profile, it stops evaluating the
list. You can reorder the placement of one or more profiles as needed to ensure that a particular small form
factor device is properly recognized.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
446
To move a browser profile
1
On the main navigation menu, click Agent Configuration.
2
In the Other Agents area, under Web browser profiles, click Edit. The Browser Profiles page appears.
3
Select the check box for any profiles you want to move.
4
Click Move Up or Move Down as needed; each click of the button moves the selected profiles up or down
one position in the list.
5
Click Save.
Fully Customizing WorkPlace Pages
The WorkPlace customization that can be done in AMC (described in Configuring WorkPlace General Settings on
page 413) are a convenient way to change the general look and feel of WorkPlace, but they may not provide
enough control for some deployments.
This section describes two levels of customization:
•
WorkPlace style and layout can be configured in AMC, as described in Modifying the Appearance of
WorkPlace on page 442. To take this customization a step further and, for example, use a background
image for your WorkPlace pages, or change the size of the header area, download an existing style, edit
it locally, and upload it back up to your appliance. See WorkPlace Style Customization: Manual Edits on
page 447 for more information.
•
If you need to do more advanced customization, such as adding a use agreement or end-user license
agreement to the login process, you can customize specific pages in WorkPlace, including
authentication, error, and notification pages. See Overview: Custom WorkPlace Templates on page 448
for more information.
WorkPlace Style Customization: Manual Edits
WorkPlace style and layout can be configured in AMC, as described in Modifying the Appearance of WorkPlace on
page 442. If you are familiar with creating Web content and style sheets (.css), you can take this customization
a step further and, for example, make your login and logoff pages visually consistent with your corporate
standards, or modify the error pages (which appear if a resource is unavailable or a user provides invalid
credentials) to include detailed support or troubleshooting information.
The most efficient way to create a new style is to download an existing style, edit it locally, and upload it back
up to your appliance.
To fully customize a WorkPlace style
1
On the main navigation menu, click WorkPlace.
2
In the Styles list on the Appearance page, select a style that you want to use as your starting point, and
then click Download. (Styles can be downloaded only one at a time.)
3
The style is downloaded as a compressed (.zip) file, and its filename is a combination of
WorkPlace_Style followed by the current style name.
•
If you plan to create a new style, rename the .zip file when you save it.
•
If you plan to overwrite an existing style with your changes, keep the current filename.
4
Make edits to the cascading style sheets (one for desktop devices and one for mobile devices) and
graphics. You can use the sample WorkPlace and login HTML pages to see how page elements are
classified.
5
Gather your edits into a .zip file name WorkPlace_Style_<your style name>.zip, and then click Upload
on the WorkPlace Appearance page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
447
6
On the Upload Style page, select whether you are uploading changes to an existing style, or adding a
new WorkPlace style. Uploading a style in the form of a .zip file overwrites all style files.
7
If you are uploading a new WorkPlace style, give it a name; for example, Corporate Branding.
8
In the Style zip file box, enter the name of the .zip file you edited or created. If your new style is named
Corporate Branding, for example, the name of the corresponding file must be
WorkPlace_Style_Corporate_Branding.zip.
9
Click Upload to transfer the style-related files to your appliance.
Overview: Custom WorkPlace Templates
There are situations in which you need to completely customize the way that WorkPlace looks and what steps
are involved in the login process. For example:
•
You may want to use your existing corporate portal (where that portal application has been defined as a
resource) instead of WorkPlace. Here you would customize the login, logoff, notification, and error
pages to match the look and feel of your existing portal.
•
You might want to provide access to a specific application (which has been defined as a resource) to a
business partner. Here you would customize the login, logoff, notification, and error pages to match the
look and feel of the application.
The templates you can customize fall into three categories. If you modify the ones in one category, you should
probably also modify the others to ensure consistency.
Table 137. Custom WorkPlace template types
Template type
Description
Authentication
The pages used to gather a user’s credentials, including selecting a realm and entering
a username, password, or passcode.
You might use these templates to provide the user with on-screen information about
how to log in to your network.
Error
The pages displayed when an error occurs, such as invalid user input (an
authorization-denied message or a failed login), or an error in the appliance.
You might use these templates to provide the user with support information, such as
administrator contact information and where to find user guides.
Notification
The pages that provide the user with basic information required to interact with the
system, including the logout page (confirming successful logout) and pages containing
messages from the authentication module (such as a password-expiration warning).
Although you can redesign the layout or add graphics and text on these pages, you cannot modify or remove the
existing elements. For example, on the authentication page you cannot rename the Login button. These
elements are dynamically generated by WorkPlace.
•
The WorkPlace pages that are presented to the user after login cannot be customized manually; they are
controlled from AMC.
•
Customized templates are not included in the configuration data that is distributed to other appliances
during replication. See What Settings Are Replicated? on page 322 for more information about replicating
configuration data.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
448
How Template Files are Matched
You can customize templates globally, or on a per-WorkPlace site basis. For example, you might customize the
global templates to use one design, and then override that design on a site-by-site basis by modifying its
templates.
When a user connects to a WorkPlace site, the appliance first looks for the most specific template. If one is not
found, it checks for the generic template for the category (authentication, error, or notification). If neither is
found, the default WorkPlace template (the one under AMC’s control) is used.
The following tables list the templates available for full-screen devices (desktops and laptops), along with the
corresponding file names. For small form factor devices, prefix the file names as follows:
•
For smartphone and PDA devices, prefix the file name with compact-.
•
For WAP devices, prefix the file name with micro-.
For example, to customize the page users see when selecting a realm, edit realm-select.tmpl. The equivalent
pages for smaller devices are compact-realm-select.tmpl (for smartphones and PDAs), and micro-realmselect.tmpl (for WAP devices).
Authentication
Table 138. Template files: authentication
Description
File name
User selects a realm
realm-select.tmpl
User provides login credentials
authentication-request.tmpl
Error
Table 139. Template files: errors
Description
File name
Realm selection failed
realm-error.tmpl
Invalid credentials supplied
authentication-error.tmpl
Access to resource is denied
authorization-error.tmpl
Appliance license capacity exceeded
licensing-error.tmpl
EPC error
epc-error.tmpl
Status
Table 140. Template files: status
Description
File name
Authentication notification (such as password expiration)
authentication-status.tmpl
Logoff successful page
logoff-status.tmpl
EPC successful logoff page
epc-logoff.tmpl
Generic
Table 141. Template files: generic
Description
File name
EPC download page
epc-launch.tmpl
User provides login credentials
authentication.tmpl
General errors
error.tmpl
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
449
Table 141. Template files: generic
Description
File name
General status
status.tmpl
General page (applied if no other specific template is found)
custom.tmpl
NOTE: The default WorkPlace template files (named extraweb.tmpl, compact-extraweb.tmpl, and microextraweb.tmpl) should never be edited: your changes will be overwritten the next time you customize
WorkPlace in AMC.
Customizing WorkPlace Templates
The appearance of WorkPlace is controlled using several templates. To customize the templates, you create an
HTML file (or, in the case of a small form factor device, an xHTML or cHTML file) using any standard Web design
tool or text editor.
If your customization includes graphics, upload them to this folder:
/usr/local/extranet/htdocs/__extraweb__/images. If an images directory is not already present, you can
create it by typing the following command:
mkdir -p /usr/local/extranet/htdocs/__extraweb__/images
The file names you must use are described in How Template Files are Matched on page 449. For small form
factor devices, a prefix is added:
•
For smartphone and PDA devices, prefix the file name with compact-.
•
For WAP devices, prefix the file name with micro-.
To customize the WorkPlace templates for desktop devices
1
Create an HTML file containing the desired layout, and add the WorkPlace-specific tags:
•
Within the BODY tag, add an HTML COMMENT tag containing the word “EXTRAWEB”:
<!-- EXTRAWEB -->
This tag is required: it determines where to place content dynamically generated by the
appliance. Without it, the user trying to log in to WorkPlace will be repeatedly sent back to the
beginning of the authentication process.
•
Add a reference to the external JavaScript file:
<script language="javascript"
src="/__extraweb__/template.js"></script>
•
To have your templates display any WorkPlace content (including the .css file or the custom logo
you configured in AMC), modify your HTML code to reference the /__extraweb__/images/ path.
For example:
<img src="/__extraweb__/images/mylogo.gif">
2
Save the file with the appropriate file name using a .tmpl file extension.
To customize the WorkPlace templates for small form factor devices
1
Create a file in xHTML (for smartphones or PDAs) or cHTML (for WAP devices) format containing the
desired layout, and add the WorkPlace-specific tags:
•
Within the BODY tag, add a COMMENT tag containing the word “EXTRAWEB”:
<!-- EXTRAWEB -->
This tag is required: it determines where to place content dynamically generated by the
appliance. Without it, the user trying to log in to WorkPlace will be repeatedly sent back to the
beginning of the authentication process.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
450
•
To have your templates display any WorkPlace content (including the .css file or the custom logo
you configured in AMC), modify your code to reference the /__extraweb__/images/ path. For
example:
<img src="/__extraweb__/images/mylogo.gif">
2
Save the file with the appropriate file name using a .tmpl file extension.
Giving Users Access to WorkPlace
Because WorkPlace is a Web application, users can access it through a standard Web browser. You can also
incorporate WorkPlace links into a Web page or a portal hosted on your own network.
You must tell users which URL to use in order to access WorkPlace. You can give users the default WorkPlace
URL, or you can give them a URL for a customized WorkPlace site.
Table 142. WorkPlace site types
WorkPlace site type
URL
Description
Default WorkPlace site
https://<server_name>
The <server_name> is the fully qualified
domain name (FQDN) contained in the
appliance’s SSL certificate. For more
information, see Certificates on page 152.
Custom WorkPlace site
http://<custom_fqdn>
The <custom_fqdn> is the external FQDN
associated with the WorkPlace site. For more
information, see WorkPlace Sites on page 439.
If users will be accessing WorkPlace from a Web page or portal hosted on your network, you may want to
provide a Log out button to preserve the security of user accounts. To do this, give users the following
WorkPlace site URL:
https://<server_name>/__extraweb__logoff
The <server_name> is the actual FQDN from your appliance’s SSL certificate.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
451
End Point Control and the User Experience
When Secure Mobile Access End Point Control components are enabled, the WorkPlace login process includes
additional steps, which vary depending on whether Cache Cleaner is used. For more information, see Overview:
End Point Control on page 349.
How Cache Cleaner Works
With Cache Cleaner, the typical WorkPlace session looks like this:
1
In a Web browser, the user types the appropriate WorkPlace URL.
2
The user logs in to WorkPlace.
3
The user must accept any Secure Mobile Access security warnings that appear. The Cache Cleaner icon
appears in the taskbar notification area.
4
The user accesses network resources as needed.
5
When the user ends the Cache Cleaner session, Cache Cleaner deletes all data associated with the
session. All browser windows are closed by Cache Cleaner upon logout. A dialog box warns users that all
browser windows will be closed on logout.
NOTE: Because Cache Cleaner closes all browser windows on logout, and if you configure Cache Cleaner
to close other browser windows at startup, make sure your users are aware: if someone is filling out a
form, for example, anything that isn’t submitted when the browser window closes will be lost.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
452
10
User Access Components and Services
The Dell SMA appliance includes several components that enable users to access resources on your network.
This section describes each of the user access components and the services that control them.
Many of these components are provisioned or activated from the WorkPlace portal. For more information about
WorkPlace, see The WorkPlace Portal on page 406.
•
User Access Agents
•
Client Installation Packages
•
Network Tunnel Client Branding
•
The OnDemand Proxy Agent
•
Managing Access Services
•
Terminal Server Access
User Access Agents
User access agents are deployed to client devices based on the community to which the user belongs. Most
agents are deployed automatically when the user logs in to the WorkPlace portal using a browser. The
installation package for these two access agents can also be made available for download from a file share on
your network or deployed through applications such as Microsoft’s Systems Management Server (SMS) or IBM’s
Tivoli. For more information, see Selecting Access Methods for a Community on page 67.
When deployed automatically—when a user logs in using a browser—the access agents are both deployed and
activated on the first visit. This generally requires the user to accept a download for the Secure Endpoint
Manager (SEM), which will in turn manage the access agent installation and future access agent updates. On
subsequent visits to the WorkPlace portal from the same client device using the same browser, the access
agents are automatically activated without user intervention. See Client and Agent Provisioning (Windows) on
page 455 for more information.
The following table compares the capabilities of access agents and lists their requirements. For other systemrequirement information, see Client Components on page 21.
Table 143. Access agent comparison
Translated,
Custom Port
mapped,
Custom FQDN
mapped Web
access
OnDemand
Mapped Mode
OnDemand
Tunnel agent
Web Proxy
Agent
Proxy access Web access
(TCP protocol) (HTTP protocol)
Connect Tunnel
client
Network tunnel access
(IP protocol)
Application support
TCP-based client/server
applications
x
x
TCP- or UDP-based
client/server applications
x
x
x
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
453
Table 143. Access agent comparison
URLs and Web applications
Network tunnel access
(IP protocol)
Proxy access Web access
(TCP protocol) (HTTP protocol)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Windows networking
Web-based file access
x
Native Windows file access
(Network Neighborhood)
x
x
Mapped network drives
x
x
Windows domain logon
x
Connection types
Forward connections
x
x
Reverse connections (such as
FTP or SMS)
x
x
Cross-connections
(such as VoIP)
x
x
Windows
x
x
x
Linux or Macintosh
x
x
x
Operating systems
x
Windows Mobile
Administrator privileges
required to install
client/agent
x
x
x
Deployment
Auto-activated from
WorkPlace
x
Provisioned from WorkPlace
x
Provisioned outside of
WorkPlace
x
x
x
(1)
x
x
x
(1)
Port-mapped mode requires ActiveX or Java. For a user without administrator rights who can’t run ActiveX,
the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is used.
Related Topics
•
Client and Agent Provisioning (Windows)
•
WorkPlace
•
The Tunnel Clients
•
Web Access
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
454
Client and Agent Provisioning (Windows)
Secure Endpoint Manager is a component that enables you to provision Windows users with EPC and access
agents reliably when they log in to WorkPlace. It provides better application compatibility for applications that
need an agent, and more reliable EPC interrogation; in addition, most client updates do not require
administrator privileges. If something goes wrong during provisioning, the error is automatically recorded in a
client installation log (identified by username) that you can view in AMC.
Installing Secure Endpoint Manager is a one-time step and does not require that the user have administrator
privileges. The only other time users will be (briefly) aware of it once it’s installed is when an access agent or
the Access Manager itself needs to be updated. Installing Secure Endpoint Manager is also not required, but
users without it will have just Web-only access to resources in WorkPlace, or be forced to log out, depending on
how you configure the community.
•
Secure Endpoint Manager
•
Installing Secure Endpoint Manager
•
Enabling Secure Endpoint Manager Software Update Policies
•
Provisioning and Personal Firewalls
•
Client Installation Logs
Secure Endpoint Manager
Secure Endpoint Manager (SEM) is a software component that is installed on a client device. It is installed when
the Dell SMA product is accessed from a Web browser. SEM enables a user on a client device to log in to an SMA
appliance and perform tasks using a Web browser.
SEM provides the installation and activation of several client components, such as OnDemand Tunnel, End Point
Control, OnDemand Mapped Mode, and Native Access Modules.
Dell Secure Mobile Access (SMA) provides an update policy for Secure Endpoint Manager (SEM) and its associated
sub-components, such as Native Access Modules, End Point Control, OnDemand Tunnel, Web Proxy, and
OnDemand Mapped Mode.
SEM installation and software update policies are supported on Windows, Mac OSX, and Linux client operating
systems.
After the server-side firmware has been updated, SMA administrators can control and update specific user
Groups and Communities individually, eliminating the need to update thousands of client devices
simultaneously.
SEM software updates can be triggered using Web access or Tunnel access methods or using both methods.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
455
Installing Secure Endpoint Manager
Users are normally required to install a Secure Mobile Access agent or client before they are granted access to
network resources when they log in to WorkPlace. This is the recommended setting: it provides better
compatibility for applications that need an agent, which means broader access for users and fewer Help Desk
calls for you.
Users logging in to WorkPlace are offered these choices when this setting is enabled:
•
Install: Secure Endpoint Manager is installed on the user’s computer. Users will need to do this only once.
•
Logout: The user’s session is ended.
If you configure the community such that an agent or client is not required, users are offered these choices
when they log in:
Install: Secure Endpoint Manager is installed on the user’s computer. Users will need to do this only once.
CAUTION: In this scenario (assuming EPC is enabled), the user is placed in either the Default zone or a
Quarantine zone, depending on how the community is configured. A Quarantine zone may be too
restrictive, and the Default zone probably needs to accommodate many other types of users. You
might want to create a unique, Web-only zone for users who don’t require an agent. See Scenario 3:
Employees Connecting from a Public Kiosk on page 355 for ideas on how to set up this kind of zone.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
456
Installing Secure Endpoint Manager on a Computer Running Vista
When users install Secure Endpoint Manager for the first time on a computer running the Microsoft Vista
operating system, they see an additional consent dialog that are not seen by users with earlier Windows
versions. Users should follow the on-screen instructions and select Do not show me the warning for this
program again, and then click Allow.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
457
Enabling Secure Endpoint Manager Software Update Policies
Software update policies for Secure Endpoint Manager (SEM) are enabled at the Community level.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
458
To enable an automatic software update policy for Secure Endpoint Manager:
1
Log in to AMC.
2
Go to the Realms > {Your Realm} > Communities > {Your Community} > Access Methods page.
The Secure Endpoint Manager (SEM) panel is near the bottom of the page.
There are three options that can be configured for the SEM Software Update Policy:
•
Update only when necessary – Select this option if you want the SEM to be updated on client
devices based on the following criteria whether or not it is necessary. The following criteria
triggers and an update:
•
When Personal Device Authorization is not enabled on any client version 10.6.1 and older.
Clients running versions 10.7.X or 11.X.X are not prompted for updates.
•
When Personal Device Authorization is enabled on any client version 11.1.0 and older,
regardless of which release line the client is at: 10.6.X, 10.7.X, or 11.X.
When the Update only when necessary option is selected, updates and installations are
performed whenever an update is required by the system or whenever an update is required by
the administrator.
•
Always update - Select this option if you want the SEM to always be kept up-to-date on client
devices. This includes differences in hotfix, maintenance, and major releases (any differences in
those triggers an update).
When the Always Update option is selected, when a user logs in, they are given a choice to
update the SEM or log out.
•
Notify user - Select the Notify the user when installing or updating client software option if
you want notifications to be sent to the user about the SEM during an installation or an update.
This is controlled by the AMC administrator and applies to both installations and updates of the
SEM.
The only time a user, that cannot make it to Land on WorkPlace, will not get notification is if
the AMC Administrator has enabled notifications, but the user has opted out by clicking Logout.
In cases where SEM is required, either Access Agents or EPC must be provisioned. Otherwise, the
SEM installation or update will fail.
Automatic Installation of SEM Components
If SEM or any of its subcomponents are not present on a device, they will be installed during the update process,
regardless of which option is selected in the SEM Software Update Policy. Access to WorkPlace resources cannot
be guaranteed unless SEM and its subcomponents are installed properly.
•
If SEM is not installed, you are prompted to Accept Installation of the SEM components.
•
•
If you select Yes, SEM is installed.
•
If the SEM Installation is Successful, you can continue to Land on Workplace.
•
If the SEM Installation Fails, you are Logged Out.
If you select No, you are Logged Out.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
459
Provisioning and Personal Firewalls
Some third-party firewall products regulate outbound connections by process (in addition to port and protocol).
These firewalls may raise a security alert dialog regarding Secure Endpoint Manager during the provisioning of
agents or EPC components. In most cases, the user should be instructed to “unblock” or “permit” the outbound
connection.
There are a few firewalls, such as one supplied by Trend Micro, that do not permit a user with restricted rights
to override firewall settings. For corporate systems on which users have limited access rights, you may want to
update the firewall settings before deploying the Secure Mobile Access VPN so that users won’t have to respond
to these security dialog prompts. See Using Personal Firewalls with Agents on page 588 for more information.
Client Installation Logs
If something goes wrong during client or agent installation on a computer running Windows, the error is
recorded in a client installation log on the user’s local computer. These logs are automatically uploaded to the
appliance and listed in AMC if the user has Secure Endpoint Manager installed. For more information, see Client
Installation Logs (Windows) on page 299.
WorkPlace
WorkPlace is a Web-based portal that provides dynamically personalized access to Web resources protected by
the Web proxy service. After a user logs in to WorkPlace, a home page appears that contains an administratordefined list of shortcuts. These shortcuts point to Web-based file shares, Web-based applications, and terminal
server resources to which the user has access privileges.
All Secure Mobile Access user access components are provisioned or activated through the WorkPlace portal.
WorkPlace is accessible from any standard Web browser. For more information, see The WorkPlace Portal on
page 406.
Network Explorer
Network Explorer, available through WorkPlace, is a Web-based user interface that provides access to any
shared Windows file system resources a user has permission to access (even from a computer that isn’t running
Windows). These resources can include domains, servers, computers, workgroups, folders, and files.
Network Explorer is an optional component that can be controlled through policy or completely disabled. It is
supported on any browser supported by WorkPlace. For more information, see The WorkPlace Portal on page
406.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
460
The Tunnel Clients
The Secure Mobile Access tunnel clients provide secure access for TCP and UDP traffic; bi-directional traffic,
such as remote Help Desk applications; cross-connections, such as VoIP applications; and reverse connections,
such as SMS. The clients all provide network-level access to all resources, effectively making the user’s
computer a node on your network:
•
OnDemand Tunnel agent is a browser-based, Web-activated agent.
•
Connect Tunnel client is a Web-installed client. The tunnel clients are managed from AMC using the
network tunnel service. Configuring this service to manage TCP/IP connections from the network tunnel
clients requires setting up IP address pools that are used to allocate IP addresses to the clients.
Related Topics
•
OnDemand Tunnel Agent
•
Connect Tunnel Client
OnDemand Tunnel Agent
The OnDemand Tunnel agent enables you to provide complete network and application access through a Web
browser to resources protected by the network tunnel service. The OnDemand Tunnel agent is a lightweight
agent that provides the same broad application and protocol access as the Connect Tunnel client, but it is
integrated into the WorkPlace portal and automatically starts each time users log in to WorkPlace.
The OnDemand Tunnel agent is supported on Windows, Linux, and Macintosh, and requires Internet Explorer
with ActiveX or Java enabled, or Mozilla Firefox or Safari with the Java Runtime Environment (JRE).
Connect Tunnel Client
The Connect Tunnel client provides full access to resources protected by the network tunnel service, and to any
type of application, including those that use TCP, and non-TCP protocols such as VoIP and ICMP. Connect Tunnel
also includes split-tunneling control, granular access controls, proxy detection, and authentication.
The Connect Tunnel client can be deployed in a number of ways (for more information, see Client Installation
Packages on page 479):
•
Offer users a shortcut in WorkPlace for downloading and installing the client; the link points to the
Connect Tunnel resource, described in Built-In Resources on page 224.
•
If you don’t want to require users to log in to WorkPlace, have them download and install the Connect
Tunnel client components from a network location (such as a Web server, FTP server, or file server).
•
Distribute installation packages using an application such as SMS or Tivoli.
•
Create a master image of a Connect Tunnel install and copy it to user systems using a third-party diskimage copying utility such as Norton Ghost.
The Connect Tunnel client is supported on Windows, Linux, and Macintosh operating systems, and installation of
the Connect Tunnel client requires users to have administrator privileges. All Connect Tunnel configuration and
management is performed in AMC.
The Connect Tunnel client supports command-line utilities such as “ngdial” that can modify the normal run-time
behavior of the client and enable you to perform troubleshooting and diagnostic tasks without using the
standard graphical user interface. For more information, see Command Line Access to Connect Tunnel with
NGDIAL on page 483.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
461
When Connect Tunnel is active, a Connect Tunnel icon is displayed in the system taskbar. Mousing over this icon
displays the following popup window:
You can configure the Windows version of the Connect Tunnel client software to be automatically updated on
users’ computers whenever a new version becomes available. For more information, see Windows Tunnel Client
Automatic Client Updating on page 75.
NOTE: A user logged in as a “guest” on a computer running the Windows Vista operating system will not
be able to run Connect Tunnel. A guest account is for users who don't have a permanent account on your
computer or domain—it allows them to use your computer without giving them access to your personal
files.
Support for Dell Desktop Workspace
Moka5 Suite is an enterprise desktop management platform that is used to create and administer layered virtual
desktop images called LivePCs, which execute as guests on a Type-2 Hypervisor.
Dell provides a pre-installed SMA VPN client (Windows) on the virtual windows OS image that is created using
the Moka5 Creator.
The windows SMA Connect Tunnel client can be integrated with the Moka5 Creator by making changes to the
SMA Connect Tunnel client (Windows) as specified in the Moka5 Integration Guide.
The SMA Connect Tunnel client works well with the Dell KACE K1000 management appliance.
Web Access
This section provides an overview of the Web Proxy Agent and zero-client Web access methods such as
translated Web access, custom port mapped Web access, and custom FQDN mapped Web access. A section
describing Exchange ActiveSync Web access is also included.
•
Web Proxy Agent
•
Translated ActiveSync Web Access
•
Custom Port Mapped Web Access
•
Custom FQDN Mapped Web Access
•
Notes for Custom Port Mapped or Custom FQDN Mapped Web Access
•
Seamless Editing in SharePoint
•
Exchange ActiveSync Web Access
•
ActiveSync Resource Configuration with SAN Certificates
•
Outlook Anywhere Web Access
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
462
Web Proxy Agent
The Web Proxy Agent provides access through the WorkPlace portal to any Web resource—including Web-based
applications, Web portals, and Web servers—as well as Windows network shares. The Web Proxy Agent provides
improved application compatibility over Translated Web access, but provisioning the Web Proxy Agent can take
a little extra time when a user first logs in to WorkPlace. The Web Proxy Agent requires Internet Explorer with
ActiveX enabled.
NOTE: The Web Proxy Agent is being deprecated.
In the absence of a Web Proxy agent, the administrator should select the Network tunnel client option on the
User Access > Realms > Configure Community > Access Methods > Tunnel IP Protocol page, for a given user
community. Unlike the Web Proxy Agent, which provides access only to Web-based resources, the Network
tunnel client provides access to all types of resources.
NOTE: You must have Administrator privileges to install the Network tunnel client option. See The Tunnel
Clients on page 461.
Translated ActiveSync Web Access
By default, the appliance is configured to deploy a Microsoft ActiveX control (the “Web Proxy Agent”) on
Microsoft Windows systems running Internet Explorer. If the Web Proxy Agent cannot run, Translated Web access
can be used as a fallback. Translated Web provides basic access to Web resources, and enables you to create
aliases that obscure internal host names. It proxies Web content directly through the appliance and provides
access to any Web resource that is specifically configured to run with WorkPlace, as well as access to Windows
network shares. Translated Web access works on any Web browser that supports SSL and has JavaScript enabled.
It uses URL rewriting, which may have limitations with some Web applications, such as AJAX. Custom port
mapping or custom FQDN mapping may be used as an alternative to URL translation.
Custom Port Mapped Web Access
Custom port mapping involves mapping the backend resource or server to a port number at the EX Series
appliance. Apache listens on this port and all HTTPS traffic received on it is terminated at the appliance. A new
HTTP request is made to retrieve the mapped backend resource. The HTTP reply is transmitted using plain text
to facilitate translation of absolute URLs. URL rewriting is not used. When using custom port mapping, any
firewalls in the network must be configured to keep the specific ports open. Custom port mapping does not
require installation of a client agent, and works with any Web browser.
Custom FQDN Mapped Web Access
Custom FQDN mapping means that the backend resource or server is mapped to an external fully qualified
domain name (host and domain). The resource should be accessed with the FQDN name rather than with the IP
address. The FQDN name should be resolvable to an IP address in the public domain. Apache listens on port 443
at this IP address. All HTTPS traffic is terminated at this socket. A new HTTP request is made to retrieve the
mapped backend resource. The HTTP reply is transmitted using plain text to facilitate translation of absolute
URLs. URL rewriting is not used.
Notes for Custom Port Mapped or Custom FQDN Mapped Web
Access
These access methods are ideal for all well written applications that predominantly use relative URLs. Ajax and
Flash applications may also behave better with these access methods than the Translated Web Access.
The following applications are recommended for Custom Port Mapped or Custom FQDN Mapped Web Access over
Translated Web Access:
•
Share Point 2010, SharePoint 2013
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
463
•
Outlook Web Access 2013
•
Dominos Web Access
•
Complex web applications (Java applets/AJAX/Flash/other advanced web technologies)
Configuration Requirements
•
Each resource should be configured using only one of the access methods. Do not mix translated, custom
port mapped and custom FQDN mapped modes.
•
Do not include a path in the URL. For example, do not use a URL like:
http(s)://backend_hostname(:portNumber)
To set the complete path on WorkPlace, specify the start page on the Edit WorkPlace ShortCuts >
Advanced page, as explained in Adding Web Shortcuts on page 415.
•
Use of valid Certificates is highly recommended.
•
Single sign-on for the appliance might not work with Internet Explorer when a custom FQDN
mapped resource with an invalid certificate is accessed from WorkPlace. For example, this could
happen when a user logs in to WorkPlace and clicks a custom FQDN mapped resource that has a
self-signed certificate or otherwise does not have a valid certificate on the appliance. A
JavaScript certificate warning is popped up to the Internet Explorer user. After the user accepts
the certificate, Internet Explorer does not transmit the “referrer” HTTP header to the initial
page. This referrer value is required for single sign-on functionality. This issue does not occur
when using browsers other than Internet Explorer, or when there is no certificate warning, or
when wildcard or SAN certificates are used.
This Internet Explorer issue is described at:
http://connect.microsoft.com/IE/feedback/ViewFeedback.aspx?FeedbackID=379975
•
•
Custom Port Mapped resource may get redirected to Workplace Portal in case of certificate
warning while accessing with Internet Explorer.
The resources should be configured and accessed using host and domain name only, not via IP address.
Known Behavior
•
Logging out of applications like OWA, DWA and SharePoint from an Internet Explorer browser may log you
out of Workplace. Note that logging out does not affect other active WorkPlace shortcut sessions. Only
the browser is logged off as the backend application clears all cookies (including appliance specific
cookies) on logoff.
Seamless Editing in SharePoint
The Dell Secure Mobile Access (SMA) platform supports Microsoft SharePoint access using reverse proxy, as well
as seamless editing of Office documents while in SharePoint. SMA accomplishes this by allowing persistent
cookie information to be stored on appropriate zones. Administrators can enable or disable persistent cookie
information on the user’s system.
NOTE: Editing SharePoint documents from a zone that allows persistent session storage is available only
for Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE).
NOTE: In cases where legal regulations require the consent of the user before storing persistent cookies,
the Administrator can create an Acceptable Use Policy (AUP).
NOTE: If there are zones where a user could go to unsafe zones (such as kiosk mode zones), persistent
cookies should not be enabled for those zones.
Configuring seamless editing in SharePoint is done in three parts:
•
Enabling storage of persistent session information
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
464
•
Configuring a resource as a SharePoint Web Service
•
Modifying a zone to allow storing of persistent session information
Enabling storage of persistent session information
To enable Persistent Cookie information on a user’s system:
1
Go to the End Point Control page.
2
In the Zones and Profiles panel, click Edit for Zones.
The Zones page appears.
3
Select a zone or create a new zone as follows:
a
If you want a new zone, see Creating a Device Zone on page 335.
b
If you want to change one of the existing zones, click on that zone in the table.
The Zone Definition - Device Zone page appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
465
4
Scroll down to the Client Security panel and open it.
5
Under Persistent session information, select the Allow storage of persistence session information on
client system checkbox.
Configuring a resource as a SharePoint Web Service
To configure a resource as a SharePoint Web Service:
1
Go to the Security Administration > Resources page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
466
2
Click New, then select URL from the drop-down menu.
The Add Resource - URL dialog appears.
3
Enter the Name and the URL for this resource.
4
If this resource is on the external network, select the checkbox for This destination is on the external
network.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
467
5
Scroll down to the Web proxy options panel and open it.
6
From the Web application profile menu, select SharePoint.
7
Select the Web service is Microsoft Sharepoint checkbox.
8
Select Access this from resource using a custom FQDN.
9
In the Custom FQDN box, enter the FQDN.
Modifying a zone to allow storing of persistent session information
To modify a zone to allow storing of persistent session information on a client system:
1
Go to the User Sessions page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
468
2
Click on the User Session that you want.
The Session Details page appears.
3
Click on the zone that you want.
The Zone Details window appears.
Click Edit Zone.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
469
The Zone Definition - Device Zone page appears.
4
Scroll down to the Client Security panel and open it.
5
Under Persistent session information, select the Allow storage of persistence session information on
client system checkbox.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
470
Exchange ActiveSync Web Access
Beginning in 10.6 Secure Mobile Access supports Exchange ActiveSync for Apple iPhones/iPads and smart phones
or tablets that run Android 2.1/2.2/2.3+ or the Symbian 9.x operating system.
Symbian is an open OS that acts as host to many devices. A few popular devices that run the latest Symbian OS
versions and support Exchange ActiveSync (branded as “Mail for Exchange” on Nokia devices) are:
•
Symbian OS 9.1 – Nokia E65, N71
•
Symbian OS 9.3 – Nokia E72
•
Symbian OS 9.4 – Nokia X6, Samsung Omnia HD
Once the administrator configures the Dell SMA appliance, a user with a supported smartphone or tablet can
configure the device to access email using Exchange ActiveSync.
To do this, the user enters an email account name, server, domain, user name and password. The user turns on
ActiveSync for this account. The results are saved as a new email account on the device.
With ActiveSync turned on, the device gives the user notice when new mail arrives.
When the user syncs the iPhone or Symbian device to a computer that is connected to the Exchange server
through the Dell SMA appliance, the mail, contacts and calendar are updated. On Symbian, Tasks and Out Of
Office settings are also supported.
Enabling Exchange ActiveSync access on the appliance
The administrator can enable Exchange ActiveSync access for a community of iPhone or Symbian device users.
This involves the following tasks:
•
Create a realm that uses an Active Directory authentication server. Realms that use chained
authentication are not supported for Exchange ActiveSync.
•
Create a resource for Exchange ActiveSync using the “Exchange Server Options” section of the Resources
Add/Edit page for a URL resource.
The Exchange Server Options section allows the administrator to specify a custom FQDN, IP address, SSL
certificate, and realm to use for providing Exchange ActiveSync access.
The custom FQDN, IP address, and SSL certificate options function in the same way as those for
Workplace sites that use these options. The custom FQDN provides a host/domain name through which
ActiveSync connections or sessions can be established.
The IP address is a virtual IP address hosted by the appliance, and must be on the same subnet as the
external interface (or the internal if single-homed) of the Dell SMA appliance so that it is reachable via
the public interface of the appliance.
The SSL certificate can be a wildcard certificate or you can configure a server certificate that matches
the host name.
The only realms that appear in the Realm drop-down list are those that use an Active Directory
authentication server. Realms that use chained authentication do not appear in the list. A realm used for
Exchange ActiveSync cannot be changed to provide chained authentication or to use an authentication
server other than Active Directory.
•
Define a Device Profile for end point control of Exchange ActiveSync devices from the EPC page in AMC.
You can select Exchange ActiveSync as the device profile type.
The only attribute that can be configured for this device profile is “Equipment ID”. The device serial
number is used as the identifier. Equipment ID retrieval uses the underlying operating system hard disk
drivers. All driver updates should be applied to ensure that Equipment ID retrieval works reliably.
The Exchange ActiveSync device profile can be included in any zone for evaluation.
NOTE: ActiveSync clients will not be able to connect on zones that have Device
authorization enabled.
•
View the Network Settings page to see all custom IP addresses used for virtual hosting, the FQDNs that
listen on these addresses, and the associated Resources or WorkPlace Sites.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
471
The Resources and WorkPlace Site items are links to the configuration page for easy navigation and
editing.
•
View the User Sessions page, which displays Exchange ActiveSync sessions as belonging to the “Exchange
ActiveSync” Access Agent. “Exchange ActiveSync” is an option in the Agent list under Filters.
Exchange ActiveSync sessions
Initial connections to the ActiveSync Exchange Server FQDN name cause a username and password challenge by
the appliance.
If the user successfully authenticates, the ActiveSync session is established with the Exchange server without
further user interaction.
For users connecting to Exchange 2007, the device IMEI serial number is parsed out of the ActiveSync stream
during session initialization. The administrator of the Exchange system might need to make configuration
changes that result in the device identifier being sent.
Authentication methods from the appliance to the Exchange server use basic authentication.
Notes for Exchange ActiveSync device profiles
•
Device authorization is not supported by ActiveSync clients. ActiveSync clients will not be able to
connect on zones that have Device authorization enabled.
•
The profiles only work with an ActiveSync stream because that is the only way to obtain the device
value.
•
The profiles only work on ActiveSync streams that are interacting with Exchange 2007 servers.
•
Only ActiveSync for Exchange is supported in this release.
ActiveSync Resource Configuration with SAN Certificates
Starting in 10.7, SAN certificate support has been added. SAN certificates can be used for different host names
on the same IP address.
However, if you do not want to use a SAN certificate and instead want to continue configuring ActiveSync
resources as in previous versions, the same can be achieved with a CEM variable
MGMT_ALLOW_LEGACY_VIRTUAL_HOSTS being set to TRUE.
To use a SAN certificate, configure the IP address on the Exchange Server options page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
472
Outlook Anywhere Web Access
Starting with 11.4, SMA supports Outlook Anywhere for Microsoft Outlook clients on Windows. Once the
administrator configures the Dell SMA appliance, a user can configure the Microsoft Outlook Client to access
Emails using Outlook Anywhere and can use the Out-of-Office service as well.
Configuring Outlook Anywhere on the appliance
The administrator can enable Outlook Anywhere access for Microsoft Outlook Client users. This involves the
following tasks:
•
Create a realm that uses an Active Directory authentication server. Realms that use chained
authentication are not supported for Outlook Anywhere.
•
Create a resource for Outlook Anywhere using the Exchange Server Options section of the Resources
Add/Edit page for a URL resource.
The Exchange Server Options section allows the administrator to specify the Exchange Server FQDN and
realm to use for providing Exchange access. The Exchange Server FQDN should be same as the one
configured at the exchange server for Outlook Anywhere RPC over HTTP or MAPI over HTTP and should
resolve to the DELL SMA appliance public IP.
The realms that appear in the Realm drop-down list are those that use an Active Directory
authentication server. Realms that use chained authentication do not appear in the list. A realm used for
Outlook Anywhere cannot be changed to provide chained authentication or to use an authentication
server other than Active Directory.
Microsoft Outlook will try to connect to the Exchange Autodiscover FQDN when configuring the Email
account. For example, the Email address, user@example.com, would have an Autodiscover FQDN of
autodiscover.example.com. The name autodiscover.example.com must be configured in a public DNS
server with the public IP address of the appliance.
The User Sessions page displays Exchange sessions as belonging to the Outlook Anywhere Access Agent.
Outlook Anywhere Session
When connecting to Outlook Anywhere, users must submit their username/password credentials to the
appliance. If the user authenticates successfully, the OA session is established with the exchange server.
The username/password is extracted from the basic authorization headers from the client and is authenticated
with the Active Directory server to establish a session to appliance. Then, the connection to the exchange
server is established after successful authentication.
If non-basic authentication headers come in the initial requests, the client is prompted again for the basic
headers. Then, the username/password is extracted and authenticated against the Active Directory server.
Once authentication is successful, the session is established with the exchange server.
If Autodiscover is enabled, the Outlook Anywhere client will automatically update the server information using
the Email ID. This may take some time while the server is updated.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
473
Microsoft Outlook Client Configuration
To configure a new Microsoft Outlook client account:
1
Open Microsoft Outlook.
2
Go to the File > Info page.
3
Click the Add Account button. The Add New account window appears.
4
Enter Your Name, Email Address, and Password.
The client will automatically fetch the server information using autodiscover and setup the account.
Make sure the autodiscover URL at AMC and Exchange server are configured properly.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
474
To configure a already existing Microsoft Outlook client account:
For RPC/HTTP you can manually configure the Outlook Anywhere settings at Microsoft Outlook client, though it
automatically updates with the latest server information if autodiscover is enabled.
1
Open Microsoft Outlook.
2
Click on File > Info page.
3
Click Account Settings.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
475
The Account Settings dialog appears.
4
Click Change...
The Change Account dialog appears.
5
Click the More Settings... button.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
476
The Microsoft Exchange dialog appears.
6
Select the Connection tab.
NOTE: The Connection tab is not available for MAPI/HTTP. It gets the server information
automatically.
7
Under Outlook Anywhere, select Connect to Microsoft Exchange using HTTP.
8
Click the Exchange Proxy Settings button.
The Microsoft Exchange Proxy Settings dialog appears.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
477
9
In the Use this URL to connect to my proxy server for Exchange field, enter the Outlook Anywhere
FQDN.
10 Under Proxy authentication settings, from the drop-down menu, select Basic Authentication.
NOTE: Since Basic Authentication is supported only for RPC/HTTP in SMA, you must make sure that
Basic Authentication is configured for Outlook Anywhere RPC/HTTP at the Exchange server.
11 Click OK to save the configuration.
12 Exit Microsoft Outlook.
13 Open Microsoft Outlook to start a new session.
To view the Outlook Anywhere sessions belonging to the Outlook Anywhere Access Agent:
1
Go to the Monitor > Users Session page.
2
Under Filters, in the Agent list, select the Exchange option.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
478
Client Installation Packages
You can make the Connect Tunnel client components available for users to download and install from another
network location (such as a Web server, FTP server, or file server) without requiring them to log in to WorkPlace.
You can also push the Connect Tunnel client installation package to users through an application such as Tivoli or
SMS, or create a master image of a client install and copy it to user systems using a third-party disk-image
copying utility.
The client setup packages are available for you to download from AMC. With the Windows-based packages
(Connect Tunnel for Windows), you also have the option of configuring various client settings in an .ini
configuration file before distributing the client to users.
NOTE: The easiest way to ensure that users are running the latest version is to make client updates
automatic; see Windows Tunnel Client Automatic Client Updating on page 75 for more information.
Related Topics
•
Downloading the Secure Mobile Access Client Installation Packages
•
Customizing the Configuration for the Connect Tunnel Client
•
Command Line Access to Connect Tunnel with NGDIAL
•
Command Syntax
•
Running Connect as a Service
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
479
Downloading the Secure Mobile Access Client
Installation Packages
This section describes how to download the installation package for the Connect Tunnel client to your local
workstation.
To download a client installation package
1
From the main navigation menu, click Agent Configuration.
2
In the Secure Mobile Access access agents area, under Client installation packages, click Download.
The Client Installation Packages page appears.
3
Select the language for the installation packages. Each package includes translated user interface
elements and online help.
4
Download the client installation files for the platforms you plan to support (<xx> represents the language
you selected):
Table 144. Download links
Download link
Installation package
Windows
ngsetup_<xx>.exe
Linux x86
AventailConnect-Linux.tar
Mac OS X 10.5.x
AventailConnect-OSX.dmg
Windows Mobile
cmsetup.exe
Windows service
(Connect Tunnel Service)
ctssetup_<xx>.exe
5
The Download Client Package page appears, and a File Download dialog box prompts you to save the
file to your local computer.
6
Click Save, browse to the appropriate directory, and then click Save again.
7
Click OK on the Download Client Package page to return to the Client Installation Packages page.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
480
Customizing the Configuration for the Connect
Tunnel Client
The Connect Tunnel client setup package that you download from the appliance is not configured. You can
customize the Connect Tunnel configuration file (an .ini file) before deploying the setup package to users. This
allows you to speed things up for users by preconfiguring the client with the host name or IP address of the
appliance, the realm name used during log in, and other client options. If you skip this step, the package uses
the default appliance settings.
To customize the Connect Tunnel configuration file
1
Download the Connect Tunnel installation file onto a Windows computer as described in Downloading the
Secure Mobile Access Client Installation Packages on page 480.
2
Open a Windows command prompt by typing cmd in the Start > Run box.
3
Browse to the directory where you saved ngsetup_<xx>.exe, and then extract the installation files by
typing the following command. The destination for the unpacked files will be the current working
directory unless you specify a <path> with the expand parameter:
ngsetup_<xx>.exe -expand=<path>
4
Open the ngsetup.ini file in a text editor and specify the appropriate configuration settings.
5
Save and then close the modified ngsetup.ini file. The .ini customizations you made will be incorporated
during setup if the file is copied to the same directory in which you saved ngsetup_<xx>.exe. To specify
a different location for the .ini file, use the following command:
ngsetup_<xx>.exe -f=<path>\<configuration file name>
You can also log installation data to a file named ngmsi.log in the %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Aventail folders. Type the following for a list of all the possible
parameters:
ngsetup_<xx>.exe -?
6
The following table describes the configuration options, followed by a sample .ini file. Some of these
options are available only when Connect Tunnel is installed from WorkPlace. For any optional
components that you do not specify, default values are used.
Table 145. Configuration options
Option
Description
[Connectoid number] section
(Required) This controls the basic settings for accessing the
appliance. To enable the user to access multiple appliances,
copy this configuration block and increment the number
([Connectoid 1], [Connectoid 2], and so on).
ConnectionName=name
(Optional) The name for the connection as it will appear in the
client user interface. If you do not specify a value, the default
connection name is used (Aventail VPN Connection).
VpnServer=host name | IP
address
(Optional) The host name or IP address of the appliance. If you
do not specify a value, users must manually type the host name
or IP address of the appliance.
StartMenuIcon=[0 | 1]
(Optional) Determines whether to add a shortcut named Secure
Mobile Access VPN Connection to the Secure Mobile Access
Start menu folder. The default value is 1 (add a shortcut).
DesktopIcon=[0 | 1]
(Optional) Determines whether to add a shortcut to the
desktop. The default value is 1 (add a shortcut).
UserRealm=name
(Optional) Determines the default realm that users will log in
to. Type the realm name exactly as it appears in AMC.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
481
Table 145. Configuration options
Option
Description
DefaultAuthType=
[ADUNPW | LDAPUNPW |
RADIUSUNPW | RADIUSCRAM |
UNIX]
(Obsolete) This setting determines which type of user
authentication to perform. It applies only when accessing an EClass SMA appliance that predates v8.7.0.
StatusDlg=[0 | 1]
(Optional) Determines whether to display a status dialog box
when connecting to the appliance. The default value is 1
(status display enabled).
Taskbar=[0 | 1]
(Optional) Determines whether to display an icon in the taskbar
notification area when connected to the appliance. The default
value is 1 (icon display enabled).
RunAtStartup=[0 | 1]
(Optional) Determines whether to automatically start the
connection at Windows startup. The default value is 1 (enable
automatic startup).
[Install Settings] section
(Optional) This section contains information about the type of
MSI installation to perform. Each .ini file can include only one
[Install Settings] section.
UILevel=[FULL | REDUCED |
BASIC | NONE]
(Optional) Determines the level of user interface to include
during installation. The default value is NONE.
ProductCode=key
These settings are preconfigured and required. They should not
be modified.
PackageCode=key
FileSize=bytecount
ProductVersion=x.yy.zzz
Sample ngsetup.ini file
[Install Settings]
UILevel=FULL
ProductCode={A814B50B-B392-458A-8C31-51697E1EBB7A}
PackageCode={A77CB50B-0384-5D8A-DE3D-61099E9EB37C}
Branding=C:\Users\Admin\AppData\Roaming\Aventail\CustomBranding.zip
BrandingMD5=1fc1a7b361c3b7e81e29842372f5e875
NOTE: The value of Branding should specify the absolute path of your Custom Branding file.
The value of Branding MD5 can be obtained using any MD5 tool.
[Connectoid 1]
ConnectionName="XYZ Company Network"
VpnServer=64.94.142.134
[Connectoid 2]
ConnectionName="Test Network"
VpnServer=64.94.142.134
StartMenuIcon=1
DesktopIcon=1
UserRealm="employees"
StatusDlg=1
Taskbar=1
RunAtStartup=1
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
482
NOTE:
•
On a computer running the Windows operating system, there is a registry key that enables you to
launch programs once, after which the reference is deleted so that the program is not run again.
After Connect Tunnel is installed, any program that is listed in
HKEY_Local_Machine\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\RunOnce is executed.
•
The file cannot include certain items—such as authentication type and custom prompts—until a
connection has been made to the VPN appliance. This means that first-time users are presented
with dimmed authentication prompts. There are a few workarounds:
•
Have users install from WorkPlace.
•
Have users click Properties in the Connect dialog box and select a realm.
•
Refer to Secure Mobile Access knowledgebase article 2831 for an explanation of how to
obtain a complete configuration file from a WorkPlace installation and modify it for your
users.
Command Line Access to Connect Tunnel with
NGDIAL
The NGDIAL command-line utility establishes a connection to a remote network using Connect Tunnel, much
like the Windows RASDIAL utility does with other network connections.
The NGDIAL command-line utility can also create, delete, and modify network connection phone book entries.
Issuing the NGDIAL command without any parameters will list all RAS connections.
Beginning in software version 10.6.1, Linux and Macintosh configurations support Connect Tunnel and the
Connect Tunnel Extensibility Toolkit.
For more information about using the Windows Remote Access Service (RAS) to develop client applications that
access network resources secured by an E-Class SMA appliance through the Connect Tunnel client, see the
Connect Tunnel Extensibility Toolkit, which can be downloaded from the Support website:
https://support.software.dell.com/sonicwall-e-class-sra-series/release-notes-guides
Command Syntax
ngdial <connection name> <public> [<private>|* [<auth type>]]
[-phonebook=<phonebook>]
[-server=<server name>|<server IP>]
[-login=<login group>]
[-proxycredential=<username>[,<password>|*]]
[-status[=enable|disable]] [-icon[=enable|disable]] [-gui]
ngdial <connection name> <public> [<private>|* [<auth type>]]
[-phonebook=<phonebook>]
[-connection=<connection name>|<Connection list friendly name>]
[-proxycredential=<username>[,<password>|*]]
[-status[=enable|disable]] [-icon[=enable|disable]] [-gui]
[-nocerterrors]
ngdial <connection name> -disconnect|-d
ngdial <connection name> -prompt
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
483
[-phonebook=<phonebook>]
ngdial <connection name> [-list= <connection name>]
ngdial <connection name> [-editserver= <server name>]
ngdial <connection name> [-editrealm= <realm name>]
ngdial <connection name> -create
[-phonebook=<phonebook>]
[-server=<server name>|<server IP>]
[-login=<login group>]
[-status[=enable|disable]] [-icon[=enable|disable]]
ngdial -help | -?
Table 146. Command syntax
Option
Description
<connection name>
The name of the network connection; if the name includes a space,
enclose it in quotes.
<public>
The user’s public credential (username) for authentication; if the name
includes a space, enclose it in quotes. For example:
ngdial report_server "Jen Bates"
The public and <private> portions of the credentials must correspond
correctly with the authentication type specified by the authentication
realm on the E-Class SMA appliance.
[<private>|* [<auth
type>]]
The private credentials (password) and authentication type to be used
when authenticating the user (the <auth type> parameter is required
only for logging in to a pre-v8.7.0 appliance).
If the <private> portion of the credential is omitted or an asterisk (*) is
specified, the NGDIAL command prompts the user to enter the password.
If you do not specify an <auth type> when logging in to a pre-v8.7.0
appliance, the default authentication type for the realm is used. Values
for <auth type> are:
•
NULL: No authentication required
•
LDAPUNPW: LDAP username/password credential
•
LDAPCERTIFICATE: LDAP certificate credential
•
RADIUSCRAM: RADIUS token/securID credential
•
RADIUSUNPW: RADIUS username/password credential
•
UNIX: UNIX username/password credential
•
TEAM: SMA TEAM credential
•
ADUNPW: Active Directory username/password credential
-create
Generates a new network connection, or updates an existing network
connection, with the information passed on the command line.
-delete
Deletes the specified network connection entry from the specified phone
book. You must have system administrator privileges to perform this
operation.
[-connection=<connection
name> | <connection list
friendly name>]
Loads the connection entry for dial from connection list.
-disconnect | -d
Causes the VPN to disconnect from the <connection name> remote
network.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
484
Table 146. Command syntax
Option
Description
[-gui]
If additional information is necessary to establish the VPN network
connection, use this parameter to allow RAS to prompt the user with a
graphical user interface (GUI).
For example, the user could be prompted to accept the appliance's server
certificate if there are any problems with the certificate, or the user
might need to be notified regarding password expiration or required
changes. If the -gui option is not specified in such a case, the NGDIAL
utility fails and returns an error code to the caller.
-help | -?
Displays the command-line syntax for the NGDIAL command. When
combined with the -gui option, displays the online Help.
[-icon[=enable|disable]]
Controls the display of an icon in the taskbar notification area that allows
the user to manage the VPN network connection and receive connection
notifications. See Notes.
[-login=<login group>]
The name of the login group (authentication realm) used to authenticate
the user. If a login is specified without specifying an <auth type> for the
credentials (in a connection to a pre-v8.7.0 appliance), NGDIAL uses an
<auth type> of ADUNPW.
[-phonebook=<phonebook>]
Specifies the file name of the phone book where the <connection name>
is defined. The file name must include the fully qualified path to the
phone book file. If a path is not specified, NGDIAL looks in the directory
that contains the system phone book (rasphone.pbk) for the specified
phone book file.
[-list=<connection name>]
Displays all connections in list when used without an argument. Displays
detail of connection list when used with an argument.
-prompt
Causes the NGDIAL command to prompt the user to connect to the
<connection name> remote network.
[-proxycredential=
<username>
[,<password>|*]]
If a proxy server is required for access to the appliance, use this option to
specify the username and password credentials for it.
[-server=<server name>|
<server IP>]
Specifies the appliance name or IP address. If a server is specified, and it
is different from the server defined in the phone book entry, the server
and login group (if specified) are saved to the phone book entry.
[-editserver=<server
name>]
Edits server name in custom connection list
[-editrealm=<realm name>]
Edits realm name in custom connection list
[status[=enable|disable]]
Controls the display of a connection status dialog box when the VPN
network connection takes more than two seconds to connect.
[-nocerterrors]
Suppresses the server certificate errors.
If the password is omitted, or entered as an asterisk (*), the NGDIAL
command prompts the user for a proxy password.
Examples:
NGDIAL "ACME Corp" -create -server=remote.acme.com -icon -status
NGDIAL "ACME Corp" "Jen Bates" * -login="Business Partners" -icon -gui
NGDIAL "ACME Corp" jdoe password
NGDIAL "ACME Corp" -disconnect
NOTE: Although the ngdial -help usage statement indicates that the -icon=disable flag is an option
without the -create flag, in some cases the -create flag is necessary to disable the icon.
To disable the icon so that it does not appear on the taskbar, you can use either of the following two methods:
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
485
•
Set taskbar=0 in the ngsetup.ini file and then type a command such as:
ngdial "SMA VPN Connection" -server=<server IP address> -login="Realm name"
username password -icon=disable -gui
•
Type a command using the -create option with the -icon=disable option to store the icon parameter, and
then type the command to connect, such as:
ngdial "SMA VPN Connection" -create -server=<server IP address>
-icon=disable -gui
ngdial "SMA VPN Connection" -server=<server IP address> -login="Realm name"
username password -icon=disable -gui
Running Connect as a Service
The Connect Tunnel client is a Windows client component of Secure Mobile Access’s VPN solution that enables
secure, authorized access to Web-based and client/server applications, and to Windows file shares.
In a server environment, you can install and configure an add-on component—Connect Tunnel Service—so that
the VPN connection starts automatically without user intervention: no user login is required, and no user
interface or icons are displayed. For example, you may want to synchronize data between a remote system in
the field and a file server secured behind the VPN at corporate headquarters. On the remote system (running
the Windows Server platform), Connect Tunnel Service is configured to run at a specific time, connect to the
corporate file server, and synchronize its database with the master database at headquarters.
NOTE: Connect Tunnel has the capability to establish a dial-up connection before it makes a connection to
an E-Class SMA appliance. The Connect Tunnel Service, on the other hand, does not support this option; it
requires an always-on, non-dialup network connection.
Installing Connect Tunnel Service
Using the Connect Tunnel Service involves installing both Connect Tunnel and Connect Tunnel Service.
To install and configure Connect Tunnel Service
1
On the Client Installation Packages page in AMC (Agent Configuration > Download), select a language
and then download the installation packages for both the Connect Tunnel (ngsetup_<xx>.exe) and
Connect Tunnel Service (ctssetup_<xx>.exe).
2
Install Connect Tunnel first (ngsetup_<xx>.exe). A shortcut named Secure Mobile Access VPN Connection
will be created on desktop.
3
Install Connect Tunnel Service (ctssetup_<xx>.exe). A shortcut named Secure Mobile Access VPN Service
Options will be created on desktop.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
486
4
On the desktop, double-click the Secure Mobile Access VPN Service Options shortcut. Alternatively,
double-click VPN Service Options in the Control Panel. The VPN Service Properties dialog box appears.
5
On the VPN tab, configure the following settings:
Table 147. VPN tab settings
6
Setting
Description
VPN Connection Name
Type the name of the Connect client connection object exactly as it
appears in the Windows Network Connections window (Start|Connect
To|Show All Connections). By default, this is VPN Connection.
Hostname or IP address
Type the host name or IP address of the E-Class SMA appliance to log in
to.
Login group
Type the name of the realm to log in to.
Username and Password
Type the credentials for a user in this Login group (realm).
On the Service tab, configure the following settings:
Table 148. Service tab settings
Setting
Description
Number of attempts to restart a
failed connection
Specify how many times to attempt restarting if an initial
connection attempt fails.
Time interval between restart
attempts
Specify the amount of time (in minutes) to wait between restart
attempts.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
487
7
Click the Start and Stop buttons to control the service.
8
To verify that Connect Tunnel started, open the VPN Connection shortcut on the desktop. You should see
the established connection. Alternatively, you can issue the ipconfig command on the command line
to verify that you have a virtual IP address for the VPN connection.
Windows Services and Scripting Options
You can use Windows Services to manage Connect Tunnel Service on a local or remote computer.
How to use Windows Services to configure and run Connect Tunnel Service
1
On the computer running the Windows Server platform and Connect Tunnel Service, run Windows
Services, and then open the VPN Service Properties dialog box (Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Services > VPN Service).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
488
2
Use these settings to control the service (start, stop, pause, resume, or disable it), set up recovery
actions in case of service failure, or disable the service for a hardware profile.
Using a Command or Script to Run Connect Tunnel Service
You can use the Windows sc.exe utility to communicate with Service Controller (services.exe) from the
command prompt or in a batch file. This enables you, for example, to automate the startup and shutdown of
the VPN service. Or, in an environment where you want users to be able to start the VPN connection by clicking
on a shortcut (and without being aware of the credentials), you could also create a shortcut on the desktop that
launches a command or batch file.
For example, start and stop the service on a remote computer with the following commands:
sc \\SERVERNAME start ctssrv
sc \\SERVERNAME stop ctssrv
To start or stop the Connect Tunnel Service from the command line or a third-party application, invoke these
commands:
%windir%\system32\sc.exe start ctssrv
%windir%\system32\sc.exe stop ctssrv
Troubleshooting
Use the Windows Event Viewer (Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Event Viewer> Application > CTS) to
view any information, warning, or error messages related to running Connect Tunnel Service. For more detailed
messages, look in the service log. The default location is here:
%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Application Data\Aventail
NOTE: If your environment includes an outbound HTTP proxy for access to the Internet, you must use one
that does not require authentication, otherwise you will see the following error message in the log file for
Connect Tunnel Service (ctssrv.log): “Direct internet access is not available.” You must also configure
Connect Tunnel Service to run under a Windows user account with administrative privileges.Distributing
Secure Mobile Access Client Setup Packages
You can deploy the Connect Tunnel client setup package to users from a network location (such as a Web server,
FTP server, or file server) without requiring them to log in to WorkPlace.
For the Connect Tunnel client, you can also push an installation package to users through a configuration
management application such as Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS) or IBM Tivoli Configuration
Manager, or distribute a disk image that includes a preconfigured Connect Tunnel installation.
If you configured the client’s .ini file, you should distribute it along with the setup program (if you distribute
the setup program by itself the client will use the default settings).
Deploying Client Installation Packages for Connect Tunnel
The Connect Tunnel client can be installed as an .exe file, deployed using a Microsoft Installer (.msi) file, or
distributed as part of a disk image.
To deploy the Connect Tunnel client as an .exe file
Distribute the ngsetup_<xx>.exe file to users (<xx> represents the language you selected). If you modified the
ngsetup.ini file (as described in Customizing the Configuration for the Connect Tunnel Client on page 481),
distribute this file as well. To invoke the .ini file, pass it as a command-line parameter to the setup program by
typing the following command:
ngsetup_<xx>.exe -f=<path>\<configuration file name>
To simplify the user experience, you might write a batch file that calls the setup program with this parameter.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
489
To deploy the Connect Tunnel client using an .msi file
Set up your configuration management software program (such as Microsoft SMS or IBM Tivoli) to deploy the
.msi installation package and the modified ngsetup.ini file (if you created one).
If you install the Connect Tunnel client this way (rather than running ngsetup_<xx>.exe.), you must set the
Windows Installer to do a per-machine, rather than a per-user, installation. (A per-user installation does not
make the registry entries that are necessary for later updates.)
To specify a per-machine installation so that subsequent MSI updates will be supported, follow these steps:
1
Download ngsetup_<xx>.exe from the Client Installation Packages page in AMC, and then extract the
installation files by typing the following command. The destination for the unpacked files will be the
current working directory unless you specify a <path> with the expand parameter:
ngsetup_<xx>.exe -expand=<path>
2
Modify the ngsetup.ini file (as described in Customizing the Configuration for the Connect Tunnel Client
on page 481) as needed.
3
To run Windows Installer, type the following:
msiexec.exe /i ngvpn.msi ALLUSERS=1 NGSETUP=1 CONFIGURATIONFILE=<path>\<.ini
file name>
To deploy the Connect Tunnel client as a disk image
Disk cloning is a common method for distributing Windows operating systems and applications. If you decide to
use this distribution method for Connect Tunnel, you must run the Windows System Preparation Tool
(Sysprep.exe) to prepare the disk image for duplication. Without Sysprep, the computer’s security ID (SID)
remains unchanged and Connect Tunnel’s unique identifier is then duplicated, resulting in IP address conflicts.
Here is a broad outline of how to prepare and distribute disk images:
1
Install Connect Tunnel for Windows on a reference system and configure it as needed.
2
Run the Windows System Preparation Tool and shut down the computer.
3
Duplicate the master disk using a third-party application or disk duplicator.
4
When the disk is inserted into the destination computers, Mini-Setup will prompt the user for information
(for example, the computer name). You can automate this step by creating an “answer file”
(sysprep.inf). For more information about using System Preparation Tool, refer to the Microsoft Web site:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/302577
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
490
Network Tunnel Client Branding
Custom branding is available for the Connect Tunnel user interface. This feature allows companies to replace
the Dell branding in Connect Tunnel windows with their own company names and logos. Connect Tunnel
branding is available on Windows, Mac OS X, and Linux platforms and is done on a per-appliance basis.
To upload customized branding graphics and guidelines:
1
Under the main navigation menu, select Agent Configuration and then click Configure next to Network
Tunnel client branding.
2
Click Download next to Default branding package and select the download location.
3
Click OK to return to the Configure custom branding package page.
4
Unzip the downloaded file, which contains a folder of branding files for each platform (Windows, Linux,
and Mac). Using the README.txt file as a guide, replace the default files with custom branding files, and
then zip the files.
5
On the Configure custom branding package page, click the Browse button and select the zip file
containing the custom branding files.
6
After saving the file, click Save. All Connect Tunnel windows and icons are then updated with custom
branding.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
491
The OnDemand Proxy Agent
The OnDemand Proxy Agent is a secure, lightweight agent that provides access to TCP/IP resources. It uses local
loopback proxying to redirect communication to protected network resources according to routing directives
defined in AMC (it does not support UDP applications).
Note that the OnDemand Proxy Agent does not scale as effectively as the OnDemand Tunnel agent. The
OnDemand Proxy Agent is not recommended for usage as a broad VPN agent, but instead should be targeted for
access to specific applications through WorkPlace. In situations where you want to provide broad access to
applications through the WorkPlace portal for more than 500 concurrent users at a time, we recommend that
you deploy the OnDemand Tunnel agent instead. Note that you can use OnDemand Proxy as a fallback for
OnDemand Tunnel in case OnDemand Tunnel cannot be installed (perhaps due to issues around administrative
rights). In that scenario, you would configure both OnDemand Tunnel and OnDemand Proxy within a community.
This section provides an overview of OnDemand and describes how to configure and deploy it.
•
Overview: OnDemand Proxy
•
How OnDemand Redirects Network Traffic
•
Configuring OnDemand to Access Specific Applications
•
Configuring Advanced OnDemand Options
•
Client Configuration
Overview: OnDemand Proxy
OnDemand Proxy is a loopback-based proxy solution that secures communication between a client application
and an application server.
The following diagram illustrates the connection sequence.
Figure 27. OnDemand Proxy connection sequence
1
OnDemand starts automatically when the user logs in to WorkPlace.
2
OnDemand runs within the WorkPlace window.
3
OnDemand waits for application requests on the local loopback address (127.0.0.1) and redirects the
traffic to the Web proxy service.
4
The Web proxy service proxies the traffic to an application server using the application’s required
port(s).
5
The application server sends application traffic to the Web proxy service.
6
The Web proxy service sends the application traffic to OnDemand, which then passes it to the client
application.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
492
OnDemand supports TCP applications that use one or multiple ports, including applications that dynamically
define ports (it does not support UDP-based applications). Here are applications that are typically accessed
using OnDemand:
Table 149. Applications accessed using OnDemand
Application
Examples
Resident client/server
Internet email applications:
Typically, these client applications are
installed locally on the client computer
•
Microsoft Outlook
•
Outlook Express
•
Lotus Notes
•
Netscape Mail
•
Eudora
Terminal emulation applications:
•
WRQ Reflection
•
NetManage RUMBA PC-to-Host
Remote office connectivity applications:
•
Citrix ICA/Xenapp
•
Microsoft Windows Terminal Services
By default, OnDemand is configured to run automatically when the user connects to WorkPlace. For optimum
performance, OnDemand is installed on the user’s computer the first time it is accessed, minimizing download
time for returning users.
•
OnDemand Mapped Mode
•
Activating OnDemand
OnDemand Mapped Mode
By default, OnDemand starts automatically when users log in to WorkPlace. Mapped mode enables users to click
a shortcut that is configured for a specific application. Optionally, you can configure OnDemand to
automatically launch a specified Web URL when users click a shortcut. This is useful for starting an application
(such as a thin-client application) when OnDemand runs. You must manually create any shortcuts to specific
applications. Mapped mode is supported on Windows, Macintosh, and Linux platforms.
On Windows PCs, when a user logs in to WorkPlace for the first time, WorkPlace automatically downloads,
installs, and launches OnDemand on the user’s computer (assuming the community the user belongs to is
configured to do so). On subsequent WorkPlace logins, WorkPlace automatically starts OnDemand.
Activating OnDemand
By default, when OnDemand is enabled, it starts automatically when users log in to WorkPlace and runs within
the WorkPlace window. Users must keep the WorkPlace window open while working with OnDemand in this
embedded mode.
NOTE:
•
Users cannot start an application from the OnDemand window. Unless you configure a URL to
launch automatically when users start OnDemand, users must manually start applications as they
would normally.
•
Users may need to configure their personal firewalls to allow OnDemand traffic.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
493
How OnDemand Redirects Network Traffic
OnDemand uses the local loopback address to redirect and secure traffic through the appliance. This section
provides an overview of loopback proxying and describes the various redirection methods.
•
Overview: Loopback Proxying
•
Hosts File Redirection
Overview: Loopback Proxying
OnDemand uses local loopback proxying to securely submit application traffic through the Web proxy service.
For example, suppose a Windows user wants to connect to the appliance and run a Citrix application:
1
The user logs in to WorkPlace, and OnDemand automatically starts.
2
OnDemand dynamically maps the local loopback address to the host name for the Citrix server.
3
The user runs the Citrix application, which attempts to connect to citrix.example.com. OnDemand
resolves the Citrix host name to 127.0.0.1 and routes the traffic to the Web proxy service.
4
OnDemand encrypts the Citrix traffic using SSL and securely routes it to the Dell SMA appliance, which in
turn forwards it to the Citrix server.
5
The Citrix server responds, sending data back through the Dell SMA appliance.
6
The appliance forwards the response to OnDemand over SSL.
7
OnDemand forwards the information to the Citrix application.
Hosts File Redirection
To redirect traffic to destination servers, modify the hosts file on the user’s computer. This redirection method
is supported on Windows, Macintosh, and Linux platforms, provided the user has administrator privileges on the
local computer.
Modifying the hosts file on a user’s system maps a destination server to a local loopback address. When an
application attempts to resolve a host name, traffic is redirected to the loopback address on which OnDemand
is listening.
The following example shows a typical hosts file, with host names mapped to IP addresses, followed by a hosts
file modified for use by OnDemand. Notice that the OnDemand host names are mapped to the local loopback
address, not the host’s IP address. For application-specific configurations, these loopback addresses would
match the addresses you specify when configuring OnDemand in AMC; for more information, see Configuring
OnDemand to Access Specific Applications on page 495.
Typical Hosts File
192.168.1.135 telnet.example.com telnet
192.168.1.140 mailhost.example.com mail
192.168.1.143 citrix.example.com citrix
OnDemand Hosts File
127.0.0.1 telnet.example.com telnet
127.0.0.1 mailhost.example.com mail
127.0.0.1 citrix.example.com citrix
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
494
Configuring OnDemand to Access Specific
Applications
If you are deploying OnDemand to users on non-Windows platforms, or want to automatically use the launch URL
feature to start a thin-client application when users run OnDemand, you must define an application-specific
configuration in AMC. This involves mapping the port numbers for the client and server, a process called “port
mapping.”
•
Overview: Port Mapping
•
Configuring an Application for Use with OnDemand
Overview: Port Mapping
To configure OnDemand to redirect traffic for a specific application, you need to know the port numbers the
application uses for the client and server, and then map those ports in AMC. OnDemand listens for incoming
requests on specific ports on the client and then proxies them to the appliance, which forwards the information
to an IP address and port on the application server.
For example, you might configure an IP address and port on the client (such as 127.0.1.1:23) to the host or IP
address and port on the destination server, such as telneta.example.com:23.
Some applications—such as email—use multiple ports for different protocols. In this case, you must configure
OnDemand to listen on several different ports. This configuration can also be useful for configuring OnDemand
to work with several different applications. The following example shows OnDemand configured to work with
three applications over five different ports.
In this example OnDemand is configured to listen on port 23 for telnet and port 1494 for Citrix. For email
requests it is listening on port 25 (SMTP), port 110 (POP3), and port 143 (IMAP).
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
495
Configuring an Application for Use with OnDemand
To configure an application, you need to know the protocols it uses for each service and map the source address
and ports on the client to those on the destination host. You also have the option of specifying a URL to open a
Web page, which is useful for automatically starting an application, when the user runs OnDemand.
To configure an application for use with OnDemand
1
On the main navigation menu of AMC, click Agent Configuration.
2
In the OnDemand area under Access agents, click Edit. The Configure OnDemand page appears.
3
In the Mapped mode area, click New.
4
In the Application name box, type the name to use for the application. This name is displayed to the
user in WorkPlace. Use a short, descriptive name.
5
In the Description box, type a descriptive comment about the application.
6
Configure each service used by the application in the Add mapping area.
a
Click the Edit button beside the Destination resource box, select the network resource you want
to configure, and then click Save. Alternatively, you can create a new network resource by
clicking the New Resource button in the Resources dialog box.
b
If the IP address/port combination of the service conflicts with that of another service, you can
modify the IP address displayed in the Local host box, or you can map the ports as described
below. You can change the Local host value to any IP address in the 127.x.y.z address space.
NOTE: On MacOS, OnDemand works only when using IP address 127.0.0.1 for the local
host.
c
In the Service type list, select the type of service used by the application. This populates the
Destination/local ports boxes with the well-known port for that service. If the service uses a
destination port that differs from that of the local port, map the ports to each other by editing
the information in the Destination/local ports boxes as needed.
d
Click Add to Current Mapping. This adds the mapping to the Current mapping list.
Dell Secure Mobile Access 11.4
Administration Guide
496
7
If the application uses multiple services, repeat step six to configure each one. Most applications use
only one service, but some (like email) use multiple protocols, which requires multiple services.
8
Select the Create shortcut on WorkPlace check box.
•
If you want OnDemand to open a Web page automatically (which is useful for automatically
starting a thin-client application), type the URL of the appropriate page in the Start an
application by launching this URL box. You must specify either an http:// or an https://
pro